EPA/600/R-10/122 October 2010 

Standardized Analytical Methods

for Environmental Restoration 

Following Homeland Security Events

– SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 

SCIENCE 

Office of Research and Development

National Homeland Security Research Center 

EPA/600/R-10/122 | October 2010 | www.epa.gov/sam

 

Standardized Analytical Methods 

for Environmental Restoration 

Following Homeland Security 

Events – SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0)

 

UNITED STATES ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY 

Cincinnati, OH 45268 

Office of Research and Development

National Homeland Security Research Center
Disclaimer 

Disclaimer

The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) through its Office of Research and Development 

funded and managed the research described here under Contract EP-W-06-046 to Computer Sciences 

Corporation (CSC). This document has been subjected to the Agency’s review and has been approved for 

publication. Note that approval does not signify that the contents necessarily reflect the views of the 

Agency. 

Mention of trade names or commercial products in this document or in the methods referenced in this 

document does not constitute endorsement or recommendation for use. 

Questions concerning this document or its application should be addressed to: 

Kathy Hall 

 National Homeland Security Research Center 

 Office of Research and Development (NG16) 

 U.S. Environmental Protection Agency 

 26 West Martin Luther King Drive 

 Cincinnati, OH 45268 

 (513) 379-5260 

hall.kathy@epa.gov 

 SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) ii October 2010
Use of This Document 

Use of This Document

The information contained in this document represents the latest step in an ongoing effort of the 

Environmental Protection Agency’s (EPA’s) National Homeland Security Research Center 

(NHSRC) to provide standardized analytical methods for use by those laboratories tasked with 

performing confirmatory analyses of environmental samples in support of EPA restoration efforts 

following a homeland security incident. The information also can be found on the SAM Web site 

(www.epa.gov/sam), which provides searchable links to supporting information based on SAM 

analytes and the analytical methods listed. 

Although at this time, some of the methods listed have not been fully validated for a particular 

analyte (e.g., analytes not explicitly identified in the method) or sample type, the methods are 

considered to contain the most appropriate currently available techniques. Unless a published 

method listed in this document states specific applicability to the analyte/sample type for which it 

has been selected, it should be assumed that method testing is needed, and adjustments may be 

required to accurately account for variations in analyte/sample type characteristics, environmental 

samples, analytical interferences, and data quality objectives (DQOs). 

Many of the SAM analytes have only recently become an environmental concern. EPA is actively 

pursuing development and validation of Standard Analytical Protocols (SAPs) based on the 

methods listed, including optimization of procedures for measuring target analytes or agents. In 

those cases where method procedures are determined to be insufficient for a particular situation, 

EPA will provide guidelines regarding appropriate actions. EPA also is in the process of compiling 

information and preparing documents regarding field screening equipment, sample collection 

materials, rapid screening/ preliminary identification equipment, and disposal of samples 

corresponding to SAM analytes and sample types. This will be an ongoing process as EPA will 

strive to establish a consistent level of validation for all listed analytes. 

 SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) iii October 2010
Foreword 

Foreword 

Following the events of September 11, 2001, EPA's mission was expanded to account for critical needs 

related to homeland security. Presidential directives identified EPA as the primary federal agency 

responsible for the country's water supplies and for environmental decontamination following a chemical, 

biological, and/or radiological (CBR) attack. To provide scientific and technical support to help EPA 

meet this expanded role, EPA's National Homeland Security Research Center (NHSRC) was established. 

The NHSRC research program is focused on conducting research and delivering products that improve 

the capability of the Agency to carry out its homeland security responsibilities. 

One focus area of NHSRC's research is to support the Environmental Response Laboratory Network 

(ERLN), a nationwide association of federal, state, local and commercial environmental laboratories, 

established by EPA. The ERLN can be deployed in response to a large-scale environmental disaster, 

providing consistent analytical capability, capacity, and data quality. Toward this end, NHSRC has 

worked with experts from across EPA and other federal agencies to undertake research designed to 

provide appropriate, effective, and verified technologies and methods. These methods and technologies 

can help the Agency determine the risks posed by CBR agents and enhance EPA’s ability to detect, 

contain, and clean up following an incident involving such agents. This document provides a 

compendium of methods that have been selected for use when analytical laboratories must support an 

environmental restoration involving CBR contaminants. 

This publication represents the sixth revision of this compendium. This information will continue to be 

revised as research progresses and new information becomes available. In addition, NHSRC will 

continue to provide a searchable form of this document which is available at http://www.epa.gov/sam. 

We value your comments as we move toward the development of an efficient process to manage 

environmental samples and move EPA one step closer to achieving its homeland security mission and its 

overall mission of protecting human health and the environment while supporting sustainable solutions. 

Gregory D. Sayles, Acting Director 

National Homeland Security Research Center

 SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) iv October 2010
Abbreviations and Acronyms 

Abbreviations and Acronyms

ACS American Chemical Society 

amp-ELISA Amplified-enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay 

APHA American Public Health Association 

APHL Association of Public Health Laboratories 

AOAC AOAC International (formerly the Association of Official Analytical Chemists) 

ASTM ASTM International (formerly the American Society for Testing and Materials) 

BHT Butylated hydroxytoluene 

BMBL Biosafety in Microbiological and Biomedical Laboratories

BZ Quinuclidinyl benzilate 

°C Degrees Celsius 

CAS RN Chemical Abstracts Service Registry Number 

CBR Chemical, biological, and/or radiological 

CCID Coordinating Center for Infectious Diseases 

CDC Centers for Disease Control and Prevention 

CFR Code of Federal Regulations 

CFSAN Center for Food Safety and Applied Nutrition 

CIEIA Competitive inhibition enzyme immunoassay 

CLLE Continuous liquid-liquid extraction 

CLP Contract Laboratory Program 

cps Counts per second 

CVAA Cold vapor atomic absorption 

2-CVAA 2-Chlorovinylarsonous acid 

CVAFS Cold vapor atomic fluorescence spectrometry 

2,4-D 2,4-Dichlorophenoxyacetic acid 

DAS Diacetoxyscirpenol 

DAS-HG-HSA Diacetoxyscirpenol hemiglutarate human serum albumin 

DAS-HS-HRP Diacetoxyscirpenol hemisuccinate horseradish peroxidase conjugate 

DB-1 100% Dimethylpolysiloxane 

DBPR Division of Bioterrorism Preparedness and Response 

DHS U.S. Department of Homeland Security 

DIG-ELISA Digoxigenin labeled enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay 

DIMP Diisopropyl methylphosphonate 

2,4-DNPH 2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazine 

DoD U.S. Department of Defense 

DOE U.S. Department of Energy 

DOT U.S. Department of Transportation 

DPD N,N-Diethyl-p-phenylenediamine 

DQO Data quality objective 

DTPA Diethylenetriamine-pentaacetate 

DVL Detection verification level 

EA2192 Diisopropylaminoethyl methylthiolophosphonate 

ECD Electron capture detector 

e-CFR Electronic Code of Federal Regulations 

ECL Electrochemiluminescence 

ED Ethyldichloroarsine 

EDEA N-Ethyldiethanolamine 

EDL Estimated detection limit 

EDTA Ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid 

EDXA Energy dispersive X-ray analysis 

EIA Enzyme immunoassay 

ELISA Enzyme-Linked Immunosorbent Assay 

 SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) v October 2010
Abbreviations and Acronyms 

EMC Emission Measurement Center 

EML Environmental Measurements Laboratory 

EMMI Environmental Monitoring Methods Index 

EMPA Ethyl methylphosphonic acid 

EMSL Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory 

EPA U.S. Environmental Protection Agency 

EQL Estimated quantitation limit 

ERLN Environmental Response Laboratory Network 

ESI Electrospray ionization 

ETV Environmental Technology Verification 

FBI U.S. Federal Bureau of Investigation 

FDA U.S. Food and Drug Administration 

FEMS Federation of European Microbiological Societies 

FGC-ECD Fast gas chromatography with electron capture detection 

FGI Fluorescein derivative of Conus geographus α-conotoxin 

FID Flame ionization detector 

FL Fluorescence detector 

FPD Flame photometric detector 

FRET Fluorescence resonance energy transfer 

FRMAC Federal Radiological Monitoring and Assessment Center 

GA Tabun 

GB Sarin 

GC Gas chromatograph or Gas chromatography 

GC-ECD Gas chromatography – electron capture detector 

GC-FID Gas chromatography – flame ionization detector 

GC-FPD Gas chromatography – flame photometric detector 

GC-MS Gas chromatography – mass spectrometry 

GC-MD Gas chromatography – multi-detector 

GC-NPD Gas chromatography – nitrogen-phosphorus detector 

GD Soman 

GE 1-Methylethyl ester ethylphosphonofluoridic acid 

Ge Germanium 

Ge(Li) Germanium (Lithium) 

GESTIS A German database (Gefahrstoffdaten banken) containing data and information on 

hazardous substances and products 

GF Cyclohexyl sarin 

GFAA Graphite furnace atomic absorption spectrophotometer or Graphite furnace atomic 

absorption spectrophotometry 

HASL Health and Safety Laboratory, currently known as Environmental Measurements 

Laboratory (EML) 

HD Sulfur mustard / mustard gas; bis(2-chloroethyl) sulfide 

HHS U.S. Health and Human Services 

HMTD Hexamethylenetriperoxidediamine 

HMX Octahydro-1,3,5,7-tetranitro-1,3,5,7-tetrazocine 

HN-1 Nitrogen mustard 1; bis(2-chloroethyl)ethylamine 

HN-2 Nitrogen mustard 2; 2,2'-dichloro-N-methyldiethylamine N,N-bis(2-

chloroethyl)methylamine 

HN-3 Nitrogen mustard 3; tris(2-chloroethyl)amine 

HP(Ge) High purity Germanium 

HPLC High performance liquid chromatography 

HPLC-FL High performance liquid chromatography – fluorescence 

HPLC-MS High performance liquid chromatography – mass spectrometery 

HPLC-MS-MS High performance liquid chromatography tandem mass spectrometry 

 SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) vi October 2010
Abbreviations and Acronyms 

HPLC-PDA High performance liquid chromatography – photodiode array detector 

HPLC-UV High performance liquid chromatography – ultraviolet 

HPLC-vis High performance liquid chromatography – visible 

HRP Horseradish peroxidase 

HV High volume 

IC Ion chromatograph or Ion chromatography 

IC 20 Inhibitory concentration – Concentration to inhibit 20% 

IC 50 Inhibitory concentration – Concentration to inhibit 50% 

ICP Inductively coupled plasma 

ICP-AES Inductively coupled plasma – atomic emission spectrometry 

ICP-MS Inductively coupled plasma – mass spectrometry 

IDL Instrument detection limit 

ILM Inorganic Laboratory Method 

IMPA Isopropyl methylphosphonic acid 

INCHEM INCHEM is a means of rapid access to internationally peer reviewed information on 

chemicals commonly used throughout the world, which may also occur as contaminants 

in the environment and food. It consolidates information from a number of 

intergovernmental organizations whose goal it is to assist in the sound management of 

chemicals. http://www.inchem.org/

IO Inorganic 

i.p. Intraperitoneally 

IRIS Integrated Risk Information System (EPA) 

ISE Ion specific electrode 

ISG Impregnated silica gel 

ISO International Organization for Standardization 

KHP Potassium hydrogen phthalate 

L-1 Lewisite 1; 2-Chlorovinyldichloroarsine 

L-2 Lewisite 2; bis(2-Chlorovinyl)chloroarsine 

L-3 Lewisite 3; tris(2-Chlorovinyl)arsine 

LC Liquid chromatograph or Liquid chromatography 

LC/APCI-MS Liquid chromatography / atmospheric pressure chemical ionization – mass spectrometry 

LC/ESI-MS Liquid chromatography / electrospray ionization – mass spectrometry 

LCMRL Lowest common minimum reporting level 

LC-MS Liquid chromatography – mass spectrometry 

LC-MS-MS Liquid chromatography tandem mass spectrometry 

LC-TSP Liquid chromatography – thermospray 

LFD Lateral flow device 

LLD Lower limit of detection 

LOD Limit of detection 

LOQ Limit of quantitation 

LRN Laboratory Response Network 

LSE Liquid-solid extraction 

Ltd. A private company limited by shares 

mAbs Monoclonal antibodies 

MALDI Matrix-assisted laser-desorbtion ionization 

MARLAP Multi-Agency Radiological Laboratory Analytical Protocols (EPA/402/3-04/001A, B, C) 

MDL Method detection limit 

MIC Methyl isocyanate 

MLD Minimum lethal dose 

MPA Methylphosphonic acid 

MRM Multiple reaction monitoring 

mRNA Messenger ribonucleic acid 

MS Mass spectrometer or Mass spectrometry 

 SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) vii October 2010
Abbreviations and Acronyms 

MS-MS Tandem mass spectrometry 

MS/MSD Matrix spike/Matrix spike duplicate 

MSE Microscale solvent extraction 

MTBE Methyl tert-butyl ether 

MW Molecular weight 

NA Not applicable 

NaI(Tl) Thallium-activated sodium iodide 

NBD chloride 7-Chloro-4-nitrobenzo-2-oxa-1,3-diazole 

NBD-F 7-Fluoro-4-nitro-2,1,3-benzoxadiazole 

NCPDCID National Center for the Prevention, Detection, and Control of Infectious Diseases 

NCRP National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements 

NEMI National Environmental Methods Index 

NERL National Exposure Research Laboratory 

NHSRC EPA National Homeland Security Research Center 

NIOSH National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health 

NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology 

nM Nanomolar 

NMAM NIOSH Manual of Analytical Methods 

NNSA National Nuclear Security Administration 

NPD Nitrogen-phosphorus detector 

NRC U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission 

nS nano Siemens 

NTIS National Technical Information Service 

NTU Nephelometric turbidity units 

OAQPS EPA Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards 

OAR EPA Office of Air and Radiation 

ORAU Oak Ridge Associated Universities 

ORD EPA Office of Research and Development 

ORIA Office of Radiation and Indoor Air 

ORISE Oak Ridge Institute for Science and Education 

OSWER EPA Office of Solid Waste and Emergency Response 

OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration 

OVS OSHA versatile sampler 

OW EPA Office of Water 

PBS Phosphate buffered saline 

PCDDs Polychlorinated dibenzo-p-dioxins 

PCDFs Polychlorinated dibenzofurans 

PCR Polymerase chain reaction 

PDA Photodiode array detector 

PEL Permissible exposure limit 

PETN Pentaerythritol tetranitrate 

PFBHA O-(2,3,4,5,6-pentafluorobenzyl)-hydroxylamine 

PFE Pressurized fluid extraction 

PMPA Pinacolyl methyl phosphonic acid 

1,2-PP 1-(2-pyridyl)piperazine 

PubMED U.S. National Library of Medicine (http://www.pubmed.gov) 

PUF Polyurethane foam 

PVC Polyvinyl chloride 

PVDH Polyvinylidene fluoride 

QA Quality assurance 

QAP Quality assessment program 

QC Quality control 

® Registered trademark 

 SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) viii October 2010
Abbreviations and Acronyms 

R 33 Methylphosphonothioic acid, S-[2-(diethylamino)ethyl] O-2-methylpropyl ester (VR) 

RCRA Resource Conservation and Recovery Act 

RDX Hexahydro-1,3,5-trinitro-1,3,5-triazine 

RESL Radiological and Environmental Sciences Laboratory 

RLAB Regional laboratory method 

RNA Ribonucleic acid 

rpm Revolutions per minute 

RTECS Registry of Toxic Effects of Chemical Substances 

SAED Select area electron diffraction 

SAM Standardized Analytical Methods for Environmental Restoration Following Homeland 

Security Events

SAP Standard Analytical Protocol 

SEA Staphylococcal enterotoxin type A 

SEB Staphylococcal enterotoxin type B 

SEC Staphylococcal enterotoxin type C 

SIM Selective ion monitoring 

SM Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater

SPE Solid-phase extraction 

SRM Single reaction monitoring 

STEC Shiga-toxigenic E. coli 

STEL Short term exposure limit 

STX Saxitoxin 

Stx-1 Shiga toxin Type 1 

Stx-2 Shiga toxin Type 2 

SW Solid Waste 

TATP Triacetone triperoxide 

TBD To be determined 

TCLP Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure 

TDG Thiodiglycol 

TEA Triethanolamine 

TEM Transmission electron microscope or Transmission electron microscopy 

TFA Trifluoroacetic acid 

TM Unregistered trademark 

1,3,5-TNB 1,3,5-Trinitrobenzene 

2,4,6-TNT 2,4,6-Trinitrotoluene 

TO Toxic Organic 

TOFMS Time-of-flight mass spectrometry 

TOXNET Toxicology Data Network 

TRU Transuranic 

TSP Thermospray 

TSP-MS Thermospray –mass spectrometry 

TTN Technical Transfer Network 

TTX Tetrodotoxin 

U.S. United States 

USDA U.S. Department of Agriculture 

USGS U.S. Geological Survey 

UV Ultraviolet 

VCSB Voluntary Consensus Standard Body 

VE Phosphonothioic acid, ethyl-, S-(2-(diethylamino)ethyl) O-ethyl ester 

VG Phosphonothioic acid, S-(2-(diethylamino)ethyl) O,O-diethyl ester

vis Visible detector 

VM Phosphonothioic acid, methyl-,S-(2-(diethylamino)ethyl) O-ethyl ester 

VOCs Volatile organic compounds 

 SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) ix October 2010
Abbreviations and Acronyms 

 SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) x October 2010

VR Methylphosphonothioic acid, S-[2-(diethylamino)ethyl] O-2-methylpropyl ester (R 33) 

VX O-ethyl-S-(2-diisopropylaminoethyl)methylphosphonothiolate 

WCIT Water Contamination Information Tool 

WEF Water Environment Federation 

WHO World Health Organization 

WSD EPA Water Security Division 
Acknowledgements

Acknowledgments

Contributions of the following individuals and organizations to the development of SAM Revision 6.0 are 

gratefully acknowledged. Please refer to older versions of SAM for historical acknowledgments. 

United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) 

• Office of Research and Development, National Homeland Security Research Center

Joan Bursey 

April Dupree 

Kathy Hall 

 Romy Lee 

 Alan Lindquist 

 Matthew Magnuson 

 Tonya Nichols 

 Sarah Perkins 

 Eugene Rice 

 Frank Schaefer 

 Sanjiv Shah 

 Erin Silvestri 

 Stuart Willison 

 

• Office of Research and Development, National Exposure Research Laboratory (NERL), Las 

Vegas

Thomas Hinners (Environmental Sciences Division) 

• Office of Research and Development, National Exposure Research Laboratory (NERL), 

Cincinnati

 Gerard Stelma (Microbiological and Chemical Exposure Assessment Research Division) 

 Jeanette Von Emon (Human Exposure & Atmospheric Sciences Division) 

• Office of Research and Development, National Health and Environmental Effects Research 

Laboratory (NHEERL)

Denise Macmillan 

• Office of Solid Waste and Emergency Response 

 Michele Burgess (Office of Emergency Management) 

 Terry Smith (Office of Emergency Management) 

 

• Office of Air and Radiation, Office of Radiation and Indoor Air 

Malek Chatila (National Air and Radiation Environmental Laboratory) 

 George Dilbeck (National Air and Radiation Environmental Laboratory) 

 John Griggs (National Air and Radiation Environmental Laboratory) 

 Daniel Mackney (National Air and Radiation Environmental Laboratory) 

 

• Office of Water, Office of Ground Water and Drinking Water

 Pamela Bernard (Water Security Division) 

 Adrian Hanley (Water Security Division) 

 Elizabeth Hedrick (Water Security Division) 

 Karen Milam (Water Security Division) 

 Malik Raynor (Water Security Division) 

 John Sinclair (Technical Support Center) 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) xi October 2010
Acknowledgements

• Office of Pesticide Programs

 Christian Byrne (Stennis Space Center) 

Elizabeth Flynt (Stennis Space Center) 

 Bill Reynolds (Ft. Meade) 

 Charles Stafford (Ft. Meade) 

• EPA National Decontamination Team 

 Larry Kaelin 

 

• EPA Regions

 Katie Adams (Region 10) 

Jack Berges (Region 9) 

Cynthia Caporale (Region 3) 

Gerald Dodo (Region 10) 

Diane Gregg (Region 6) 

Ted Haigh (Region 10) 

Stephanie Harris (Region 10) 

Johnson Matthew (Region 6) 

Ed O’Neill (Region 6) 

Steve Reimer (Region 10) 

Melvin Ritter (Region 6) 

Sue Warner (Region 3) 

Michael Wasko (Region 4) 

Adam Zachary (Region 5) 

Harold Zachary (Region 3) 

Larry Zintek (Region 5) 

 

United States Department of Agriculture

Lou Blume (Food Safety and Inspection Service) 

Mark Campbell (Food Safety and Inspection Service) 

Marcus Head (Food Safety and Inspection Service) 

United States Department of Commerce 

 Peter Moeller (National Oceanic & Atmospheric Administration) 

United States Department of Defense

Linda Beck (U.S. Navy, Naval Surface Warfare Center Dahlgren Division) 

Jon Davis (U.S. Army, Medical Research Institute of Infectious Diseases) 

Bob Durgin (U.S. Army) 

Eric Holwitt (U.S. Air Force) 

Johnathan Kiel (U.S. Air Force) 

David Norwood (.S. Army, Medical Research Institute of Infectious Diseases) 

Elaine Strauss (U.S. Navy, Naval Surface Warfare Center Dahlgren Division) 

Ronald Swatski (U.S. Army, Center for Health Promotion and Preventive Medicine) 

 

United States Department of Energy 

 Steve Goldberg (New Brunswick Laboratory) 

 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) xii October 2010
Acknowledgements

United States Department of Health and Human Services 

• Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) 

Clayton B’Hymer (National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health) 

 Cheryl Bopp (National Enteric Laboratory Diagnostics and Outbreak Team) 

Vincent Hill (National Center for Zoonotic, Vector-Borne, and Enteric Diseases) 

Jennifer Links (National Center for Environmental Health) 

Stephen Morse (National Center for Preparedness, Detection and Control of Infectious Diseases) 

John Snawder (National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health) 

Laura Rose (National Center for Preparedness, Detection and Control of Infectious Diseases) 

Richard Wang (National Center for Environmental Health) 

 

• United States Food and Drug Administration 

John Callahan 

 Eric Garber 

 Sherwood Hall 

 Michael McLaughlin 

 Shashi Sharma 

 

United Stated Department of Homeland Security 

Mark Whitmire (Chemical Security Analysis Center) 

State Agencies

 Jack Bennett (State of Connecticut Department of Public Health) 

 Sanwat Chaudhuri (Utah Unified State Laboratories) 

 William Draper (California Department of Public Health) 

 Eva King (Rhode Island Department of Health) 

 Marinea Mehrhoff (State Hygenic Laboratory at the University of Iowa) 

 William K. Nemeth (New Jersey Dept. of Health & Senior Services) 

 Bahman Parsa (New Jersey Dept. of Health & Senior Services) 

 Christopher Retarides (Virginia State Department of General Services) 

 David F. Tomkins (State Hygenic Laboratory at the University of Iowa) 

 Stephen E. Treimer (State Hygenic Laboratory at the University of Iowa) 

 Michael D. Wichman (State Hygenic Laboratory at the University of Iowa) 

 

 Municipalities 

 Gary Burlingame (Philadelphia Water Department) 

 John Consolvo (Philadelphia Water Department) 

 Earl Peterkin (Philadelphia Water Department) 

 David Nehrkorn (San Francisco Public Utilities Commission) 

 Tony Rattonetti (San Francisco Public Utility Commission) 

National Laboratories 

 Carolyn Koester (Lawrence Livermore National Laboratory) 

 Donivan Porterfield (Los Alamos National Laboratory) 

Universities 

Tambra Dunams (Georgia State University) 

Paul Zimba (Texas A&M University – Corpus Christi)

National Institute of Standards and Technology 

 Jayne Morrow

 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) xiii October 2010
Acknowledgements

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) xiv October 2010

Environmental Management Support, Inc. 

Anna Berne 

Computer Sciences Corporation

 Eric Boring 

 Yildiz Chambers 

 John Chandler 

 Joan Cuddeback 

 Melody Jensen 

 Daniel Montgomery 

 Larry Umbaugh 

 Joshua Vinson 

 
Table of Contents 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) xv October 2010

Standardized Analytical Methods for Environmental Restoration 

Following Homeland Security Events

DRAFT SAM 2010 

(Revision 6.0)

October 2010

Contents

Disclaimer ....................................................................................................................................................ii 

Use of This Document................................................................................................................................iii 

Foreword.....................................................................................................................................................iv 

Abbreviations and Acronyms ....................................................................................................................v 

Acknowledgments......................................................................................................................................xi 

Section 1.0: Introduction...........................................................................................................................1 

Section 2.0: Background............................................................................................................................3 

Section 3.0: Scope and Application ..........................................................................................................7 

Section 4.0: Points of Contact .................................................................................................................11 

Section 5.0: Selected Chemical Methods................................................................................................13 

5.1 General Guidelines................................................................................................................14 

5.1.1 Standard Operating Procedures for Identifying Chemical Methods.....................................14 

5.1.2 General QC Guidelines for Chemical Methods ....................................................................31 

5.1.3 Safety and Waste Management.............................................................................................33 

5.2 Method Summaries ...............................................................................................................33 

5.2.1 EPA Method 200.7: Determination of Metals and Trace Elements in Waters and Wastes by 

Inductively Coupled Plasma-Atomic Emission Spectrometry..............................................34 

5.2.2 EPA Method 200.8: Determination of Trace Elements in Waters and Wastes by Inductively 

Coupled Plasma-Mass Spectrometry ....................................................................................35 

5.2.3 EPA Method 245.1: Determination of Mercury in Water by Cold Vapor Atomic Absorption 

Spectrometry (CVAA) ..........................................................................................................36 

5.2.4 EPA Method 300.1, Revision 1.0: Determination of Inorganic Anions in Drinking Water by 

Ion Chromatography .............................................................................................................36 

5.2.5 EPA Method 335.4: Determination of Total Cyanide by Semi-Automated Colorimetry .....37 

5.2.6 EPA Method 350.1: Nitrogen, Ammonia (Colorimetric, Automated Phenate) ....................38 

5.2.7 EPA Method 524.2: Measurement of Purgeable Organic Compounds in Water by Capillary 

Column Gas Chromatography / Mass Spectrometry.............................................................38 

5.2.8 EPA Method 525.2: Determination of Organic Compounds in Drinking Water by LiquidSolid Extraction and Capillary Column Gas Chromatography / Mass Spectrometry ...........39 
Table of Contents 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) xvi October 2010

5.2.9 EPA Method 531.2: Measurement of N-Methylcarbamoyloximes and N-Methylcarbamates 

in Water by Direct Aqueous Injection HPLC with Postcolumn Derivatization....................40 

5.2.10 EPA Method 538: Determination of Selected Organic Contaminants in Drinking Water by 

Direct Aqueous Injection-Liquid Chromatography/Tandem Mass Spectrometry (DAILC/MS/MS)...........................................................................................................................40 

5.2.11 EPA Method 549.2: Determination of Diquat and Paraquat in Drinking Water by LiquidSolid Extraction and High Performance Liquid Chromatography with Ultraviolet Detection

...............................................................................................................................................41 

5.2.12 EPA Method 551.1: Determination of Chlorination Disinfection Byproducts, Chlorinated 

Solvents, and Halogenated Pesticides/Herbicides in Drinking Water by Liquid-Liquid 

Extraction and Gas Chromatography with Electron-Capture Detection ...............................42 

5.2.13 EPA Method 556.1: Determination of Carbonyl Compounds in Drinking Water by Fast Gas 

Chromatography....................................................................................................................42 

5.2.14 EPA Method 3050B (SW-846): Acid Digestion of Sediments, Sludges, and Soils..............43 

5.2.15 EPA Method 3520C (SW-846): Continuous Liquid-Liquid Extraction................................44 

5.2.16 EPA Method 3535A (SW-846): Solid-Phase Extraction ......................................................45 

5.2.17 EPA Method 3541 (SW-846): Automated Soxhlet Extraction .............................................48 

5.2.18 EPA Method 3545A (SW-846): Pressurized Fluid Extraction (PFE)...................................50 

5.2.19 EPA Method 3570 (SW-846): Microscale Solvent Extraction (MSE) .................................52 

5.2.20 EPA Method 3571 (SW-846): Extraction of Solid and Aqueous Samples for Chemical 

Agents ...................................................................................................................................54 

5.2.21 EPA Method 5030C (SW-846): Purge-and-Trap for Aqueous Samples...............................55 

5.2.22 EPA Method 5035A (SW-846): Closed-System Purge-and-Trap and Extraction for Volatile 

Organics in Soil and Waste Samples.....................................................................................56 

5.2.23 EPA Method 6010C (SW-846): Inductively Coupled Plasma - Atomic Emission 

Spectrometry .........................................................................................................................57 

5.2.24 EPA Method 6020A (SW-846): Inductively Coupled Plasma - Mass Spectrometry............58 

5.2.25 EPA Method 7470A (SW-846): Mercury in Liquid Wastes (Manual Cold-Vapor Technique)

...............................................................................................................................................59 

5.2.26 EPA Method 7471B (SW-846): Mercury in Solid or Semisolid Wastes (Manual Cold-Vapor 

Technique).............................................................................................................................59

5.2.27 EPA Method 7473 (SW-846): Mercury in Solids and Solutions by Thermal Decomposition, 

Amalgamation, and Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry................................................60 

5.2.28 EPA Method 7580 (SW-846): White Phosphorus (P4) by Solvent Extraction and Gas 

Chromatography....................................................................................................................60 

5.2.29 EPA Method 8015C (SW-846): Nonhalogenated Organics Using GC/FID.........................61 

5.2.30 EPA Method 8260C (SW-846): Volatile Organic Compounds by Gas ChromatographyMass Spectrometry (GC/MS)................................................................................................62 

5.2.31 EPA Method 8270D (SW-846): Semivolatile Organic Compounds by Gas 

Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry (GC-MS) ...................................................................63 

5.2.32 EPA Method 8290A, Appendix A (SW-846): Procedure for the Collection, Handling, 

Analysis, and Reporting of Wipe Tests Performed within the Laboratory ...........................66 

5.2.33 EPA Method 8315A (SW-846): Determination of Carbonyl Compounds by High 

Performance Liquid Chromatography (HPLC).....................................................................68 

5.2.34 EPA Method 8316 (SW-846): Acrylamide, Acrylonitrile and Acrolein by High Performance 

Liquid Chromatography (HPLC) ..........................................................................................69 

5.2.35 EPA Method 8318A (SW-846): N-Methylcarbamates by High Performance Liquid 

Chromatography (HPLC)......................................................................................................69 

5.2.36 EPA Method 8321B (SW-846): Solvent-Extractable Nonvolatile Compounds by High 

Performance Liquid Chromatography-Thermospray-Mass Spectrometry (HPLC-TS-MS) or 

Ultraviolet (UV) Detection....................................................................................................70 

5.2.37 EPA Method 8330B (SW-846): Nitroaromatics and Nitramines by High Performance 

Liquid Chromatography (HPLC) ..........................................................................................71 
Table of Contents 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) xvii October 2010

5.2.38 EPA CLP ISM01.2 Cyanide: Analytical Methods for Total Cyanide Analysis....................72 

5.2.39 EPA Region 7 RLAB Method 3135.2I: Cyanide, Total and Amenable in Aqueous and Solid 

Samples Automated Colorimetric with Manual Digestion ...................................................73 

5.2.40 IO [Inorganic] Compendium Method IO-3.1: Selection, Preparation, and Extraction of Filter 

Material .................................................................................................................................73 

5.2.41 IO [Inorganic] Compendium Method IO-3.4: Determination of Metals in Ambient 

Particulate Matter Using Inductively Coupled Plasma (ICP) Spectroscopy .........................74 

5.2.42 IO [Inorganic] Compendium Method IO-3.5: Determination of Metals in Ambient 

Particulate Matter Using Inductively Coupled Plasma/Mass Spectrometry (ICP-MS) ........75 

5.2.43 IO [Inorganic] Compendium Method IO-5: Sampling and Analysis for Vapor and Particle 

Phase Mercury in Ambient Air Utilizing Cold Vapor Atomic Fluorescence Spectrometry 

(CVAFS) ...............................................................................................................................76 

5.2.44 EPA Air Method, Toxic Organics - 10A (TO-10A): Determination of Pesticides and 

Polychlorinated Biphenyls in Ambient Air Using Low Volume Polyurethane Foam (PUF) 

Sampling Followed by Gas Chromatographic/Multi-Detector Detection (GC/MD)............77 

5.2.45 EPA Air Method, Toxic Organics - 15 (TO-15): Determination of Volatile Organic 

Compounds (VOCs) in Air Collected in Specially-Prepared Canisters and Analyzed by Gas 

Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry (GC/MS)....................................................................79 

5.2.46 NIOSH Method 1612: Propylene Oxide ...............................................................................80 

5.2.47 NIOSH Method 2016: Formaldehyde ...................................................................................80 

5.2.48 NIOSH Method 2513: Ethylene Chlorohydrin .....................................................................81 

5.2.49 NIOSH Method 3510: Monomethylhydrazine......................................................................81 

5.2.50 NIOSH Method 5600: Organophosphorus Pesticides...........................................................82 

5.2.51 NIOSH Method 5601: Organonitrogen Pesticides................................................................82 

5.2.52 NIOSH Method 6001: Arsine ...............................................................................................83 

5.2.53 NIOSH Method 6002: Phosphine .........................................................................................84 

5.2.54 NIOSH Method 6010: Hydrogen Cyanide............................................................................84 

5.2.55 NIOSH Method 6013: Hydrogen Sulfide..............................................................................85 

5.2.56 NIOSH Method 6015: Ammonia ..........................................................................................85 

5.2.57 NIOSH Method 6402: Phosphorus Trichloride.....................................................................86 

5.2.58 NIOSH Method 7903: Acids, Inorganic ...............................................................................86 

5.2.59 NIOSH Method 7905: Phosphorus .......................................................................................87 

5.2.60 NIOSH Method 7906: Fluorides, Aerosol and Gas, by IC ...................................................87 

5.2.61 NIOSH Method 9102: Elements on Wipes...........................................................................88 

5.2.62 NIOSH Method S301-1: Fluoroacetate Anion......................................................................89 

5.2.63 OSHA Method 40: Methylamine ..........................................................................................89 

5.2.64 OSHA Method 54: Methyl Isocyanate (MIC).......................................................................90 

5.2.65 OSHA Method 61: Phosgene ................................................................................................90 

5.2.66 OSHA Method ID-211: Sodium Azide and Hydrazoic Acid in Workplace Atmospheres...91 

5.2.67 OSHA Method ID216SG: Boron Trifluoride (BF3)..............................................................91 

5.2.68 OSHA Method PV2004: Acrylamide ..................................................................................92 

5.2.69 OSHA Method PV2103: Chloropicrin.................................................................................92 

5.2.70 ASTM Method D5755-03: Standard Test Method for Microvacuum Sampling and Indirect 

Analysis of Dust by Transmission Electron Microscopy for Asbestos Structure Number 

Surface Loading ....................................................................................................................93 

5.2.71 ASTM Method D6480-05: Standard Test Method for Wipe Sampling of Surfaces, Indirect 

Preparation, and Analysis for Asbestos Structure Number Concentration by Transmission 

Electron Microscopy .............................................................................................................93 

5.2.72 ASTM Method D7597-09: Standard Test Method for Determination of Diisopropyl 

Methylphosphonate, Ethyl Hydrogen Dimethylamidophosphate, Ethyl Methylphosphonic 

Acid, Isopropyl Methylphosphonic Acid, Methylphosphonic Acid and Pinacolyl 

Methylphosphonic Acid in Water by Liquid Chromatography/Tandem Mass Spectrometry

...............................................................................................................................................94 
Table of Contents 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) xviii October 2010

5.2.73 ASTM Method D7598-09: Standard Test Method for Determination of Thiodiglycol in 

Water by Single Reaction Monitoring Liquid Chromatography/Tandem Mass Spectrometry

...............................................................................................................................................94 

5.2.74 ASTM Method D7599-09: Standard Test Method for Determination of Diethanolamine, 

Triethanolamine, N-Methyldiethanolamine and N-Ethyldiethanolamine in Water by Single 

Reaction Monitoring Liquid Chromatography/Tandem Mass Spectrometry (LC/MS/MS) .95 

5.2.75 ASTM Method D7600-09: Standard Test Method for Determination of Aldicarb, 

Carbofuran, Oxamyl and Methomyl by Liquid Chromatography/Tandem Mass 

Spectrometry .........................................................................................................................96 

5.2.76 ISO Method 10312:1995: Ambient Air - Determination of Asbestos Fibres - Direct-transfer 

Transmission Electron Microscopy Method .........................................................................96 

5.2.77 Standard Method 4500-NH3 B: Nitrogen (Ammonia) Preliminary Distillation Step ...........97 

5.2.78 Standard Method 4500-NH3 G: Nitrogen (Ammonia) Automated Phenate Method ............97 

5.2.79 Standard Method 4500-Cl G: DPD Colorimetric Method ....................................................98 

5.2.80 Literature Reference for Chlorine (Analyst, 1999. 124(12): 1853–1857).............................98 

5.2.81 Literature Reference for Fluoroacetate Salts (Analytical Letters, 1994. 27(14): 2703–2718)

...............................................................................................................................................99 

5.2.82 Literature Reference for Methamidophos (Chromatographia. 2006. 63(5/6): 233–237)......99 

5.2.83 Literature Reference for Methamidophos (Journal of Chromatography A, 2007. 1154: 3–25)

.............................................................................................................................................100 

5.2.84 Literature Reference for Fluoroacetamide (Journal of Chromatography B, 2008. 876(1): 

103–108) .............................................................................................................................100 

5.2.85 Literature Reference for Sodium Azide (Journal of Forensic Sciences, 1998. 43(1): 200–

202) .....................................................................................................................................101 

Section 6.0: Selected Radiochemical Methods.....................................................................................103 

6.1 General Guidelines.............................................................................................................104 

6.1.1 Standard Operating Procedures for Identifying Radiochemical Methods...........................104 

6.1.2 General QC Guidelines for Radiochemical Methods..........................................................107 

6.1.3 Safety and Waste Management...........................................................................................108 

6.2 Method Summaries .............................................................................................................109 

6.2.1 EPA Method 111: Determination of Polonium-210 Emissions from Stationary Sources ..109 

6.2.2 EPA Method 900.0: Gross Alpha and Gross Beta Radioactivity in Drinking Water..........110 

6.2.3 EPA Method 901.1: Gamma Emitting Radionuclides in Drinking Water..........................111 

6.2.4 EPA Method 903.0: Alpha-Emitting Radium Isotopes in Drinking Water.........................111 

6.2.5 EPA Method 903.1: Radium-226 in Drinking Water – Radon Emanation Technique .......112 

6.2.6 EPA Method 905.0: Radioactive Strontium in Drinking Water..........................................112 

6.2.7 EPA Method 906.0: Tritium in Drinking Water .................................................................113 

6.2.8 EPA Method 908.0: Uranium in Drinking Water – Radiochemical Method......................114 

6.2.9 EPA Method EMSL-19: Determination of Radium-226 and Radium-228 in Water, Soil, Air 

and Biological Tissue..........................................................................................................114 

6.2.10 EPA Method EMSL-33: Isotopic Determination of Plutonium, Uranium, and Thorium in 

Water, Soil, Air, and Biological Tissue ..............................................................................115 

6.2.11 EPA Method R4-73-014: Radioactive Phosphorus.............................................................116 

6.2.12 EPA Method: Determination of Radiostrontium in Food and Bioenvironmental Samples 116 

6.2.13 EML HASL-300 Method Am-01-RC: Americium in Soil .................................................117 

6.2.14 EML HASL-300 Method Am-02-RC: Americium-241 in Soil-Gamma Spectrometry......117 

6.2.15 EML HASL-300 Method Am-04-RC: Americium in QAP Water and Air Filters - Eichrom’s 

TRU Resin...........................................................................................................................118 

6.2.16 EML HASL-300 Method Ga-01-R: Gamma Radioassay ...................................................118 
Table of Contents 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) xix October 2010

6.2.17 EML HASL-300 Method Po-02-RC: Polonium in Water, Vegetation, Soil, and Air Filters

.............................................................................................................................................119 

6.2.18 EML HASL-300 Method Pu-12-RC: Plutonium and/or Americium in Soil or Sediments.120 

6.2.19 EML HASL-300 Method Sr-03-RC: Strontium-90 in Environmental Samples.................120 

6.2.20 EML HASL-300 Method Tc-02-RC: Technetium-99 in Water – TEVA® Resin ...............121 

6.2.21 FRMAC Method Volume 2, Page 33: Gross Alpha and Beta in Air ..................................121 

6.2.22 RESL Method P-2: 32P Fish, Vegetation, Dry Ash, Ion Exchange .....................................122 

6.2.23 ORISE Method AP1: Gross Alpha and Beta for Various Matrices ....................................123 

6.2.24 ORISE Method AP2: Determination of Tritium.................................................................124 

6.2.25 ORISE Method AP5: Determination of Technetium-99.....................................................124 

6.2.26 ORISE Method AP11: Sequential Determination of the Actinides in Environmental Samples 

Using Total Sample Dissolution and Extraction Chromatography .....................................125 

6.2.27 ORISE Method Procedure #9: Determination of I-125 in Environmental Samples ...........125 

6.2.28 ASTM Method D3084-05: Standard Practice for Alpha Spectrometry in Water ...............126 

6.2.29 ASTM Method D3972-02: Standard Test Method for Isotopic Uranium in Water by 

Radiochemistry ...................................................................................................................127 

6.2.30 Standard Method 7110 B: Gross Alpha and Gross Beta Radioactivity (Total, Suspended, 

and Dissolved).....................................................................................................................127 

6.2.31 Standard Method 7120: Gamma-Emitting Radionuclides ..................................................128 

6.2.32 Standard Method 7500-Ra B: Radium: Precipitation Method ............................................129 

6.2.33 Standard Method 7500-Ra C: Radium: Emanation Method ...............................................129 

6.2.34 Standard Method 7500-Sr B: Total Radioactive Strontium and Strontium-90: Precipitation 

Method ................................................................................................................................130 

6.2.35 Standard Method 7500-U B: Uranium: Radiochemical Method.........................................131 

6.2.36 Standard Method 7500-U C: Uranium: Isotopic Method....................................................131 

Section 7.0: Selected Pathogen Methods..............................................................................................133 

Section 8.0: Selected Biotoxin Methods................................................................................................135 

8.1 General Guidelines.............................................................................................................136 

8.1.1 Standard Operating Procedures for Identifying Biotoxin Methods.....................................137 

8.1.2 General QC Guidelines for Biotoxin Methods....................................................................138 

8.1.3 Safety and Waste Management...........................................................................................139 

8.1.4 Laboratory Response Network (LRN)................................................................................140 

8.2 Method Summaries for Protein Biotoxins..........................................................................141 

8.2.1 Abrin ...................................................................................................................................141 

8.2.1.1 Literature Reference for Abrin (Journal of Food Protection. 2008. 71(9): 1868–1874)

..................................................................................................................................141 

8.2.1.2 Literature Reference for Abrin by Abrine Detection (Journal of Agricultural and 

Food Chemistry. 2008. 56(23): 11139-11143).........................................................142 

8.2.1.3 Literature Reference for Abrin and Ricin (Analytical Biochemistry. 2008. 378(1): 87-

89).............................................................................................................................143 

8.2.1.4 Literature Reference for Abrin, Shiga Toxin, and Shiga-like Toxins (Pharmacology 

Toxicology. 2001. 88(5): 255–260) .........................................................................143 

8.2.2 Botulinum Neurotoxins (Serotypes A, B, E, F) ..................................................................144 

8.2.2.1 FDA, Bacteriological Analytical Manual Online, Chapter 17, 2001: Botulinum 

Neurotoxins..............................................................................................................144 

8.2.2.2 Literature Reference for Botulinum Neurotoxins by SNAP-25 and VAMP 2 

Cleavage Product Detection (Journal of Chemical Health and Safety. 2008. 15(6): 

14–19).......................................................................................................................145 
Table of Contents 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) xx October 2010

8.2.2.3 EPA Environmental Technology Verification (ETV) Program Reports – Lateral Flow 

Immunoassay Kits....................................................................................................146 

8.2.3 Ricin (Ricinine)...................................................................................................................147 

8.2.3.1 Literature Reference for Ricin (Journal of AOAC International. 2008. 91(2): 376–

382)...........................................................................................................................147 

8.2.3.2 Literature Reference for Ricin by Ricinine Detection (Journal of Analytical 

Toxicology. 2005. 29(3): 149–155) .........................................................................148 

8.2.4 Shiga and Shiga-like Toxins (Stx, Stx-1, Stx-2) .................................................................148 

8.2.4.1 FDA, Bacteriological Analytical Manual Online, Appendix 1, 2001: Rapid Methods 

for Detecting Foodborne Pathogens.........................................................................148 

8.2.4.2 Literature Reference for Shiga and Shiga-like Toxins (Journal of Clinical 

Microbiology. 2007. 45(10): 3377–3380)................................................................149 

8.2.5 Staphylococcal Enterotoxins (SEA, SEB, SEC) .................................................................150 

8.2.5.1 AOAC Official Method 993.06: Staphylococcal Enterotoxins in Selected Foods...150 

8.2.5.2 Literature Reference for Staphylococcal Enterotoxins Types A, B, and C (Applied 

and Environmental Microbiology. 1997. 63(6): 2361–2365)...................................150 

8.3 Method Summaries for Small Molecule Biotoxins............................................................151 

8.3.1 Aflatoxin (Type B1)............................................................................................................151 

8.3.1.1 AOAC Official Method 991.31: Aflatoxins in Corn, Raw Peanuts, and Peanut Butter

..................................................................................................................................151 

8.3.2 α-Amanitin ..........................................................................................................................152 

8.3.2.1 Literature Reference for α-Amanitin (Journal of Chromatography B. 1991. 563(2): 

299–311)...................................................................................................................152 

8.3.2.2 Literature Reference for α-Amanitin, T-2 Mycotoxin (Journal of Food Protection. 

2005. 68(6): 1294–1301)..........................................................................................153 

8.3.3 Anatoxin-a...........................................................................................................................153 

8.3.3.1 Literature Reference for Anatoxin-a (Biomedical Chromatography. 1996. 10(1): 46–

47).............................................................................................................................153 

8.3.4 Brevetoxins (B form) ..........................................................................................................154 

8.3.4.1 Literature Reference for Brevetoxins (Environmental Health Perspectives. 2002. 

110(2): 179–185)......................................................................................................154 

8.3.4.2 Literature Reference for Brevetoxins (Toxicon. 2004. 43(4): 455–465) ................154 

8.3.5 α-Conotoxin ........................................................................................................................155 

8.3.5.1 Literature Reference for α-Conotoxin (Biochemical Journal. 1997. 328(1): 245–250)

..................................................................................................................................155 

8.3.5.2 Literature Reference for α-Conotoxin (Journal of Medicinal Chemistry. 2004. 47(5): 

1234–1241)...............................................................................................................156 

8.3.6 Cylindrospermopsin ............................................................................................................156 

8.3.6.1 Literature Reference for Cylindrospermopsin (FEMS Microbiology Letters. 2002. 

216(2): 159–164)......................................................................................................156 

8.3.6.2 ELISA Kits for Cylindrospermopsin.......................................................................157 

8.3.7 Diacetoxyscirpenol (DAS)..................................................................................................157 

8.3.7.1 Literature Reference for Diacetoxyscirpenol (DAS) (International Journal of Food 

Microbiology. 1988. 6(1): 9–17)..............................................................................157 

8.3.7.2 Literature Reference for Diacetoxyscirpenol (DAS) and T-2 Mycotoxin (Rapid 

Communications in Mass Spectrometry. 2006. 20(9): 1422–1428).........................158 

8.3.8 Microcystins (Principal isoforms: LA, LR, LW, RR, YR) .................................................158 

8.3.8.1 Literature Reference for Microcystins (Journal of AOAC International. 2001. 84(4): 

1035–1044)...............................................................................................................159 

8.3.8.2 Literature Reference for Microcystins (Analyst. 1994. 119(7): 1525–1530)..........159 

8.3.9 Picrotoxin ............................................................................................................................160
Table of Contents 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) xxi October 2010

8.3.9.1 Literature Reference for Picrotoxin (Journal of Pharmaceutical & Biomedical 

Analysis. 1989. 7(3): 369–375)................................................................................160 

8.3.10 Saxitoxins (Principal isoforms: STX, NEOSTX, GTX, dcGTX, dcSTX)..........................160 

8.3.10.1 Literature Reference for Saxitoxin (Journal of AOAC International. 1995. 78(2): 

528–532)...................................................................................................................160 

8.3.10.2 ELISA Kits for Saxitoxins .......................................................................................161 

8.3.11 T-2 Mycotoxin ....................................................................................................................162 

8.3.12 Tetrodotoxin........................................................................................................................162 

8.3.12.1 Literature Reference for Tetrodotoxin (Analytical Biochemistry. 2001. 290(1): 10–

17).............................................................................................................................162 

8.3.12.2 Literature Reference for Tetrodotoxin (Journal of Clinical Laboratory Analysis. 1992. 

6(2): 65–72)..............................................................................................................162 

Section 9.0: Conclusions........................................................................................................................165

Figures

Figure 1-1. Environmental Evaluation Analytical Process Roadmap for Homeland Security Events .........2 

Figure 2-1. SAM Method Selection Process.................................................................................................5 

Tables 

Table 5-1. Chemical Methods and Corresponding Section Numbers........................................................14 

Table 5-2. Sources of Chemical Methods..................................................................................................30 

Table 6-1. Radiochemical Methods and Corresponding Section Numbers .............................................104 

Table 6-2 Sources of Radiochemical Methods. ......................................................................................106 

Table 8-1. Sources of Biotoxin Methods .................................................................................................137 

 Appendices

 

Appendix A: Selected Chemical Methods............................................................................................A-1 

 

Appendix B: Selected Radiochemical Methods................................................................................... B-1 

Appendix C: Selected Pathogen Methods............................................................................................ C-1 

Appendix D: Selected Biotoxin Methods .............................................................................................D-1 

Attachments

 

DRAFT Attachment 1: SAM Supporting Documents.........................................................................1-1 
Table of Contents 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) xxii October 2010
Section 1 – Introduction 

Section 1.0: Introduction 

After the terrorist attacks of September 11, 2001 and the anthrax attacks in the fall of 2001, federal and 

state personnel provided response, recovery, and remediation under trying circumstances, including 

unprecedented demand on their capabilities to analyze environmental samples. In reviewing these events, 

the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) identified several areas where the country could better 

prepare itself in the event of future terrorist incidents. The need to improve the nation’s laboratory 

capacity and capability to analyze environmental samples following a homeland security event (i.e., 

chemical, biological, and/or radiological [CBR] crime/attack) was one of the most important areas 

identified. 

In response, EPA formed the Homeland Security Laboratory Capacity Work Group to identify and 

implement opportunities for near-term improvements and to develop recommendations for addressing 

longer-term laboratory issues. The EPA Homeland Security Laboratory Capacity Work Group consists of 

representatives from the Office of Research and Development (ORD), Office of Air and Radiation 

(OAR), Office of Water (OW), Office of Solid Waste and Emergency Response (OSWER), Office of 

Environmental Information, Office of Chemical Safety and Pollution Prevention, and several EPA 

regional offices. 

A critical area identified by the work group was the need for a list of analytical methods to be used by all 

laboratories when analyzing homeland security event samples and, in particular, when analysis of many 

samples is required over a short period of time. Having standardized methods would reduce confusion, 

permit sharing of sample load between laboratories, improve data comparability, and simplify the task of 

outsourcing analytical support to the commercial laboratory sector. Standardized methods would also 

improve the follow-up activities of validating results, evaluating data, and making decisions. To this end, 

work group members formed an Analytical Methods Subteam to address homeland security methods 

issues. 

The Analytical Methods Subteam recognized that widely different analytical methods are required for 

various phases of environmental sample analyses in support of homeland security preparation and 

response: (1) ongoing surveillance and monitoring; (2) response and rapid screening for determining 

whether an event has occurred; (3) preliminary site characterizations to determine the extent and type of 

contamination; and (4) confirmatory laboratory analyses to plan, implement, and evaluate the 

effectiveness of site remediation. Figure 1-1 represents these analytical phases. EPA’s Standardized 

Analytical Methods for Environmental Restoration Following Homeland Security Events (SAM) provides 

information for analytical methods to be applied during the “Site Remediation” phase. 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 1 October 2010
Section 1 – Introduction 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 2 October 2010

Figure 1-1. Environmental Evaluation Analytical Process Roadmap for Homeland 

Security Events 

SAM

(Standardized Analytical Methods for Environmental 

Restoration Following Homeland Security Events) 

Site Remediation

Surveillance and Monitoring

Immediate Response/

Credibility Determination

Preliminary Site

Characterization

Assessment Cleanup Clearance
 Section 2 – Background 

Section 2.0: Background 

In support of this document, EPA periodically assembles methods experts from within EPA and other 

federal agencies to review methods and, if necessary, revise the methods listed. SAM identifies a single 

method or method group per analyte/sample type to ensure a consistent analytical approach across 

multiple laboratories when analyzing environmental samples following an event. Method selection is 

based on consideration of specific criteria that emphasize method performance and include existing 

laboratory capabilities, laboratory capacity, method applicability to multiple environmental sample types, 

and method applicability to multiple SAM analytes. For some analytes, the preferred method is a clear 

choice; for others, competing criteria make the choice more difficult. Final method selections are based 

on technical recommendations from the SAM work groups. For analytes where limited laboratory 

testing/experience exists, such as chemical warfare agents, methods were selected based on their 

applicability to similar chemicals (e.g., nerve agents and some pesticides). In these cases, laboratory 

studies to test the ability of the selected method to measure the target analyte(s) are either underway or 

planned. Figure 2-1 summarizes steps and provides the criteria used during the SAM method selection 

process. It is important to note that the method selection criteria included in this figure are listed in nonhierarchical order and, in some cases, only a subset of the criteria was considered. 

Since 2004, EPA’s National Homeland Security Research Center (NHSRC) has brought together experts 

from across EPA and its sister agencies to develop this compendium of analytical methods to be used 

when analyzing environmental samples, and to address site characterization, remediation and clearance 

following future homeland security events. Participants have included representatives from EPA program 

offices, EPA regions, EPA laboratories, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC), Food and 

Drug Administration (FDA), Department of Homeland Security (DHS), Federal Bureau of Investigation 

(FBI), Department of Defense (DoD), Department of Agriculture (USDA), and U.S. Geological Survey 

(USGS). Methodologies were considered for chemical and biological agents of concern in the types of 

environmental samples that would be anticipated. The primary objective of this effort was to identify 

appropriate SAM Analytical Methods Subteam consensus methods that represent a balance between 

providing existing, documented, determinative techniques and providing consistent and valid analytical 

results. 

A survey of available confirmatory analytical methods for approximately 120 biological and chemical 

analytes was conducted using existing resources including the following: 

C National Environmental Methods Index (NEMI) and NEMI for Chemical, Biological, and 

Radiological Methods (NEMI-CBR) 

C Environmental Monitoring Method Index (EMMI) 

C EPA Test Methods Index 

C EPA Office of Solid Waste SW-846 Methods 

C EPA Microbiological Methods 

C National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) Manual of Analytical Methods 

(NMAM) 

C Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Index of Sampling and Analytical 

Methods 

C AOAC International 

C ASTM International 

C International Organization for Standardization (ISO) methods 

C Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater 

C PubMED Literature Database 

In September 2004, EPA published Standardized Analytical Methods for Use During Homeland Security 

Events, Revision 1.0 (SAM, Revision 1.0, EPA/600/R-04/126), which provided a list of analytical and 

sample preparation methods that were selected for measurement of 82 chemical analytes in 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 3 October 2010
 Section 2 – Background 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 4 October 2010

aqueous/liquid, solid, oily solid, and air samples, and 27 biological analytes in water, dust, and aerosol 

samples. During 2005, SAM was expanded to include radionuclides, several persistent chemical warfare 

agent degradation products, a drinking water sample type, methods for determination of the viability of 

biological organisms, and a separate section for biotoxin analytes. Where necessary, the methods 

included in SAM Revision 1.0 were updated to reflect more recent or appropriate methodologies. Similar 

efforts to those used for method selection during development of SAM Revision 1.0 were undertaken to 

select and include methods for measurement of radionuclides and chemical warfare agent degradation 

products in all sample types, for measurement of CBR analytes in drinking water, and to determine the 

viability of biological organisms. These additional analytes and the corresponding methods selected were 

included in SAM Revision 2.0. 

During 2006, SAM was revised further to incorporate analytes included on updated federal agency lists, 

provide additional or more current method listings for target analytes, incorporate explosives into the 

chemical analytes listing, combine identification and viability methods information for pathogens, and 

address comments from EPA Science Advisory Board’s Homeland Security Advisory Committee1

 to 

clarify the intended use of the document. These changes were included in SAM Revision 3.0 

(Standardized Analytical Methods for Environmental Restoration Following Homeland Security Events, 

February 2007 / EPA/600/R-07/015). SAM Revision 3.0 included a new title to emphasize the intended 

use of SAM methods for analysis during environmental restoration activities. Following publication of 

SAM Revision 3.0, SAM work groups updated the document to include the addition of several chemical 

analytes, one radionuclide, and one biotoxin, along with corresponding selected methods, and provided 

the updated documents as SAM Revision 3.1 (November 2007 / EPA/600/R-07/136). In 2007, NHSRC 

also developed a Web-based version of the SAM document to allow users and other stakeholders to 

search for specific needs and to submit questions and comments regarding the information. 

Since publication of SAM Revision 3.1 and its corresponding Web site, NHSRC has continued to 

convene technical work groups to evaluate and, if necessary, update the analytes and methods that are 

listed. During development of SAM Revision 4.0 (September 2008), work groups added a wipe sample 

type for chemical analytes and several polymerase chain reaction (PCR) methods for pathogens. A 

drinking water sample type was added during development of SAM Revision 5.0 (September 2009). 

SAM Revisions 4.0 and 5.0 also reflect the addition of several chemical, radiochemical, and biotoxin 

analytes. The current SAM Revision 6.0 (September 2010) reflects the addition of several more 

chemical, radiochemical, and biotoxin analytes along with removal of the non-aqueous/organic solid 

sample types in the chemistry methods section. SAM Revision 6.0 also reflects temporary removal of 

sections pertaining to pathogens methods for reformatting and further consideration. In the next revision 

of SAM, NHSRC and its partners plan to revise the document's title to better reflect its focus. 

In addition to updating SAM analytes and methods, SAM work groups have identified four areas for 

development of SAM companion documents to provide information regarding field screening equipment, 

sample collection, rapid screening and preliminary analysis equipment, and sample disposal to 

supplement the analytical methods included in SAM. The information listed in these documents 

corresponds to the analytes and methods in SAM and will be updated periodically to reflect revisions to 

SAM. Currently available SAM companion documents are listed in Attachment 1. 

 

1

EPA Science Advisory Board’s Homeland Security Advisory Committee: 

http://yosemite.epa.gov/sab/sabpeople.nsf/WebCommittees/BOARD
 Section 2 – Background 

Figure 2-1. SAM Method Selection Process 

Is there an EPA 

published method for 

measurement of the 

analyte in the sample 

type of interest?

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Is there a method that has been 

developed and published by another 

federal agency or Voluntary Consensus 

Standard Body (VCSB) for measurement 

of the analyte in the sample type of 

interest?

Repeat Steps 1 - 4 to identify methods that measure 

analytes similar to the analyte of concern

NO

NO

NO

NO Evaluate method against 

selection criteria

YES

YES

YES

Use the following criteria as guidelines to assess which method is most 

appropriate for inclusion in SAM:

• Has the method been tested/approved by issuing program office?

• Has the method been evaluated based on reliability, performance criteria 

(e.g., sensitivity, specificity, false positives/false negatives, precision, 

recovery)?

• Is the method appropriate for measurement of this analyte in the sample 

 type of interest to assess extent of contamination and decontamination 

effectiveness?

• Has the method been tested for the specific intended use?

• Is the existing lab capacity (i.e., equipment, number of labs, cost) suitable 

for implementation of the method?

• Is the required equipment readily available?

• Is the method capable of determining viability of an organism?

• What is the time required for analysis?

• Are reagents, standards, controls, etc., available and accessible?

• Is specific and/or unique training required?

• Are large sample volumes required?

• Are analytical costs high?

• Has the method already been selected for other SAM analytes?

• Are modifications needed to accommodate the analytes or sample types?

Select method for inclusion in SAM

If no methods are available, prioritize 

for further research

Is there an EPA, 

federal, or VCSB method 

that has been developed for 

measurement of the analyte 

in another environmental 

sample type?

Are there procedures 

described and supported by 

data in a peer-reviewed 

journal article for 

measurement of the analyte 

in the sample type of 

interest?

YES

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 5 October 2010
 Section 2 – Background 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 6 October 2010
 Section 3 – Scope and Application 

Section 3.0: Scope and Application

The premise and purpose of this document is to standardize the analytical methods that will be used in 

cases when multiple laboratories are called on to analyze environmental samples following a homeland 

security event (i.e., CBR crime/attack). The document also is intended as a tool that will be available to 

assist state and local laboratories in planning for and analyzing environmental samples following a 

homeland security event. The methods presented in this document should be used to: 

• Determine the extent of site contamination (assumes early responders have identified contaminants 

prior to EPA’s remediation effort), and 

• Confirm effectiveness of decontamination in support of site clearance decisions. 

The methods provided are limited to those that would be used to determine, to the extent possible within 

analytical limitations, the presence of chemical, radiochemical, pathogen, and biotoxin analytes of 

concern and their concentrations and viability, when applicable, in environmental media. The methods 

include detailed laboratory procedures for confirming the identification of analytes and determining their 

concentrations in environmental samples. The methods, therefore, are not designed to be used for rapid 

or immediate response or for conducting an initial evaluation (triage or screening) of suspected material 

to determine if it poses an immediate danger or should be analyzed in specially designed, highly secure 

facilities. This document also is not intended to provide information regarding sample collection 

activities or equipment. Methods for addressing these needs are and will be the subject of other efforts. 

In conjunction with SAM, NHSRC is developing SAM companion documents that are intended to 

provide information regarding field screening equipment, sample collection, laboratory rapid 

screening/preliminary identification equipment, and sample disposal in support of the confirmatory 

methods and analytes listed in SAM. Currently available SAM companion documents are listed in 

Attachment 1. 

Methods are provided in this document as corresponding to specific analyte/sample type combinations 

that are listed in Appendices A (chemical), B (radiochemical), C (pathogen), and D (biotoxin). 

Summaries of each method are provided in numerical order by the developing agency, throughout 

Sections 5.2 (chemical methods), 6.2 (radiochemical methods), and 8.2 (biotoxin methods). 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 7 October 2010
 Section 3 – Scope and Application 

It is important to note that, in some cases, the methods included in this document have not been fully 

validated for the analyte/sample type combination(s) for which they have been selected. The 

information contained in this document represents the latest step in an ongoing effort by EPA’s 

NHSRC to provide standardized analytical methods for use by those laboratories tasked with 

performing confirmatory analyses on environmental samples in support of EPA restoration efforts 

following a homeland security incident. The information also can be found on the SAM Web site 

(www.epa.gov/sam), which provides searchable links to supporting information based on SAM 

analytes and the analytical methods listed. 

Although at this time, some of the methods listed have not been fully validated for a particular 

analyte (e.g., analytes not explicitly identified in the method) or sample type, the methods are 

considered to contain the most appropriate currently available techniques. Unless a published 

method listed in this document states specific applicability to the analyte/sample type combination 

for which it has been selected, it should be assumed that method testing is needed, and adjustments 

may be required to accurately account for variations in analyte characteristics, environmental 

samples, analytical interferences, and target risk levels. 

Many of the SAM analytes have only recently become an environmental concern. EPA is actively 

pursuing development and validation of Standard Analytical Protocols (SAPs) based on the methods 

listed, including optimization of procedures for measuring target analytes or agents. In those cases 

where method procedures are determined to be insufficient for a particular situation, EPA will 

provide guidelines regarding appropriate actions. This will be an ongoing process as EPA will strive 

to establish a consistent level of validation for all listed analytes.

EPA recognizes that specification of a single method may limit laboratory capacity and techniques that 

may be needed to evaluate difficult samples. In those cases where method procedures are determined to 

be insufficient for a particular situation, EPA will provide guidelines regarding appropriate actions (see 

list of contacts in Section 4). Where further development and testing are necessary, EPA is developing 

and validating SAPs based on the methods that are listed in this document. Once validation is complete, 

data regarding the resulting method performance and data quality objectives will be available. The SAM 

document and corresponding SAPs will be reviewed frequently. EPA plans to continue to update the 

SAM document to address the needs of homeland security, to reflect improvements in analytical 

methodology and new technologies, and to incorporate changes in analytes based on needs. EPA also 

anticipates that addenda may be generated to provide guidelines regarding issues that currently are not 

addressed by this document. Any deviations from the methods referenced in this document should be 

coordinated with the appropriate point(s) of contact identified in Section 4. 

Participants in the chemical, radiochemical, pathogen, and biotoxin work groups, including 

representatives from the EPA, CDC, FDA, DHS, FBI, DoD, USDA, and USGS evaluated the suitability 

of existing methodologies and selected this set of methods for use by those laboratories that support EPA 

environmental restoration efforts in an emergency. EPA recognizes that this advanced selection of such 

methods may pose potential risks, including the following: 

• Selecting technologies that may not be the most cost-effective technologies currently available for 

addressing the particular situation at hand; 

• Selecting methodologies that may not be appropriate for use in responding to a particular 

emergency because EPA did not anticipate having to analyze for a particular analyte or 

analyte/sample type combination; and 

• Preventing development and adoption of new and better measurement technologies. 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 8 October 2010
 Section 3 – Scope and Application 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 9 October 2010

To address these potential risks as soon as possible, EPA plans to take several steps. These include the 

following: 

• Developing and specifying measurement quality objectives for all analyte/sample type 

combinations listed in this document. This includes required minimum standards of accuracy (bias 

and precision) and sensitivity for the analysis of samples that support the data quality needs of the 

particular stage of the emergency response/recovery process); 

• Specifying guidelines for ensuring the analytical methods listed provide results that are consistent 

with and support their intended use as indicated in SAM; 

• Working with other government agencies and the private sector to establish a laboratory network to 

ensure that laboratories, selected to assist EPA and its federal, state, and local partners in 

responding to homeland security events, have the requisite expertise and systems to perform this 

type of testing; and 

• Continuing to work with multiple agencies and stakeholders to update SAM and supporting 

documents periodically. 

Public officials must accurately assess all of the activities that are needed concerning site contamination 

following an emergency situation. These activities include initial assessment of potential site 

contamination for determination of immediate public and environmental risk, determination of the extent 

of contamination, and full remediation of the site. EPA recognizes that having data of known and 

documented quality is critical in making proper decisions during each of these activities. Data quality 

objectives (DQOs) must be established for each response activity2

. These DQOs are based upon needs 

for both quality and response time. During initial assessments, time is of utmost importance and DQOs 

must be established that weigh the need for rapid analytical response (e.g., using screening methods) 

against the need for very high quality data (confirmational methods such as those listed in SAM). Many 

of the methods listed in this document include quality control (QC) requirements for collecting and 

analyzing samples. EPA will assess these QC requirements to ensure analytical data quality supports 

decisions concerning site remediation and release. These QC requirements may be adjusted as necessary 

to maximize data and decision quality. Specific QC considerations and recommendations for analysis of 

samples for chemical, radiochemical, pathogen, and biotoxin analytes are provided in each corresponding 

section of this document (i.e., Sections 5.1.2, 6.1.2, 7.1.2, and 8.1.2, respectively). 

 

2

 Information regarding EPA’s DQO process, considerations, and planning is available at: 

http://www.epa.gov/QUALITY/dqos.html. 
 Section 3 – Scope and Application 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 10 October 2010
 Section 4 – Points of Contact 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 11 October 2010

Section 4.0: Points of Contact 

Questions concerning this document, or the methods identified in this document, should be addressed to 

the appropriate point(s) of contact identified below. These contacts should be consulted regarding any 

method deviations or modifications, sample problems or interferences, QC requirements, the use of 

potential alternative methods, or the need to address analytes or sample types other than those listed in 

SAM. As previously indicated, any deviations from the recommended method(s) should be reported 

immediately to ensure data comparability is maintained when responding to homeland security events. In 

addition, general questions and comments can be submitted via the SAM Web site (www.epa.gov/sam). 

General

Kathy Hall - Primary

National Homeland Security Research Center 

U.S. EPA ORD (NG16) 

26 West Martin Luther King Jr. Drive 

Cincinnati, OH 45268 

(513) 379-5260 

hall.kathy@epa.gov 

Romy Lee - Alternate

National Homeland Security Research Center 

U.S. EPA ORD (NG16) 

26 West Martin Luther King Jr. Drive 

Cincinnati, OH 45268 

(513) 569-7016 

lee.romy@epa.gov

Chemical Methods

Steve Reimer - Primary

U.S. EPA Region 10 - Manchester Laboratory 

7411 Beach Drive East 

Port Orchard, WA 98366 

(360) 871-8718 

reimer.steve@epa.gov 

Matthew Magnuson - Alternate

National Homeland Security Research Center 

U.S. EPA ORD (NG16) 

26 West Martin Luther King Jr. Drive 

Cincinnati, OH 45268 

(513) 569-7321 

magnuson.matthew@epa.gov

Radiochemical Methods

John Griggs - Primary

U.S. EPA Office of Radiation and Indoor Air 

Environmental Laboratory 

540 South Morris Avenue 

Montgomery, AL 36115-2601 

(334) 270-3450 

griggs.john@epa.gov

Kathy Hall - Alternate

National Homeland Security Research Center 

U.S. EPA ORD (NG16) 

26 West Martin Luther King Jr. Drive 

Cincinnati, OH 45268 

(513) 379-5260 

hall.kathy@epa.gov

Pathogen Methods

Sanjiv Shah - Primary

National Homeland Security Research Center 

U.S. EPA ORD - 8801RR 

1200 Pennsylvania Avenue, NW 

Washington, DC 20460 

(202) 564-9522 

shah.sanjiv@epa.gov 

Erin Silvestri - Alternate

National Homeland Security Research Center 

U.S. EPA ORD (NG16) 

26 West Martin Luther King Jr. Drive 

Cincinnati, OH 45268 

(513) 569-7619 

silvestri.erin@epa.gov 

Biotoxins Methods

Matthew Magnuson - Primary

National Homeland Security Research Center 

U.S. EPA ORD (NG16) 

26 West Martin Luther King Jr. Drive 

Cincinnati, OH 45268 

(513) 569-7321 

magnuson.matthew@epa.gov

Sanjiv Shah - Alternate

National Homeland Security Research Center 

U.S. EPA ORD - 8801RR 

1200 Pennsylvania Avenue, NW 

Washington, DC 20460 

(202) 564-9522 

shah.sanjiv@epa.gov 
 Section 4 – Points of Contact 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 12 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

Section 5.0: Selected Chemical Methods 

Appendix A provides a list of methods to be used in analyzing environmental samples for chemical 

contaminants during remediation activities that result from a homeland security event. Methods are listed 

for each analyte and for each sample type that potentially may need to be measured and analyzed when 

responding to an environmental emergency. Procedures from peer-reviewed journal articles are listed for 

those analyte-sample type combinations where methods are not available. Once standard procedures are 

available, the literature references will be replaced. 

 

Please note: This section provides guidance for selecting chemical methods that have a high likelihood 

of assuring analytical consistency when laboratories are faced with a large scale environmental 

restoration crisis. Not all methods have been verified for the analyte/sample type combination listed in 

Appendix A. Please refer to the specified method to identify analyte/sample type combinations that 

have been verified. Any questions regarding information discussed in this section should be addressed 

to the appropriate contact(s) listed in Section 4. 

Appendix A is sorted alphabetically by analyte and includes the following information: 

• Analyte(s). The component, contaminant, or constituent of interest. 

• Chemical Abstracts Service Registration Number (CAS RN). A unique identifier for chemical 

substances that provides an unambiguous way to identify a chemical or molecular structure when 

there are many possible systematic, generic, or trivial names. 

• Determinative technique. An analytical instrument or technique used to determine the quantity and 

identification of compounds or components in a sample. 

• Method type. Two method types (sample preparation and determinative) are used to complete 

sample analysis. In some cases, a single method contains information for both sample preparation 

and determinative procedures. In most instances, however, two separate methods may need to be 

used in conjunction. 

• Solid samples. The recommended method/procedure to identify and measure the analyte of interest 

in solid phase samples. 

• Aqueous liquid samples. The recommended method/procedure to identify and measure the analyte 

of interest in aqueous liquid phase samples. 

• Drinking water samples. The recommended method/procedure to identify and measure the analyte 

of interest in drinking water samples. 

• Air samples. The recommended method/procedure to identify and measure the analyte of interest in 

air samples. 

• Wipe samples. The recommended method/procedure to identify and measure the analyte of interest 

in wipes used to collect a sample from a surface. 

Following a homeland security event, it is assumed that only those areas with contamination greater than 

pre-existing/naturally prevalent levels commonly found in the environment would be subject to 

remediation. Dependent on site- and event-specific goals, investigation of background levels using 

methods listed in Appendix A is recommended. 

 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 13 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

5.1 General Guidelines 

This section provides a general overview of how to identify the appropriate chemical method(s) for a 

given analyte-sample type combination, as well as recommendations for QC procedures. 

For additional information on the properties of the chemicals listed in Appendix A, TOXNET 

(http://toxnet.nlm.nih.gov/index.html), a cluster of databases on toxicology, hazardous chemicals, and 

related areas maintained by the National Library of Medicine, is an excellent resource. Additional 

resources include: 

• SRC’s PHYSPROP (http://srcinc.com/what-we-do/product.aspx?id=133) and CHEMFATE, part of 

the Environmental Fate Database supported by EPA (http://srcinc.com/what-wedo/product.aspx?id=132&terms=Environmental+Fate+and+Exposure). 

• INCHEM at http://www.inchem.org/ contains both chemical and toxicity information. 

• The Registry of Toxic Effects of Chemical Substances (RTECS) database can be accessed via the 

NIOSH Web site at http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/rtecs/default.html for toxicity information. 

• EPA’s Integrated Risk Information System (IRIS): http://www.epa.gov/iris/ contains toxicity 

information (searchable on TOXNET). 

• Forensic Science and Communications published by the Laboratory Division of the FBI. 

http://www.fbi.gov/hq/lab/fsc/current/backissu.htm. 

• Joint Research Centre/Institute for Health & Consumer Protection: http://ecb.jrc.it and 

http://ecb.jrc.it/testing-methods/ containing information regarding European Directive 67/548/EEC 

and Annex V. 

• Agency of Toxic Substances & Disease Registry (ATSDR) Toxic Substances Portal, Toxicological 

Profiles: http://www.atsdr.cdc.gov/toxprofiles/index.asp. 

Additional research on chemical contaminants is ongoing within EPA. Databases to manage this 

information are currently under development. 

5.1.1 Standard Operating Procedures for Identifying Chemical Methods 

To determine the appropriate method to be used on an environmental sample, locate the analyte of 

concern under the “Analyte(s)” column in Appendix A: Chemical Methods. After locating the analyte of 

concern, continue across the table to identify the appropriate determinative technique (e.g., high 

performance liquid chromatography [HPLC], gas chromatography – mass spectrometry [GC-MS]), then 

identify the appropriate sample preparation and determinative method(s) for the sample type of interest 

(solid, aqueous liquid, drinking water, air, or wipe). In some cases, two methods (sample preparation and 

determinative) are needed to complete sample analysis. 

Sections 5.2.1 through 5.2.85 below provide summaries of the sample preparation and determinative 

methods listed in Appendix A. Once a method has been identified in Appendix A, Table 5-1 can be used 

to locate the method summary. 

Table 5-1. Chemical Methods and Corresponding Section Numbers 

Analyte CAS RN Method Section 

538 (EPA OW) 5.2.10 

Chromatographia. 2006. 63(5/6): 

233–237 5.2.82 Acephate 30560-19-1 

Journal of Chromatography A. 

2007. 1154(1): 3–25 5.2.83 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 14 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 15 October 2010

Analyte CAS RN Method Section 

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

8316 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.34 Acrylamide 79-06-1 

PV2004 (OSHA) 5.2.68 

524.2 5.2.7 

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

5035A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.22 

8260C (EPA-SW846) 5.2.30 

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

Acrylonitrile 107-13-1 

PV2004 (OSHA) 5.2.68 

531.2 (EPA OW) 5.2.9 

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

8318A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.35

5601 (NIOSH) 5.2.51

Aldicarb (Temik) 

Aldicarb sulfone 

Aldicarb sulfoxide 

116-06-3 

1646-88-4 

1646-87-3 

D7600-09 (ASTM) 5.2.75 

5030C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.21 

5035A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.22 

8260C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.30 Allyl alcohol 107-18-6 

TO-15 (EPA ORD) 5.2.45 

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 4-Aminopyridine 504-24-5 

8330B (EPA SW-846) 5.2.37

350.1 (EPA OW) 5.2.6

6015 (NIOSH) 5.2.56

4500-NH3 B (SM) 5.2.77

Ammonia 7664-41-7 

4500-NH3 G (SM) 5.2.78

200.7 (EPA OW) 5.2.1 

200.8 (EPA OW) 5.2.2

3050B (EPA SW-846) 5.2.14

6010C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.23

6020A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.24

IO-3.1 (EPA ORD) 5.2.40

IO-3.4 (EPA ORD) 5.2.41

IO-3.5 (EPA ORD) 5.2.42

Ammonium metavanadate (analyze as total 

vanadium) 

Arsenic, Total 

Arsenic trioxide (analyze as total arsenic) 

7803-55-6 

7440-38-2 

1327-53-3 

9102 (NIOSH) 5.2.61 

200.7 (EPA OW) 5.2.1 

200.8 (EPA OW) 5.2.2

3050B (EPA SW-846) 5.2.14

6010C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.23 

6020A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.24

6001 (NIOSH) 5.2.52

Arsine (analyze as total arsenic in non-air 

samples) 7784-42-1 

9102 (NIOSH) 5.2.61 

D5755-03 (ASTM) 5.2.70

Asbestos 1332-21-4 D6480-05 (ASTM) 5.2.71

10312:1995 (ISO) 5.2.76

Boron trifluoride 7637-07-2 ID216SG (OSHA) 5.2.67
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 16 October 2010

Analyte CAS RN Method Section 

3520C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.15

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

Brodifacoum 56073-10-0 

8321B (EPA SW-846) 5.2.36

3520C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.15 

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16 

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17 

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18 

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

8321B (EPA SW-846) 5.2.36 

Bromadiolone 28772-56-7 

D7600-09 (ASTM) 5.2.75 

3520C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.15

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

8321B (EPA SW-846) 5.2.36

BZ [Quinuclidinyl benzilate] 6581-06-2 

TO-10A (EPA ORD) 5.2.44 

200.7 (EPA OW) 5.2.1 

200.8 (EPA OW) 5.2.2

3050B (EPA SW-846) 5.2.14

6010C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.23

6020A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.24

IO-3.1 (EPA ORD) 5.2.40

IO-3.4 (EPA ORD) 5.2.41

IO-3.5 (EPA ORD) 5.2.42

Calcium arsenate (analyze as total arsenic) 7778-44-1 

9102 (NIOSH) 5.2.61 

531.2 (EPA OW) 5.2.9

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

8318A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.35

5601 (NIOSH) 5.2.51

Carbofuran (Furadan) 1563-66-2 

D7600-09 (ASTM) 5.2.75 

3520C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.15 

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16 

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17 

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18 

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

Carfentanil 59708-52-0 

8321B (EPA SW-846) 5.2.36 
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 17 October 2010

Analyte CAS RN Method Section 

524.2 (EPA OW) 5.2.7

5030C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.21

5035A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.22

8260C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.30

Carbon disulfide 75-15-0 

TO-15 (EPA ORD) 5.2.45

3520C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.15 

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16 

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17 

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18 

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8270D (EPA SW-846) 5.2.31 

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

Chlorfenvinphos 470-90-6 

TO-10A (EPA ORD) 5.2.44 

4500-Cl G (SM) 5.2.79 Chlorine 7782-50-5 

Analyst. 1999. 124: 1853–1857 5.2.80

5030C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.21 

5035A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.22 

8260C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.30 

2-Chloroethanol 107-07-3 

2513 (NIOSH) 5.2.48 

3520C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.15

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8270D (EPA SW-846) 5.2.31

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

3-Chloro-1,2-propanediol 96-24-2 

TO-10A (EPA ORD) 5.2.44

551.1 (EPA OW) 5.2.12

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17 

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8270D (EPA SW-846) 5.2.31

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

Chloropicrin 76-06-2 

PV2103 (OSHA) 5.2.69

3520C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.15

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8270D (EPA SW-846) 5.2.31

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

Chlorosarin 

Chlorosoman 

1445-76-7 

7040-57-5 

TO-10A (EPA ORD) 5.2.44
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 18 October 2010

Analyte CAS RN Method Section 

200.7 (EPA OW) 5.2.1 

200.8 (EPA OW) 5.2.2

3050B (EPA SW-846) 5.2.14

6010C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.23

6020A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.24

IO-3.1 (EPA ORD) 5.2.40

IO-3.4 (EPA ORD) 5.2.41

IO-3.5 (EPA ORD) 5.2.42

2-Chlorovinylarsonous acid (2-CVAA) 85090-33-1 

9102 (NIOSH) 5.2.61 

3520C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.15

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8270D (EPA SW-846) 5.2.31

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

Chlorpyrifos 

Chlorpyrifos oxon 

2921-88-2 

5598-15-2 

TO-10A (EPA ORD) 5.2.44

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17 

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8270D (EPA SW-846) 5.2.31

Crimidine 535-89-7 

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

Cyanide, Amenable to chlorination NA RLAB Method 3135.2I 5.2.39 

335.4 (EPA OW) 5.2.5

Cyanide, Total 57-12-5 ISM01.2 CN (EPA CLP) 5.2.38

6010 (NIOSH) 5.2.54

5030C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.21 

5035A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.22 

8260C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.30 Cyanogen chloride 506-77-4 

TO-15 (EPA ORD) 5.2.45 

3520C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.15

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8270D (EPA SW-846) 5.2.31

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

Cyclohexyl sarin (GF) 329-99-7 

TO-10A (EPA ORD) 5.2.44

524.2 (EPA OW) 5.2.7

5030C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.21

5035A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.22

8260C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.30

1,2-Dichloroethane 107-06-2 

TO-15 (EPA ORD) 5.2.45
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 19 October 2010

Analyte CAS RN Method Section 

525.2 (EPA OW) 5.2.8

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17 

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8270D (EPA SW-846) 5.2.31

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

Dichlorvos 62-73-7 

TO-10A (EPA ORD) 5.2.44

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17 

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8270D (EPA SW-846) 5.2.31

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

Dicrotophos 141-66-2 

TO-10A (EPA ORD) 5.2.44

3520C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.15

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8015C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.29

Diesel range organics NA 

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

538 (EPA OW) 5.2.10

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17 

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

8321B (EPA SW-846) 5.2.36

TO-10A (EPA ORD) 5.2.44

Diisopropyl methylphosphonate (DIMP) 1445-75-6 

D7597-09 (ASTM) 5.2.72 

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17 

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8270D (EPA SW-846) 5.2.31

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

Dimethylphosphite 868-85-9 

TO-10A (EPA ORD) 5.2.44

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16 

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17 

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18 

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

8321B (EPA SW-846) 5.2.36 

Dimethylphosphoramidic acid 33876-51-6 

TO-10A (EPA ORD) 5.2.44 
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 20 October 2010

Analyte CAS RN Method Section 

3520C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.15 

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16 

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17 

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18 

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

Diphacinone 82-66-6 

8321B (EPA SW-846) 5.2.36 

525.2 (EPA OW) 5.2.8 

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17 

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18 

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8270D (EPA SW-846) 5.2.31

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

Disulfoton 

Disulfoton sulfone oxon 

Disulfoton sulfoxide 

Disulfoton sulfoxide oxon 

298-04-4 

2496-91-5 

2497-07-6 

2496-92-6 

5600 (NIOSH) 5.2.50 

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17 

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8270D (EPA SW-846) 5.2.31

1,4-Dithiane 505-29-3 

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17 

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18 

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

8321B (EPA SW-846) 5.2.36 

EA2192 [Diisopropylaminoethyl methylthiolophosphonate] 73207-98-4 

TO-10A (EPA ORD) 5.2.44 

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17 

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

8321B (EPA SW-846) 5.2.36

TO-10A (EPA ORD) 5.2.44

Ethyl methylphosphonic acid (EMPA) 1832-53-7 

D7597-09 (ASTM) 5.2.72 

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17 

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18

8270D (EPA SW-846) 5.2.31

TO-15 (EPA ORD) 5.2.45

Ethyldichloroarsine (ED) 598-14-1 

9102 (NIOSH) 5.2.61 
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

Analyte CAS RN Method Section 

3520C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.15

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18

N-Ethyldiethanolamine (EDEA) 139-87-7 3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

8321B (EPA SW-846) 5.2.36

TO-10A (EPA ORD) 5.2.44

D7599-09 (ASTM) 5.2.74 

5030C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.21 

5035A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.22 

8260C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.30 Ethylene oxide 75-21-8 

TO-15 (EPA ORD) 5.2.45 

525.2 (EPA OW) 5.2.8

3520C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.15

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17

Fenamiphos 22224-92-6 3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8270D (EPA SW-846) 5.2.31

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

TO-10A (EPA ORD) 5.2.44

3520C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.15 

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16 

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17 

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18 

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

Fentanyl 437-38-7 

8321B (EPA SW-846) 5.2.36 

Fluoride 16984-48-8 300.1, Rev 1.0 (EPA OW) 5.2.4

Fluoroacetamide 640-19-7 Journal of Chromatography B. 

2008. 876, 103–108 5.2.84 

300.1, Rev 1.0 (EPA OW) 5.2.4

S301-1 (NIOSH) 5.2.62 Fluoroacetic acid and fluoroacetate salts NA 

Analytical Letters. 1994. 27(14): 

2703–2718 5.2.81

5030C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.21 

5035A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.22 

8260C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.30 

2-Fluoroethanol 371-62-0 

2513 (NIOSH) 5.2.48 

556.1 (EPA OW) 5.2.13 

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

8315A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.33

Formaldehyde 50-00-0 

2016 (NIOSH) 5.2.47

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 21 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

Analyte CAS RN Method Section 

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

5030C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.21

5035A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.22

8015C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.29

Gasoline range organics NA 

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16 

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

Hexahydro-1,3,5-trinitro-1,3,5-triazine (RDX) 

Hexamethylenetriperoxidediamine (HMTD) 

121-82-4 

283-66-9 

8330B (EPA SW-846) 5.2.37

Hydrogen bromide 

Hydrogen chloride 

10035-10-6 

7647-01-0 7903 (NIOSH) 5.2.58

Hydrogen cyanide 74-90-8 6010 (NIOSH) 5.2.54

Hydrogen fluoride 7664-39-3 7903 (NIOSH) 5.2.58

Hydrogen sulfide 7783-06-4 6013 (NIOSH) 5.2.55

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17 

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

8321B (EPA SW-846) 5.2.36

TO-10A (EPA ORD) 5.2.44

Isopropyl methylphosphonic acid (IMPA) 1832-54-8 

D7597-09 (ASTM) 5.2.72 

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

5030C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.21

5035A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.22

8015C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.29

Kerosene 64742-81-0 

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

200.7 (EPA OW) 5.2.1 

200.8 (EPA OW) 5.2.2

3050B (EPA SW-846) 5.2.14

6010C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.23

6020A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.24

IO-3.1 (EPA ORD) 5.2.40

IO-3.4 (EPA ORD) 5.2.41

IO-3.5 (EPA ORD) 5.2.42

Lead arsenate (analyze as total arsenic) 

Lewisite 1 (L-1) [2-chlorovinyldichloroarsine] 

(analyze as total arsenic) 

Lewisite 2 (L-2) [bis(2-

chlorovinyl)chloroarsine] (analyze as total 

arsenic) 

Lewisite 3 (L-3) [tris(2-chlorovinyl)arsine] 

(analyze as total arsenic) 

Lewisite oxide 

7645-25-2 

541-25-3 

40334-69-8 

40334-70-1 

1306-02-1 

9102 (NIOSH) 5.2.61 

245.1 (EPA OW) 5.2.3 

Mercuric chloride (analyze as total mercury) 7487-94-7 7473 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.27 

9102 (NIOSH) 5.2.61 

245.1 (EPA OW) 5.2.3

7473 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.27

IO-5 (EPA ORD) 5.2.43 Mercury, Total 7439-97-6 

9102 (NIOSH) 5.2.61 

538 (EPA OW) 5.2.10 

Chromatographia. 2006. 63(5/6): 

233–237 Methamidophos 5.2.82 10265-92-6 

Journal of Chromatography A. 

2007. 1154(1): 3–25 5.2.83 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 22 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

Analyte CAS RN Method Section 

531.2 (EPA OW) 5.2.9

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

8318A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.35

5601 (NIOSH) 5.2.51

Methomyl 16752-77-5 

D7600-09 (ASTM) 5.2.75 

245.1 (EPA OW) 5.2.3

7473 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.27 

IO-5 (EPA ORD) 5.2.43 

Methoxyethylmercuric acetate (analyze as 

total mercury) 151-38-2 

9102 (NIOSH) 5.2.61 

524.2 (EPA OW) 5.2.7 

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

5035A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.22 

8260C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.30 

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

Methyl acrylonitrile 126-98-7 

PV2004 (OSHA) 5.2.68 

300.1, Rev 1.0 (EPA OW) 5.2.4

Methyl fluoroacetate (analyze as S301-1 (NIOSH) 5.2.62

fluoroacetate ion) 453-18-9 

Analytical Letters. 1994. 27(14): 

2703–2718 5.2.81

3520C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.15

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8270D (EPA SW-846) 5.2.31

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

Methyl hydrazine 60-34-4 

3510 (NIOSH) 5.2.49

Methyl isocyanate 624-83-9 OSHA 54 5.2.64

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17 

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8270D (EPA SW-846) 5.2.31

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

Methyl paraoxon 

Methyl parathion 

950-35-6 

298-00-0 

TO-10A (EPA ORD) 5.2.44

Methylamine 74-89-5 OSHA 40 5.2.63

3520C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.15

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

8321B (EPA SW-846) 5.2.36

TO-10A (EPA ORD) 5.2.44

N-Methyldiethanolamine (MDEA) 105-59-9 

D7599-09 (ASTM) 5.2.74 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 23 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

Analyte CAS RN Method Section 

3520C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.15

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8270D (EPA SW-846) 5.2.31

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

1-Methylethyl ester ethylphosphonofluoridic 

acid (GE) 1189-87-3 

TO-10A (EPA ORD) 5.2.44

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17 

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

8321B (EPA SW-846) 5.2.36

TO-10A (EPA ORD) 5.2.44

Methylphosphonic acid (MPA) 993-13-5 

D7597-09 (ASTM) 5.2.72 

525.2 (EPA OW) 5.2.8

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17 

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8270D (EPA SW-846) 5.2.31

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

Mevinphos 7786-34-7 

TO-10A (EPA ORD) 5.2.44

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16 

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17 

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18 

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8270D (EPA SW-846) 5.2.31 

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

Monocrotophos 6923-22-4 

TO-10A (EPA ORD) 5.2.44 

3520C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.15

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8270D (EPA SW-846) 5.2.31

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

Mustard, nitrogen (HN-1) [bis(2-chloroethyl)-

ethylamine] 

Mustard, nitrogen (HN-2) [2,2’-dichloro-Nmethyldiethylamine N,N-bis(2-chloroethyl)- 

methylamine] 

Mustard, nitrogen (HN-3) [tris(2-chloroethyl)- 

amine] 

538-07-8 

51-75-2 

555-77-1 TO-10A (EPA ORD) 5.2.44

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

3571 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.20

8270D (EPA SW-846) 5.2.31

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

Mustard, sulfur / Mustard gas (HD) 505-60-2 

TO-10A (EPA ORD) 5.2.44

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 24 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

Analyte CAS RN Method Section 

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17 

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8270D (EPA SW-846) 5.2.31

Nicotine compounds 54-11-5 

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

Octahydro-1,3,5,7-tetranitro-1,3,5,7-

tetrazocine (HMX) 2691-41-0 

8330B (EPA SW-846) 5.2.37

200.7 (EPA OW) 5.2.1

200.8 (EPA OW) 5.2.2 

3050B (EPA SW-846) 5.2.14

6010C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.23

IO-3.1 (EPA ORD) 5.2.40

IO-3.4 (EPA ORD) 5.2.41

Osmium tetroxide (analyze as total osmium) 20816-12-0 

9102 (NIOSH) 5.2.61 

531.2 (EPA OW) 5.2.9

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

8318A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.35

5601 (NIOSH) 5.2.51

Oxamyl 23135-22-0 

D7600-09 (ASTM) 5.2.75 

Paraquat 4685-14-7 549.2 (EPA OW) 5.2.11

3520C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.15 

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16 

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17 

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18 

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8270D (EPA SW-846) 5.2.31

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

Paraoxon 

Parathion 

311-45-5 

56-38-2 

TO-10A (EPA ORD) 5.2.44 

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 Pentaerythritol tetranitrate (PETN) 78-11-5 

8330B (EPA SW-846) 5.2.37

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17 

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8270D (EPA SW-846) 5.2.31

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

Phencyclidine 77-10-1 

TO-10A (EPA ORD) 5.2.44

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 25 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

Analyte CAS RN Method Section 

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16 

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17 

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18 

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8270D (EPA SW-846) 5.2.31

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

Phorate 

Phorate sulfone 

Phorate sulfone oxon 

Phorate sulfoxide 

Phorate sulfoxide oxon 

298-02-2 

2588-04-7 

2588-06-9 

2588-03-6 

2588-05-8 

TO-10A (EPA ORD) 5.2.44 

Phosgene 75-44-5 OSHA 61 5.2.65

3520C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.15 

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16 

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17 

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18 

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8270D (EPA SW-846) 5.2.31

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

Phosphamidon 13171-21-6 

TO-10A (EPA ORD) 5.2.44 

Phosphine 7803-51-2 6002 (NIOSH) 5.2.53

Phosphorus trichloride 7719-12-2 6402 (NIOSH) 5.2.57

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17 

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

8321B (EPA SW-846) 5.2.36

TO-10A (EPA ORD) 5.2.44

Pinacolyl methyl phosphonic acid (PMPA) 616-52-4 

D7597-09 (ASTM) 5.2.72 

5030C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.21 

5035A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.22 

8260C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.30 Propylene oxide 75-56-9 

1612 (NIOSH) 5.2.46 

3520C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.15 

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16 

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17 

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18 

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8270D (EPA SW-846) 5.2.31 

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

R 33 (VR) [methylphosphonothioic acid, S-

[2-(diethylamino)ethyl] O-2-methylpropyl 

ester] 

159939-87-4 

TO-10A (EPA ORD) 5.2.44 

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

3571 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.20

8270D (EPA SW-846) 5.2.31

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

Sarin (GB) 107-44-8 

TO-10A (EPA ORD) 5.2.44

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 26 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

Analyte CAS RN Method Section 

200.7 (EPA OW) 5.2.1 

200.8 (EPA OW) 5.2.2

3050B (EPA SW-846) 5.2.14

6010C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.23

6020A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.24

IO-3.1 (EPA ORD) 5.2.40

IO-3.4 (EPA ORD) 5.2.41

IO-3.5 (EPA ORD) 5.2.42

Sodium arsenite (analyze as total arsenic) 7784-46-5 

9102 (NIOSH) 5.2.61 

300.1, Rev 1.0 (EPA OW) 5.2.4 

ID-211 (OSHA) 5.2.66 Sodium azide (analyze as azide ion) 26628-22-8 

Journal of Forensic Sciences. 

1998. 43(1): 200–202 5.2.85 

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17 

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8270D (EPA SW-846) 5.2.31

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

Soman (GD) 96-64-0 

TO-10A (EPA ORD) 5.2.44

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17 

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8270D (EPA SW-846) 5.2.31

Strychnine 57-24-9 

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17 

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8270D (EPA SW-846) 5.2.31

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

Tabun (GA) 77-81-6 

TO-10A (EPA ORD) 5.2.44

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17 

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8270D (EPA SW-846) 5.2.31

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

Tetraethyl pyrophosphate 107-49-3 

TO-10A (EPA ORD) 5.2.44

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 27 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

Analyte CAS RN Method Section 

3520C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.15

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8270D (EPA SW-846) 5.2.31

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

Tetramethylenedisulfotetramine 80-12-6 

TO-10A (EPA ORD) 5.2.44

200.7 (EPA OW) 5.2.1 

200.8 (EPA OW) 5.2.2 

3050B (EPA SW-846) 5.2.14 

6010C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.23 

6020A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.24 

IO-3.1 (EPA ORD) 5.2.40 

IO-3.4 (EPA ORD) 5.2.41 

IO-3.5 (EPA ORD) 5.2.42 

Thallium sulfate (analyze as total thallium) 10031-59-1 

9102 (NIOSH) 5.2.61 

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17 

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

8321B (EPA SW-846) 5.2.36 

TO-10A (EPA ORD) 5.2.44

Thiodiglycol (TDG) 111-48-8 

D7598-09 (ASTM) 5.2.73 

531.2 (EPA OW) 5.2.9 

3520C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.15

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

8321B (EPA SW-846) 5.2.36 

Thiofanox 39196-18-4 

5601 (NIOSH) 5.2.51 

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17 

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8270D (EPA SW-846) 5.2.31

1,4-Thioxane 15980-15-1 

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

3050B (EPA SW-846) 5.2.14

6010C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.23

6020A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.24

Titanium tetrachloride (analyze as total 

titanium) 7550-45-0 

9102 (NIOSH) 5.2.61 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 28 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

Analyte CAS RN Method Section 

3520C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.15

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

8321B (EPA SW-846) 5.2.36

TO-10A (EPA ORD) 5.2.44

Triethanolamine (TEA) 102-71-6 

D7599-09 (ASTM) 5.2.74 

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17 

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8270D (EPA SW-846) 5.2.31

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

Trimethyl phosphite 121-45-9 

TO-10A (EPA ORD) 5.2.44

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

1,3,5-Trinitrobenzene (1,3,5-TNB) 

2,4,6-Trinitrotoluene (2,4,6-TNT) 

99-35-4 

118-96-7 

8330B (EPA SW-846) 5.2.37

200.7 (EPA OW) 5.2.1 

200.8 (EPA OW) 5.2.2 

3050B (EPA SW-846) 5.2.14 

6010C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.23 

6020A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.24 

IO-3.1 (EPA ORD) 5.2.40 

IO-3.4 (EPA ORD) 5.2.41 

IO-3.5 (EPA ORD) 5.2.42 

Vanadium pentoxide (analyze as total 

vanadium) 1314-62-1 

9102 (NIOSH) 5.2.61 

3520C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.15

3535A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.16

3541 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.17

3545A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.18

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

8270D (EPA SW-846) 5.2.31

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

VE [phosphonothioic acid, ethyl-, S-(2-

(diethylamino)ethyl) O-ethyl ester] 

VG [phosphonothioic acid, S-(2-

(diethylamino)ethyl) O,O-diethyl ester] 

VM [phosphonothioic acid, methyl-,S-(2-

(diethylamino)ethyl) O-ethyl ester] 

21738-25-0 

78-53-5 

21770-86-5 

TO-10A (EPA ORD) 5.2.44

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

3571 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.20

8270D (EPA SW-846) 5.2.31

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 

VX [O-ethyl-S-(2-

diisopropylaminoethyl)methylphosphonothiolate] 

50782-69-9 

TO-10A (EPA ORD) 5.2.44

3570 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.19 

7580 (EPA SW-846) 5.2.28

8290A Appendix A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.32 White phosphorus 12185-10-3 

7905 (NIOSH) 5.2.59

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 29 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 30 October 2010

Analyte CAS RN Method Section 

The following analytes should be prepared and/or analyzed by the following methods only if problems (e.g., 

insufficient recovery, interferences) occur when using the sample preparation/determinative techniques identified 

for these analytes in Appendix A. 

Allyl alcohol 107-18-6 TO-10A (EPA ORD) 5.2.44

BZ [Quinuclidinyl benzilate] 6581-06-2 8270D (EPA SW-846) 5.2.31 

3-Chloro-1,2-propanediol 96-24-2 TO-15 (EPA ORD) 5.2.45

Chlorosarin 

Chlorosoman 

1445-76-7 

7040-57-5 TO-15 (EPA ORD) 5.2.45

Crimidine 535-89-7 8321B (EPA SW-846) 5.2.36

8270D (EPA SW-846) 5.2.31 Diisopropyl methylphosphonate (DIMP) 1445-75-6 

TO-15 (EPA ORD) 5.2.45 

Dimethylphosphoramidic acid 33876-51-6 8270D (EPA SW-846) 5.2.31

EA2192 [Diisopropylaminoethyl methylthiolophosphonate] 

Ethyl methylphosphonic acid (EMPA) 

73207-98-4 

1832-53-7 

8270D (EPA SW-846) 5.2.31

Hydrogen fluoride 7664-39-3 7906 (NIOSH) 5.2.60

Isopropyl methylphosphonic acid (IMPA) 1832-54-8 8270D (EPA SW-846) 5.2.31

Mercuric chloride (analyze as total mercury) 7470A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.25 

Mercury, Total 

7487-94-7 

7439-97-6 7471B (EPA SW-846) 5.2.26 

Methamidophos 10265-92-6 5600 (NIOSH) 5.2.50 

Methoxyethylmercuric acetate (analyze as 7470A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.25 

total mercury) 151-38-2 

7471B (EPA SW-846) 5.2.26 

1-Methylethyl ester ethylphosphonofluoridic 

acid (GE) 1189-87-3 TO-15 (EPA ORD) 5.2.45

Methylphosphonic acid (MPA) 993-13-5 8270D (EPA SW-846) 5.2.31

Pinacolyl methyl phosphonic acid (PMPA) 616-52-4 8270D (EPA SW-846) 5.2.31

Sarin (GB) 

Soman (GD) 

107-44-8 

96-64-0 TO-15 (EPA ORD) 5.2.45

5030C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.21 

1,4-Thioxane 15980-15-1 5035A (EPA SW-846) 5.2.22 

8260C (EPA SW-846) 5.2.30 

 

Method summaries are listed in order of method selection hierarchy (see Figure 2-1), starting with EPA 

methods, followed by methods from other federal agencies, voluntary consensus standard bodies 

(VCSBs), and literature references. Methods are listed in numerical order under each publisher. Where 

available, a direct link to the full text of the method is provided in the method summary. For additional 

information on preparation procedures and methods available through consensus standards organizations, 

please use the contact information provided in Table 5-2. 

Table 5-2. Sources of Chemical Methods 

Name Publisher Reference

NEMI EPA, USGS http://www.nemi.gov

EPA OW Methods EPA OW http://www.epa.gov/safewater/metho

ds/sourcalt.html

EPA SW-846 Methods EPA OSWER http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer/hazw

aste/test/main.htm

EPA ORD Methods EPA ORD http://www.epa.gov/ttnamti1/
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 31 October 2010

Name Publisher Reference

EPA Air Toxics Methods EPA OAR http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/airtox.h

tml

OSHA Methods OSHA http://www.osha.gov/dts/sltc/method

s/index.html

NIOSH Methods NIOSH http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/nmam/

Standard Methods for the Examination 

of Water and Wastewater (SM), 21st

Edition, 2005*

American Public Health 

Association (APHA), American 

Water Works Association 

(AWWA), and Water 

Environment Federation (WEF)

http://www.standardmethods.org

Annual Book of ASTM Standards* ASTM International http://www.astm.org

GESTIS Substance Database BGIA http://www.dguv.de/bgia/en/gestis/st

offdb/index.jsp

ISO Methods* ISO http://www.iso.org

Official Methods of Analysis of AOAC 

International*

AOAC International http://www.aoac.org

Analyst Royal Society of Chemistry http://www.rsc.org/Publishing/Journ

als/AN/

Analytical Letters* Taylor & Francis http://www.informaworld.com/smpp/t

itle~content=t713597227

Journal of Chromatography A* Elsevier Science Publishers http://www.elsevier.com/

Journal of Forensic Sciences* ASTM International http://www.astm.org

Chromatographia Vieweg+Teubner http://www.chromatographia.de/

EPA Water Contamination Information 

Tool (WCIT) 

EPA OW Water Security 

Division (WSD) 

http://www.epa.gov/wcit 

Analytical Chemistry American Chemical Society 

(ACS) 

pubs.acs.org/journal/anacham 

Journal of Agricultural and Food 

Chemistry 

ACS pubs.acs.org/journal/jafcau 

* Subscription and/or purchase required.

5.1.2 General QC Guidelines for Chemical Methods 

Having analytical data of appropriate quality requires that laboratories: (1) conduct the necessary QC 

activities to ensure that measurement systems are in control and operating correctly; (2) properly 

document results of the analyses; and (3) properly document measurement system evaluation of the 

analysis-specific QC, including corrective actions. In addition to the laboratories being capable of 

generating accurate and precise data during site remediation, they must be able to deliver results in a 

timely and efficient manner. Therefore, laboratories must be prepared with calibrated instruments, the 

proper standards, standard analytical procedures, standard operating procedures, and qualified and trained 

staff. Moreover, laboratories also must be capable of providing rapid turnaround of sample analyses and 

data reporting. 

The level or amount of QC needed during sample analysis and reporting depends on the intended purpose 

of the data that are generated (e.g., the decision(s) to be made). The specific needs for data generation 

should be identified. QC requirements and data quality objectives should be derived based on those 
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

needs, and should be applied consistently across laboratories when multiple laboratories are used. For 

almost all of the chemical warfare agents, most laboratories will not have access to analytical standards 

for calibration and QC. Use of these agents is strictly controlled by the DoD and access is limited. For 

information regarding laboratory analysis of samples containing CWAs or laboratory requirements to 

possess and use ultra-dilute agent standards, please contact Terry Smith, EPA's Office of Emergency 

Management, at (202) 564-2908. 

A minimum set of analytical QC procedures should be planned, documented, and conducted for all 

chemical testing. Some method-specific QC requirements are described in many of the individual 

methods that are cited in this document and will be referenced in any SAPs developed to address specific 

analytes and sample types of concern. Individual methods, sampling and analysis protocols, or 

contractual statements of work should also be consulted to determine if any additional QC might be 

needed. Analytical QC requirements generally consist of analysis of laboratory control samples to 

document whether the analytical system is in control; matrix spikes to identify and quantify measurement 

system accuracy for the media of concern and, at the levels of concern, various blanks as a measure of 

freedom from contamination; as well as matrix spike duplicates or sample replicates to assess data 

precision. 

In general, for measurement of chemical analytes, appropriate QC includes an initial demonstration of 

measurement system capability, as well as ongoing analysis of standards and other samples to ensure the 

continued reliability of the analytical results. Examples of appropriate QC include: 

• Demonstration that the measurement system is operating properly: 

< Initial calibration; and 

< Method blanks. 

• Demonstration of analytical method suitability for intended use: 

< Detection and quantitation limits; 

< Precision and recovery (verify measurement system has adequate accuracy); and 

< Analyte/matrix/level of concern-specific QC samples (verify that measurement system has 

adequate sensitivity at levels of concern). 

• Demonstration of continued analytical method reliability: 

< Matrix spike/matrix spike duplicates (MS/MSDs) (recovery and precision); 

< QC samples (system accuracy and sensitivity at levels of concern); 

< Surrogate spikes (where appropriate); 

< Continuing calibration verification; and 

< Method blanks. 

QC tests should be consistent with EPA’s Good Laboratory Practice Standards 

(http://www.epa.gov/oecaerth/monitoring/programs/fifra/glp.html) and be run as frequently as necessary 

to ensure the reliability of analytical results. Additional guidance can be found at: 

www.epa.gov/quality/qatools.html; in Chapter 1 of EPA SW-846 Hazardous Test Methods 

(http://www.epa.gov/epawaste/hazard/testmethods/sw846/pdfs/chap1.pdf); and in EPA's Drinking Water 

Laboratory Certification Manual 

(http://www.epa.gov/ogwdw000/methods/pdfs/manual_labcertification.pdf). As with the identification of 

needed QC samples, the frequency of QC sampling should be established based on an evaluation of data 

quality objectives. The type and frequency of QC tests can be refined over time. 

Ensuring data quality also requires that laboratory results are properly assessed and documented. The 

results of the data quality assessment are transmitted to decision makers. This evaluation is as important 

as the data for ensuring informed and effective decisions. While some degree of data evaluation is 

necessary in order to be able to confirm data quality, 100% verification and/or validation is neither 

necessary nor conducive to efficient decision making in emergency situations. The level of such reviews 

should be determined based on the specific situation being assessed and on the corresponding data quality 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 32 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

objectives. In every case, the levels of QC and data review necessary to support decision making should 

be determined as much in advance of data collection as possible. 

Please note: The appropriate point of contact identified in Section 4 should be consulted regarding 

appropriate quality assurance (QA) and QC procedures prior to sample analysis. These contacts will 

consult with the EPA Environmental Response Laboratory Network (ERLN) coordinator responsible for 

laboratory activities during the specific event to ensure QA/QC procedures are performed consistently 

across laboratories. EPA program offices will be responsible for ensuring that the QA/QC practices are 

implemented. 

5.1.3 Safety and Waste Management 

It is imperative that safety precautions are used during collection, processing, and analysis of 

environmental samples. Laboratories should have a documented health and safety plan for handling 

samples that may contain the target CBR contaminants. Laboratory staff should be trained in, and need to 

implement, the safety procedures included in the plan. In addition, many of the methods summarized or 

cited in Section 5.2 contain some specific requirements, guidelines, or information regarding safety 

precautions that should be followed when handling or processing environmental samples and reagents. 

These methods also provide information regarding waste management. Other resources that can be 

consulted for additional information include the following: 

• CDC – Title 42 of the Code of Federal Regulations part 72 (42 CFR 72). Interstate Shipment of 

Etiologic Agents. 

• CDC – 42 CFR part 73. Select Agents and Toxins. 

• Department of Transportation (DOT) – 49 CFR part 172. Hazardous Materials Table, Special 

Provisions, Hazardous Materials Communications, Emergency Response Information, and Training 

Requirements. 

• EPA – 40 CFR part 260. Hazardous Waste Management System: General. 

• EPA – 40 CFR part 270. EPA Administered Permit Programs: The Hazardous Waste Permit 

Program. 

• OSHA – 29 CFR part 1910.1450. Occupational Exposure to Hazardous Chemicals in Laboratories. 

• OSHA – 29 CFR part 1910.120. Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response. 

Please note that the Electronic Code of Federal Regulations (e-CFR) is available at 

http://ecfr.gpoaccess.gov/. 

5.2 Method Summaries 

Summaries for the analytical methods listed in Appendix A are provided in Sections 5.2.1 through 5.2.85. 

These sections contain summary information only, extracted from the selected methods. Each method 

summary contains a table identifying the contaminants in Appendix A to which the method applies, a 

brief description of the analytical method, and a link to, or source for, obtaining a full version of the 

method. The full version of the method should be consulted prior to sample analysis. 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 33 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

5.2.1 EPA Method 200.7: Determination of Metals and Trace Elements in Waters and 

Wastes by Inductively Coupled Plasma-Atomic Emission Spectrometry 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Ammonium metavanadate (analyze as total vanadium) 7803-55-6 

Arsenic, Total 7440-38-2 

Arsenic trioxide (analyze as total arsenic) 1327-53-3 

Arsine (analyze as total arsenic in non-air samples) 7784-42-1

Calcium arsenate (analyze as total arsenic) 7778-44-1 

2-Chlorovinylarsonous acid (2-CVAA) 85090-33-1 

Lead arsenate (analyze as total arsenic) 7645-25-2 

Lewisite 1 (L-1) [2-chlorovinyldichloroarsine] (analyze as total arsenic) 541-25-3 

Lewisite 2 (L-2) [bis(2-chlorovinyl)chloroarsine] (analyze as total arsenic) 40334-69-8 

Lewisite 3 (L-3) [tris(2-chlorovinyl)arsine] (analyze as total arsenic) 40334-70-1 

Lewisite oxide 1306-02-1 

Osmium tetroxide (analyze as total osmium) 20816-12-0 

Sodium arsenite (analyze as total arsenic) 7784-46-5 

Thallium sulfate (analyze as total thallium) 10031-59-1 

Vanadium pentoxide (analyze as total vanadium) 1314-62-1 

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation, and analyte determination and measurement 

Sample Preparation Technique: Acid digestion

Determinative Technique: Inductively Coupled Plasma-Atomic Emission Spectrometry (ICP-AES) 

Method Developed for: Determination of metals in solution. This method is a consolidation of existing 

methods for water, wastewater, and solid wastes. 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and analysis of aqueous liquid and drinking 

water samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: Method detection limits (MDLs) in aqueous samples have been found to 

be 0.008 mg/L for arsenic, 0.003 mg/L for vanadium, and 0.001 mg/L for thallium. 

Description of Method: This method will determine metal-containing compounds only as the total metal 

(e.g., total arsenic) in aqueous samples. An aliquot of a well-mixed, homogeneous sample is accurately 

weighed or measured for sample processing. For total recoverable analysis of a sample containing 

undissolved material, analytes are first solubilized by gentle refluxing with nitric and hydrochloric acids. 

After cooling, the sample is made up to volume, mixed, and centrifuged or allowed to settle overnight 

prior to analysis. For determination of dissolved analytes in a filtered aqueous sample aliquot, or for the 

“direct analysis” total recoverable determination of analytes in drinking water where sample turbidity is < 

1 nephelometric turbidity units (NTU), the sample is made ready for analysis by the addition of nitric 

acid, and then diluted to a predetermined volume and mixed before analysis. The prepared sample is 

analyzed using ICP-AES. Specific analytes targeted by Method 200.7 are listed in Section 1.1 of the 

method. 

Special Considerations: Laboratory testing is currently underway for speciation of lewisite 1 using GCMS techniques. Users should consult with the appropriate point of contact listed in Section 4.0 regarding 

use of graphite furnace atomic absorption spectrophotometry (GFAA) as a back-up or for additional 

confirmatory analyses. 

Source: EPA. 1994. “Method 200.7: Determination of Metals and Trace Elements in Water and Wastes 

by Inductively Coupled Plasma-Atomic Emission Spectrometry,” Revision 4.4. 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA-200.7.pdf

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 34 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

5.2.2 EPA Method 200.8: Determination of Trace Elements in Waters and Wastes by 

Inductively Coupled Plasma-Mass Spectrometry 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Ammonium metavanadate (analyze as total vanadium) 7803-55-6 

Arsenic, Total 7440-38-2 

Arsenic trioxide (analyze as total arsenic) 1327-53-3 

Arsine (analyze as total arsenic in non-air samples) 7784-42-1

Calcium arsenate (analyze as total arsenic) 7778-44-1 

2-Chlorovinylarsonous acid (2-CVAA) 85090-33-1 

Lead arsenate (analyze as total arsenic) 7645-25-2 

Lewisite 1 (L-1) [2-chlorovinyldichloroarsine] (analyze as total arsenic) 541-25-3 

Lewisite 2 (L-2) [bis(2-chlorovinyl)chloroarsine] (analyze as total arsenic) 40334-69-8 

Lewisite 3 (L-3) [tris(2-chlorovinyl)arsine] (analyze as total arsenic) 40334-70-1 

Lewisite oxide 1306-02-1 

Osmium tetroxide (analyze as total osmium) 20816-12-0 

Sodium arsenite (analyze as total arsenic) 7784-46-5 

Thallium sulfate (analyze as total thallium) 10031-59-1 

Vanadium pentoxide (analyze as total vanadium) 1314-62-1 

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation, and analyte determination and measurement

Sample Preparation Technique: Acid digestion

Determinative Technique: Inductively Coupled Plasma-Mass Spectrometry (ICP-MS) 

Method Developed for: Dissolved and total elements in ground water, surface water, drinking water, 

wastewater, sludges, and soils. 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and analysis of aqueous liquid and drinking 

water samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: MDLs for arsenic in aqueous samples have been found to be 1.4 μg/L in 

scanning mode, and 0.4 μg/L in selected ion monitoring mode. The recommended calibration range is 10 

to 200 μg/L. 

Description of Method: This method will determine metal-containing compounds only as the total metal 

(e.g., total arsenic). An aliquot of a well-mixed, homogeneous sample is accurately weighed or measured 

for sample processing. For total recoverable analysis of a sample containing undissolved material, 

analytes are first solubilized by gentle refluxing with nitric and hydrochloric acids. After cooling, the 

sample is made up to volume, mixed, and centrifuged or allowed to settle overnight prior to analysis. For 

determination of dissolved analytes in a filtered aqueous sample aliquot, or for the “direct analysis” total 

recoverable determination of analytes in drinking water where sample turbidity is < 1 NTU, the sample is 

made ready for analysis by the addition of nitric acid, and then diluted to a predetermined volume and 

mixed before analysis. The prepared sample is analyzed using ICP-MS. Specific analytes targeted by 

Method 200.8 are listed in Section 1.1 of the method. 

Special Considerations: Laboratory testing is currently underway for speciation of lewisite 1 using GCMS techniques. Users should consult with the appropriate point of contact listed in Section 4.0 regarding 

use of graphite furnace atomic absorption spectrophotometry (GFAA) as a back-up or for additional 

confirmatory analyses. 

Source: EPA. 1994. “Method 200.8: Determination of Trace Elements in Waters and Wastes by 

Inductively Coupled Plasma-Mass Spectrometry,” Revision 5.4. http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA200.8.pdf

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 35 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

5.2.3 EPA Method 245.1: Determination of Mercury in Water by Cold Vapor Atomic 

Absorption Spectrometry (CVAA) 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Mercuric chloride (analyze as total mercury) 7487-94-7 

Mercury, Total 7439-97-6

Methoxyethylmercuric acetate (analyze as total mercury) 151-38-2 

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation, and analyte determination and measurement

Sample Preparation Technique: Acid digestion 

Determinative Technique: Cold vapor atomic absorption (CVAA) 

Method Developed for: Mercury in surface waters. It may be applicable to saline waters, wastewaters, 

effluents, and domestic sewages providing potential interferences are not present.

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and analysis of drinking water samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: Applicable concentration range is 0.2 to 10.0 μg Hg/L. The detection limit 

for this method is 0.2 μg Hg/L. 

Description of Method: This method will determine mercuric chloride and methoxyethylmercuric 

acetate as total mercury. If dissolved mercury is targeted, the sample is filtered prior to acidification. To 

detect total mercury (inorganic and organic mercury), the sample is treated with potassium permanganate 

and potassium persulfate to oxidize organic mercury compounds prior to analysis. Inorganic mercury is 

reduced to the elemental state (using stannous chloride) and aerated from solution. The mercury vapor 

passes through a cell positioned in the light path of a CVAA spectrophotometer. The concentration of 

mercury is measured using the CVAA spectrophotometer. 

Source: EPA. 1994. “Method 245.1: Determination of Mercury in Water by Cold Vapor Atomic 

Absorption Spectrometry CVAA).” http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA-245.1.pdf

5.2.4 EPA Method 300.1, Revision 1.0: Determination of Inorganic Anions in Drinking 

Water by Ion Chromatography 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Fluoride 16984-48-8 

Fluoroacetic acid and fluoroacetate salts NA

Methyl fluoroacetate 453-18-9 

Sodium azide (analyze as azide ion) 26628-22-8 

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation, and analyte determination and measurement 

Sample Preparation Technique: For fluoride, use direct injection. For fluoroacetic acid, fluoroacetate 

salts, and methyl fluoroacetate, use ultrasonic extraction by Analytical Letters, 1994, 27(14): 2703-2718 

(solid and wipe samples), and water extraction by NIOSH Method S301-1 (air samples). For sodium 

azide, use water extraction, filtration, and acidification steps from the Journal of Forensic Science, 1998. 

43(1):200-202 (solid samples), and filtration and acidification steps from this journal (aqueous liquid and 

drinking water samples). 

Determinative Technique: Ion chromatography (IC) with conductivity detection 

Method Developed for: Inorganic anions in reagent water, surface water, ground water, and finished 

drinking water 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 36 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and analysis of aqueous liquid and drinking 

water samples for fluoride, fluoroacetic acid, fluoroacetate salts, and methyl fluoroacetate. It also should 

be used for analysis of solid, air, and/or wipe samples for fluoroacetic acid, fluoroacetate salts, methyl 

fluoroacetate, and sodium azide when appropriate sample preparation techniques have been applied. 

Detection and Quantitation: The detection limit for fluoride in reagent water is 0.009 mg/L. The MDL 

varies depending upon the nature of the sample and the specific instrumentation employed. The estimated 

calibration range should not extend over more than 2 orders of magnitude in concentration over the 

expected concentration range of the samples. 

Description of Method: This method was developed for analysis of aqueous samples, and can be 

adapted for analysis of prepared solid and air samples when appropriate sample preparation techniques 

have been applied (see Appendix A). A small volume of an aqueous liquid sample (10 μL or 50 μL) is 

introduced into an ion chromatograph. The volume selected depends on the concentration of 

fluoroacetate ion in the sample. The anions of interest are separated and measured, using a system 

comprising a guard column, analytical column, suppressor device, and conductivity detector. The 

separator columns and guard columns, as well as eluent conditions, are identical. To achieve comparable 

detection limits, an ion chromatographic system must use suppressed conductivity detection, be properly 

maintained, and be capable of yielding a baseline with no more than 5 nS noise/drift per minute of 

monitored response over the background conductivity. 

Special Considerations: For sodium azide, if analyses are problematic, refer to column manufacturer 

for alternate conditions. 

Source: EPA. 1997. “Method 300.1: Determination of Inorganic Anions in Drinking Water by Ion 

Chromatography,” Revision 1.0. http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA-300.1.pdf

 

5.2.5 EPA Method 335.4: Determination of Total Cyanide by Semi-Automated 

Colorimetry 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Cyanide, Total 57-12-5

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation, and analyte determination and measurement 

Sample Preparation Technique: Reflux-distillation

Determinative Technique: Visible spectrophotometry 

Method Developed for: Cyanide in drinking, ground, surface, and saline waters, and domestic and 

industrial wastes 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and analysis of drinking water samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: The applicable range is 5 to 500 μg/L. 

Description of Method: Cyanide is released from cyanide complexes as hydrocyanic acid by manual 

reflux-distillation, and absorbed in a scrubber containing sodium hydroxide solution. The cyanide ion in 

the absorbing solution is converted to cyanogen chloride by reaction with chloramine-T, which 

subsequently reacts with pyridine and barbituric acid to give a red-colored complex. 

Special Considerations: Some interferences include aldehydes, nitrate-nitrite, and oxidizing agents, 

such as chlorine, thiocyanate, thiosulfate, and sulfide. These interferences can be eliminated or reduced 

by distillation.

 

Source: EPA. 1993. “Method 335.4: Determination of Total Cyanide by Semi-Automated Colorimetry,” 

Revision 1.0. http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA-335.4.pdf

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 37 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

5.2.6 EPA Method 350.1: Nitrogen, Ammonia (Colorimetric, Automated Phenate) 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Ammonia 7664-41-7

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation, and analyte determination and measurement 

Sample Preparation Technique: Distillation

Determinative Technique: Visible spectrophotometry 

Method Developed for: Ammonia in drinking, ground, surface, and saline waters, and domestic and 

industrial wastes 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and analysis of drinking water samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: The working range for ammonia is 0.01 to 2.0 mg/L. 

Description of Method: This method identifies and determines the concentration of ammonia in 

drinking water samples by spectrophotometry. Samples are buffered at a pH of 9.5 with borate buffer to 

decrease hydrolysis of cyanates and organic nitrogen compounds, and are distilled into a solution of boric 

acid. Alkaline phenol and hypochlorite react with ammonia to form indophenol blue that is proportional 

to the ammonia concentration. The blue color formed is intensified with sodium nitroprusside and 

measured spectrophotometrically. 

Special Considerations: Reduced volume distillation techniques, such as midi-distillation or microdistillation, can be used in place of traditional macro-distillation techniques. 

Source: EPA. 1993. “Method 350.1: Nitrogen, Ammonia (Colorimetric, Automated Phenate),” Revision 

2.0. http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA-350.1.pdf

5.2.7 EPA Method 524.2: Measurement of Purgeable Organic Compounds in Water by 

Capillary Column Gas Chromatography / Mass Spectrometry 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Acrylonitrile 107-13-1 

Carbon disulfide 75-15-0

1,2-Dichloroethane 107-06-2

Methyl acrylonitrile 126-98-7 

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation, and analyte determination and measurement 

Sample Preparation Technique: Purge-and-trap

Determinative Technique: GC-MS 

Method Developed for: Purgeable volatile organic compounds (VOCs) in surface water, ground water, 

and drinking water in any stage of treatment 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and analysis of drinking water samples for 

carbon disulfide and 1,2-dichloroethane, and preparation and analysis of drinking and aqueous/liquid 

samples for acrylonitrile and methyl acrylonitrile. 

Detection and Quantitation: Detection levels for acrylonitrile, carbon disulfide, 1,2-dichloroethane, and 

methyl acrylonitrile in reagent water have been found to be 0.22, 0.093, 0.02, and 0.11 μg/L, respectively. 

The applicable concentration range of this method is primarily column and matrix dependent, and is 

approximately 0.02 to 200 μg/L when a wide-bore thick-film capillary column is used. Narrow-bore thinfilm columns may have a lower capacity, which limits the range to approximately 0.02 to 20 μg/L. 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 38 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 39 October 2010

Description of Method: VOCs and surrogates with low water solubility are extracted (purged) from the 

sample matrix by bubbling an inert gas through the aqueous sample. Purged sample components are 

trapped in a tube containing suitable sorbent materials. When purging is complete, the sorbent tube is 

heated and backflushed with helium to desorb the trapped sample components into a capillary gas 

chromatography (GC) column interfaced to a mass spectrometer (MS). The column is temperature 

programmed to facilitate the separation of the method analytes, which are then detected with the MS. 

Specific analytes targeted by Method 524.2 are listed in Section 1.1 of the method. 

Special Considerations: The most recent version of this method (Method 524.3) requires 

instrumentation, such as cryogenic auto samplers, which are not currently in common use. If laboratory 

use of this equipment increases, Method 524.3 may be considered for SAM applications. 

Source: EPA. 1992. “Method 524.2: Measurement of Purgeable Organic Compounds in Water by 

Capillary Column Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry,” Revision 4.0. 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA-524.2.pdf

5.2.8 EPA Method 525.2: Determination of Organic Compounds in Drinking Water by 

Liquid-Solid Extraction and Capillary Column Gas Chromatography / Mass 

Spectrometry 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Dichlorvos 62-73-7

Disulfoton 298-04-4 

Disulfoton sulfone oxon1 2496-91-5 

Disulfoton sulfoxide 2497-07-6 

Disulfoton sulfoxide oxon1 2496-92-6 

Fenamiphos 22224-92-6

Mevinphos 7786-34-7 1

 If problems occur when using this method for measurement of oxon compounds, analysts should consider use of 

procedures included in "Oxidation of selected organophosphate pesticides during chlorination of simulated drinking 

water." Water Research. 2009. 43(2): 522–534. http://www.sciencedirect.com/science/journal/00431354

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation, and analyte determination and measurement

Sample Preparation Technique: Liquid-solid extraction (LSE) or solid-phase extraction (SPE)

Determinative Technique: GC-MS 

Method Developed for: Organic compounds in finished drinking water, source water, or drinking water 

in any treatment stage 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and analysis of aqueous liquid and/or 

drinking water samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: The applicable concentration range for most analytes is 0.1 to 10 μg/L. 

Description of Method: Organic compounds, internal standards, and surrogates are extracted from a 

water sample by passing 1 L of sample through a cartridge or disk containing a solid matrix with 

chemically bonded C18 organic phase (LSE or SPE). The organic compounds are eluted from the LSE 

(SPE) cartridge or disk with small quantities of ethyl acetate followed by methylene chloride. The 

resulting extract is concentrated further by evaporation of some of the solvent. Sample components are 

separated, identified, and measured by injecting an aliquot of the concentrated extract into a high 

resolution fused silica capillary column of a GC-MS system. Specific analytes targeted by Method 525.2 

are listed in Section 1.1 of the method. 
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

Special Considerations: Refer to footnote provided in analyte table above for special considerations 

that should be applied when measuring specific analytes. SPE using C18 resin may not work for certain 

compounds having high water solubility. In these cases, other sample preparation techniques or different 

SPE resins may be required. 

Source: EPA. 1995. “Method 525.2: Determination of Organic Compounds in Drinking Water by 

Liquid-Solid Extraction and Capillary Column Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry,” Revision 2.0. 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA-525.2.pdf

5.2.9 EPA Method 531.2: Measurement of N-Methylcarbamoyloximes and NMethylcarbamates in Water by Direct Aqueous Injection HPLC with Postcolumn 

Derivatization 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Aldicarb (Temik) 116-06-3

Aldicarb sulfone 1646-88-4 

Aldicarb sulfoxide 1646-87-3 

Carbofuran (Furadan) 1563-66-2

Methomyl 16752-77-5 

Oxamyl 23135-22-0

Thiofanox 39196-18-4 

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation, and analyte determination and measurement 

Sample Preparation Technique: Direct injection

Determinative Technique: HPLC 

Method Developed for: N-methylcarbamoyloximes and N-methylcarbamates in finished drinking 

water 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and analysis of drinking water samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: Detection limits range from 0.026 to 0.115 μg/L. The concentration 

range for target analytes in this method was evaluated between 0.2 μg/L and 10 μg/L.

Description of Method: An aliquot of sample is measured in a volumetric flask. Samples are preserved, 

spiked with appropriate surrogates and then filtered. Analytes are chromatographically separated by 

injecting a sample aliquot (up to 1000 μL) into a HPLC system equipped with a reverse phase (C18) 

column. After elution from the column, the analytes are hydrolyzed in a post column reaction to form 

methylamine, which is in turn reacted to form a fluorescent isoindole that is detected by a fluorescence 

(FL) detector. Analytes also are quantitated using the external standard technique. 

Source: EPA. 2001. “Method 531.2: Measurement of N-Methylcarbamoyloximes and NMethylcarbamates in Water by Direct Aqueous Injection HPLC with Postcolumn Derivatization,” 

Revision 1.0. http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA-531.2.pdf

5.2.10 EPA Method 538: Determination of Selected Organic Contaminants in Drinking 

Water by Direct Aqueous Injection-Liquid Chromatography/Tandem Mass 

Spectrometry (DAI-LC/MS/MS) 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Acephate 30560-19-1 

Diisopropyl methylphosphonate (DIMP) 1445-75-6 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 40 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 41 October 2010

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Methamidophos 10265-92-6 

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation, and analyte determination and measurement 

Sample Preparation Technique: Direct injection 

Determinative Technique: Liquid Chromatography Tandem Mass Spectrometry (LC-MS-MS) 

Method Developed for: Acephate, DIMP and methamidophos in drinking water samples 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and analysis of drinking water samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: The MDLs for acephate, DIMP, and methamidophos in reagent water were 

calculated to be 0.019, 0.014 and 0.017 μg/L, respectively. The Lowest Common Minimum Reporting 

Levels (LCMRLs) in reagent water were calculated to be 0.044, 0.022 and 0.032 μg/L, respectively 

Description of Method: A 40-mL water sample is collected in a bottle containing sodium omadine and 

ammonium acetate. An aliquot of the sample is placed in an autosampler vial and internal standards are 

added. A 50-μL or larger injection is made into a liquid chromatograph (LC) equipped with a C18 

column that is interfaced to an MS-MS operated in the electrospray ionization (ESI) mode. The analytes 

are separated and identified by comparing the acquired mass spectra and retention times to reference 

spectra and retention times for calibration standards acquired under identical LC-MS-MS conditions. The 

concentration of each analyte is determined by internal standard calibration using procedural standards. 

Source: EPA. 2009. “Method 538: Determination of Selected Organic Contaminants in Drinking Water 

by Direct Aqueous Injection-Liquid Chromatography/Tandem Mass Spectrometry (DAI-LC/MS/MS),” 

Revision 1.0. http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA-538.pdf

5.2.11 EPA Method 549.2: Determination of Diquat and Paraquat in Drinking Water by 

Liquid-Solid Extraction and High Performance Liquid Chromatography with 

Ultraviolet Detection 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Paraquat 4685-14-7

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation, and analyte determination and measurement 

Sample Preparation Technique: LSE or SPE

Determinative Technique: HPLC-UV 

Method Developed for: Diquat and paraquat in drinking water sources and finished drinking water 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and analysis of aqueous liquid and drinking 

water samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: MDL for paraquat is 0.68 μg/L. The analytical range depends on the 

sample matrix and the instrumentation used. 

Description of Method: A 250-mL sample is extracted using a C8 LSE cartridge or a C8 disk that has 

been specially prepared for the reversed-phase, ion-pair mode. The LSE disk or cartridge is eluted with 

acidic aqueous solvent to yield the eluate/extract. An ion-pair reagent is added to the eluate/extract. The 

concentrations of paraquat in the eluate/extract are measured using a HPLC system equipped with an 

ultraviolet (UV) absorbance detector. A photodiode array detector is used to provide simultaneous 

detection and confirmation of the method analytes. 

Source: EPA. 1997. “Method 549.2: Determination of Diquat and Paraquat in Drinking Water by 

Liquid-Solid Extraction and High Performance Liquid Chromatography with Ultraviolet Detection,” 

Revision 1.0. http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA-549.2.pdf
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

5.2.12 EPA Method 551.1: Determination of Chlorination Disinfection Byproducts, 

Chlorinated Solvents, and Halogenated Pesticides/Herbicides in Drinking Water by 

Liquid-Liquid Extraction and Gas Chromatography with Electron-Capture 

Detection 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Chloropicrin 76-06-2

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation, and analyte determination and measurement 

Sample Preparation Technique: Solvent extraction 

Determinative Technique: Gas chromatography-electron capture detector (GC-ECD) 

Method Developed for: Chlorination disinfection byproducts, chlorinated solvents, and halogenated 

pesticides/herbicides in finished drinking water, drinking water during intermediate stages of treatment, 

and raw source water 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and analysis of aqueous liquid and drinking 

water samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: The estimated detection limit (EDL) using MTBE and ammonium 

chloride-preserved reagent water on a 100% dimethylpolysiloxane (DB-1) column has been found to be 

0.014 μg/L. 

Description of Method: This is a GC-ECD method applicable to the determination of halogenated 

analytes in finished drinking water, drinking water during intermediate stages of treatment, and raw 

source water. A 50-mL sample aliquot is extracted with 3 mL of methyl tert-butyl ether (MTBE) or 5 mL 

of pentane. Two μL of the extract is then injected into a GC equipped with a fused silica capillary 

column and linearized ECD for separation and analysis. This liquid/liquid extraction technique efficiently 

extracts a wide boiling range of non-polar and polar organic components of the sample. Thus, 

confirmation is quite important, particularly at lower analyte concentrations. A confirmatory column is 

suggested for this purpose. 

Special Considerations: The presence of chloropicrin should be confirmed by either a secondary GC 

column or by an MS. 

Source: EPA. 1995. “Method 551.1: Determination of Chlorination Disinfection Byproducts, 

Chlorinated Solvents, and Halogenated Pesticides/Herbicides in Drinking Water by Liquid-Liquid 

Extraction and Gas Chromatography with Electron-Capture Detection,” Revision 1.0.

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA-551.1.pdf

5.2.13 EPA Method 556.1: Determination of Carbonyl Compounds in Drinking Water by 

Fast Gas Chromatography 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Formaldehyde 50-00-0 

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation, and analyte determination and measurement 

Sample Preparation Technique: Liquid-liquid extraction with hexane 

Determinative Technique: Fast gas chromatography with electron capture detection (FGC-ECD) 

Method Developed for: Formaldehyde in drinking water samples 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and analysis of drinking water samples. 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 42 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

Detection and Quantitation: MDLs for formaldehyde in reagent water were calculated as 0.09 and 0.08 

μg/L for primary and secondary columns, respectively. The applicable concentration range is 

approximately 5 to 40 μg/L. 

Description of Method: A 20-mL volume of water sample is adjusted to pH 4 with potassium hydrogen 

phthalate (KHP) and the analytes are derivatized at 35oC for 2 hours with 15 mg of O- 

(2,3,4,5,6-pentafluorobenzyl)-hydroxylamine (PFBHA) reagent. The oxime derivatives are extracted 

from the water with 4 mL of hexane. The extract is processed through an acidic wash step, and analyzed 

by FGC-ECD. The target analytes are identified and quantified by comparison to a procedural standard. 

Two chromatographic peaks will be observed for many of the target analytes. Both (E) and (Z) isomers 

are formed for carbonyl compounds that are asymmetrical, and that are not sterically hindered. The (E) 

and (Z) isomers may not be chromatographically resolved in a few cases. Compounds with two carbonyl 

groups, such as glyoxal and methyl glyoxal, can produce even more isomers. Chromatographic peaks 

used for analyte identification are provided in Section 17, Table 1 and Figure 1 of the method. 

Special Considerations: All results should be confirmed on a second, dissimilar capillary GC column. 

Source: EPA. 1999. “Method 556.1: Determination of Carbonyl Compounds in Drinking Water by Fast 

Gas Chromatography,” Revision 1.0. http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA-556.1.pdf

5.2.14 EPA Method 3050B (SW-846): Acid Digestion of Sediments, Sludges, and Soils 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Ammonium metavanadate (analyze as total vanadium) 7803-55-6 

Arsenic, Total 7440-38-2 

Arsenic trioxide (analyze as total arsenic) 1327-53-3 

Arsine (analyze as total arsenic in non-air samples) 7784-42-1

Calcium arsenate (analyze as total arsenic) 7778-44-1 

2-Chlorovinylarsonous acid (2-CVAA) 85090-33-1 

Lead arsenate (analyze as total arsenic) 7645-25-2 

Lewisite 1 (L-1) [2-chlorovinyldichloroarsine] (analyze as total arsenic) 541-25-3 

Lewisite 2 (L-2) [bis(2-chlorovinyl)chloroarsine] (analyze as total arsenic) 40334-69-8 

Lewisite 3 (L-3) [tris(2-chlorovinyl)arsine] (analyze as total arsenic) 40334-70-1 

Lewisite oxide 1306-02-1 

Osmium tetroxide (analyze as total osmium) 20816-12-0

Sodium arsenite (analyze as total arsenic) 7784-46-5 

Thallium sulfate (analyze as total thallium) 10031-59-1 

Titanium tetrachloride (analyze as total titanium) 7550-45-0

Vanadium pentoxide (analyze as total vanadium) 1314-62-1 

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation 

Sample Preparation Technique: Acid digestion 

Determinative Technique: ICP-AES / ICP-MS 

Determinative Method: EPA SW-846 Method 6010C or Method 6020A. Refer to Appendix A for 

which of these determinative methods should be used for a particular analyte. 

Method Developed for: Metals in sediments, sludges, and soil samples 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation of solid samples. 

Description of Method: This method is used to prepare samples for the determination of arsenic 

trioxide, arsine, lewisite, lewisite degradation products, calcium and lead arsenate, and sodium arsenite as 

total arsenic; thallium sulfate as total thallium; titanium tetrachloride as titanium; osmium tetroxide as 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 43 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

osmium; and ammonium metavanadate and vanadium pentoxide as total vanadium. A 1-g to 2-g sample 

is digested with nitric acid and hydrogen peroxide. Sample volumes are reduced, then brought up to a 

final volume of 100 mL. Samples are analyzed for total arsenic, total thallium, total titanium, or total 

vanadium by Method 6010C or 6020A (SW-846); use Method 6010C (SW-846) for total osmium; use 

Method 7010 (SW-846) for arsine. 

Special Considerations: Concerns have been raised regarding the use of nitric acid when analyzing 

samples for osmium tetroxide; hydrochloric acid should be considered and evaluated as a possible 

alternative. 

Source: EPA. 1996. “Method 3050B (SW-846): Acid Digestion of Sediments, Sludges, and Soils,” 

Revision 2. http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA-3050b.pdf

5.2.15 EPA Method 3520C (SW-846): Continuous Liquid-Liquid Extraction 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Brodifacoum 56073-10-0 

Bromadiolone 28772-56-7

BZ [Quinuclidinyl benzilate] 6581-06-2 

Carfentanil 59708-52-0 

Chlorfenvinphos 470-90-6 

3-Chloro-1,2-propanediol 96-24-2 

Chlorosarin 1445-76-7

Chlorosoman 7040-57-5

Chlorpyrifos 2921-88-2 

Chlorpyrifos oxon 5598-15-2 

Cyclohexyl sarin (GF) 329-99-7

Diesel range organics NA

Diphacinone 82-66-6 

N-Ethyldiethanolamine (EDEA) 139-87-7 

Fenamiphos 22224-92-6

Fentanyl 437-38-7 

Methyl hydrazine 60-34-4

N-Methyldiethanolamine (MDEA) 105-59-9 

1-Methylethyl ester ethylphosphonofluoridic acid (GE) 1189-87-3 

Mustard, nitrogen (HN-1) [bis(2-chloroethyl)ethylamine] 538-07-8 

Mustard, nitrogen (HN-2) [2,2’-dichloro-Nmethyldiethylamine N,N-bis(2-chloroethyl)methylamine] 51-75-2

Mustard, nitrogen (HN-3) [tris(2-chloroethyl)amine] 555-77-1 

Paraoxon 311-45-5 

Parathion 56-38-2 

Phosphamidon 13171-21-6 

R 33 (VR) [methylphosphonothioic acid, S-[2-

(diethylamino)ethyl] O-2-methylpropyl ester] 159939-87-4 

Tetramethylenedisulfotetramine 80-12-6

Thiofanox 39196-18-4 

Triethanolamine (TEA) 102-71-6 

VE [phosphonothioic acid, ethyl-, S-(2-

(diethylamino)ethyl) O-ethyl ester] 21738-25-0

VG [phosphonothioic acid, S-(2-(diethylamino)ethyl) 

O,O-diethyl ester] 78-53-5

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 44 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 45 October 2010

Analyte(s) CAS RN

VM [phosphonothioic acid, methyl-, S-(2-

(diethylamino)ethyl) O-ethyl ester] 21770-86-5

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation 

Sample Preparation Technique: Continuous liquid-liquid extraction (CLLE) 

Determinative Technique: Gas chromatography-flame ionization detector (GC-FID) / GC-MS / HPLC

Determinative Method: EPA SW-846 Method 8015C, Method 8270D, or Method 8321B. Refer to 

Appendix A for which of these determinative methods should be used for a particular analyte. 

Method Developed for: Organic compounds in aqueous samples 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation of aqueous liquid and/or drinking water 

samples. Please note: Drinking water samples for fenamiphos should be prepared and analyzed by EPA 

Method 525.2; drinking water samples for thiofanox should be prepared and analyzed by EPA Method 

531.2; aqueous/liquid samples for bromadiolone should be analyzed using ASTM D7600-09; aqueous 

liquid samples for EDEA, MDEA, and TEA should be analyzed using ASTM D7599-09. All other 

drinking water and aqueous liquid samples should be prepared using this method (SW-846 Method 

3520C). 

Description of Method: This method is applicable to the isolation and concentration of water-insoluble 

and slightly soluble organics in preparation for a variety of chromatographic procedures. A measured 

volume of sample, usually 1 L, is placed into a continuous liquid-liquid extractor, adjusted, if necessary, 

to a specific pH and extracted with organic solvent for 18 to 24 hours. The extract is filtered through 

sodium sulfate to remove residual moisture, concentrated, and exchanged as necessary into a solvent 

compatible with the cleanup or determinative procedure used for analysis. 

Special Considerations: Some of the target compounds will hydrolyze in water, with hydrolysis rates 

dependant on various factors such as sample pH and temperature. For more information on the 

preparation and analysis of thiofanox, see application note: 

http://www.pickeringlabs.com/catalog/pdfs/MA112%20expanded%20Carbamates.pdf

Source: EPA. 1996. “Method 3520C (SW-846): Continuous Liquid-Liquid Extraction,” Revision 3. 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA-3520c.pdf

5.2.16 EPA Method 3535A (SW-846): Solid-Phase Extraction 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

4-Aminopyridine 504-24-5 

Brodifacoum 56073-10-0 

Bromadiolone 28772-56-7

BZ [Quinuclidinyl benzilate] 6581-06-2 

Carfentanil 59708-52-0 

Chlorfenvinphos 470-90-6 

3-Chloro-1,2-propanediol 96-24-2 

Chlorosarin 1445-76-7

Chlorosoman 7040-57-5

Chlorpyrifos 2921-88-2 

Chlorpyrifos oxon 5598-15-2 

Crimidine 535-89-7 

Cyclohexyl sarin (GF) 329-99-7

Dichlorvos 62-73-7

Dicrotophos 141-66-2
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 46 October 2010

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Diesel range organics NA

Dimethylphosphite 868-85-9

Dimethylphosphoramidic acid 33876-51-6

Diphacinone 82-66-6 

1,4-Dithiane 505-29-3 

EA2192 [Diisopropylaminoethyl 

methylthiolophosphonate] 73207-98-4

Ethyl methylphosphonic acid (EMPA) 1832-53-7

Ethyldichloroarsine (ED) 598-14-1

N-Ethyldiethanolamine (EDEA) 139-87-7 

Fenamiphos 22224-92-6

Fentanyl 437-38-7 

Hexahydro-1,3,5-trinitro-1,3,5-triazine (RDX) 121-82-4 

Hexamethylenetriperoxidediamine (HMTD) 283-66-9 

Isopropyl methylphosphonic acid (IMPA) 1832-54-8

Methyl hydrazine 60-34-4

Methyl paraoxon 950-35-6 

Methyl parathion 298-00-0

N-Methyldiethanolamine (MDEA) 105-59-9 

1-Methylethyl ester ethylphosphonofluoridic acid (GE) 1189-87-3 

Methylphosphonic acid (MPA) 993-13-5

Mevinphos 7786-34-7

Monocrotophos 6923-22-4 

Mustard, nitrogen (HN-1) [bis(2-chloroethyl)ethylamine] 538-07-8 

Mustard, nitrogen (HN-2) [2,2’-dichloro-Nmethyldiethylamine N,N-bis(2-chloroethyl)methylamine] 51-75-2

Mustard, nitrogen (HN-3) [tris(2-chloroethyl)amine] 555-77-1 

Nicotine compounds 54-11-5

Octahydro-1,3,5,7-tetranitro-1,3,5,7-tetrazocine (HMX) 2691-41-0 

Paraoxon 311-45-5 

Parathion 56-38-2 

Pentaerythritol tetranitrate (PETN) 78-11-5 

Phencyclidine 77-10-1

Phorate 298-02-2

Phorate sulfone 2588-04-7 

Phorate sulfone oxon1 2588-06-9 

Phorate sulfoxide 2588-03-6 

Phorate sulfoxide oxon1 2588-05-8 

Phosphamidon 13171-21-6 

Pinacolyl methyl phosphonic acid (PMPA) 616-52-4 

R 33 (VR) [methylphosphonothioic acid, S-[2-

(diethylamino)ethyl] O-2-methylpropyl ester] 159939-87-4 

Soman (GD) 96-64-0

Strychnine 57-24-9

Tabun (GA) 77-81-6

Tetraethyl pyrophosphate 107-49-3

Tetramethylenedisulfotetramine 80-12-6

Thiodiglycol (TDG) 111-48-8

Thiofanox 39196-18-4 

1,4-Thioxane 15980-15-1 

Triethanolamine (TEA) 102-71-6 
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 47 October 2010

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Trimethyl phosphite 121-45-9

1,3,5-Trinitrobenzene (1,3,5-TNB) 99-35-4 

2,4,6-Trinitrotoluene (2,4,6-TNT) 118-96-7 

VE [phosphonothioic acid, ethyl-, S-(2-

(diethylamino)ethyl) O-ethyl ester] 21738-25-0

VG [phosphonothioic acid, S-(2-(diethylamino)ethyl) 

O,O-diethyl ester] 78-53-5

VM [phosphonothioic acid, methyl-, S-(2-

(diethylamino)ethyl) O-ethyl ester] 21770-86-5

1

 If problems occur when using this method for measurement of oxon compounds, analysts should consider use of 

procedures included in "Oxidation of selected organophosphate pesticides during chlorination of simulated drinking 

water." Water Research. 2009. 43(2): 522–534. http://www.sciencedirect.com/science/journal/00431354

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation 

Sample Preparation Technique: SPE 

Determinative Technique: GC-FID / GC-MS / HPLC

Determinative Method: EPA SW-846 Method 8015C, Method 8270D, Method 8321B, or Method 

8330B. Refer to Appendix A for which of these determinative methods should be used for a particular 

analyte. 

Method Developed for: Organic compounds in ground water, wastewater, and Toxicity Characteristic 

Leaching Procedure (TCLP, Method 1311) leachates 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation of aqueous liquid and/or drinking water 

samples. Please note: Drinking water samples for dichlorvos, fenamiphos, and mevinphos should be 

prepared and analyzed by EPA Method 525.2; drinking water samples for thiofanox should be prepared 

and analyzed by EPA Method 531.2; aqueous liquid samples for EMPA, IMPA, MPA, and PMPA should 

be prepared and analyzed using ASTM D7597-09; aqueous liquid samples for EDEA, MDEA and TEA 

should be prepared and analyzed using ASTM D7599-09; aqueous liquid samples for bromadiolone 

should be prepared and analyzed using ASTM 7600-09; aqueous liquid samples for thiodiglycol should 

be prepared and analyzed using ASTM 7598-09. All other drinking water samples and all aqueous liquid 

samples should be prepared using this method (SW-846 Method 3535A). 

Description of Method: This method describes a procedure for isolating target organic analytes from 

aqueous and liquid samples using SPE media. Sample preparation procedures vary by analyte group. 

Following any necessary pH adjustment, a measured volume of sample is extracted by passing it through 

the SPE medium (disks or cartridges), which is held in an extraction device designed for vacuum filtration 

of the sample. Target analytes are eluted from the solid-phase media using an appropriate solvent which 

is collected in a receiving vessel. The resulting solvent extract is dried using sodium sulfate and 

concentrated, as needed. 

Special Considerations: Refer to footnote provided in analyte table above for special considerations 

that should be applied when measuring specific analytes. Tetramethylenedisulfotetramine may require 

SPE extraction using acetone or methyl ethylketone. Water samples that contain a high level of 

particulates or a large amount of humic products may not be extractable by SPE. Some of the target 

compounds will hydrolyze in water, with hydrolysis rates dependant on various factors such as sample pH 

and temperature. 

Source: EPA. 1998. “Method 3535A (SW-846): Solid-Phase Extraction (SPE),” Revision 1. 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA-3535a.pdf

 
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

5.2.17 EPA Method 3541 (SW-846): Automated Soxhlet Extraction 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Brodifacoum 56073-10-0 

Bromadiolone 28772-56-7

BZ [Quinuclidinyl benzilate] 6581-06-2 

Carfentanil 59708-52-0 

Chlorfenvinphos 470-90-6 

3-Chloro-1,2-propanediol 96-24-2 

Chloropicrin 76-06-2 

Chlorosarin 1445-76-7

Chlorosoman 7040-57-5

Chlorpyrifos 2921-88-2 

Chlorpyrifos oxon 5598-15-2 

Crimidine 535-89-7 

Cyclohexyl sarin (GF) 329-99-7

Dichlorvos 62-73-7 

Dicrotophos 141-66-2 

Diesel range organics NA

Diisopropyl methylphosphonate (DIMP) 1445-75-6 

Dimethylphosphite 868-85-9 

Dimethylphosphoramidic acid 33876-51-6 

Diphacinone 82-66-6 

Disulfoton 298-04-4 

Disulfoton sulfone oxon1 2496-91-5 

Disulfoton sulfoxide 2497-07-6 

Disulfoton sulfoxide oxon1 2496-92-6 

1,4-Dithiane 505-29-3 

EA2192 [Diisopropylaminoethyl 

methylthiolophosphonate] 73207-98-4 

Ethyl methylphosphonic acid (EMPA) 1832-53-7 

Ethyldichloroarsine (ED) 598-14-1 

N-Ethyldiethanolamine (EDEA) 139-87-7 

Fenamiphos 22224-92-6

Fentanyl 437-38-7 

Isopropyl methylphosphonic acid (IMPA) 1832-54-8 

Methyl hydrazine 60-34-4

Methyl paraoxon 950-35-6 

Methyl parathion 298-00-0 

N-Methyldiethanolamine (MDEA) 105-59-9 

1-Methylethyl ester ethylphosphonofluoridic acid (GE) 1189-87-3 

Methylphosphonic acid (MPA) 993-13-5 

Mevinphos 7786-34-7 

Monocrotophos 6923-22-4 

Mustard, nitrogen (HN-1) [bis(2-chloroethyl)ethylamine] 538-07-8 

Mustard, nitrogen (HN-2) [2,2’-dichloro-Nmethyldiethylamine N,N-bis(2-chloroethyl)methylamine] 51-75-2

Mustard, nitrogen (HN-3) [tris(2-chloroethyl)amine] 555-77-1 

Nicotine compounds 54-11-5 

Paraoxon 311-45-5 

Parathion 56-38-2 

Phencyclidine 77-10-1 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 48 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 49 October 2010

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Phorate 298-02-2 

Phorate sulfone 2588-04-7 

Phorate sulfone oxon1 2588-06-9 

Phorate sulfoxide 2588-03-6 

Phorate sulfoxide oxon1 2588-05-8 

Phosphamidon 13171-21-6 

Pinacolyl methyl phosphonic acid (PMPA) 616-52-4 

R 33 (VR) [methylphosphonothioic acid, S-[2-

(diethylamino)ethyl] O-2-methylpropyl ester] 159939-87-4 

Soman (GD) 96-64-0 

Strychnine 57-24-9 

Tabun (GA) 77-81-6 

Tetraethyl pyrophosphate 107-49-3 

Tetramethylenedisulfotetramine 80-12-6

Thiodiglycol (TDG) 111-48-8 

Thiofanox 39196-18-4 

1,4-Thioxane 15980-15-1 

Triethanolamine (TEA) 102-71-6 

Trimethyl phosphite 121-45-9 

VE [phosphonothioic acid, ethyl-, S-(2-

(diethylamino)ethyl) O-ethyl ester] 21738-25-0

VG [phosphonothioic acid, S-(2-(diethylamino)ethyl) 

O,O-diethyl ester] 78-53-5

VM [phosphonothioic acid, methyl-, S-(2-

(diethylamino)ethyl) O-ethyl ester] 21770-86-5

1

 If problems occur when using this method for measurement of oxon compounds, analysts should consider use of 

procedures included in "Oxidation of selected organophosphate pesticides during chlorination of simulated drinking 

water." Water Research. 2009. 43(2): 522–534. http://www.sciencedirect.com/science/journal/00431354

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation 

Sample Preparation Technique: Automated Soxhlet extraction 

Determinative Technique: GC-FID / GC-MS / HPLC

Determinative Method: EPA SW-846 Method 8015C, Method 8270D, or Method 8321B. Refer to 

Appendix A for which of these determinative methods should be used for a particular analyte. 

Method Developed for: Organic compounds in soil, sediment, sludges, and waste solids 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation of solid samples. 

Description of Method: Approximately 10 g of solid sample is mixed with an equal amount of 

anhydrous sodium sulfate and placed in an extraction thimble or between two plugs of glass wool. After 

adding the appropriate surrogate amount, the sample is extracted using an appropriate solvent in an 

automated Soxhlet extractor. The extract is dried with sodium sulfate to remove residual moisture, 

concentrated and exchanged, as necessary, into a solvent compatible with the cleanup or determinative 

procedure for analysis. 

Special Considerations: Refer to footnote provided in analyte table above for special considerations 

that should be applied when measuring specific analytes. Some of the target compounds will hydrolyze 

in water, with hydrolysis rates dependant on various factors such as sample pH and temperature. 

Source: EPA. 1994. “Method 3541 (SW-846): Automated Soxhlet Extraction,” Revision 0. 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA-3541.pdf
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

5.2.18 EPA Method 3545A (SW-846): Pressurized Fluid Extraction (PFE) 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Brodifacoum 56073-10-0 

Bromadiolone 28772-56-7

BZ [Quinuclidinyl benzilate] 6581-06-2 

Carfentanil 59708-52-0 

Chlorfenvinphos 470-90-6 

3-Chloro-1,2-propanediol 96-24-2 

Chloropicrin 76-06-2

Chlorosarin 1445-76-7

Chlorosoman 7040-57-5

Chlorpyrifos 2921-88-2 

Chlorpyrifos oxon 5598-15-2 

Crimidine 535-89-7 

Cyclohexyl sarin (GF) 329-99-7

Dichlorvos 62-73-7

Dicrotophos 141-66-2

Diesel range organics NA

Diisopropyl methylphosphonate (DIMP) 1445-75-6

Dimethylphosphite 868-85-9

Dimethylphosphoramidic acid 33876-51-6

Diphacinone 82-66-6 

Disulfoton 298-04-4 

Disulfoton sulfone oxon1 2496-91-5 

Disulfoton sulfoxide 2497-07-6 

Disulfoton sulfoxide oxon1 2496-92-6 

1,4-Dithiane 505-29-3 

EA2192 [Diisopropylaminoethyl 

methylthiolophosphonate] 73207-98-4

Ethyl methylphosphonic acid (EMPA) 1832-53-7

Ethyldichloroarsine (ED) 598-14-1

N-Ethyldiethanolamine (EDEA) 139-87-7 

Fenamiphos 22224-92-6

Fentanyl 437-38-7 

Isopropyl methylphosphonic acid (IMPA) 1832-54-8

Methyl hydrazine 60-34-4

Methyl paraoxon 950-35-6 

Methyl parathion 298-00-0

N-Methyldiethanolamine (MDEA) 105-59-9 

1-Methylethyl ester ethylphosphonofluoridic acid (GE) 1189-87-3 

Methylphosphonic acid (MPA) 993-13-5

Mevinphos 7786-34-7

Monocrotophos 6923-22-4 

Mustard, nitrogen (HN-1) [bis(2-chloroethyl)ethylamine] 538-07-8 

Mustard, nitrogen (HN-2) [2,2’-dichloro-Nmethyldiethylamine N,N-bis(2-chloroethyl)methylamine] 51-75-2

Mustard, nitrogen (HN-3) [tris(2-chloroethyl)amine] 555-77-1 

Nicotine compounds 54-11-5

Paraoxon 311-45-5 

Parathion 56-38-2 

Phencyclidine 77-10-1

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 50 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 51 October 2010

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Phorate 298-02-2

Phorate sulfone 2588-04-7 

Phorate sulfone oxon1 2588-06-9 

Phorate sulfoxide 2588-03-6 

Phorate sulfoxide oxon1 2588-05-8 

Phosphamidon 13171-21-6 

Pinacolyl methyl phosphonic acid (PMPA) 616-52-4 

R 33 (VR) [methylphosphonothioic acid, S-[2-

(diethylamino)ethyl] O-2-methylpropyl ester] 159939-87-4 

Soman (GD) 96-64-0

Strychnine 57-24-9

Tabun (GA) 77-81-6

Tetraethyl pyrophosphate 107-49-3

Tetramethylenedisulfotetramine 80-12-6

Thiodiglycol (TDG) 111-48-8

Thiofanox 39196-18-4 

1,4-Thioxane 15980-15-1 

Triethanolamine (TEA) 102-71-6 

Trimethyl phosphite 121-45-9

VE [phosphonothioic acid, ethyl-, S-(2-

(diethylamino)ethyl) O-ethyl ester] 21738-25-0

VG [phosphonothioic acid, S-(2-(diethylamino)ethyl) 

O,O-diethyl ester] 78-53-5

VM [phosphonothioic acid, methyl-, S-(2-

(diethylamino)ethyl) O-ethyl ester] 21770-86-5

1

 If problems occur when using this method for measurement of oxon compounds, analysts should consider use of 

procedures included in "Oxidation of selected organophosphate pesticides during chlorination of simulated drinking 

water." Water Research. 2009. 43(2): 522–534. http://www.sciencedirect.com/science/journal/00431354

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation 

Sample Preparation Technique: Pressurized Fluid Extraction (PFE) 

Determinative Technique: GC-FID / GC-MS / HPLC

Determinative Method: EPA SW-846 Method 8015C, Method 8270D, or Method 8321B. Refer to 

Appendix A for which of these determinative methods should be used for a particular analyte. 

Method Developed for: Organic compounds in soils, clays, sediments, sludges, and waste solids 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation of solid samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: This method has been validated for solid matrices containing 250 to 

12,500 μg/kg of semivolatile organic compounds, 250 to 2500 μg/kg of organophosphorus pesticides, 5 to 

250 μg/kg of organochlorine pesticides, 50 to 5000 μg/kg of chlorinated herbicides, and 1 to 2500 ng/kg 

of polychlorinated dibenzo-p-dioxins (PCDDs) / polychlorinated dibenzofurans (PCDFs). 

Description of Method: Approximately 10 to 30 g of soil sample is prepared for extraction either by air 

drying the sample, or by mixing the sample with anhydrous sodium sulfate or pelletized diatomaceous 

earth. The sample is then ground and loaded into the extraction cell. The extraction cell containing the 

sample is heated to the extraction temperature, pressurized with the appropriate solvent system, and 

extracted for 5 minutes (or as recommended by the instrument manufacturer). The extract may be 

concentrated, if necessary, and exchanged into a solvent compatible with the cleanup or determinative 

step being employed. 

 

Special Considerations: Refer to footnote provided in analyte table above for special considerations 

that should be applied when measuring specific analytes. Sodium sulfate can cause clogging, and airdrying or pelletized diatomaceous earth may be preferred. Phencyclidine and VX require extraction with 
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

5% triethylamine in ethyl acetate. Some of the target compounds will hydrolyze in water, with hydrolysis 

rates dependant on various factors such as sample pH and temperature. 

Source: EPA. 1998. “Method 3545A (SW-846): Pressurized Fluid Extraction (PFE),” Revision 1. 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA-3545a.pdf

5.2.19 EPA Method 3570 (SW-846): Microscale Solvent Extraction (MSE) 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Acrylamide 79-06-1

Acrylonitrile 107-13-1

Aldicarb (Temik) 116-06-3

Aldicarb sulfone 1646-88-4 

Aldicarb sulfoxide 1646-87-3 

4-Aminopyridine 504-24-5 

BZ [Quinuclidinyl benzilate] 6581-06-2 

Brodifacoum 56073-10-0 

Bromadiolone 28772-56-7 

Carfentanil 59708-52-0 

Carbofuran (Furadan) 1563-66-2

Chlorfenvinphos 470-90-6 

3-Chloro-1,2-propanediol 96-24-2 

Chloropicrin 76-06-2

Chlorosarin 1445-76-7

Chlorosoman 7040-57-5

Chlorpyrifos 2921-88-2 

Chlorpyrifos oxon 5598-15-2 

Crimidine 535-89-7 

Cyclohexyl sarin (GF) 329-99-7

Dichlorvos 62-73-7

Dicrotophos 141-66-2

Diesel range organics NA 

Diisopropyl methylphosphonate (DIMP) 1445-75-6 

Dimethylphosphite 868-85-9

Dimethylphosphoramidic acid 33876-51-6 

Diphacinone 82-66-6 

Disulfoton 298-04-4 

Disulfoton sulfone oxon1 2496-91-5 

Disulfoton sulfoxide 2497-07-6 

Disulfoton sulfoxide oxon1 2496-92-6 

1,4-Dithiane 505-29-3 

EA2192 [Diisopropylaminoethyl 

methylthiolophosphonate] 73207-98-4 

Ethyl methylphosphonic acid (EMPA) 1832-53-7 

N-Ethyldiethanolamine (EDEA) 139-87-7 

Fenamiphos 22224-92-6

Fentanyl 437-38-7 

Formaldehyde 50-00-0 

Gasoline range organics NA 

Hexahydro-1,3,5-trinitro-1,3,5-triazine (RDX) 121-82-4 

Hexamethylenetriperoxidediamine (HMTD) 283-66-9 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 52 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 53 October 2010

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Isopropyl methylphosphonic acid (IMPA) 1832-54-8 

Kerosene 64742-81-0 

Methomyl 16752-77-5 

Methyl acrylonitrile 126-98-7 

Methyl hydrazine 60-34-4

Methyl paraoxon 950-35-6 

Methyl parathion 298-00-0

N-Methyldiethanolamine (MDEA) 105-59-9 

1-Methylethyl ester ethylphosphonofluoridic acid (GE) 1189-87-3 

Methylphosphonic acid (MPA) 993-13-5 

Mevinphos 7786-34-7

Monocrotophos 6923-22-4 

Mustard, nitrogen (HN-1) [bis(2-chloroethyl)ethylamine] 538-07-8 

Mustard, nitrogen (HN-2) [2,2’-dichloro-Nmethyldiethylamine N,N-bis(2-chloroethyl)methylamine] 51-75-2

Mustard, nitrogen (HN-3) [tris(2-chloroethyl)amine] 555-77-1 

Mustard, sulfur / Mustard gas (HD) 505-60-2

Nicotine compounds 54-11-5

Octahydro-1,3,5,7-tetranitro-1,3,5,7-tetrazocine (HMX) 2691-41-0 

Oxamyl 23135-22-0

Paraoxon 311-45-5 

Parathion 56-38-2 

Pentaerythritol tetranitrate (PETN) 78-11-5 

Phencyclidine 77-10-1

Phorate 298-02-2

Phorate sulfone 2588-04-7 

Phorate sulfone oxon1 2588-06-9 

Phorate sulfoxide 2588-03-6 

Phorate sulfoxide oxon1 2588-05-8 

Phosphamidon 13171-21-6 

Pinacolyl methyl phosphonic acid (PMPA) 616-52-4 

R 33 (VR) [methylphosphonothioic acid, S-[2-

(diethylamino)ethyl] O-2-methylpropyl ester] 159939-87-4 

Sarin (GB) 107-44-8

Soman (GD) 96-64-0

Strychnine 57-24-9

Tabun (GA) 77-81-6

Tetraethyl pyrophosphate 107-49-3

Tetramethylenedisulfotetramine 80-12-6 

Thiodiglycol (TDG) 111-48-8

Thiofanox 39196-18-4 

1,4-Thioxane 15980-15-1 

Triethanolamine (TEA) 102-71-6 

Trimethyl phosphite 121-45-9

1,3,5-Trinitrobenzene (1,3,5-TNB) 99-35-4

2,4,6-Trinitrotoluene (2,4,6-TNT) 118-96-7

VE [phosphonothioic acid, ethyl-, S-(2-

(diethylamino)ethyl) O-ethyl ester] 21738-25-0

VG [phosphonothioic acid, S-(2-(diethylamino)ethyl) 

O,O-diethyl ester] 78-53-5
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 54 October 2010

Analyte(s) CAS RN

VM [phosphonothioic acid, methyl-, S-(2-

(diethylamino)ethyl) O-ethyl ester] 21770-86-5

VX [O-ethyl-S-(2-diisopropylaminoethyl)methylphosphonothiolate] 50782-69-9

White phosphorus 12185-10-3 1

 If problems occur when using this method for measurement of oxon compounds, analysts should consider use of 

procedures included in "Oxidation of selected organophosphate pesticides during chlorination of simulated drinking 

water." Water Research. 2009. 43(2): 522–534. http://www.sciencedirect.com/science/journal/00431354

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation 

Sample Preparation Technique: MSE 

Determinative Technique: Gas chromatography – nitrogen-phosphorus detector (GC-NPD) / GC-FID / 

GC-MS / HPLC

Determinative Method: EPA SW-846 Methods 7580, 8015C, 8270D, 8315A, 8316, 8318A, 8321B, and 

8330B. Refer to Appendix A for which of these determinative methods should be used for a particular 

analyte. 

Method Developed for: Extracting volatile, semivolatile, and nonvolatile organic compounds from 

solids such as soils, sludges, and wastes 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation of wipe samples. 

Description of Method: Samples are prepared by shake extraction with an organic solvent in sealed 

extraction tubes. Careful manipulation of the sample, solvent, drying agent, and spiking solutions during 

the procedure minimizes loss of volatile compounds while maximizing extraction of volatile, 

semivolatile, and nonvolatile compounds. Sample extracts are collected, dried, and concentrated using a 

modification of the Kuderna-Danish concentration method or other appropriate concentration technique. 

By increasing the number of theoretical plates and reducing the distillation temperature, extracts are 

concentrated without loss of volatile constituents. Samples should be prepared one at a time to the point 

of solvent addition (i.e., do not pre-weigh a number of samples then add the solvent). Samples should be 

extracted as soon after collection as possible, and exposure to air before sample extraction is minimized 

as much as possible. 

Special Considerations: Refer to footnote provided in analyte table above for special considerations 

that should be applied when measuring specific analytes. 

Source: EPA. 2002. “Method 3570 (SW-846): Microscale Solvent Extraction (MSE),” Revision 0. 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA-3570.pdf

5.2.20 EPA Method 3571 (SW-846): Extraction of Solid and Aqueous Samples for 

Chemical Agents 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Mustard, sulfur / Mustard gas (HD) 505-60-2 

Sarin (GB) 107-44-8 

VX [O-ethyl-S-(2-diisopropylaminoethyl)methylphosphonothiolate] 50782-69-9

 

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation 

Sample Preparation Technique: MSE 

Determinative Technique: GC-MS

Determinative Method: EPA SW-846 Method 8270D 
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

Method Developed for: HD, GB, and VX in concrete, charcoal, wood, water, brine, ash, coral, sand, and 

soil 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation of solid, aqueous liquid, and drinking water 

samples. 

Description of Method: This method provides procedures for sample collection and extraction of the 

referenced compounds from solids and aqueous samples. A separate extract is required for each agent to 

be measured. Glacial acetic acid is added as a preservative to samples being assayed for GB and glacial 

acetic acid/sodium chloride is a preservative for samples assayed for HD. No preservative is added for 

VX. Samples are extracted with 10% isopropanol in dichloromethane by vortex mixing and filtered, if 

necessary. An optional water wash is included for VX that back-extracts the compound from heavy 

organics that could interfere with the assay. An optional column cleanup procedure is described to 

separate GB from heavy organics, if needed. Solvents are used to elute the extract first through the 

Carboprep90 column, then the silica column. 

Source: EPA. 2007. “Method 3571 (SW-846): Extraction of Solid and Aqueous Samples for Chemical 

Agents,” Revision 0. http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA-3571.pdf

5.2.21 EPA Method 5030C (SW-846): Purge-and-Trap for Aqueous Samples 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Allyl alcohol 107-18-6

Carbon disulfide 75-15-0

2-Chloroethanol 107-07-3

Cyanogen chloride 506-77-4

1,2-Dichloroethane 107-06-2

Ethylene oxide 75-21-8

2-Fluoroethanol 371-62-0 

Gasoline range organics NA

Kerosene 64742-81-0

Propylene oxide 75-56-9

The following analytes should be prepared by this method (and determined by the corresponding SW-846 Method 

8260C) only if problems (e.g., insufficient recovery, interferences) occur when using the sample 

preparation/determinative techniques identified for these analytes in Appendix A. 

1,4-Thioxane 15980-15-1

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation 

Sample Preparation Technique: Purge-and-trap 

Determinative Technique: GC-FID / GC-MS 

Determinative Method: EPA SW-846 Method 8015C or Method 8260C. Refer to Appendix A for 

which of these determinative methods should be used for a particular analyte. 

Method Developed for: VOCs in aqueous and water miscible liquid samples 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation of aqueous liquid and/or drinking water 

samples. For carbon disulfide and 1,2-dichloroethane, EPA Method 524.2 (rather than Method 5030C) 

should be used for preparation of drinking water samples. 

Description of Method: This method describes a purge-and-trap procedure for the analysis of VOCs in 

aqueous liquid samples and water miscible liquid samples. An inert gas is bubbled through a portion of 

the aqueous liquid sample at ambient temperature, and the volatile components are transferred from the 

aqueous liquid phase to the vapor phase. The vapor is swept through a sorbent column where the volatile 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 55 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

components are adsorbed. After purging is completed, the sorbent column is heated and backflushed with 

inert gas to desorb the components onto a GC column. 

Special Considerations: Heated purge may be required for poor-purging analytes. 

Source: EPA. 2003. “Method 5030C (SW-846): Purge-and-Trap for Aqueous Samples, Revision 3. 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA-5030c.pdf

 

5.2.22 EPA Method 5035A (SW-846): Closed-System Purge-and-Trap and Extraction for 

Volatile Organics in Soil and Waste Samples 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Acrylonitrile 107-13-1 

Allyl alcohol 107-18-6

Carbon disulfide 75-15-0

2-Chloroethanol 107-07-3

Cyanogen chloride 506-77-4

1,2-Dichloroethane 107-06-2

Ethylene oxide 75-21-8

2-Fluoroethanol 371-62-0 

Gasoline range organics NA

Kerosene 64742-81-0

Methyl acrylonitrile 126-98-7 

Propylene oxide 75-56-9

The following analytes should be prepared by this method (and determined by the corresponding SW-846 Method 

8260C) only if problems (e.g., insufficient recovery, interferences) occur when using the sample 

preparation/determinative techniques identified for these analytes in Appendix A. 

1,4-Thioxane 15980-15-1

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation

Sample Preparation Technique: Purge-and-trap 

Determinative Technique: GC-FID / GC-MS

Determinative Method: EPA SW-846 Method 8015C or Method 8260C. Refer to Appendix A for 

which of these determinative methods should be used for a particular analyte. 

Method Developed for: VOCs in solid materials (e.g., soils, sediments, and solid waste) and oily wastes 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation of solid samples. 

Description of Method: This method describes a closed-system purge-and-trap process for analysis of 

VOCs in solid samples containing low levels (0.5 to 200 μg/kg) of VOCs. The method also provides 

specific procedures for preparation of samples containing high levels (>200 μg/kg ) of VOCs. For lowlevel VOCs, a 5-g sample is collected into a vial that is placed into an autosampler device. Reagent 

water, surrogates, and internal standards are added automatically, and the vial is heated to 40°C. The 

volatiles are purged into an appropriate trap using an inert gas combined with sample agitation. When 

purging is complete, the trap is heated and backflushed with helium to desorb the trapped sample 

components into a GC for analysis. For high-level VOCs, samples are either collected into a vial that 

contains a water-miscible organic solvent or a portion of sample is removed from the vial and dispersed in 

a water-miscible solvent. An aliquot of the solvent is added to reagent water, along with surrogates and 

internal standards, then purged and analyzed using an appropriate determinative method (e.g., Method 

8015C or 8260C (SW-846)). 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 56 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

Source: EPA. 2002. “Method 5035A (SW-846): Closed-System Purge-and-Trap and Extraction for 

Volatile Organics in Soil and Waste Samples,” Draft Revision 1. http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA5035a.pdf

5.2.23 EPA Method 6010C (SW-846): Inductively Coupled Plasma - Atomic Emission 

Spectrometry 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Ammonium metavanadate (analyze as total vanadium) 7803-55-6 

Arsenic, Total 7440-38-2 

Arsenic trioxide (analyze as total arsenic) 1327-53-3 

Arsine (analyze as total arsenic in non-air samples) 7784-42-1 

Calcium arsenate (analyze as total arsenic) 7778-44-1 

2-Chlorovinylarsonous acid (2-CVAA) 85090-33-1 

Lead arsenate (analyze as total arsenic) 7645-25-2 

Lewisite 1 (L-1) [2-chlorovinyldichloroarsine] (analyze as total arsenic) 541-25-3 

Lewisite 2 (L-2) [bis(2-chlorovinyl)chloroarsine] (analyze as total arsenic) 40334-69-8 

Lewisite 3 (L-3) [tris(2-chlorovinyl)arsine] (analyze as total arsenic) 40334-70-1 

Lewisite oxide 1306-02-1 

Osmium tetroxide (analyze as total osmium) 20816-12-0

Sodium arsenite (analyze as total arsenic) 7784-46-5 

Thallium sulfate (analyze as total thallium) 10031-59-1 

Titanium tetrachloride (analyze as total titanium) 7550-45-0

Vanadium pentoxide (analyze as total vanadium) 1314-62-1 

Analysis Purpose: Analyte determination and measurement

Determinative Technique: ICP-AES 

Sample Preparation Method: EPA SW-846 Method 3050B (solid samples) and NIOSH Method 9102 

(wipe samples) 

Sample Preparation Technique: Acid digestion 

Method Developed for: Trace elements in solution 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for analysis of solid and wipe samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: Detection limits vary with each analyte. Estimated instrument detection 

limits (IDLs) for arsenic and titanium are 30 μg/L and 5.0 μg/L, respectively. The upper end of the 

analytical range may be extended by sample dilution. 

Description of Method: This method determines arsenic trioxide, lewisite, lewisite degradation 

products, calcium and lead arsenate, and sodium arsenite as total arsenic; osmium tetroxide as osmium; 

thallium sulfate as thallium; titanium tetrachloride as titanium; and ammonium metavanadate and 

vanadium pentoxide as total vanadium. Soil samples (prepared using SW-846 Method 3050B) and wipe 

samples (prepared using NIOSH Method 9102) are analyzed by ICP-AES. 

 

Special Considerations: Laboratory testing is currently underway for speciation of lewisite 1 using GCMS techniques. Users should consult with the appropriate point of contact listed in Section 4.0 regarding 

use of GFAA as a back-up or for additional confirmatory analyses. 

Source: EPA. 2007. “Method 6010C (SW-846): Inductively Coupled Plasma-Atomic Emission 

Spectrometry,” Revision 3. http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA-6010c.pdf

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 57 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

5.2.24 EPA Method 6020A (SW-846): Inductively Coupled Plasma - Mass Spectrometry 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Ammonium metavanadate (analyze as total vanadium) 7803-55-6 

Arsenic, Total 7440-38-2 

Arsenic trioxide (analyze as total arsenic) 1327-53-3 

Arsine (analyze as total arsenic in non-air samples) 7784-42-1 

Calcium arsenate (analyze as total arsenic) 7778-44-1 

2-Chlorovinylarsonous acid (2-CVAA) 85090-33-1

Lead arsenate (analyze as total arsenic) 7645-25-2 

Lewisite 1 (L-1) [2-chlorovinyldichloroarsine] (analyze as total arsenic) 541-25-3 

Lewisite 2 (L-2) [bis(2-chlorovinyl)chloroarsine] (analyze as total arsenic) 40334-69-8 

Lewisite 3 (L-3) [tris(2-chlorovinyl)arsine] (analyze as total arsenic) 40334-70-1 

Lewisite oxide 1306-02-1 

Sodium arsenite (analyze as total arsenic) 7784-46-5 

Thallium sulfate (analyze as total thallium) 10031-59-1 

Titanium tetrachloride (analyze as total titanium) 7550-45-0

Vanadium pentoxide (analyze as total vanadium) 1314-62-1 

Analysis Purpose: Analyte determination and measurement

Determinative Technique: ICP-MS 

Sample Preparation Method: EPA SW-846 Method 3050B (solid samples) and NIOSH Method 9102 

(wipe samples) 

Sample Preparation Technique: Acid digestion 

Method Developed for: Elements in water samples and in waste extracts or digests 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for analysis of solid and wipe samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: In relatively simple sample types, detection limits will generally be below 

0.1 μg/L. Less sensitive elements, such as arsenic, may have detection limits of 1.0 μg/L or higher. The 

upper end of the analytical range may be extended by sample dilution. 

Description of Method: This method will determine arsenic trioxide, lewisite, lewisite degradation 

products, calcium and lead arsenate, and sodium arsenite as total arsenic. The method also will determine 

thallium sulfate as total thallium, titanium tetrachloride as titanium, and ammonium metavanadate and 

vanadium pentoxide as total vanadium. Soil samples (prepared using SW-846 Method 3050B) and wipe 

samples (prepared using NIOSH Method 9102) are analyzed by ICP-MS. IDLs, sensitivities, and linear 

ranges vary with sample type, instrumentation, and operation conditions. 

Special Considerations: Laboratory testing is currently underway for speciation of lewisite 1 using GCMS techniques. Users should consult with the appropriate point of contact listed in Section 4.0 regarding 

use of GFAA as a back-up or for additional confirmatory analyses. 

Source: EPA. 1998. “Method 6020A (SW-846): Inductively Coupled Plasma-Mass Spectrometry,” 

Revision 1. http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA-6020a.pdf

 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 58 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

5.2.25 EPA Method 7470A (SW-846): Mercury in Liquid Wastes (Manual Cold-Vapor 

Technique) 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Mercuric chloride (analyze as total mercury) 7487-94-7 

Mercury, Total 7439-97-6

Methoxyethylmercuric acetate (analyze as total mercury) 151-38-2 

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation and/or analyte determination and measurement 

Sample Preparation Technique: Acid digestion (solid and aqueous liquid samples) and acid digestion 

by NIOSH Method 9102 (wipe samples) 

Determinative Technique: CVAA 

Method Developed for: Mercury in mobility-procedure extracts, aqueous wastes, and ground waters 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for use if problems occur when using EPA SW-846 

Method 7473 for these analytes during preparation and analysis of aqueous liquid samples. (See Footnote 

12 of Appendix A.) 

Detection and Quantitation: The detection limit for the method is 0.2 μg/L. 

Description of Method: A 100-mL aqueous sample is digested with acids, permanganate solution, 

persulfate solution, and heat. The sample is cooled and reduced with hydroxylamine-sodium chloride 

solution. Just prior to analysis, the sample is treated with Sn(II), reducing the mercury to Hg(0). The 

reduced sample is sparged and the mercury vapor is analyzed by CVAA. 

Special Considerations: Chloride and copper are potential interferences. 

Source: EPA. 1994. “Method 7470A (SW-846): Mercury in Liquid Waste (Manual Cold-Vapor 

Technique),” Revision 1. http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA-7470a.pdf

5.2.26 EPA Method 7471B (SW-846): Mercury in Solid or Semisolid Wastes (Manual ColdVapor Technique) 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Mercuric chloride (analyze as total mercury) 7487-94-7 

Mercury, Total 7439-97-6

Methoxyethylmercuric acetate (analyze as total mercury) 151-38-2 

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation and/or analyte determination and measurement 

Sample Preparation Technique: Acid digestion (solid and aqueous liquid samples) and acid digestion 

by NIOSH Method 9102 (wipe samples) 

Determinative Technique: CVAA 

Method Developed for: Total mercury in soils, sediments, bottom deposits, and sludge-type materials 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for use if problems occur when using EPA SW-846 

Method 7473 for these analytes during preparation and analysis of solid and wipe samples. (See Footnote 

12 of Appendix A.) 

Description of Method: A 0.5-g to 0.6-g sample is digested with aqua regia, permanganate solution, and 

heat. The sample is cooled and reduced with hydroxylamine-sodium chloride solution. Just prior to 

analysis, the sample is treated with Sn(II), reducing the mercury to Hg(0). The reduced sample is sparged 

and the mercury vapor is analyzed by CVAA. 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 59 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

Special Considerations: Chloride and copper are potential interferences. 

Source: EPA. 1998. “Method 7471B (SW-846): Mercury in Solid or Semisolid Waste (Manual ColdVapor Technique),” Revision 2. http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA-7471b.pdf

5.2.27 EPA Method 7473 (SW-846): Mercury in Solids and Solutions by Thermal 

Decomposition, Amalgamation, and Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Mercuric chloride (analyze as total mercury) 7487-94-7 

Mercury, Total 7439-97-6

Methoxyethylmercuric acetate (analyze as total mercury) 151-38-2 

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation and/or analyte determination and measurement 

Sample Preparation Technique: Thermal decomposition (solid and aqueous liquid samples) and acid 

digestion by NIOSH Method 9102 (wipe samples) 

Determinative Technique: Visible spectrophotometry 

Method Developed for: Total mercury in solids, aqueous samples, and digested solutions 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and analysis of solid, aqueous liquid, and 

wipe samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: The IDL is 0.01 ng total mercury. The typical working range for this 

method is 0.05 to 600 ng. 

Description of Method: Controlled heating in an oxygenated decomposition furnace is used to liberate 

mercury from solid and aqueous samples. The sample is dried and then thermally and chemically 

decomposed within the furnace. The decomposition products are carried by flowing oxygen to the 

catalytic section of the furnace, where oxidation is completed and halogens and nitrogen/sulfur oxides are 

trapped. The remaining decomposition products are then carried to an amalgamator that selectively traps 

mercury. After the system is flushed with oxygen to remove any remaining gases or decomposition 

products, the amalgamator is rapidly heated, releasing mercury vapor. Flowing oxygen carries the 

mercury vapor through absorbance cells positioned in the light path of a single wavelength atomic 

absorption spectrophotometer. Absorbance (peak height or peak area) is measured at 253.7 nm as a 

function of mercury concentration. 

Special Considerations: If equipment is not available, use CVAA Methods 7471B (EPA SW-846) for 

solid samples and 7470A (EPA SW-846) for aqueous liquid samples. 

Source: EPA. 1998. “Method 7473 (SW-846): Mercury in Solids and Solutions by Thermal 

Decomposition, Amalgamation, and Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry,” Revision 0. 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA-7473.pdf

5.2.28 EPA Method 7580 (SW-846): White Phosphorus (P4) by Solvent Extraction and Gas 

Chromatography 

Analyte(s) CAS RN 

White phosphorus 12185-10-3 

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation and/or analyte determination and measurement

Sample Preparation Technique: Solvent extraction (solid, aqueous liquid, and drinking water samples) 

and MSE / solvent extraction by EPA SW-846 Method 3570/8290A Appendix A (wipe samples) 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 60 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

Determinative Technique: GC-NPD 

Method Developed for: White phosphorus in soil, sediment, and water 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and analysis of solid, aqueous liquid, 

drinking water, and wipe samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: MDLs for reagent water, well water, and pond water were calculated to be 

0.008, 0.009, 0.008 μg/L, respectively. MDLs for sand, a sandy loam soil (Lebanon soil), and soil from 

the Rocky Mountain Arsenal (U.S. Army Environmental Center soil) were calculated to be 0.02, 0.43, 

0.07 μg/kg, respectively. This procedure provides sensitivity on the order of 0.01 μg/L for water samples 

and 1 μg/kg for soil samples. 

Description of Method: Method 7580 may be used to determine the concentration of white phosphorus 

in soil, sediment, and water samples using solvent extraction and GC. Water samples are extracted by 

one of two procedures, depending on the sensitivity required. For the more sensitive procedure, a 500-

mL water sample is extracted with 50 mL of diethyl ether. The extract is concentrated by back extraction 

with reagent water, yielding a final extract volume of approximately 1.0 mL. A 1.0 μL aliquot of this 

extract is injected into a GC equipped with a nitrogen-phosphorus detector (NPD). Wet soil or sediment 

samples are analyzed by extracting a 40 g wet-weight aliquot of the sample with a mixture of 10.0 mL 

degassed reagent water and 10.0 mL isooctane. The extraction is performed in a glass jar on a platform 

shaker for 18 hours. A 1.0 μL aliquot of the extract is analyzed by GC-NPD. 

Special Considerations: The presence of white phosphorus should be confirmed by either a secondary 

GC column or by an MS. 

Source: EPA. 1996. “Method 7580 (SW-846): White Phosphorus (P4) by Solvent Extraction and Gas 

Chromatography,” Revision 0. http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA-7580.pdf

5.2.29 EPA Method 8015C (SW-846): Nonhalogenated Organics Using GC/FID 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Diesel range organics NA

Gasoline range organics NA

Kerosene 64742-81-0

Analysis Purpose: Analyte determination and measurement 

Determinative Technique: GC-FID 

Sample Preparation Method: EPA SW-846 Method 3541/3545A or Method 5035A (solid samples), 

Method 3535A or 5030C (aqueous liquid and drinking water samples), and Method 3570/8290A 

Appendix A (wipe samples). Refer to Appendix A for which of these preparation methods should be used 

for a particular analyte/sample type combination. 

Sample Preparation Technique: Automated Soxhlet extraction / PFE / purge-and-trap (solid samples), 

SPE / purge-and-trap (aqueous liquid and drinking water samples), and MSE / solvent extraction (wipe 

samples). 

Method Developed for: Various nonhalogenated VOCs and semivolatile organic compounds in water 

samples 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for analysis of solid, aqueous liquid, drinking water, and 

wipe samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: The estimated MDLs vary with each analyte and range between 2 and 48 

μg/L for aqueous liquid samples. The MDLs in other matrices have not been evaluated. The analytical 

range depends on the target analyte(s) and the instrument used. 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 61 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

Description of Method: This method provides GC conditions for the detection of certain 

nonhalogenated volatile and semivolatile organic compounds. Depending on the analytes of interest, 

samples may be introduced into the GC by a variety of techniques including purge-and-trap, direct 

injection of aqueous liquid samples, and solvent extraction. An appropriate column and temperature 

program are used in the GC to separate the organic compounds. Detection is achieved by a flame 

ionization detector (FID). The method allows the use of packed or capillary columns for the analysis and 

confirmation of the non-halogenated individual analytes. 

Special Considerations: The presence of the analytes listed in the table above should be confirmed by 

either a secondary GC column or by an MS. 

Source: EPA. 2000. “Method 8015C (SW-846): Nonhalogenated Organics Using GC/FID,” Revision 3. 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA-8015c.pdf

5.2.30 EPA Method 8260C (SW-846): Volatile Organic Compounds by Gas 

Chromatography-Mass Spectrometry (GC/MS) 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Acrylonitrile 107-13-1 

Allyl alcohol 107-18-6

Carbon disulfide 75-15-0

2-Chloroethanol 107-07-3

Cyanogen chloride 506-77-4

1,2-Dichloroethane 107-06-2

Ethylene oxide 75-21-8

2-Fluoroethanol 371-62-0 

Methyl acrylonitrile 126-98-7 

Propylene oxide 75-56-9

The following analytes should be determined by this method (and corresponding sample preparation methods) 

only if problems (e.g., insufficient recovery, interferences) occur when using the sample preparation/determinative 

techniques identified for these analytes in Appendix A. 

1,4-Thioxane 15980-15-1

Analysis Purpose: Analyte determination and measurement 

Determinative Technique: GC-MS 

Sample Preparation Method: EPA SW-846 Method 5035A (solid samples), Method 5030C (aqueous 

liquid and drinking water samples), and Method 3570/8290A Appendix A (wipe samples). 

Sample Preparation Technique: Purge-and-trap (solid samples, aqueous liquid, and drinking water 

samples) and MSE / solvent extraction (wipe samples). 

Method Developed for: Applicable to nearly all types of samples, regardless of water content, including 

various air sampling trapping media, ground and surface water, aqueous sludges, caustic liquors, acid 

liquors, waste solvents, oily wastes, mousses (emulsified oil), tars, fibrous wastes, polymeric emulsions, 

filter cakes, spent carbons, spent catalysts, soils, and sediments. 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for analysis of solid, aqueous liquid, drinking water, and/or 

wipe samples. For acrylonitrile, carbon disulfide, 1,2-dichloroethane, and methyl acrylonitrile only, EPA 

Method 524.2 (rather than 8260C) should be used for analysis of drinking water samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: Using standard quadrupole instrumentation and the purge-and-trap, 

estimated quantitation limits are 5 ug/kg (wet weight) for soil/sediment samples and 5 ug/L for ground 

water. Somewhat lower limits may be achieved using an ion trap MS or other instrumentation of 

improved design. No matter which instrument is used, estimated quantitation limits (EQLs) will be 

proportionately higher for sample extracts and samples that require dilution or when a reduced sample 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 62 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

size is used to avoid saturation of the detector. The EQL for an individual analyte is dependent on the 

instrument as well as the choice of sample preparation/introduction method. 

Description of Method: Volatile compounds are introduced into a GC by purge-and-trap or other 

procedures (see Section 1.2 in Method 8260C). The analytes can be introduced directly to a wide-bore 

capillary column or cryofocused on a capillary pre-column before being flash evaporated to a narrow-bore 

capillary for analysis. Alternatively, the effluent from the trap is sent to an injection port operating in the 

split mode for injection to a narrow-bore capillary column. The column is temperature-programmed to 

separate the analytes, which are then detected with a MS interfaced to the GC. Analytes eluted from the 

capillary column are introduced into the MS via a jet separator or a direct connection. 

Source: EPA. 2006. “Method 8260C (SW-846): Volatile Organic Compounds by Gas 

Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry (GC/MS),” Revision 3. http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA8260c.pdf

 

5.2.31 EPA Method 8270D (SW-846): Semivolatile Organic Compounds by Gas 

Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry (GC-MS) 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Chlorfenvinphos 470-90-6 

3-Chloro-1,2-propanediol1 96-24-2 

Chloropicrin2 76-06-2

Chlorosarin 1445-76-7

Chlorosoman 7040-57-5

Chlorpyrifos 2921-88-2 

Chlorpyrifos oxon 5598-15-2 

Crimidine3 535-89-7 

Cyclohexyl sarin (GF) 329-99-7

Dichlorvos 62-73-7

Dicrotophos 141-66-2

Dimethylphosphite 868-85-9

Disulfoton 298-04-4 

Disulfoton sulfone oxon4 2496-91-5 

Disulfoton sulfoxide 2497-07-6 

Disulfoton sulfoxide oxon4 2496-92-6 

1,4-Dithiane 505-29-3 

Ethyldichloroarsine (ED) 598-14-1

Fenamiphos 22224-92-6

Methyl hydrazine 60-34-4

Methyl paraoxon 950-35-6 

Methyl parathion 298-00-0

1-Methylethyl ester ethylphosphonofluoridic acid (GE) 1189-87-3 

Mevinphos 7786-34-7

Monocrotophos 6923-22-4 

Mustard, nitrogen (HN-1) [bis(2-chloroethyl)ethylamine] 538-07-8 

Mustard, nitrogen (HN-2) [2,2’-dichloro-Nmethyldiethylamine N,N-bis(2-chloroethyl)methylamine] 51-75-2

Mustard, nitrogen (HN-3) [tris(2-chloroethyl)amine] 555-77-1 

Mustard, sulfur / Mustard gas (HD)5 505-60-2

Nicotine compounds 54-11-5

Paraoxon 311-45-5 

Parathion 56-38-2 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 63 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 64 October 2010

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Phencyclidine 77-10-1

Phorate 298-02-2

Phorate sulfone 2588-04-7 

Phorate sulfone oxon4 2588-06-9 

Phorate sulfoxide 2588-03-6 

Phorate sulfoxide oxon4 2588-05-8 

Phosphamidon 13171-21-6 

R 33 (VR) [methylphosphonothioic acid, S-[2-

(diethylamino)ethyl] O-2-methylpropyl ester] 159939-87-4 

Sarin (GB)5 107-44-8

Soman (GD) 96-64-0

Strychnine 57-24-9

Tabun (GA) 77-81-6

Tetraethyl pyrophosphate 107-49-3

Tetramethylenedisulfotetramine2 80-12-6 

1,4-Thioxane6 15980-15-1 

Trimethyl phosphite2 121-45-9

VE [phosphonothioic acid, ethyl-, S-(2-

(diethylamino)ethyl) O-ethyl ester] 21738-25-0

VG [phosphonothioic acid, S-(2-(diethylamino)ethyl) 

O,O-diethyl ester] 78-53-5

VM [phosphonothioic acid, methyl-, S-(2-

(diethylamino)ethyl) O-ethyl ester] 21770-86-5

VX [O-ethyl-S-(2-diisopropylaminoethyl)methylphosphonothiolate]5 50782-69-9

The following analyte should be determined by this method only if liquid chromatography-mass spectrometry (LCMS) [electrospray] procedures are not available to the laboratory. Sample preparation methods should remain the 

same. 

BZ [Quinuclidinyl benzilate]1 6581-06-2 

Diisopropyl methylphosphonate (DIMP) 1445-75-6 

Dimethylphosphoramidic acid1 33876-51-6 

EA2192 [Diisopropylaminoethyl 

methylthiolophosphonate]1 73207-98-4 

Ethyl methylphosphonic acid (EMPA)1 1832-53-7 

Isopropyl methylphosphonic acid (IMPA)1 1832-54-8 

Methylphosphonic acid (MPA)1 993-13-5 

Pinacolyl methyl phosphonic acid (PMPA)1 616-52-4 1

 For this analyte, SW-846 Method 8270D must be modified to include a derivatization step. 

2

 If problems occur with analyses, lower the injection temperature. 

3

 If problems occur when using this method, it is recommended that SW-846 Method 8321B be used. Sample 

preparation methods should remain the same. 

4

 If problems occur when using this method for measurement of oxon compounds, analysts should consider use of 

procedures included in "Oxidation of selected organophosphate pesticides during chlorination of simulated drinking 

water." Water Research. 2009. 43(2): 522–534. http://www.sciencedirect.com/science/journal/00431354 5 For this analyte, refer to EPA SW-846 Method 8271 for GC-MS conditions.

6

 If problems occur when using this method, it is recommended that SW-846 Method 8260C and appropriate 

corresponding sample preparation procedures (i.e., Method 5035A for solid samples and Method 5030C for 

aqueous liquid and drinking water samples) be used. 

Analysis Purpose: Analyte determination and measurement 

Determinative Technique: GC-MS 

Sample Preparation Method: EPA SW-846 Method 3541/3545A (solid samples), Method 

3520C/3535A (aqueous liquid and drinking water samples), and Method 3570/8290A Appendix A or 
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

NIOSH 9102 (wipe samples). Refer to Appendix A for which of these preparation methods should be 

used for a particular analyte/sample type combination. 

Sample Preparation Technique: Automated Soxhlet extraction / PFE (solid samples), CLLE / SPE 

(aqueous liquid and drinking water samples), and MSE / solvent extraction / acid digestion (wipe 

samples). 

Method Developed for: Semivolatile organic compounds in extracts prepared from many types of solid 

waste matrices, soils, air sampling media and water samples 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for analysis of solid, aqueous liquid, drinking water, and/or 

wipe samples. Please note: drinking water samples for dichlorvos, disulfoton, disulfoton sulfoxide, 

fenamiphos, and mevinphos should be prepared and analyzed by EPA Method 525.2; aqueous liquid and 

drinking water samples for chloropicrin should be prepared and analyzed by EPA Method 551.1; all other 

analyte/sample type combinations should be analyzed by this method (SW-846 8270D). 

Detection and Quantitation: The EDLs vary with each analyte and range between 10 and 1000 μg/L for 

aqueous liquid samples and 660 and 3300 μg/kg for soil samples. The analytical range depends on the 

target analyte(s) and the instrument used. 

Description of Method: Samples are prepared for analysis by GC-MS using the appropriate sample 

preparation and, if necessary, sample cleanup procedures. Semivolatile compounds are introduced into 

the GC-MS by injecting the sample extract into a GC with a narrow-bore fused-silica capillary column. 

The GC column is temperature-programmed to separate the analytes, which are then detected with a MS 

connected to the GC. Analytes eluted from the capillary column are introduced into the MS. For the 

determination of BZ, 3-chloro-1,2-propanediol, dimethylphosphoramidic acid, EA2192, EMPA, IMPA, 

MPA, and PMPA, a derivatization step is required prior to injection into the GC-MS. The phosphonic 

acids require derivatization with a trimethylsilyl agent and 3-chloro-1,2-propanediol requires 

derivatization with a heptafluorobutyryl agent. 

Special Considerations: Refer to footnotes provided in analyte table above for special considerations 

that should be applied when measuring specific analytes. Procedures for derivatization are described in 

the following references: 

Black et al. 1994. “Application of gas chromatography-mass spectrometry and gas chromatographytandem mass spectrometry to the analysis of chemical warfare samples, found to contain residues of the 

nerve agent sarin, sulphur mustard and their degradation products.” Journal of Chromatography A. 

662(2): 301–321. http://www.sciencedirect.com/science/journal/00219673

Brereton, P., Kelly, J., Crews, C., Honour, S., and Wood, R. 2001. “Determination of 3-Chloro-1,2-

Propanediol in Foods and Food Ingredients by Gas Chromatography with Mass Spectrometric Detection: 

Collaborative Study.” Journal of AOAC International. 84(2): 455–465. http://www.atyponlink.com/AOAC/doi/abs/10.5555/jaoi.2001.84.2.455

Divinova, V., Svejkovska, B., Dolezal, M., and Velisek, J. 2004. “Determination of Free and Bound 3-

Chloropropane-1,2-diol by Gas Chromatography with Mass Spectrometric Detection using Deuterated 3-

Chloropropane-1,2-diol as Internal Standard.” Czech Journal of Food Sciences. 22(5): 182–189. 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/Czech_J_Food_Sci-22(5)_pg182-189.pdf

Retho, C., and Blanchard, F. 2005. “Determination of 3-chloropropane-1,2-diol as its 1,3-dioxolane 

derivative at the μg kg-1 level: Application to a wide range of foods.” Food Additives & Contaminants: 

Part A Chemistry, Analysis, Control, Exposure & Risk Assessment. 22(12): 1189–1197. 

http://www.informaworld.com/smpp/content~db=all~content=a727751832 

White et al. 1992. “Determination of 3-Quinuclidinyl Benzilate (QNB) and Its Major Methoabolites in 

Urine by Isotope Dilution Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry.” Journal of Analytical Toxicology. 

16: 182–187. http://www.jatox.com/shop/shopexd.asp?id=4062

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 65 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

Source: EPA. 1998. “Method 8270D (SW-846): Semivolatile Organic Compounds by Gas 

Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry (GC/MS),” Revision 4. http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA8270d.pdf

5.2.32 EPA Method 8290A, Appendix A (SW-846): Procedure for the Collection, Handling, 

Analysis, and Reporting of Wipe Tests Performed within the Laboratory

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Acrylamide 79-06-1

Acrylonitrile 107-13-1

Aldicarb (Temik) 116-06-3

Aldicarb sulfone 1646-88-4 

Aldicarb sulfoxide 1646-87-3 

4-Aminopyridine 504-24-5 

BZ [Quinuclidinyl benzilate] 6581-06-2 

Brodifacoum 56073-10-0 

Bromadiolone 28772-56-7 

Carfentanil 59708-52-0 

Carbofuran (Furadan) 1563-66-2

Chlorfenvinphos 470-90-6 

3-Chloro-1,2-propanediol 96-24-2 

Chloropicrin 76-06-2

Chlorosarin 1445-76-7

Chlorosoman 7040-57-5

Chlorpyrifos 2921-88-2 

Chlorpyrifos oxon 5598-15-2 

Crimidine 535-89-7 

Cyclohexyl sarin (GF) 329-99-7

Dichlorvos 62-73-7

Dicrotophos 141-66-2

Diesel range organics NA 

Diisopropyl methylphosphonate (DIMP) 1445-75-6 

Dimethylphosphite 868-85-9

Dimethylphosphoramidic acid 33876-51-6 

Diphacinone 82-66-6 

Disulfoton 298-04-4 

Disulfoton sulfone oxon1 2496-91-5 

Disulfoton sulfoxide 2497-07-6 

Disulfoton sulfoxide oxon1 2496-92-6 

1,4-Dithiane 505-29-3 

EA2192 [Diisopropylaminoethyl 

methylthiolophosphonate] 73207-98-4 

Ethyl methylphosphonic acid (EMPA) 1832-53-7 

N-Ethyldiethanolamine (EDEA) 139-87-7 

Fenamiphos 22224-92-6

Fentanyl 437-38-7 

Formaldehyde 50-00-0 

Gasoline range organics NA 

Hexahydro-1,3,5-trinitro-1,3,5-triazine (RDX) 121-82-4 

Hexamethylenetriperoxidediamine (HMTD) 283-66-9 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 66 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 67 October 2010

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Isopropyl methylphosphonic acid (IMPA) 1832-54-8 

Kerosene 64742-81-0 

Methomyl 16752-77-5 

Methyl acrylonitrile 126-98-7 

Methyl hydrazine 60-34-4

Methyl paraoxon 950-35-6 

Methyl parathion 298-00-0

N-Methyldiethanolamine (MDEA) 105-59-9 

1-Methylethyl ester ethylphosphonofluoridic acid (GE) 1189-87-3 

Methylphosphonic acid (MPA) 993-13-5 

Mevinphos 7786-34-7

Monocrotophos 6923-22-4 

Mustard, nitrogen (HN-1) [bis(2-chloroethyl)ethylamine] 538-07-8 

Mustard, nitrogen (HN-2) [2,2’-dichloro-Nmethyldiethylamine N,N-bis(2-chloroethyl)methylamine] 51-75-2

Mustard, nitrogen (HN-3) [tris(2-chloroethyl)amine] 555-77-1 

Mustard, sulfur / Mustard gas (HD) 505-60-2

Nicotine compounds 54-11-5

Octahydro-1,3,5,7-tetranitro-1,3,5,7-tetrazocine (HMX) 2691-41-0 

Oxamyl 23135-22-0

Paraoxon 311-45-5 

Parathion 56-38-2 

Pentaerythritol tetranitrate (PETN) 78-11-5 

Phencyclidine 77-10-1

Phorate 298-02-2

Phorate sulfone 2588-04-7 

Phorate sulfone oxon1 2588-06-9 

Phorate sulfoxide 2588-03-6 

Phorate sulfoxide oxon1 2588-05-8 

Phosphamidon 13171-21-6 

Pinacolyl methyl phosphonic acid (PMPA) 616-52-4 

R 33 (VR) [methylphosphonothioic acid, S-[2-

(diethylamino)ethyl] O-2-methylpropyl ester] 159939-87-4 

Sarin (GB) 107-44-8

Soman (GD) 96-64-0

Strychnine 57-24-9

Tabun (GA) 77-81-6

Tetraethyl pyrophosphate 107-49-3

Tetramethylenedisulfotetramine 80-12-6 

Thiodiglycol (TDG) 111-48-8

Thiofanox 39196-18-4 

1,4-Thioxane 15980-15-1 

Triethanolamine (TEA) 102-71-6 

Trimethyl phosphite 121-45-9

1,3,5-Trinitrobenzene (1,3,5-TNB) 99-35-4

2,4,6-Trinitrotoluene (2,4,6-TNT) 118-96-7

VE [phosphonothioic acid, ethyl-, S-(2-

(diethylamino)ethyl) O-ethyl ester] 21738-25-0

VG [phosphonothioic acid, S-(2-(diethylamino)ethyl) 

O,O-diethyl ester] 78-53-5
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 68 October 2010

Analyte(s) CAS RN

VM [phosphonothioic acid, methyl-, S-(2-

(diethylamino)ethyl) O-ethyl ester] 21770-86-5

VX [O-ethyl-S-(2-diisopropylaminoethyl)methylphosphonothiolate] 50782-69-9

White phosphorus 12185-10-3 1

 If problems occur when using this method for measurement of oxon compounds, analysts should consider use of 

procedures included in "Oxidation of selected organophosphate pesticides during chlorination of simulated drinking 

water." Water Research. 2009. 43(2): 522–534. http://www.sciencedirect.com/science/journal/00431354

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation 

Sample Preparation Technique: Solvent extraction 

Determinative Technique: GC-NPD / GC-FID / GC-MS / HPLC

Determinative Method: EPA OW Method 300.1 Revision 1.0; EPA SW-846 Methods 7580, 8015C, 

8270D, 8315A, 8316, 8318A, 8321B, and 8330B. Refer to Appendix A for which of these determinative 

methods should be used for a particular analyte.

Method Developed for: Evaluation of surface contamination by 2,3,7,8-substituted PCDD and PCDF 

congeners 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation of wipe samples. 

Description of Method: A surface area of 2 inches by 1 foot is wiped with glass fiber paper saturated 

with distilled-in-glass acetone. One wipe is used per designated area. Wipes are combined into a single 

composite sample in an extraction jar and solvent extracted using a wrist action shaker. 

Special Considerations: Refer to footnote provided in analyte table above for special considerations 

that should be applied when measuring specific analytes. The solvent systems described in this method 

extraction have been evaluated for PCDD and PCDF congeners only. Other analytes may require 

different solvent systems for optimal sample extraction. 

Source: EPA. 2007. “Method 8290A, Appendix A (SW-846): Procedure for the Collection, Handling, 

Analysis, and Reporting of Wipe Tests Performed within the Laboratory,” Revision 1. 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA-8290a.pdf

5.2.33 EPA Method 8315A (SW-846): Determination of Carbonyl Compounds by High 

Performance Liquid Chromatography (HPLC) 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Formaldehyde 50-00-0

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation and/or analyte determination and measurement

Sample Preparation Technique: Solvent extraction (solid and aqueous liquid samples) and MSE / 

solvent extraction by EPA SW-846 Method 3570/8290A Appendix A (wipe samples) 

Determinative Technique: HPLC 

Method Developed for: Free carbonyl compounds in aqueous, soil, waste, and stack samples 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and analysis of solid, aqueous liquid, and 

wipe samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: The MDL for formaldehyde varies depending on sample conditions and 

instrumentation, but is approximately 6.2 μg/L for aqueous liquid samples. 

Description of Method: A measured volume of aqueous liquid sample (approximately 100 mL), or an 

appropriate amount of solids extract (approximately 25 g), is buffered to pH 3 and derivatized with 2,4-
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

dinitrophenylhydrazine (2,4-DNPH). Using the appropriate extraction technique, the derivatives are 

extracted using methylene chloride and the extracts are exchanged with acetonitrile prior to HPLC 

analysis. HPLC conditions are described permitting the separation and measurement of various carbonyl 

compounds in the extract by absorbance detection at 360 nm. If formaldehyde is the only analyte of 

interest, the aqueous liquid sample and/or solid sample extract should be buffered to pH 5.0 to minimize 

the formation of artifact formaldehyde. 

Source: EPA. 1996. “Method 8315A (SW-846): Determination of Carbonyl Compounds by High 

Performance Liquid Chromatography (HPLC),” Revision 1. http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA8315a.pdf

5.2.34 EPA Method 8316 (SW-846): Acrylamide, Acrylonitrile and Acrolein by High 

Performance Liquid Chromatography (HPLC) 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Acrylamide 79-06-1

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation and/or analyte determination and measurement

Sample Preparation Technique: Direct injection (aqueous liquid and drinking water samples), water 

extraction (solid), and MSE / solvent extraction by EPA SW-846 Method 3570/8290A Appendix A (wipe 

samples) 

Determinative Technique: HPLC 

Method Developed for: Acrylamide, acrylonitrile, and acrolein in water samples 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and/or analysis of solid, aqueous liquid, 

drinking water, and wipe samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: Acrylamide has an MDL of 10 μg/L; acrylonitrile has an MDL of 20 μg/L. 

Description of Method: Samples are analyzed by HPLC. A 200-μL aliquot is injected onto a C18

reverse-phase column, and compounds in the effluent are detected with a UV detector. Solid samples 

should be water extracted prior to injection. Aqueous liquid and drinking water samples can be directly 

injected. 

Source: EPA. 1994. “Method 8316 (SW-846): Acrylamide, Acrylonitrile and Acrolein by High 

Performance Liquid Chromatography (HPLC),” Revision 0. http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA-8316.pdf

5.2.35 EPA Method 8318A (SW-846): N-Methylcarbamates by High Performance Liquid 

Chromatography (HPLC) 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Aldicarb (Temik) 116-06-3

Aldicarb sulfone 1646-88-4 

Aldicarb sulfoxide 1646-87-3 

Carbofuran (Furadan) 1563-66-2

Methomyl 16752-77-5 

Oxamyl 23135-22-0

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation and/or analyte determination and measurement

Sample Preparation Technique: Solvent extraction (solid samples), and MSE / solvent extraction by 

EPA SW-846 Method 3570/8290A Appendix A (wipe samples) 

Determinative Technique: HPLC 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 69 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

Method Developed for: N-methylcarbamates in soil, water, and waste matrices 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and/or analysis of solid and wipe samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: The estimated MDLs vary with each analyte and range from 1.7 to 9.4 

μg/L for aqueous samples and 10 to 50 μg/kg for soil samples. 

Description of Method: N-methylcarbamates are extracted from aqueous liquid samples with methylene 

chloride, and from soils, oily solid waste, and oils with acetonitrile. The extract solvent is exchanged to 

methanol/ethylene glycol, and the extract is cleaned using a C18 cartridge, filtered, and eluted on a C18

analytical column. After separation, the target analytes are hydrolyzed and derivatized post-column, then 

quantified fluorometrically. The sensitivity of the method usually depends on the level of interferences 

present, rather than on instrument conditions. Waste samples with a high level of extractable fluorescent 

compounds are expected to yield significantly higher detection limits. 

Source: EPA. 2000. “Method 8318A (SW-846): N-Methylcarbamates by High Performance Liquid 

Chromatography (HPLC),” Revision 1. http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA-8318a.pdf

5.2.36 EPA Method 8321B (SW-846): Solvent-Extractable Nonvolatile Compounds by 

High Performance Liquid Chromatography-Thermospray-Mass Spectrometry 

(HPLC-TS-MS) or Ultraviolet (UV) Detection 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Brodifacoum 56073-10-0 

Bromadiolone 28772-56-7

BZ [Quinuclidinyl benzilate]1 6581-06-2 

Carfentanil 59708-52-0 

Diisopropyl methylphosphonate (DIMP)2 1445-75-6 

Dimethylphosphoramidic acid1 33876-51-6 

Diphacinone 82-66-6 

EA2192 [Diisopropylaminoethyl 

methylthiolophosphonate]1 73207-98-4 

Ethyl methylphosphonic acid (EMPA)1 1832-53-7 

N-Ethyldiethanolamine (EDEA) 139-87-7 

Fentanyl 437-38-7 

Isopropyl methylphosphonic acid (IMPA)1 1832-54-8 

N-Methyldiethanolamine (MDEA) 105-59-9 

Methylphosphonic acid (MPA)1 993-13-5 

Pinacolyl methyl phosphonic acid (PMPA)1 616-52-4 

Thiodiglycol (TDG) 111-48-8 

Thiofanox 39196-18-4 

Triethanolamine (TEA) 102-71-6 

The following analyte should be determined by this method only if problems (e.g., insufficient recovery, 

interferences) occur when using SW-846 Method 8270D. Sample preparation methods should remain the same as 

those listed in Appendix A. 

Crimidine3 535-89-7 1

 LC-MS (electrospray) procedures are preferred for these analytes; however, if this technique is not available to the 

laboratory, GC-MS procedures using derivatization based on SW-846 Method 8270D may be used. Sample 

preparation methods should remain the same. Both electrospray LC-MS and GC-MS derivatization procedures are 

currently under development. 2 If problems occur with the analysis of DIMP using EPA SW-846 Method 8321B, use SW-846 Method 8270D. 3

 This analyte needs to be determined using a wavelength of 230 nm. 

Analysis Purpose: Analyte determination and measurement

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 70 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

Determinative Technique: HPLC 

Sample Preparation Method: EPA SW-846 Method 3541/3545A (solid samples), 3520C/3535A 

(aqueous liquid and drinking water samples), and Method 3570/8290A Appendix A (wipe samples). For 

thiofanox, EPA Method 531.2 (rather than Method 3520C/3535A) should be used for preparation of 

drinking water samples. Refer to Appendix A for which of these preparation methods should be used for 

a particular analyte/sample type combination. 

Sample Preparation Technique: Automated Soxhlet extraction / PFE (solid samples), CLLE / SPE 

(aqueous liquid and drinking water samples), and MSE / solvent extraction (wipe samples). For 

thiofanox, direct injection should be used for preparation of drinking water samples. 

Method Developed for: Solvent-extractable nonvolatile compounds, including dyes, organophosphorus 

compounds, phenoxyacid herbicides, and carbamates in solid, and water samples 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for analysis of solid, aqueous liquid, drinking water, and/or 

wipe samples. Aqueous liquid samples for DIMP, EMPA, IMPA, MPA, and PMPA should be analyzed 

using ASTM D7597-09; aqueous liquid samples for EDEA, MDEA, and TEA should be prepared and 

analyzed using ASTM D7599-09; aqueous liquid samples for bromadiolone should be prepared and 

analyzed using ASTM D7600-09; aqueous liquid samples for thiodiglycol should be prepared and 

analyzed using ASTM D7598-09. Drinking water samples for DIMP should be analyzed using EPA 

Method 538. 

Description of Method: This method provides reversed-phase HPLC, thermospray (TSP) MS, and UV 

conditions for detection of the target analytes. Sample extracts can be analyzed by direct injection into 

the TSP or onto a LC-TSP interface. A gradient elution program is used to separate the compounds. 

Primary analysis may be performed by UV detection; however, positive results should be confirmed by 

TSP-MS. Quantitative analysis may be performed by either TSP-MS or UV detection, using either an 

external or internal standard approach. TSP-MS detection may be performed in either a negative 

ionization (discharge electrode) mode or a positive ionization mode, with a single quadrupole MS. The 

use of MS-MS techniques is an option. The analytical range and detection limits vary depending on the 

target analyte and instrument used. 

Special Considerations: Refer to footnotes provided in analyte table above for special considerations 

that should be applied when measuring specific analytes. 

Source: EPA. 1998. “Method 8321B (SW-846): Solvent-Extractable Nonvolatile Compounds by High 

Performance Liquid Chromatography-Thermospray-Mass Spectrometry (HPLC-TSP-MS) or Ultraviolet 

(UV) Detection,” Revision 2. http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA-8321b.pdf

5.2.37 EPA Method 8330B (SW-846): Nitroaromatics and Nitramines by High Performance 

Liquid Chromatography (HPLC)

Analyte(s) CAS RN

4-Aminopyridine 504-24-5 

Hexahydro-1,3,5-trinitro-1,3,5-triazine (RDX) 121-82-4 

Hexamethylenetriperoxidediamine (HMTD) 283-66-9 

Octahydro-1,3,5,7-tetranitro-1,3,5,7-tetrazocine (HMX) 2691-41-0 

Pentaerythritol tetranitrate (PETN) 78-11-5 

1,3,5-Trinitrobenzene (1,3,5-TNB) 99-35-4

2,4,6-Trinitrotoluene (2,4,6-TNT) 118-96-7

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 71 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation and/or analyte determination and measurement 

Sample Preparation Technique: Solvent extraction or direct injection (solid samples), SPE by EPA 

SW-846 Method 3535A (aqueous liquid and drinking water samples), and MSE / solvent extraction by 

EPA SW-846 Method 3570/8290A Appendix A (wipe samples) 

Method Developed for: Trace analysis of explosives and propellant residues in water, soil, or sediment 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and/or analysis of solid, aqueous liquid, 

drinking water, and wipe samples. Aqueous liquid and drinking water samples are prepared using 

Methods 3535A or 8330B prior to analysis. 

Detection and Quantitation: The detection limits, ranges, and interferences depend on the target 

compound 

Description of Method: This method is intended for the trace analysis of explosives and propellant 

residues by HPLC using a dual wavelength UV detector in a water, soil, or sediment matrix. All of the 

compounds listed in this method are either used in the manufacture of explosives or propellants, or they 

are the degradation products of compounds used for that purpose. Samples are prepared for analysis by 

high performance liquid chromatography – ultraviolet (HPLC-UV) using the appropriate sample 

preparation technique (solid phase extraction by 3535A or solvent extraction by 8330B) and, if necessary, 

sample cleanup procedures. Direct injection of diluted and filtered water samples can be used for water 

samples of higher concentration. Soil and sediment samples are extracted using acetonitrile in an 

ultrasonic bath, filtered and chromatographed. 

Source: EPA. 2006. “Method 8330B (SW-846): Nitroaromatics, Nitramines, and Nitrate Esters by High 

Performance Liquid Chromatography (HPLC),” Revision 2. http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA8330b.pdf

5.2.38 EPA CLP ISM01.2 Cyanide: Analytical Methods for Total Cyanide Analysis 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Cyanide, Total 57-12-5

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation, and analyte determination and measurement

Sample Preparation Technique: Midi- or micro-distillation 

Determinative Technique: Visible spectrophotometry 

Method Developed for: Metals in water, sediment, sludge, and soil 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and analysis of solid, aqueous liquid, and 

wipe samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: The method quantitation limits are 10 μg/L for aqueous samples and 0.5 

mg/kg for solid samples. 

Description of Method: Cyanide as hydrocyanic acid is released from cyanide complexes by means of 

reflux-distillation, using either a midi- or micro-distillation process, and absorbed in a scrubber containing 

sodium hydroxide solution. The cyanide ion in the absorbing solution is then determined 

spectrophotometrically. In the semiautomated spectrophotometric measurement, cyanide is converted to 

cyanogen chloride without hydrolyzing to the cyanate, by reaction with chloramine-T, at a pH less than 8. 

After the reaction is complete, color is formed on the addition of pyridine-barbituric acid reagent, and 

absorbance is read between 570 and 580 nanometers (nm). To obtain colors of comparable intensity, it is 

essential to have the same salt content in both the sample and the standards. 

Source: EPA Contract Laboratory Program (CLP). “ISM01.2: Exhibit D – Part D: Analytical Methods 

for Total Cyanide Analysis.” http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA-ISM01.2.pdf

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 72 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

5.2.39 EPA Region 7 RLAB Method 3135.2I: Cyanide, Total and Amenable in Aqueous 

and Solid Samples Automated Colorimetric with Manual Digestion 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Cyanide, Amenable to chlorination NA

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation, and analyte determination and measurement 

Sample Preparation Technique: Acid digestion followed by distillation 

Determinative Technique: Visible spectrophotometry 

Method Developed for: Cyanide in drinking, ground, and surface waters, domestic and industrial waste 

waters, sediments and solid waste 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and analysis of solid, aqueous liquid, 

drinking water, and wipe samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: The applicable range is 0.003 to 0.500 mg/L cyanide in the distillate. This 

range can be expanded by sample dilution, either by using less sample for distillation or diluting the 

distillate. 

 

Description of Method: This method detects inorganic cyanides that are present as either simple soluble 

salts or complex radicals. It may be used to determine values for both total cyanide and cyanide 

amenable to chlorination (also known as available cyanide). Cyanide in the sample released as 

hydrocyanic acid by refluxing the sample with strong acid. The hydrocyanic acid is distilled and 

collected in an absorber-scrubber containing sodium hydroxide solution. The cyanide ion in the 

absorbing solution is then determined by automated colorimetry. For determination of cyanide amenable 

to chlorination, a portion of the sample is chlorinated using sodium hypochlorite at a pH > 11 to 

decompose the cyanide. Cyanide levels are then determined in both the chlorinated sample portion of the 

sample and a portion of the sample that has not been chlorinated using the total cyanide method. 

Cyanides amenable to chlorination are then calculated by difference between unchlorinated and the 

chlorinated aliquots of the sample. 

Special Considerations: Alternate cyanide analyzer equipment may be used, provided it is used 

according to the procedures described and the laboratory can demonstrate equivalent performance.

Source: EPA Region 7. 2008. “RLAB Method 3135.2I: Cyanide, Total and Amenable in Aqueous and 

Soil Samples Automated Colorimetric with Manual Digestion.” http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA3135.2I.pdf 

5.2.40 IO [Inorganic] Compendium Method IO-3.1: Selection, Preparation, and Extraction 

of Filter Material 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Ammonium metavanadate (analyze as total vanadium) 7803-55-6 

Arsenic, Total 7440-38-2 

Arsenic trioxide (analyze as total arsenic) 1327-53-3 

Calcium arsenate (analyze as total arsenic) 7778-44-1 

2-Chlorovinylarsonous acid (2-CVAA) 85090-33-1 

Lead arsenate (analyze as total arsenic) 7645-25-2 

Lewisite 1 (L-1) [2-chlorovinyldichloroarsine] (analyze as total arsenic) 541-25-3 

Lewisite 2 (L-2) [bis(2-chlorovinyl)chloroarsine] (analyze as total arsenic) 40334-69-8 

Lewisite 3 (L-3) [tris(2-chlorovinyl)arsine] (analyze as total arsenic) 40334-70-1 

Lewisite oxide 1306-02-1 

Osmium tetroxide (analyze as total osmium) 20816-12-0 

Sodium arsenite (analyze as total arsenic) 7784-46-5 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 73 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 74 October 2010

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Thallium sulfate (analyze as total thallium) 10031-59-1 

Vanadium pentoxide (analyze as total vanadium) 1314-62-1 

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation 

Sample Preparation Technique: Acid extraction 

Determinative Technique: ICP-AES / ICP-MS

Determinative Method: EPA Method IO-3.4 or Method IO-3.5. Osmium tetroxide should be analyzed 

by Method IO-3.4. 

Method Developed for: Particulate metals in air. 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation of air samples. 

Description of Method: This method supports determination of arsenic trioxide, lewisite, lewisite 

degradation products, calcium and lead arsenate, and sodium arsenite as total arsenic. Thallium sulfate is 

determined as total thallium and ammonium metavanadate and vanadium pentoxide are determined as 

total vanadium. A subsample (one-ninth of the overall filter) is obtained by cutting a strip from the filter 

used to collect the sample. The filter strip is extracted using a hydrochloric/nitric acid mix and 

microwave or hotplate heating. The extract is filtered, worked up to 20 mL, and analyzed using either 

Method IO-3.4 or Method IO-3.5. 

Source: EPA. 1999. “IO Compendium Method IO-3.1: Compendium of Methods for the Determination 

of Inorganic Compounds in Ambient Air: Selection, Preparation and Extraction of Filter Material.” 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA-IO-3.1.pdf

5.2.41 IO [Inorganic] Compendium Method IO-3.4: Determination of Metals in Ambient 

Particulate Matter Using Inductively Coupled Plasma (ICP) Spectroscopy 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Ammonium metavanadate (analyze as total vanadium) 7803-55-6 

Arsenic, Total 7440-38-2 

Arsenic trioxide (analyze as total arsenic) 1327-53-3 

Calcium arsenate (analyze as total arsenic) 7778-44-1 

2-Chlorovinylarsonous acid (2-CVAA) 85090-33-1 

Lead arsenate (analyze as total arsenic) 7645-25-2 

Lewisite 1 (L-1) [2-chlorovinyldichloroarsine] (analyze as total arsenic) 541-25-3 

Lewisite 2 (L-2) [bis(2-chlorovinyl)chloroarsine] (analyze as total arsenic) 40334-69-8 

Lewisite 3 (L-3) [tris(2-chlorovinyl)arsine] (analyze as total arsenic) 40334-70-1 

Lewisite oxide 1306-02-1 

Osmium tetroxide (analyze as total osmium) 20816-12-0

Sodium arsenite (analyze as total arsenic) 7784-46-5 

Thallium sulfate (analyze as total thallium) 10031-59-1 

Vanadium pentoxide (analyze as total vanadium) 1314-62-1 

Analysis Purpose: Analyte determination and measurement 

Determinative Technique: ICP-AES 

Sample Preparation Method: EPA Method IO-3.1 

Sample Preparation Technique: Acid extraction 

Method Developed for: Metals in ambient particulate matter 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for analysis of air samples. 
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

Description of Method: This method determines arsenic trioxide, lewisite, lewisite degradation 

products, calcium and lead arsenate, and sodium arsenite as total arsenic. Osmium tetroxide is 

determined as total osmium, thallium sulfate is determined as total thallium, and ammonium 

metavanadate and vanadium pentoxide are determined as total vanadium. Ambient air is sampled by 

high-volume filters using Method IO-2.1 (a sampling method) and the filters are extracted by Method IO3.1. Detection limits, ranges, and interference corrections are dependent on the analyte and the 

instrument used. 

Special Considerations: Laboratory testing is currently underway for speciation of lewisite 1 using GCMS techniques. Concerns have been raised regarding the use of nitric acid when analyzing samples for 

osmium tetroxide; hydrochloric acid should be considered and evaluated as a possible alternative. 

Source: EPA. 1999. “IO Compendium Method IO-3.4: Compendium of Methods for the Determination 

of Inorganic Compounds in Ambient Air: Determination of Metals in Ambient Particulate Matter Using 

Inductively Coupled Plasma (ICP) Spectroscopy.” http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA-IO-3.4.pdf

EPA. 1999. “IO Compendium Method IO-2.1: Compendium of Methods for the Determination of 

Inorganic Compounds in Ambient Air: Sampling of Ambient Air for Total Suspended Particulate Matter 

(SPM) and PM10 Using High Volume (HV) Sampler.” http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA-IO-2.1.pdf 

5.2.42 IO [Inorganic] Compendium Method IO-3.5: Determination of Metals in Ambient 

Particulate Matter Using Inductively Coupled Plasma/Mass Spectrometry (ICP-MS) 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Ammonium metavanadate (analyze as total vanadium) 7803-55-6 

Arsenic, Total 7440-38-2 

Arsenic trioxide (analyze as total arsenic) 1327-53-3 

Calcium arsenate (analyze as total arsenic) 7778-44-1 

2-Chlorovinylarsonous acid (2-CVAA) 85090-33-1 

Lead arsenate (analyze as total arsenic) 7645-25-2 

Lewisite 1 (L-1) [2-chlorovinyldichloroarsine] (analyze as total arsenic) 541-25-3 

Lewisite 2 (L-2) [bis(2-chlorovinyl)chloroarsine] (analyze as total arsenic) 40334-69-8 

Lewisite 3 (L-3) [tris(2-chlorovinyl)arsine] (analyze as total arsenic) 40334-70-1 

Lewisite oxide 1306-02-1 

Sodium arsenite (analyze as total arsenic) 7784-46-5 

Thallium sulfate (analyze as total thallium) 10031-59-1 

Vanadium pentoxide (analyze as total vanadium) 1314-62-1 

Analysis Purpose: Analyte determination and measurement 

Determinative Technique: ICP-MS 

Sample Preparation Method: EPA Method IO-3.1 

Sample Preparation Technique: Acid extraction 

Method Developed for: Metals in ambient particulate matter 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for analysis of air samples. 

Description of Method: This method determines arsenic trioxide, lewisite, lewisite degradation 

products, calcium and lead arsenate, and sodium arsenite as total arsenic. Thallium sulfate is determined 

as total thallium and ammonium metavanadate and vanadium pentoxide are determined as total vanadium. 

Ambient air is sampled by high-volume filters using Method IO-2.1 (a sampling method). The filters are 

extracted by Method IO-3.1. Detection limits, ranges, and interference corrections are dependent on the 

analyte and the instrument used. 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 75 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

Special Considerations: Laboratory testing is currently underway for speciation of lewisite 1 using GCMS techniques. 

Source: EPA. 1999. “IO Compendium Method IO-3.5: Compendium of Methods for the Determination 

of Inorganic Compounds in Ambient Air: Determination of Metals in Ambient Particulate Matter Using 

Inductively Coupled Plasma/Mass Spectrometry (ICP/MS).” http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA-IO3.5.pdf

EPA. 1999. “IO Compendium Method IO-2.1: Compendium of Methods for the Determination of 

Inorganic Compounds in Ambient Air: Sampling of Ambient Air for Total Suspended Particulate Matter 

(SPM) and PM10 Using High Volume (HV) Sampler.” http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA-IO-2.1.pdf 

5.2.43 IO [Inorganic] Compendium Method IO-5: Sampling and Analysis for Vapor and 

Particle Phase Mercury in Ambient Air Utilizing Cold Vapor Atomic Fluorescence 

Spectrometry (CVAFS) 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Mercury, Total 7439-97-6

Methoxyethylmercuric acetate (analyze as total mercury) 151-38-2 

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation, and analyte determination and measurement 

Sample Preparation Technique: Acid digestion for particulate mercury 

Determinative Technique: Cold vapor atomic fluorescence spectrometry (CVAFS) 

Method Developed for: Vapor and particle phase mercury in ambient air 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and analysis of air samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: The detection limits are 30 pg/m3 for particulate mercury and 45 pg/m3 for 

vapor phase mercury. Detection limits, analytical range, and interferences are dependent on the 

instrument used. 

Description of Method: Vapor phase mercury is collected using gold-coated glass bead traps at a flow 

rate of 0.3 L/min. The traps are directly desorbed onto a second (analytical) trap. The mercury desorbed 

from the analytical trap is determined by Atomic Fluorescence Spectrometry. Particulate mercury is 

sampled on glass-fiber filters at a flow rate of 30 L/min. The filters are extracted with nitric acid and 

microwave heating. The extract is oxidized with bromine chloride, then reduced with stannous chloride 

and purged from solution onto a gold-coated glass bead trap. This trap is desorbed onto a second trap, the 

second trap is desorbed, and the mercury is determined by CVAFS. 

Special Considerations: There are no known positive interferences at 253.7 nm wavelength. Water 

vapor will cause a negative interference. 

Source: EPA. 1999. “IO Compendium Method IO-5: Compendium of Methods for the Determination of 

Inorganic Compounds in Ambient Air: Sampling and Analysis for Vapor and Particle Phase Mercury in 

Ambient Air Utilizing Cold Vapor Atomic Fluorescence Spectrometry (CVAFS).” 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA-IO-5.pdf

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 76 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

5.2.44 EPA Air Method, Toxic Organics - 10A (TO-10A): Determination of Pesticides and 

Polychlorinated Biphenyls in Ambient Air Using Low Volume Polyurethane Foam 

(PUF) Sampling Followed by Gas Chromatographic/Multi-Detector Detection 

(GC/MD) 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

BZ [Quinuclidinyl benzilate]1 6581-06-2 

Chlorfenvinphos 470-90-6 

3-Chloro-1,2-propanediol2 96-24-2 

Chlorosarin2 1445-76-7 

Chlorosoman2 7040-57-5 

Chlorpyrifos 2921-88-2 

Chlorpyrifos oxon 5598-15-2 

Cyclohexyl sarin (GF) 329-99-7 

Dichlorvos 62-73-7

Dicrotophos 141-66-2

Diisopropyl methylphosphonate (DIMP)2 1445-75-6

Dimethylphosphite 868-85-9

Dimethylphosphoramidic acid1 33876-51-6 

EA2192 [Diisopropylaminoethyl 

methylthiolophosphonate]1 73207-98-4 

Ethyl methylphosphonic acid (EMPA)1 1832-53-7 

N-Ethyldiethanolamine (EDEA) 139-87-7 

Fenamiphos 22224-92-6

Isopropyl methylphosphonic acid (IMPA)1 1832-54-8 

Methyl paraoxon 950-35-6 

Methyl parathion 298-00-0

N-Methyldiethanolamine (MDEA) 105-59-9 

1-Methylethyl ester ethylphosphonofluoridic acid (GE)2 1189-87-3 

Methylphosphonic acid (MPA)1 993-13-5 

Mevinphos 7786-34-7

Monocrotophos 6923-22-4 

Mustard, nitrogen (HN-1) [bis(2-chloroethyl)ethylamine] 538-07-8 

Mustard, nitrogen (HN-2) [2,2’-dichloro-Nmethyldiethylamine N,N-bis(2-chloroethyl)methylamine] 51-75-2 

Mustard, nitrogen (HN-3) [tris(2-chloroethyl)amine] 555-77-1 

Mustard, sulfur / Mustard gas (HD) 505-60-2 

Paraoxon 311-45-5 

Parathion 56-38-2 

Phencyclidine 77-10-1

Phorate 298-02-2

Phorate sulfone 2588-04-7 

Phorate sulfone oxon3 2588-06-9 

Phorate sulfoxide 2588-03-6 

Phorate sulfoxide oxon3 2588-05-8 

Phosphamidon 13171-21-6 

Pinacolyl methyl phosphonic acid (PMPA)1 616-52-4 

R 33 (VR) [methylphosphonothioic acid, S-[2-

(diethylamino)ethyl] O-2-methylpropyl ester] 159939-87-4 

Sarin (GB)2 107-44-8 

Soman (GD)2 96-64-0 

Tabun (GA) 77-81-6 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 77 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 78 October 2010

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Tetraethyl pyrophosphate 107-49-3

Tetramethylenedisulfotetramine 80-12-6

Thiodiglycol (TDG) 111-48-8 

Triethanolamine (TEA) 102-71-6 

Trimethyl phosphite 121-45-9

VE [phosphonothioic acid, ethyl-, S-(2-

(diethylamino)ethyl) O-ethyl ester] 21738-25-0

VG [phosphonothioic acid, S-(2-(diethylamino)ethyl) 

O,O-diethyl ester] 78-53-5

VM [phosphonothioic acid, methyl-, S-(2-

(diethylamino)ethyl) O-ethyl ester] 21770-86-5

VX [O-ethyl-S-(2-diisopropylaminoethyl)methylphosphonothiolate] 50782-69-9

The following analyte should be determined by this method only if problems (e.g., insufficient recovery, 

interferences) occur when using Method TO-15. 

Allyl alcohol 107-18-6 1

 For this analyte, HPLC is the preferred technique; however, if problems occur, Method TO-10A must be modified to 

include a derivatization step prior to analysis by GC-MS (see references listed under Special Considerations in 

Section 5.2.31). 

2

 If problems occur when using this method, it is recommended that the canister Method TO-15 be used. 3

 If problems occur when using this method for measurement of oxon compounds, analysts should consider use of 

procedures included in "Oxidation of selected organophosphate pesticides during chlorination of simulated drinking 

water." Water Research. 2009. 43(2): 522–534. http://www.sciencedirect.com/science/journal/00431354

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation, and analyte determination and measurement

Sample Preparation Technique: Solvent extraction 

Determinative Technique: GC-MS or HPLC 

Method Developed for: Pesticides and polychlorinated biphenyls in ambient air 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and analysis of air samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: The limit of detection (LOD) will depend on the specific compounds 

measured, the concentration level, and the degree of specificity required. This method is applicable to 

multicomponent atmospheres, 0.001 to 50 μg/m3

 concentrations, and 4 to 24-hour sampling periods. 

Description of Method: A low-volume (1 to 5 L/min) sample collection rate is used to collect vapors on 

a sorbent cartridge containing PUF in combination with another solid sorbent. Airborne particles also are 

collected, but the sampling efficiency is not known. Pesticides and other chemicals are extracted from the 

sorbent cartridge with 5% diethyl ether in hexane and determined by GC-MS. For common pesticides, 

HPLC coupled with a UV detector or electrochemical detector is preferable. If analyzed by GC-MS, BZ, 

dimethylphosphoramidic acid, EA2192, EMPA, IMPA, MPA, and PMPA require derivatization with a 

trimethylsilyl agent prior to injection into the GC. 

Special Considerations: Refer to footnotes provided in analyte table above for special considerations 

that should be applied when measuring specific analytes. See Special Considerations for EPA SW-846 

8270D in Section 5.2.31 for information regarding derivatization of compounds. 

Source: EPA. 1999. “Air Method, Toxic Organics-10A (TO-10A): Compendium of Methods for the 

Determination of Inorganic Compounds in Ambient Air: Determination of Pesticides and Polychlorinated 

Biphenyls in Ambient Air Using Low Volume Polyurethane Foam (PUF) Sampling Followed by Gas 

Chromatographic/Multi-Detector Detection (GC/MD).” http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA-TO-10a.pdf
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

5.2.45 EPA Air Method, Toxic Organics - 15 (TO-15): Determination of Volatile Organic 

Compounds (VOCs) in Air Collected in Specially-Prepared Canisters and Analyzed 

by Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry (GC/MS) 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Allyl alcohol 107-18-6 

Carbon disulfide 75-15-0

Cyanogen chloride 506-77-4

1,2-Dichloroethane 107-06-2

Ethyldichloroarsine (ED) 598-14-1

Ethylene oxide 75-21-8

The following analytes should be determined by this method only if problems (e.g., insufficient recovery, 

interferences) occur when using Method TO-10A. 

3-Chloro-1,2-propanediol 96-24-2

Chlorosarin 1445-76-7

Chlorosoman 7040-57-5

Diisopropyl methylphosphonate (DIMP) 1445-75-6

1-Methylethyl ester ethylphosphonofluoridic acid (GE) 1189-87-3 

Sarin (GB) 107-44-8

Soman (GD) 96-64-0

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation, and analyte determination and measurement 

Sample Preparation Technique: Samples are collected using canisters. 

Determinative Technique: GC-MS 

Method Developed for: VOCs in air 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and analysis of air samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: This method applies to ambient concentrations of VOCs above 0.5 ppbv 

and typically requires VOC enrichment by concentrating up to 1 L of a sample volume; however, when 

using current technologies, quantifications of approximately 100 pptv have been achieved with 0.5-L 

sample volumes. 

Description of Method: The atmosphere is sampled by introduction of air into a specially prepared 

stainless steel canister (electropolished or silica-coated). A sample of air is drawn through a sampling 

train comprising components that regulate the rate and duration of sampling into the pre-evacuated and 

passivated canister. Grab samples also may be collected. After the air sample is collected, the canister 

valve is closed, an identification tag is attached to the canister, and the canister is transported to the 

laboratory for analysis. To analyze the sample, a known volume of sample is directed from the canister 

through a solid multisorbent concentrator. Recovery of less volatile compounds may require heating the 

canister. 

After the concentration and drying steps are completed, VOCs are thermally desorbed, entrained in a 

carrier gas stream, and then focused in a small volume by trapping on a cryo-focusing (ultra-low 

temperature) trap or small volume multisorbent trap. The sample is then released by thermal desorption 

and analyzed by GC-MS. 

Special Considerations: If problems occur when using this method for determination of allyl alcohol, it 

is recommended that Method TO-10A be used. In cases where lower detection levels are needed, use 

procedures included in EPA Compendium Method TO-15: Reduction of Method Detection Limits to 

Meet Vapor Intrusion Monitoring Needs (http://www.epa.gov/ttnamti1/files/ambient/airtox/TO-15-

Supplement.pdf). 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 79 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

Source: EPA. 1999. “Air Method, Toxic Organics-15 (TO-15): Compendium of Methods for the 

Determination of Toxic Organic Compounds in Ambient Air, Second Edition: Determination of Volatile 

Organic Compounds (VOCs) in Air Collected in Specially-Prepared Canisters and Analyzed by Gas 

Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry (GC/MS).” http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA-TO-15.pdf

5.2.46 NIOSH Method 1612: Propylene Oxide 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Propylene oxide 75-56-9

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation, and analyte determination and measurement

Sample Preparation Technique: Coconut shell charcoal solid sorbent tube 

Determinative Technique: GC-FID 

Method Developed for: Propylene oxide in air 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and analysis of air samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: The working range is between 8 and 295 ppm for air samples of 5 L. 

Description of Method: A sample tube containing coconut shell charcoal is used for sample collection 

with a flow rate of 0.01 to 0.2 L/min. One milliliter of carbon disulfide is added to the vial and allowed to 

sit for 30 minutes prior to analysis with occasional agitation. Analysis is performed on a GC-FID. No 

interferences have been found. 

Special Considerations: The presence of propylene oxide should be confirmed by either a secondary 

GC column or by an MS.

Source: NIOSH. 1994. “Method 1612: Propylene Oxide,” Issue 2. 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/NIOSH-1612.pdf

5.2.47 NIOSH Method 2016: Formaldehyde

Analyte(s) CAS RN 

Formaldehyde 50-00-0 

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation, and analyte determination and measurement 

Sample Preparation Technique: Solvent extraction 

Determinative Technique: HPLC 

Method Developed for: Formaldehyde in air 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and analysis of air samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: The detection limit for formaldehyde is 0.07 μg/sample. The working 

range is 0.015 to 2.5 mg/m3

 (0.012 to 2.0 ppm) for a 15-L sample. 

Description of Method: This method can be used for the determination of formaldehyde using HPLC 

with a UV detector. Air is sampled onto a cartridge containing silica gel coated with 2,4-DNPH, at a rate 

of 0.03 to 1.5 L/min. The cartridge is extracted with 10 mL of acetonitrile and analyzed by HPLC-UV at 

a wavelength of 360 nm. Ozone has been observed to consume the 2,4-DNPH reagent and to degrade the 

formaldehyde derivative. Ketones and other aldehydes can react with 2,4-DNPH; the derivatives 

produced, however, are separated chromatographically from the formaldehyde derivative. 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 80 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

Source: NIOSH. 2003. “Method 2016: Formaldehyde,” Issue 2. 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/NIOSH-2016.pdf

5.2.48 NIOSH Method 2513: Ethylene Chlorohydrin 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

2-Chloroethanol 107-07-3

2-Fluoroethanol 371-62-0 

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation, and analyte determination and measurement 

Sample Preparation Technique: Solvent desorption 

Determinative Technique: GC-FID 

Method Developed for: Ethylene chlorohydrin (2-chloroethanol) in air 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and analysis of air samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: The working range of the method is 0.5 to 15 ppm for a 20-L air sample. 

Description of Method: Samples are drawn into a tube containing petroleum charcoal at a rate of 0.01 to 

0.2 L/min and transferred into vials containing eluent (carbon disulfide, 2-propanol, and n-pentadiene as 

an internal standard). Vials must sit for 30 minutes prior to analysis by GC-FID. No interferences have 

been identified. Humidity may decrease the breakthrough volume during sample collection. 

Special Considerations: The presence of 2-chloroethanol should be confirmed by either a secondary 

GC column or by an MS. 

Source: NIOSH. 1994. “Method 2513: Ethylene Chlorohydrin,” Issue 2. 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/NIOSH-2513.pdf

5.2.49 NIOSH Method 3510: Monomethylhydrazine 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Methyl hydrazine (monomethylhydrazine) 60-34-4

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation, and analyte determination and measurement

Sample Preparation Technique: Samples are collected into a bubbler containing hydrochloric acid. 

Determinative Technique: Visible spectrophotometry 

Method Developed for: Monomethylhydrazine in air 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and analysis of air samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: The working range of the method is 0.027 to 2.7 ppm for a 20-L air 

sample. 

Description of Method: Samples are collected into a bubbler containing hydrochloric acid using a flow 

rate of 0.5 to 1.5 L/min. Samples are transferred to a 25-mL flask, mixed with phosphomolybdic acid 

solution, diluted to the mark with 0.1 M hydrochloric acid, and then transferred to a large test tube for 

spectrophotometric analysis. Positive interferences include other hydrazines, as well as stannous ion, 

ferrous ion, zinc, sulfur dioxide, and hydrogen sulfide. Negative interferences may occur by oxidation of 

the monomethylhydrazine by halogens, oxygen (especially in the presence of copper (I) ions) and 

hydrogen dioxide. 

Source: NIOSH. 1994. “Method 3510: Monomethylhydrazine,” Issue 1. 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/NIOSH-3510.pdf

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 81 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

5.2.50 NIOSH Method 5600: Organophosphorus Pesticides

Analyte(s) CAS RN 

Disulfoton 298-04-4 

Disulfoton sulfone oxon1 2496-91-5 

Disulfoton sulfoxide 2497-07-6 

Disulfoton sulfoxide oxon1 2496-92-6 

1

 If problems occur when using this method for measurement of oxon compounds, analysts should consider use of 

procedures included in "Oxidation of selected organophosphate pesticides during chlorination of simulated drinking 

water." Water Research. 2009. 43(2): 522–534. http://www.sciencedirect.com/science/journal/00431354

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation, and analyte determination and measurement

Sample Preparation Technique: Solvent desorption 

Determinative Technique: Gas chromatography – flame photometric detector (GC-FPD) 

Method Developed for: Organophosphorus pesticides in air 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and analysis of air samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: The detection limit depends on the compound being measured. The 

working range for each analyte is provided in Table 5 of the method. These ranges cover from 0.1 to 2 

times the OSHA Permissible Exposure Limits (PELs). 

Description of Method: This method is used for the detection of organophosphorus pesticides using GC 

with a flame photometric detector (FPD). Samples are prepared by desorbing the XAD-2 resin with 2 mL 

of toluene/acetone (90/10 v/v) solution. The method also may be applicable to the determination of other 

organophosphorus compounds after evaluation for desorption efficiency, sample capacity, sample 

stability, and precision and accuracy. The working range for each analyte is provided in Table 5 of the 

method. These ranges cover from 0.1 to 2 times the OSHA PELs (see Table 5 of the method). The 

method also is applicable to Short Term Exposure Limit (STEL) measurements using 12-L samples. 

Special Considerations: Refer to footnote provided in analyte table above for special considerations 

that should be applied when measuring specific analytes. Several organophosphates may co-elute with 

either target analytes or internal standards causing integration errors. These include other pesticides, and 

the following: tributyl phosphate, tris-(2-butoxy ethyl) phosphate, tricresyl phosphate, and triphenyl 

phosphate. 

Source: NIOSH. 1994. “Method 5600: Organophosphorus Pesticides,” Issue 1. 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/NIOSH-5600.pdf

5.2.51 NIOSH Method 5601: Organonitrogen Pesticides

Analyte(s) CAS RN 

Aldicarb (Temik) 116-06-3 

Aldicarb sulfone 1646-88-4 

Aldicarb sulfoxide 1646-87-3 

Carbofuran (Furadan) 1563-66-2 

Methomyl 16752-77-5 

Oxamyl 23135-22-0 

Thiofanox 39196-18-4 

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation, and analyte determination and measurement

Sample Preparation Technique: Solvent desorption 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 82 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

Determinative Technique: HPLC 

Method Developed for: Organonitrogen pesticides in air 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and analysis of air samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: The detection limit for aldicarb is 1.2 μg per sample and 0.6 μg per sample 

for carbofuran, methomyl, and oxamyl. The working ranges for aldicarb, carbofuran, and oxamyl are 

listed in Table 2 of the method, and range from 0.5 to 10 times the OSHA PEL. 

Description of Method: This method can be used for the determination of organonitrogen pesticides 

using HPLC with a UV detector. Samples are prepared by desorbing the XAD-2 resin with 2 mL of 

triethylamine-phosphate solution, rotating end-over-end for 45 minutes, and filtering. The method also 

may be applicable to the determination of other organonitrogen compounds and to a broad range of 

pesticides having UV chromophores, e.g., acetanilides, acid herbicides, organophosphates, phenols, 

pyrethroids, sulfonyl ureas, sulfonamides, triazines, and uracil pesticides. Because of the broad response 

of the UV detector at shorter wavelengths, there are many potential interferences. Those tested include 

solvents (chloroform and toluene), antioxidants (butylated hydroxytoluene [BHT]), plasticizers (dialkyl 

phthalates), nitrogen compounds (nicotine and caffeine), impurities in HPLC reagents (e.g., in 

triethylamine), other pesticides (2,4-Dichlorophenoxyacetic acid [2,4-D], atrazine, parathion, etc.), and 

pesticide hydrolysis products (1-naphthol). Confirmation techniques are recommended when analyte 

identity is uncertain. 

Special Considerations: The presence of the analytes listed in the table above should be confirmed by 

either a secondary HPLC column or by an MS. 

Source: NIOSH. 1998. “Method 5601: Organonitrogen Pesticides,” Issue 1. 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/NIOSH-5601.pdf

5.2.52 NIOSH Method 6001: Arsine 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Arsine (analyze as total arsenic in non-air samples) 7784-42-1

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation, and analyte determination and measurement

Sample Preparation Technique: Coconut shell charcoal solid sorbent tube 

Determinative Technique: GFAA 

Method Developed for: Arsine in air 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and analysis of air samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: The working range of the method is 0.001 to 0.2 mg/m3 for a 10-L sample. 

Description of Method: Arsine is determined as arsenic. A 0.1- to 10-L volume of air is drawn through 

a sorbent tube containing activated charcoal. The sorbent is extracted with a nitric acid solution, and 

arsenic is determined by GFAA. 

Special Considerations: The method is subject to interferences from other arsenic compounds. 

Source: NIOSH. 1994. “Method 6001: Arsine,” Issue 2. http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/NIOSH-6001.pdf

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 83 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

5.2.53 NIOSH Method 6002: Phosphine 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Phosphine 7803-51-2

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation, and analyte determination and measurement

Sample Preparation Technique: Solvent desorption with hot acidic permanganate solution

Determinative Technique: Visible spectrophotometry 

Method Developed for: Phosphine in air 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and analysis of air samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: The working range of the method is 0.02 to 0.9 mg/m3 for a 16-L sample. 

Description of Method: In this method, phosphine is determined as phosphate. A volume of 1 to 16 L 

of air is drawn through a sorbent tube containing silica gel coated with mercuric cyanide. The sorbent is 

extracted with a potassium permanganate/sulfuric acid solution and washed with reagent water. 

Following treatment with the color agent and extraction into organic solvent, phosphate is determined by 

visible spectrometry. 

Special Considerations: The method is subject to interferences from phosphorus trichloride, 

phosphorus pentachloride, and organic phosphorus compounds. 

Source: NIOSH. 1994. “Method 6002: Phosphine,” Issue 2. 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/NIOSH-6002.pdf

5.2.54 NIOSH Method 6010: Hydrogen Cyanide 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Cyanide, Total 57-12-5 

Hydrogen cyanide 74-90-8

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation, and analyte determination and measurement

Sample Preparation Technique: Solvent desorption 

Determinative Technique: Visible spectrophotometry 

Method Developed for: Hydrogen cyanide in air 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and analysis of air samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: The working range of the method is 3 to 260 mg/m3 for a 3-L sample. 

Description of Method: Hydrogen cyanide is determined as a cyanide ion complex by this method. A 

volume of 0.6 to 90 L of air is drawn through a soda lime sorbent tube. A glass-fiber filter is used to 

remove particulate cyanides prior to the sorbent tube. Cyanide is extracted from the sorbent with reagent 

water treated with sodium hydroxide. The extract is pH adjusted with hydrochloric acid, oxidized with Nchlorosuccinimide/succinimide, and treated with the coupling-color agent (barbituric acid/pyridine). The 

cyanide ion is determined by visible spectrophotometry using a wavelength of 580 nm. 

Special Considerations: The method is subject to interference from high concentrations of hydrogen 

sulfide. Two liters is the minimum volume required to measure concentration of 5 ppm. 

Source: NIOSH. 1994. “Method 6010: Hydrogen Cyanide,” Issue 2. 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/NIOSH-6010.pdf

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 84 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

5.2.55 NIOSH Method 6013: Hydrogen Sulfide 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Hydrogen sulfide 7783-06-4

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation, and analyte determination and measurement

Sample Preparation Technique: Solvent extraction 

Determinative Technique: IC with conductivity detection 

Method Developed for: Hydrogen sulfide in air 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and analysis of air samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: The working range of the method is 0.9 to 20 mg/m3 for a 20-L sample. 

Description of Method: Hydrogen sulfide is determined as sulfate by this method. A volume of 15 to 

40 L of air is drawn through charcoal sorbent. A prefilter is used to remove particulates. The sorbent 

portions are extracted with an ammonium hydroxide/hydrogen peroxide solution and the extract is 

analyzed for sulfate by IC. 

Special Considerations: The method is subject to interference from sulfur dioxide. 

Source: NIOSH. 1994. “Method 6013: Hydrogen Sulfide,” Issue 1. 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/NIOSH-6013.pdf

5.2.56 NIOSH Method 6015: Ammonia 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Ammonia 7664-41-7

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation, and analyte determination and measurement

Sample Preparation Technique: Water extraction

Determinative Technique: Visible spectrophotometry 

Method Developed for: Ammonia in air 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and analysis of air samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: The working range of the method is 0.15 to 300 mg/m3 for a 10-L sample. 

Twice the recommended sample volume should be collected in order to achieve an action level of 70 

μg/m3

. 

Description of Method: Ammonia is determined as indophenol blue by this method. A volume of 0.1 to 

96 L of air is drawn through a sulfuric acid-treated silica gel sorbent. A prefilter is used to remove 

particulates. The sorbent is extracted with reagent water, the pH adjusted, and reagents are added to 

generate the indophenol blue compound in the presence of ammonium. The extract is analyzed by visible 

spectrophotometry. No interferences have been identified. 

Source: NIOSH. 1994. “Method 6015: Ammonia,” Issue 2. 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/NIOSH-6015.pdf

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 85 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

5.2.57 NIOSH Method 6402: Phosphorus Trichloride 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Phosphorus trichloride 7719-12-2

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation, and analyte determination and measurement

Sample Preparation Technique: Add reagent to samples in bubbler solution and heat 

Determinative Technique: Visible spectrophotometry 

Method Developed for: Phosphorus trichloride in air 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and analysis of air samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: The working range of the method is 1.2 to 80 mg/m3 for a 25-L sample. 

Description of Method: In this method, phosphorus trichloride is determined as phosphate. A volume 

of 11 to 100 L of air is drawn through a bubbler containing reagent water. The resulting phosphorus acid 

solution is oxidized with bromine to phosphoric acid and color agent (sodium molybdate) and reducing 

agent (hydrazine sulfate) are added. The solution is analyzed for the resulting molybdenum blue complex 

by visible spectrophotometry. Phosphorus (V) compounds do not interfere. Sample solutions are stable 

to oxidation by air during sampling. 

Source: NIOSH. 1994. “Method 6402: Phosphorus Trichloride,” Issue 2. 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/NIOSH-6402.pdf

5.2.58 NIOSH Method 7903: Acids, Inorganic 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Hydrogen bromide 10035-10-6

Hydrogen chloride 7647-01-0

Hydrogen fluoride 7664-39-3

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation, and analyte determination and measurement

Sample Preparation Technique: Solvent desorption 

Determinative Technique: IC with conductivity detection 

Method Developed for: Inorganic acids in air 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and analysis of air samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: The working range of this method is 0.01 to 5 mg/m3 for a 50-L sample. 

Description of Method: Acids are analyzed as bromide, chloride, and fluoride. A volume of 3 to 100 L 

of air is drawn through a silica gel sorbent. The sorbent portions are extracted with a buffered 

carbonate/bicarbonate solution and the extract is analyzed by IC. 

Special Considerations: Particulate salts of the acids are an interference (trapped on the glass wool 

filter plug in the sorbent tube). Chlorine and bromine are also interferences. Acetate, formate, and 

propionate interferences may be reduced by use of a weaker eluent. If problems occur when using this 

method for analysis of hydrogen fluoride, it is recommended that NIOSH Method 7906 be used. 

Source: NIOSH. 1994. “Method 7903: Acids, Inorganic,” Issue 2. 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/NIOSH-7903.pdf

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 86 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

5.2.59 NIOSH Method 7905: Phosphorus

Analyte(s) CAS RN

White phosphorus 12185-10-3 

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation, and analyte determination and measurement

Sample Preparation Technique: GC solid sorbent tube and solvent extracted (desorbed) 

Determinative Technique: GC-FPD 

Method Developed for: Phosphorus in air 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and analysis of air samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: The LOD for samples analyzed by GC-FPD is 0.005 μg per sample. The 

working range for samples analyzed by GC-FPD is 0.056 to 0.24 mg/m3

 for a 12-L sample. 

Description of Method: This method identifies and determines the concentration of white phosphorus in 

air by using a GC-FPD. Five to 100 L of air is drawn through a GC solid sorbent tube, and the sorbent is 

extracted (desorbed) with xylene. The method is applicable to vapor-phase phosphorus only; if 

particulate phosphorus is expected, a filter could be used in the sampling train. 

Special Considerations: The presence of white phosphorus should be confirmed by either a secondary 

GC column or by an MS. 

Source: NIOSH. 1994. “Method 7905: Phosphorus,” Issue 2. 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/NIOSH-7905.pdf

5.2.60 NIOSH Method 7906: Fluorides, Aerosol and Gas, by IC 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Hydrogen fluoride 7664-39-3

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation and analysis 

Sample Preparation Technique: Water extraction

Determinative Technique: IC with conductivity detection 

Method Developed for: Fluorides in aerosol and gas 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for use if problems occur when using NIOSH Method 7903 

for the analysis of hydrogen fluoride during preparation and analysis of air samples. (See Footnote 10 of 

Appendix A.) 

Detection and Quantitation: The working range of the method is 0.04 to 8 mg/m3 for 250-L samples. 

Description of Method: Hydrogen fluoride is determined as fluoride ion by this method. A volume of 1 

to 800 L of air is drawn through a 0.8-μm cellulose ester membrane (to trap particulate fluorides) and a 

cellulose pad treated with sodium carbonate (to trap gaseous fluoride). The pad is extracted with reagent 

water and the extract is analyzed for fluoride by IC. 

Special Considerations: If other aerosols are present, gaseous fluoride may be slightly underestimated 

due to adsorption onto or reaction with particles, with concurrent overestimation of particulate/gaseous 

fluoride ratio. 

Source: NIOSH. 1994. “Method 7906: Fluorides, Aerosol and Gas by IC,” Issue 1. 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/NIOSH-7906.pdf

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 87 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

5.2.61 NIOSH Method 9102: Elements on Wipes 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Ammonium metavanadate (analyze as total vanadium) 7803-55-6 

Arsenic, Total 7440-38-2 

Arsenic trioxide (analyze as total arsenic) 1327-53-3 

Arsine (analyze as total arsenic in non-air samples) 7784-42-1 

Calcium arsenate (analyze as total arsenic) 7778-44-1 

2-Chlorovinylarsonous acid (2-CVAA) 85090-33-1 

Ethyldichloroarsine (ED) 598-14-1

Lead arsenate (analyze as total arsenic) 7645-25-2 

Lewisite 1 (L-1) [2-chlorovinyldichloroarsine] (analyze as total arsenic) 541-25-3 

Lewisite 2 (L-2) [bis(2-chlorovinyl)chloroarsine] (analyze as total arsenic) 40334-69-8 

Lewisite 3 (L-3) [tris(2-chlorovinyl)arsine] (analyze as total arsenic) 40334-70-1 

Lewisite oxide 1306-02-1 

Mercuric chloride (analyze as total mercury) 7487-94-7 

Mercury, Total 7439-97-6

Methoxyethylmercuric acetate (analyze as total mercury) 151-38-2 

Osmium tetroxide (analyze as total osmium) 20816-12-0

Sodium arsenite (analyze as total arsenic) 7784-46-5 

Thallium sulfate (analyze as total thallium) 10031-59-1 

Titanium tetrachloride (analyze as total titanium) 7550-45-0

Vanadium pentoxide (analyze as total vanadium) 1314-62-1 

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation 

Sample Preparation Technique: Acid digestion

Determinative Technique: ICP-AES / ICP-MS / Spectrophotometry

Determinative Method: EPA SW-846 Methods 6010C, 6020A, and 7473. Refer to Appendix A for 

which of these determinative methods should be used for a particular analyte. 

Method Developed for: Measurement of metals on wipe surfaces using ICP-AES 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation of wipe samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: The range for arsenic is 0.261 to105 μg/wipe; for thallium 0.136 to 50.0 

μg/wipe; for vanadium 0.0333 to 25.0 μg/wipe. 

Description of Method: Surface wipe samples are transferred to a clean beaker, followed by the addition 

of concentrated nitric and perchloric acids. The beaker contents are held at room temperature for 30 

minutes, then heated at 150°C for 8 hours. Additional nitric acid is added until the wipe media is 

completely destroyed. The sample is then taken to near dryness and the residue dissolved and diluted 

before being analyzed. 

Special Considerations: ICP-MS may also be used for the analysis of wipe samples; however, at this 

time, this technique has not been evaluated for wipes. Nitric and perchloric acids are strong oxidizers and 

extremely corrosive. Perform all perchloric acid digestions in a perchloric acid hood. When working 

with acids, use gloves and avoid inhalation or contact with skin or clothing. 

Source: NIOSH. 2003. “Method 9102, Issue 1: Elements on Wipes.” 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/NIOSH-9102.pdf

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 88 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

5.2.62 NIOSH Method S301-1: Fluoroacetate Anion 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Fluoroacetic acid and fluoroacetate salts NA

Methyl fluoroacetate 453-18-9 

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation 

Sample Preparation Technique: Water extraction

Determinative Technique: IC with electrolytic conductivity detection 

Determinative Method: EPA Method 300.1 Rev 1.0 

Method Developed for: Fluoroacetate anion in air 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation of air samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: The detection limit is estimated to be 20 ng of sodium fluoroacetate per 

injection, corresponding to a 100-μL aliquot of a 0.2-μg/mL standard. The analytical range of this 

method is estimated to be 0.01 to 0.16 mg/m3

. 

Description of Method: This method was developed specifically for sodium fluoroacetate, but also may 

be applicable to other fluoroacetate salts. The method determines fluoroacetate salts as fluoroacetate 

anion. A known volume of air (e.g., 480 L was used in validation of this method) is drawn through a 

cellulose ester membrane filter to collect sodium fluoroacetate. Sodium fluoroacetate is extracted from 

the filter with 5 mL of deionized water, and the resulting sample is analyzed by IC using electrolytic 

conductivity detection. 

Special Considerations: When analyzing samples for methyl fluoroacetate (as fluoroacetate ion), 

addition of base is required to assist dissociation into fluoroacetate anion. 

Source: NIOSH. 1977. “Method S301-1: Sodium Fluoroacetate.” 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/NIOSH-S301-1.pdf

5.2.63 OSHA Method 40: Methylamine

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Methylamine 74-89-5

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation, and analyte determination and measurement 

Sample Preparation Technique: Solvent desorption 

Determinative Technique: HPLC 

Method Developed for: Methylamine in air 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and analysis of air samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: The detection limit of the overall procedure is 0.35 μg per sample (28 ppb 

or 35 μg/m3

). Quantitation limits of 28 ppb (35 μg/m3) have been achieved. This is the smallest amount 

of methylamine that can be quantified within the requirements of a recovery of at least 75% and a 

precision (standard deviation of 1.96) of ± 25% or better. 

Description of Method: This method is used for detection of methylamine using HPLC with a FL or 

visible (vis) detector. Samples are collected by drawing 10-L volumes of air at a rate of 0.2 L/min 

through standard size sampling tubes containing XAD-7 resin coated with 10% 7-chloro-4-nitrobenzo-2-

oxa-1,3-diazole (NBD chloride) by weight. Samples are desorbed with 5% (w/v) NBD chloride in 

tetrahydrofuran (with a small amount of sodium bicarbonate present), heated in a hot water bath, and 

analyzed by high performance liquid chromatography – fluorescence (HPLC-FL) or high performance 

liquid chromatography – visible (HPLC-vis). 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 89 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

Source: OSHA. 1982. “Method 40: Methylamine.” Method originally obtained from www.osha.gov, 

but is provided here for reference. http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/OSHA-Method40.pdf

5.2.64 OSHA Method 54: Methyl Isocyanate (MIC)

Analyte(s) CAS RN 

Methyl isocyanate 624-83-9 

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation, and analyte determination and measurement 

Sample Preparation Technique: Solvent desorption 

Determinative Technique: HPLC 

Method Developed for: Methyl isocyanate in air 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and analysis of air samples. 

Description of Method: This method determines the concentration of methyl isocyanate in air by using 

HPLC with a FL or UV detector. Samples are collected by drawing a known volume of air through 

XAD-7 tubes coated with 0.3 mg of 1-(2-pyridyl)piperazine (1-2PP). Samples are desorbed with 

acetonitrile and analyzed by HPLC using a FL or UV detector. 

Source: OSHA. 1985. “Method 54: Methyl Isocyanate (MIC).” Method originally obtained from 

www.osha.gov, but is provided here for reference. http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/OSHA-Method54.pdf

5.2.65 OSHA Method 61: Phosgene

Analyte(s) CAS RN 

Phosgene 75-44-5 

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation, and analyte determination and measurement 

Sample Preparation Technique: Solvent desorption

Determinative Technique: GC-NPD 

Method Developed for: Phosgene in air samples 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and analysis of air samples. 

Description of Method: This method determines the concentration of phosgene in air by using GC with 

an NPD. Air samples are collected by drawing known volumes of air through sampling tubes containing 

XAD-2 adsorbent that has been coated with 2-(hydroxymethyl)piperidine. The samples are desorbed with 

toluene and then analyzed by GC using an NPD. 

Special Considerations: The presence of phosgene should be confirmed by either a secondary GC 

column or by MS 

Source: OSHA. 1986. “Method 61: Phosgene.” Method originally obtained from www.osha.gov, but is 

provided here for reference. http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/OSHA-Method61.pdf

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 90 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

5.2.66 OSHA Method ID-211: Sodium Azide and Hydrazoic Acid in Workplace 

Atmospheres 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Sodium azide (analyze as azide ion) 26628-22-8 

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation, and analyte determination and measurement 

Sample Preparation Technique: Buffer desorption

Determinative Technique: IC-UV 

Method Developed for: Sodium azide and hydrazoic acid in workplace atmospheres 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and analysis of air and wipe samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: The detection limit was found to be 0.001 ppm as hydrazoic acid (HN3) or 

0.003 mg/m3

 as sodium azide (NaN3) for a 5-L air sample. The quantitation limit was found to be 0.004 

ppm as HN3 or 0.011 mg/m3

 as NaN3 for a 5-L air sample. 

Description of Method: This method describes sample collection and analysis of airborne azides [as 

NaN3 and hydrazoic acid HN3]. Particulate NaN3 is collected on a PVC filter or in the glass wool plug of 

the sampling tube. Gaseous HN3 is collected and converted to NaN3 by the impregnated silica gel (ISG) 

sorbent within the sampling tube. The collected azide on either media is desorbed in a weak buffer 

solution, and the resultant anion (N3

-

) is analyzed by IC using a variable wavelength UV detector at 210 

nm. A gravimetric conversion is used to calculate the amount of NaN3 or HN3 collected. 

Source: OSHA. 1992. “Method ID-211: Sodium Azide and Hydrazoic Acid in Workplace 

Atmospheres.” http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/OSHA-ID-211.pdf

5.2.67 OSHA Method ID216SG: Boron Trifluoride (BF3) 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Boron trifluoride 7637-07-2

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation, and analyte determination and measurement 

Sample Preparation Technique: Sample collected in bubbler (no sample preparation required) 

Determinative Technique: Ion specific electrode (ISE) 

Method Developed for: Boron trifluoride in air samples 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and analysis of air samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: The detection limit is 10 μg in a 30-L sample. 

Description of Method: Boron trifluoride is determined as fluoroborate. A volume of 30 to 480 L of air 

is drawn through a bubbler containing 0.1 M ammonium fluoride. The solution is diluted and analyzed 

with a fluoroborate ISE. 

Source: OSHA. 1989. “Method ID216SG: Boron Trifluoride (BF3).” Method originally obtained from 

www.osha.gov, but is provided here for reference. http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/OSHA-ID216SG.pdf

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 91 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

5.2.68 OSHA Method PV2004: Acrylamide 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Acrylamide 79-06-1 

Acrylonitrile 107-13-1 

Methyl acrylonitrile 126-98-7 

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation, and analyte determination and measurement 

Sample Preparation Technique: Solvent desorption

Determinative Technique: HPLC 

Method Developed for: Acrylamide in air 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and analysis of air samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: The detection limit was found to be 0.7 μg/mL (0.006 mg/m3 for a 1-mL 

desorption volume or 0.029 mg/m3

 for a 5-mL desorption volume based on a 120-L air volume). 

Applicable working ranges for a 1-mL and 5-mL desorption volume are 0.017 - 1.5 mg/m3 and 0.083 - 7.5 

mg/m3

, respectively. 

Description of Method: This method determines the concentration of acrylamide in air by using HPLC 

with a UV detector. Samples are collected by drawing known volumes of air through OSHA versatile 

sampler (OVS-7) tubes, each containing a glass fiber filter and two sections of XAD-7 adsorbent. 

Samples are desorbed with a solution of 5% methanol/95% water and analyzed by HPLC using a UV 

detector. 

Source: OSHA. 1991. “Method PV2004: Acrylamide.” http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/OSHAPV2004.pdf

5.2.69 OSHA Method PV2103: Chloropicrin 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Chloropicrin 79-06-2

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation, and analyte determination and measurement 

Sample Preparation Technique: Solvent desorption

Determinative Technique: GC-ECD 

Method Developed for: Chloropicrin in air 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and analysis of air samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: The detection limit is 0.01 ng, with a 1-μL injection volume. This is the 

smallest amount that could be detected under normal operating conditions. The working range is 33.2 to 

1330 μg/m3

. 

Description of Method: This method determines the concentration of chloropicrin in air by GC-ECD. 

Samples are collected by drawing a known volume of air through two XAD-4 tubes in series. Samples 

are desorbed with ethyl acetate and analyzed by GC-ECD. 

Special Considerations: The presence of chloropicrin should be confirmed by either a secondary GC 

column or by an MS. Chloropicrin is light sensitive, and samples should be protected from light. 

Source: OSHA. 1991. “Method PV2103: Chloropicrin.” http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/OSHAPV2103.pdf

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 92 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

5.2.70 ASTM Method D5755-03: Standard Test Method for Microvacuum Sampling and 

Indirect Analysis of Dust by Transmission Electron Microscopy for Asbestos 

Structure Number Surface Loading 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Asbestos 1332-21-4

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation, and analyte determination and measurement 

Sample Preparation Technique: Direct transfer

Determinative Technique: Transmission electron microscopy (TEM) 

Method Developed for: Asbestos in dust 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and analysis of solid (e.g., soft surfacesmicrovac) samples. 

Description of Method: This method describes procedures to identify asbestos in dust and provide an 

estimate of the surface loading of asbestos reported as the number of asbestos structures per unit area of 

sampled surface. The sample is collected by vacuuming a known surface area with a standard 25- or 37-

mm air sampling cassette using a plastic tube that is attached to the inlet orifice, which acts as a nozzle. 

The sample is transferred from inside the cassette to an aqueous suspension of known volume. Aliquots 

of the suspension are then filtered through a membrane, and a section of the membrane is prepared and 

transferred to a TEM grid using a direct transfer method. The asbestiform structures are identified, sized, 

and counted by TEM, using select area electron diffraction (SAED) and energy dispersive X-ray analysis 

(EDXA) at a magnification of 15,000 to 20,000X. 

Source: ASTM. 2003. “Method D5755-03: Standard Test Method for Microvacuum Sampling and 

Indirect Analysis of Dust by Transmission Electron Microscopy for Asbestos Structure Number Surface 

Loading.” http://www.astm.org/Standards/D5755.htm

5.2.71 ASTM Method D6480-05: Standard Test Method for Wipe Sampling of Surfaces, 

Indirect Preparation, and Analysis for Asbestos Structure Number Concentration 

by Transmission Electron Microscopy 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Asbestos 1332-21-4

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation, and analyte determination and measurement 

Sample Preparation Technique: Direct transfer

Determinative Technique: TEM 

Method Developed for: Asbestos in samples wiped from surfaces 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and analysis of wipe (e.g., hard surfaceswipes) samples. 

Description of Method: This method describes a procedure to identify asbestos in samples wiped from 

surfaces and to provide an estimate of the concentration of asbestos reported as the number of asbestos 

structures per unit area of sampled surface. A sample is collected by wiping a surface of known area with 

a wipe material. The sample is transferred from the wipe material to an aqueous suspension of known 

volume. Aliquots of the suspension are then filtered through a membrane filter, and a section of the 

membrane filter is prepared and transferred to a TEM grid, using the direct transfer method. The 

asbestiform structures are identified, sized, and counted by TEM, using electron diffraction and EDXA at 

a magnification from 15,000 to 20,000X. 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 93 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

Source: ASTM. 2005. “Method D6480-05: Standard Test Method for Wipe Sampling of Surfaces, 

Indirect Preparation, and Analysis for Asbestos Structure Number Concentration by Transmission 

Electron Microscopy.” http://www.astm.org/Standards/D6480.htm 

5.2.72 ASTM Method D7597-09: Standard Test Method for Determination of Diisopropyl 

Methylphosphonate, Ethyl Hydrogen Dimethylamidophosphate, Ethyl 

Methylphosphonic Acid, Isopropyl Methylphosphonic Acid, Methylphosphonic 

Acid and Pinacolyl Methylphosphonic Acid in Water by Liquid 

Chromatography/Tandem Mass Spectrometry 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Diisopropyl methylphosphonate (DIMP) 1445-75-6 

Ethyl methylphosphonic acid (EMPA) 1832-53-7 

Isopropyl methylphosphonic acid (IMPA) 1832-54-8 

Methylphosphonic acid (MPA) 993-13-5 

Pinacolyl methyl phosphonic acid (PMPA) 616-52-4 

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation, and analyte determination and measurement

Sample Preparation Technique: Filtered using a syringe-driven Millex HV polyvinylidene fluoride 

(PVDF) filter unit 

Determinative Technique: LC-MS-MS 

Method Developed for: Diisopropyl methylphosphonate, ethyl hydrogen dimethylamidophosphate, 

isopropyl methylphosphonic acid, methylphosphonic acid and pinacolyl methylphosphonic acid in surface 

water 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and analysis of aqueous liquid samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: The detection verification levels (DVLs) and reporting range for this 

method vary for each analyte and range from 0.25 to 20 μg/L and 5 to 1500 μg/L. 

Description of Method: Target compounds are analyzed by direct injection without derivatization by 

LC-MS-MS. Samples are shipped to the laboratory at 0 to 6°C, spiked with surrogates, filtered using a 

syringe-driven filter unit and analyzed directly by LC-MS-MS within 1 day. The target compounds are 

identified by comparing the sample single reaction monitoring (SRM) transitions to the known standard 

SRM transitions. The retention time for the analytes of interest must also fall within the retention time of 

the standard by ± 5%. Target compounds are quantitated using the SRM transition of the target 

compounds and external standard calibration. 

 

Source: ASTM. 2009. “Method D7597-09: Standard Test Method for Determination of Diisopropyl 

Methylphosphonate, Ethyl Hydrogen Dimethylamidophosphate, Ethyl Methylphosphonic Acid, Isopropyl 

Methylphosphonic Acid, Methylphosphonic Acid and Pinacolyl Methylphosphonic Acid in Water by 

Liquid Chromatography/Tandem Mass Spectrometry.” http://www.astm.org/Standards/D7597.htm

5.2.73 ASTM Method D7598-09: Standard Test Method for Determination of Thiodiglycol 

in Water by Single Reaction Monitoring Liquid Chromatography/Tandem Mass 

Spectrometry 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Thiodiglycol 111-48-8 

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation, and analyte determination and measurement

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 94 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

Sample Preparation Technique: Filtered using a syringe-driven Millex HV polyvinyliden fluoride 

(PVDF) filter unit 

Determinative Technique: LC-MS-MS 

Method Developed for: Thiodiglycol in surface water samples 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and analysis of aqueous liquid samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: The DVL for thiodiglycol is 20 μg/L; the reporting range is 100 to 10000 

μg/L. 

Description of Method: Thiodiglycol is analyzed by direct injection without derivatization by LC-MSMS. Samples are shipped to the laboratory at 0 to 6°C, spiked with surrogates, filtered using a syringedriven filter unit and analyzed directly by LC-MS-MS within 7 days. The target compound is identified 

by comparing the sample primary SRM transition to the known standard SRM transition. The retention 

time must fall within the retention time of the standard by ± 5%. Thiodiglycol is quantitated using the 

primary SRM transition and external standard calibration. 

Source: ASTM. 2009. “Method D7598-09: Standard Test Method for Determination of Thiodiglycol in 

Water by Single Reaction Monitoring Liquid Chromatography/Tandem Mass Spectrometry.” 

http://www.astm.org/Standards/D7598.htm 

5.2.74 ASTM Method D7599-09: Standard Test Method for Determination of 

Diethanolamine, Triethanolamine, N-Methyldiethanolamine and NEthyldiethanolamine in Water by Single Reaction Monitoring Liquid 

Chromatography/Tandem Mass Spectrometry (LC/MS/MS) 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

N-Ethyldiethanolamine (EDEA) 139-87-7 

N-Methyldiethanolamine (MDEA) 105-59-9 

Triethanolamine (TEA) 102-71-6 

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation, and analyte determination and measurement

Sample Preparation Technique: Filtered using a syringe-driven Millex HV PVDF filter unit 

Determinative Technique: LC-MS-MS 

Method Developed for: Diethanolamine, triethanolamine, n-methyldiethanolamine and nethyldiethanolamine in surface water samples 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and analysis of aqueous liquid samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: The DVL and reporting range for EDEA and TEA are 5 μg/L and 25 to 

500 μg/L, respectively. The DVL and reporting range for MDEA are 10 μg/L and 50 to 500 μg/L, 

respectively. 

Description of Method: Target compounds are analyzed by direct injection without derivatization by 

LC-MS-MS. Samples are shipped to the laboratory at 0 to 6°C, spiked with surrogates, filtered using a 

syringe-driven filter unit and analyzed directly by LC-MS-MS within 7 days. Target compounds are 

identified by comparing sample SRM transitions to the known standard SRM transitions. The retention 

time for the analytes of interest must also fall within the retention time of the standard by ± 5%. Target 

compounds are quantitated using the SRM transition and external standard calibration. 

Source: ASTM. 2009. “Method D7599-09: Standard Test Method for Determination of Diethanolamine, 

Triethanolamine, N-Methyldiethanolamine and N-Ethyldiethanolamine in Water by Single Reaction 

Monitoring Liquid Chromatography/Tandem Mass Spectrometry (LC/MS/MS).” 

http://www.astm.org/Standards/D7599.htm

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 95 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

5.2.75 ASTM Method D7600-09: Standard Test Method for Determination of Aldicarb, 

Carbofuran, Oxamyl and Methomyl by Liquid Chromatography/Tandem Mass 

Spectrometry 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Aldicarb (Temik) 116-06-3 

Aldicarb sulfone 1646-88-4 

Aldicarb sulfoxide 1646-87-3 

Bromadiolone 28772-56-7 

Carbofuran (Furadan) 1563-66-2 

Methomyl 16752-77-5 

Oxamyl 23135-22-0

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation, and analyte determination and measurement

Sample Preparation Technique: Filtered using a syringe-driven Millex HV PVDF filter unit 

Determinative Technique: LC-MS-MS 

Method Developed for: Aldicarb, bromadiolone, carbofuran, oxamyl and methomyl in water 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and analysis of aqueous liquid samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: The DVL for aldicarb, carbofuran, methomyl, and oxamyl is 100 ng/L. 

The reporting range is 1 to 100 μg/L. 

Description of Method: Target compounds are analyzed by direct injection without derivatization by 

LC-MS-MS. Samples are shipped to the laboratory at 0 to 6°C, spiked with surrogates, filtered using a 

syringe-driven filter unit, and analyzed directly by LC-MS-MS within 7 days. The target compounds are 

identified by comparing the sample primary and confirmatory multiple reaction monitoring (MRM) 

transitions to the known standard primary and confirmatory MRM transitions. The retention time for the 

analytes of interest must also fall within the retention time of the standard by ± 5%. Target compounds 

are quantitated using the primary SRM transition and external standard calibration. 

Source: ASTM. 2009. “Method D7600-09: Standard Test Method for Determination of Aldicarb, 

Carbofuran, Oxamyl and Methomyl by Liquid Chromatography/Tandem Mass Spectrometry.” 

http://www.astm.org/Standards/D7600.htm

5.2.76 ISO Method 10312:1995: Ambient Air - Determination of Asbestos Fibres - Directtransfer Transmission Electron Microscopy Method 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Asbestos 1332-21-4

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation, and analyte determination and measurement 

Sample Preparation Technique: Direct transfer

Determinative Technique: TEM 

Method Developed for: Asbestos in ambient air 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and analysis of air samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: In a 4000-L air sample with approximately 10 pg/m3 (typical of clean or 

rural atmospheres), an analytical sensitivity of 0.5 structure/L can be obtained. This is equivalent to a 

detection limit of 1.8 structure/L when an area of 0.195 mm of the TEM specimen is examined. The 

range of concentrations that can be determined is 50 to 7,000 structures/mm2

 on the filter. 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 96 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

Description of Method: This method determines the type(s) of asbestos fibers present, but cannot 

discriminate between individual fibers of the asbestos and non-asbestos analogues of the same amphibole 

mineral. The method is defined for polycarbonate capillan/pore filters or cellulose ester (either mixed 

esters of cellulose or cellulose nitrate) filters through which a known volume of air has been drawn. The 

method is suitable for determination of asbestos in both exterior and building atmospheres. 

Source: ISO. 2005. “Method 10312: 1995: Ambient Air - Determination of Asbestos Fibres - Direct 

Transfer Transmission Electron Microscopy Method.” 

http://www.iso.org/iso/iso_catalogue/catalogue_tc/catalogue_detail.htm?csnumber=18358

5.2.77 Standard Method 4500-NH3 B: Nitrogen (Ammonia) Preliminary Distillation Step 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Ammonia 7664-41-7

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation 

Sample Preparation Technique: Distillation

Determinative Technique: Visible spectrophotometry

Determinative Method: Standard Method 4500-NH3 G 

Method Developed for: Nitrogen (ammonia) in drinking waters, clean surface or groundwater, and 

good-quality nitrified wastewater effluent 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation of aqueous liquid samples. 

Description of Method: A 0.5- to 1-L sample is dechlorinated, buffered, adjusted to pH 9.5, and distilled 

into a sulfuric acid solution. The distillate is brought up to volume, neutralized with sodium hydroxide, 

and analyzed by Method 4500-NH3 G. 

Source: APHA, AWWA, and WEF. 2005. “Method 4500-NH3 B: Nitrogen (Ammonia) Preliminary 

Distillation Step.” Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater. 21st Edition. 

http://www.standardmethods.org/

5.2.78 Standard Method 4500-NH3 G: Nitrogen (Ammonia) Automated Phenate Method 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Ammonia 7664-41-7

Analysis Purpose: Analyte determination and measurement 

Determinative Technique: Visible spectrophotometry 

Sample Preparation Method: Standard Method 4500-NH3 B 

Sample Preparation Technique: Distillation 

Method Developed for: Nitrogen (ammonia) in drinking waters, clean surface or groundwater, and 

good-quality nitrified wastewater effluent 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for analysis of aqueous liquid samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: The range of the method is 0.02 to 2.0 mg/L. 

Description of Method: Ammonia is determined as indophenol blue by this method. A portion of the 

neutralized sample distillate (from procedure 4500-NH3 B) is run through a manifold. The ammonium in 

the distillate reacts with solutions of disodium ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid (EDTA), sodium phenate, 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 97 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

sodium hypochlorite, and sodium nitroprusside. The resulting indophenol blue is detected by colorimetry 

in a flow cell. Photometric measurement is made between the wavelengths of 630 and 660 nm. 

Source: APHA, AWWA, and WEF. 2005. “Method 4500-NH3 G: Nitrogen (Ammonia) Automated 

Phenate Method.” Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater. 21st Edition. 

http://www.standardmethods.org/

5.2.79 Standard Method 4500-Cl G: DPD Colorimetric Method 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Chlorine 7782-50-5

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation and/or analyte determination and measurement 

Sample Preparation Technique: Water samples are buffered and colorimetric agent is added. Buffered 

water extraction by Analyst, 1999. 124: 1853–1857 are used for preparation of air samples.

Determinative Technique: Visible spectrophotometry 

Method Developed for: Chlorine in water and wastewater 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for preparation and analysis of aqueous liquid and drinking 

water samples. It also should be used for analysis of air samples when appropriate sample preparation 

techniques have been applied. 

Detection and Quantitation: The method can detect 10 μg/L chlorine. 

Description of Method: A portion of aqueous liquid sample is buffered and reacted with N,N-diethyl-pphenylenediamine (DPD) color agent. The resulting free chlorine is determined by colorimetry. If total 

chlorine (including chloroamines and nitrogen trichloride) is to be determined, potassium iodide crystals 

are added. Results for chromate and manganese are blank corrected using thioacetamide solution. 

Special Considerations: Organic contaminants and strong oxidizers may cause interference. 

Source: APHA, AWWA, and WEF. 2005. “Method 4500-Cl G: DPD Colorimetric Method.” Standard 

Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater. 21st Edition. http://www.standardmethods.org/

5.2.80 Literature Reference for Chlorine (Analyst, 1999. 124(12): 1853–1857) 

Analyte(s) CAS RN 

Chlorine 7782-50-5 

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation 

Sample Preparation Technique: Buffered water extraction

Determinative Technique: Visible spectrophotometry

Determinative Method: Standard Method 4500-Cl G 

Method Developed for: Active chlorine in air 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this procedure for preparation of air samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: Detection limit of 0.1 μg of chlorine; the collection efficiency was >90%; 

recovery of chlorine spikes from 0.05-g aliquots of the sorbent was not quantitative (~60%) but was 

reproducible. 

Description of Method: A procedure is described for determination of total combined gas-phase active 

chlorine (i.e., Cl2, hypochlorous acid [HOCl], and chloramines) and is based on a sulfonamidefunctionalized silica gel sorbent. For determination of the collected chlorine, a modified version of the 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 98 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

DPD colorimetric procedure is used, which yielded a detection limit of 0.1 μg of chlorine. At flow rates 

ranging from 31 to 294 mL/min, the collection efficiency was >90% based on breakthrough analysis. 

Recovery of chlorine spikes from 0.05-g aliquots of the sorbent was not quantitative (~60%) but was 

reproducible; the recovery is accounted for in samples by adding weighed amounts of sorbent to the 

standards. 

Source: Johnson, B.J., Emerson, D.W., Song, L., Floyd, J., and Tadepalli, B. 1999. “Determination of 

active chlorine in air by bonded phase sorbent collection and spectrophotometric analysis.” Analyst.

124(12): 1853–1857. www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/Analyst124_pg1853-1857.pdf

5.2.81 Literature Reference for Fluoroacetate salts (Analytical Letters, 1994. 27(14): 

2703–2718) 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Fluoroacetic acid and fluoroacetate salts NA

Methyl fluoroacetate 453-18-9 

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation 

Sample Preparation Technique: Ultrasonic extraction

Determinative Technique: IC-ECD

Determinative Method: EPA Method 300.1, Revision 1.0 

Method Developed for: Sodium fluoroacetate in soil 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this procedure for preparation of solid and wipe samples. 

Description of Method: Sodium fluoroacetate is determined at sub-microgram per gram concentrations 

in small (~1 g) soil samples. Samples are ultrasonically extracted with water, filtered, and analyzed by 

Method 300.1. 

Source: Tomkins, B.A. 1994. “Screening-Procedure for Sodium Fluoroacetate (Compound 1080) at 

Sub-Microgram/Gram Concentrations in Soils.” Analytical Letters. 27(14): 2703–2718. 

http://www.informaworld.com/smpp/content~content=a747219004~db=all~order=page

5.2.82 Literature Reference for Methamidophos (Chromatographia. 2006. 63(5/6): 233–

237) 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Acephate 30560-19-1

Methamidophos 10265-92-6 

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation, and analyte determination and measurement 

Sample Preparation Technique: SPE

Determinative Technique: LC-MS-MS 

Method Developed for: Pesticides (methamidophos) in water samples 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this procedure for preparation and analysis of aqueous liquid samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: The limit of detection for this limit is 30 μg/L. 

Description of Method: A multi-residue analytical method is described for monitoring polar pesticides, 

such as acephate and methamidophos, in water with SPE (solid-phase extraction) and LC-MS-MS. 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 99 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

Samples are analyzed using a C18 analytical column (150 mm x 3.2 mm I.D., 5μm particle size) coupled 

with a C18 guard cartridge system (4 mm x 3.0 mm I.D.).

Source: Liu, F., Bischoff, G., Pestemer, W., Xu, W., and Kofoet, A. 2006. “Multi-residue Analysis of 

Some Polar Pesticides in Water Samples with SPE and LC/MS/MS.” Chromatographia. 63(5/6): 233–

237. http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/Chromatographia-63_pg233-237.pdf 

5.2.83 Literature Reference for Methamidophos (Journal of Chromatography A, 2007. 

1154: 3–25) 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Acephate 30560-19-1

Methamidophos 10265-92-6 

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation, and analyte determination and measurement 

Sample Preparation Technique: Solvent extraction 

Determinative Technique: LC-MS-MS 

Method Developed for: Pesticides (methamidophos) in crops 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this procedure for preparation and analysis of solid, air, and wipe 

samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: The limit of detection for this method is 0.01 mg/kg. 

Description of Method: A liquid chromatography–tandem quadrupole mass spectrometry (LC-MS-MS) 

multi-residue method for the simultaneous target analysis of a wide range of pesticides and metabolites in 

fruit, vegetables and cereals is described. Gradient elution has been used in conjunction with positive 

mode electrospray ionization tandem mass spectrometry to detect up to 171 pesticides and/or metabolites 

in different crop matrices using a single chromatographic run. Pesticide residues are extracted/partitioned 

from the samples with acetone/dichloromethane/light petroleum. Samples are analyzed by LC-MS-MS 

using a C18 analytical column (150 mm x 3.2 mm I.D., 5μm particle size) coupled with a C18 guard 

cartridge system (4 mm x 3.0 mm I.D.).

Special Considerations: The procedure has been developed for the analysis of various pesticides 

(methamidophos) in crops using LC-MS-MS; modifications will be needed for application to 

environmental samples such as soils, wipes, and air samples collected on sorbent/filters. 

Source: Hiemstra, M., de Kok, A. 2007. “Comprehensive Multi-residue Method for the Target Analysis 

of Pesticides in Crops Using Liquid Chromatography-tandem Mass Spectrometry.” Journal of 

Chromatography A. 1154(1): 3–25. http://www.sciencedirect.com/science/journal/00219673

5.2.84 Literature Reference for Fluoroacetamide (Journal of Chromatography B, 2008. 

876(1): 103–108) 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Fluoroacetamide 640-19-7

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation, and analyte determination and measurement 

Sample Preparation Technique: Water extraction

Determinative Technique: GC/MS 

Method Developed for: Fluoroacetamide and tetramine in blood, urine and stomach contents 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 100 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this procedure for preparation and analysis of solid, aqueous liquid, 

drinking water, air, and wipe samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: The detection limit of this method for fluoroacetamide is 0.01 μg/g. 

Description of Method: Samples are extracted by microscale liquid-liquid extraction using acetonitrile, 

ENVI-CARB, and sodium chloride. Samples are analyzed by GC/MS using a 30-m DB-5MS capillary 

column (or equivalent) coupled with a 1.5 m Innowax capillary column (or equivalent) by a quartz 

capillary column connector. If analyzing for fluoroacetamide alone, only the Innowax capillary column is 

needed. 

Special Considerations: The procedure has been developed for the analysis of fluoroacetamide and 

tetramine in blood, urine and stomach fluid samples; modifications will be needed for application to 

environmental samples. 

Source: Xu, X., Song, G., Zhu, Y., Zhang, J., Zhao, Y., Shen, H., Cai, Z., Han, J., and Ren, Y. 2008. 

“Simultaneous Determination of two Accute Poisoning Rodenticides Tetramine and Fluoroacetamide 

with a Coupled Column in Poisoning Cases.” Journal of Chromatography B. 876(1): 103–108.

http://www.sciencedirect.com/science/journal/15700232

5.2.85 Literature Reference for Sodium Azide (Journal of Forensic Sciences, 1998. 43(1): 

200–202) 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Sodium azide (analyze as azide ion) 26628-22-8

Analysis Purpose: Sample preparation 

Sample Preparation Technique: Water extraction, filtration, and/or acidification 

Determinative Technique: IC with conductivity detection

Determinative Method: EPA Method 300.1, Revision 1.0 

Method Developed for: Sodium azide in blood 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this procedure for preparation of solid, aqueous liquid, and drinking 

water samples. 

Detection and Quantitation: This method can routinely quantify to at least 100 μg/L, and the detection 

limit is estimated to be 30 μg/L. 

Description of Method: Samples are analyzed by IC using suppressed conductivity detection. Water 

extraction and filtration steps should be used for the preparation of solid samples. Filtration steps should 

be used for preparation of aqueous liquid and drinking water samples. 

Special Considerations: The procedure described above has been developed for the analysis of sodium 

azide in blood samples. 

Source: Kruszyna, R., Smith, R.P., and Kruszyna, H. 1998. “Determining Sodium Azide Concentration 

in the Blood by Ion Chromatography.” Journal of Forensic Sciences. 43(1): 200–202. 

http://www.astm.org/JOURNALS/FORENSIC/PAGES/2933.htm

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 101 October 2010
Section 5 – Selected Chemical Methods 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 102 October 2010
Section 6 – Selected Radiohemical Methods 

Section 6.0: Selected Radiochemical Methods 

A list of analytical methods to be used in analyzing environmental samples for radiochemical 

contaminants during homeland security events is provided in Appendix B. Methods are listed for each 

isotope and for each sample type that potentially may need to be measured and analyzed when responding 

to an environmental emergency. 

 

Please note: This section provides guidance for selecting radiochemical methods that have a high 

likelihood of assuring analytical consistency when laboratories are faced with a large scale 

environmental restoration crisis. Not all methods have been verified for the analyte/sample type 

combination listed in Appendix B. Please refer to the specified method to identify analyte/sample type 

combinations that have been verified. Any questions regarding information discussed in this section 

should be addressed to the appropriate contact(s) listed in Section 4.

Appendix B is sorted alphabetically by analyte and includes the following information: 

• Analyte(s). The radionuclide(s) or contaminant(s) of interest. 

• CAS RN. A unique identifier for chemical substances that provides an unambiguous way to identify 

a chemical or molecular structure when there are many possible systematic, generic, or trivial names. 

In this section (Section 6.0) and Appendix B, the CAS RNs correspond to the specific radionuclide 

identified. 

• Determinative technique. An analytical instrument or technique used for qualitative and 

confirmatory determination of compounds or components in a sample. 

• Drinking water sample methods. The recommended methods/procedures for sample preparation 

and analysis to measure the analyte of interest in drinking water samples. Methods have been 

identified for qualitative and confirmatory determination. 

• Aqueous and liquid phase sample methods. The recommended methods/procedures for sample 

preparation and analysis to measure the analyte of interest in aqueous and/or non-aqueous liquid 

phase samples. Methods have been identified for qualitative and confirmatory determination. 

• Soil and sediment phase sample methods. The recommended methods/procedures for sample 

preparation and analysis to measure the analyte of interest in soil and sediment samples. Methods 

have been identified for qualitative and confirmatory determination. 

• Surface wipe sample methods. The recommended methods/procedures for sample preparation and 

analysis to measure the analyte of interest in surface wipe samples. Methods have been identified for 

qualitative and confirmatory determination. 

• Air filter sample methods. The recommended methods/procedures for sample preparation and 

analysis to measure the analyte of interest in air filter samples. Methods have been identified for 

qualitative and confirmatory determination. 

• Qualitative determination method identifier. A unique identifier or number assigned to an 

analytical method by the method publisher. The identified method is intended to determine the 

presence of a radionuclide. These methods are less precise than confirmatory methods, and are used 

when greater sample throughput and more rapid reporting of results is required. 

• Confirmatory method identifier. A unique identifier or number assigned to an analytical method by 

the method publisher. The identified method is for measurement of the activity from a particular 

radionuclide per unit of mass, volume, or area sampled. 

Following a homeland security event, it is assumed that only those areas with contamination greater than 

pre-existing/naturally prevalent levels commonly found in the environment would be subject to 

remediation. Dependent on site- and event-specific goals, investigation of background levels using 

methods listed in Appendix B is recommended. 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 103 October 2010
Section 6 – Selected Radiohemical Methods 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 104 October 2010

6.1 General Guidelines 

The guidelines summarized in this section provide a general overview of how to identify the appropriate 

radiochemical method(s) for a given analyte-sample type combination, as well as recommendations for 

QC procedures. 

For additional information on the properties of the radionuclides listed in Appendix B, TOXNET 

(http://toxnet.nlm.nih.gov/index.html), a cluster of databases on toxicology, hazardous chemicals, and 

related areas maintained by the National Library of Medicine, is an excellent resource. EPA’s Radiation 

Protection (http://www.epa.gov/radiation/radionuclides/index.html) and the Multi-Agency Radiological 

Laboratory Analytical Protocols Manual (MARLAP) (http://www.epa.gov/radiation/marlap/manual.html) 

Web sites provide some additional information pertaining to radionuclides of interest and selection of 

radiochemical methods. Emergency response documents recently developed by EPA’s Office of Radiation 

and Indoor Air (ORIA) may be found at http://www.epa.gov/narel/incident_guides.html. 

6.1.1 Standard Operating Procedures for Identifying Radiochemical Methods 

To determine the appropriate method to be used on an environmental sample, locate the analyte of 

concern in Appendix B: Radiochemical Methods under the “Analyte Class” or “Analyte(s)” column. 

After locating the analyte of concern, continue across the table to identify the appropriate determinative 

technique (e.g., alpha spectrometry), then identify the appropriate qualitative and/or confirmatory method 

for the sample type of interest (drinking water, aqueous and liquid phase, soil and sediment, surface 

wipes, and air filters) for the particular analyte. 

Sections 6.2.1 through 6.2.36, below, provide summaries of the qualitative and confirmatory methods 

listed in Appendix B. Once a method has been identified in Appendix B, Table 6-1 can be used to locate 

the method summary. 

Table 6-1. Radiochemical Methods and Corresponding Section Numbers 

Analyte / Analyte Class CAS RN Method Section 

900.0 (EPA) 6.2.2 

FRMAC, Vol 2, pg. 33 (DOE) 6.2.21 

AP1 (ORISE) 6.2.23 

Gross Alpha 

Gross Beta 

NA 

NA 

7110 B (SM) 6.2.30 

Gamma 901.1 (EPA) 6.2.3 

Select Mixed Fission Products* NA 

Ga-01-R (HASL-300) 6.2.16 

Am-01-RC (HASL-300) 6.2.13 

Am-02-RC (HASL-300) 6.2.14 

Am-04-RC (HASL-300) 6.2.15 

Pu-12-RC (HASL-300) 6.2.18 

AP11 (ORISE) 6.2.26 

Americium-241 14596-10-2 

D3084-05 (ASTM) 6.2.28 

 

* Please note that this category does not cover all fission products.
Section 6 – Selected Radiohemical Methods 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 105 October 2010

Analyte / Analyte Class CAS RN Method Section 

Am-01-RC (HASL-300) 6.2.13 

Am-04-RC (HASL-300) 6.2.15 

Pu-12-RC (HASL-300) 6.2.18 

AP11 (ORISE) 6.2.26 

Californium-252 13981-17-4 

D3084-05 (ASTM) 6.2.28 

901.1 (EPA) 6.2.3 

Ga-01-R (HASL-300) 6.2.16 

Cesium-137 

Cobalt-60 

10045-97-3 

10198-40-0 7120 (SM) 6.2.31 

Am-01-RC (HASL-300) 6.2.13 

Am-04-RC (HASL-300) 6.2.15 

Pu-12-RC (HASL-300) 6.2.18 

AP11 (ORISE) 6.2.26 

Curium-244 13981-15-2 

D3084-05 (ASTM) 6.2.28 

901.1 (EPA) 6.2.3 

Europium-154 15585-10-1 Ga-01-R (HASL-300) 6.2.16 

7120 (SM) 6.2.31 

Iodine-125 14158-31-7 Procedure #9 (ORISE) 6.2.27 

901.1 (EPA) 6.2.3 

Iodine-131 10043-66-0 

Ga-01-R (HASL-300) 6.2.16 

901.1 (EPA) 6.2.3 

Iridium-192 14694-69-0 Ga-01-R (HASL-300) 6.2.16 

7120 (SM) 6.2.31 

901.1 (EPA) 6.2.3 Molybdenum-99 14119-15-4 

Ga-01-R (HASL-300) 6.2.15 

R4-73-014 (EPA) 6.2.11 

Phosphorus-32 14596-37-3 

RESL P-2 (DOE) 6.2.22 

EMSL-33 (EPA) 6.2.10 

AP11 (ORISE) 6.2.26 

Plutonium-238 

Plutonium-239 

13981-16-3 

15117-48-3 D3084-05 (ASTM) 6.2.28 

Method 111 (EPA) 6.2.1 

Polonium-210 13981-52-7 

Po-02-RC (HASL-300) 6.2.17 

903.0 (EPA) 6.2.4 

903.1 (EPA) 6.2.5 

EMSL-19 (EPA) 6.2.9 

D3084-05 (ASTM) 6.2.28 

7500-Ra B (SM) 6.2.32 

Radium-226 13982-63-3 

7500-Ra C (SM) 6.2.33 

901.1 (EPA) 6.2.3 

Ga-01-R (HASL-300) 6.2.16 

Ruthenium-103 

Ruthenium-106 

Selenium-75 

13968-53-1 

13967-48-1 

14265-71-5 7120 (SM) 6.2.31 
Section 6 – Selected Radiohemical Methods 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 106 October 2010

Analyte / Analyte Class CAS RN Method Section 

905.0 (EPA) 6.2.6 

Strontium-89 14158-27-1 Stronium in Food and 

Bioenvironmental Samples 6.2.12 

905.0 (EPA) 6.2.6 

Strontium-90 10098-97-2 Sr-03-RC (HASL-300) 6.2.19 

7500-Sr B (SM) 6.2.34 

Tc-02-RC (HASL-300) 6.2.20 Technetium-99 14133-76-7 

AP5 (ORISE) 6.2.25 

906.0 (EPA) 6.2.7 Tritium (Hydrogen-3) 10028-17-8 

AP2 (ORISE) 6.2.24 

908.0 (EPA) 6.2.8 

EMSL-33 (EPA) 6.2.10 

AP11 (ORISE) 6.2.26 

D3084-05 (ASTM) 6.2.28 

D3972-02 (ASTM) 6.2.29 

7500-U B (SM) 6.2.35 

Uranium-234 

Uranium-235 

Uranium-238 

13966-29-5 

15117-96-1 

7440-61-1 

7500-U C (SM) 6.2.36 

The method summaries are listed in order of method selection hierarchy (see Figure 2-1), starting with 

EPA methods, followed by methods from other federal agencies and VCSBs. Methods are listed in 

numerical order under each publisher. Where available, a direct link to the full text of the selected 

analytical method is provided in the method summary. For additional information regarding sample 

preparation and analysis procedures and on methods available through consensus standards organizations, 

please use the contact information provided in Table 6-2. 

Table 6-2 Souces of Radiochemical Methods 

Name Publisher Reference

NEMI EPA, USGS http://www.nemi.gov

CFR Promulgated Test 

Methods 

EPA, Technical Transfer Network 

(TTN) Emission Measurement 

Center (EMC) 

http://www.epa.gov/ttn/emc/promgate.html

Prescribed Procedures for 

Measurement of Radioactivity 

in Drinking Water (EPA-600 4-

80-032, August 1980)

EPA, ORD, Environmental 

Monitoring and Support Laboratory 

(EMSL)

http://www.sld.state.nm.us/Documents/for

ewd.pdf

Also available from National Technical 

Information Service (NTIS)*, U.S. 

Department of Commerce, 5285 Port 

Royal Road, Springfield, VA 22161, (703) 

605-6000.

Radiochemical Analytical 

Procedures for Analysis of 

Environmental Samples, March 

1979. EMSL-LV-0539-17

EPA, EMSL Available NTIS*, U.S. Department of 

Commerce, 5285 Port Royal Road, 

Springfield, VA 22161, (703) 605-6000.
Section 6 – Selected Radiohemical Methods 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 107 October 2010

Name Publisher Reference

EML Procedures Manual, 

Health and Safety Laboratory 

(HASL-300), 28th Edition, 

February, 1997

Department of Energy (DOE), 

Environmental Measurements 

Laboratory (EML) / Now DHS 

http://www.eml.st.dhs.gov/publications/pro

cman.cfm

Also available from NTIS*, U.S. 

Department of Commerce, 5285 Port 

Royal Road, Springfield, VA 22161, (703) 

605-6000.

Federal Radiological Monitoring 

and Assessment Center 

(FRMAC) Laboratory Manual 

DOE, National Nuclear Security 

Administration (NNSA) 

http://www.nv.doe.gov/nationalsecurity/ho

melandsecurity/frmac/manuals.aspx

Radiological and Environmental 

Sciences Laboratory (RESL) 

Analytical Chemistry Branch 

Procedures Manual 

DOE, RESL Available from NTIS, U.S. Department of 

Commerce, 5285 Port Royal Road, 

Springfield, VA 22161, (703) 605-6000. 

Oak Ridge Institute for Science 

and Education (ORISE) 

Laboratory Procedures Manual 

ORISE, Independent 

Environmental Assessment and 

Verification 

http://orise.orau.gov/ieav/surveyprojects/lab-manual.htm

Annual Book of ASTM 

Standards, Vol. 11.02*

ASTM International http://www.astm.org

Standard Methods for the 

Examination of Water and 

Wastewater, 21st Edition, 2005*

APHA, AWWA, and WEF http://www.standardmethods.org

* Subscription and/or purchase required. 

6.1.2 General QC Guidelines for Radiochemical Methods 

Having data of known and documented quality is critical so that public officials can accurately assess the 

activities that may be needed in remediating a site. Having such data requires that laboratories: (1) 

conduct the necessary QC to ensure that measurement systems are in control and operating correctly; (2) 

properly document results of the analyses; and (3) properly document measurement system evaluation of 

the analysis-specific QC. Ensuring data quality also requires that laboratory results are properly 

evaluated and the results of the data quality evaluation are transmitted to decision makers. 

The level or amount of QC needed often depends on the intended purpose of the data that are generated. 

Various levels of QC may be required if the data are generated during contaminant presence/absence 

qualitative determinations versus confirmatory analyses. The specific needs for data generation should be 

identified. QC requirements and data quality objectives should be derived based on those needs, and 

should be applied consistently across laboratories when multiple laboratories are used. For example, 

during rapid sample screening analyses, minimal QC samples (e.g., blanks, duplicates) and 

documentation might be required to ensure data quality. Implementation of the analytical methods for 

evaluation of environmental samples during site assessment through site clearance, such as those 

identified in this document, might require increased QC. 

Some method-specific QC requirements are described in many of the individual methods that are cited in 

this manual. QC requirements will be referenced in SAPs developed to address specific analytes and 

sample types of concern. Additional information regarding QC requirements specific to radiochemical 

methods is included in the MARLAP manual at: http://www.epa.gov/radiation/marlap/manual.html. 

Individual methods, sampling and analysis protocols, or contractual statements of work also should be 

consulted to determine any additional QC that may be needed. 
Section 6 – Selected Radiohemical Methods 

QC samples are required to assess the precision, bias, and reliability of sample results. All QC results are 

tracked on control charts and reviewed for acceptability and trends in analysis or instrument operation. 

QC parameters are measured as required per method at the prescribed frequency. QC of laboratory 

analyses using radiochemical methods includes ongoing analysis of QC samples and tracking QC 

parameters including, but not limited to the following: 

• Method blanks; 

• Calibration checks; 

• Sample and sample duplicates; 

• Laboratory control sample recoveries; 

• MS/MSD recoveries; and 

• Tracer and/or carrier yield. 

Please note: The appropriate point of contact identified in Section 4 should be consulted regarding 

appropriate QA/QC procedures prior to sample analysis. These contacts will consult with the EPA 

coordinator responsible for laboratory activities during the specific event to ensure QA/QC procedures are 

performed consistently across laboratories. EPA program offices will be responsible for ensuring that the 

QA/QC practices are implemented. 

 

6.1.3 Safety and Waste Management 

It is imperative that safety precautions be used during collection, processing, and analysis of 

environmental samples. Laboratories should have a documented health and safety plan for handling 

samples that may contain target CBR contaminants, and laboratory staff should be trained in and 

implement the safety procedures included in the plan. In addition, many of the methods summarized or 

cited in Section 6.2 contain specific requirements, guidelines, or information regarding safety precautions 

that should be followed when handling or processing environmental samples and reagents. These 

methods may also provide information regarding waste management. Laboratories should consult with 

the responsible government agencies prior to disposal of waste materials. Other resources that can be 

consulted for additional information include the following: 

• OSHA - 29 CFR part 1910.1450. Occupational Exposure to Hazardous Chemicals in Laboratories. 

http://www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr/waisidx_06/29cfr1910a_06.html

• EPA - 40 CFR part 260. Hazardous Waste Management System: General. 

http://www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr/waisidx_07/40cfr260_07.html

• EPA - 40 CFR part 270. EPA Administered Permit Programs: The Hazardous Waste Permit Program. 

http://www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr/waisidx_07/40cfr270_07.html

• NRC - 10 CFR part 20. Standards for Protection Against Radiation 

http://www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr/waisidx_00/10cfr20_00.html

• DOE. Order O 435.1: Radioactive Waste Management. July 1, 1999. Available at: 

www.directives.doe.gov/pdfs/doe/doetext/neword/435/o4351.html

• DOE. M 435.1-1. Radioactive Waste Management Manual. Office of Environmental Management. 

July 9, 1999. Available at: http://www.directives.doe.gov/pdfs/doe/doetext/neword/435/m4351-

1.html

• DOE. Compendium of EPA-Approved Analytical Methods for Measuring Radionuclides in Drinking 

Water. Prepared by the Office of Environmental Policy and Assistance Air, Water and Radiation 

Division (EH-412). June 1998. Available at: 

http://www.orau.org/ptp/PTP%20Library/library/DOE/Misc/radmeth3.pdf

• EPA. 1996. Profile and Management Options for EPA Laboratory Generated Mixed Waste. Office 

of Radiation and Indoor Air, Washington, DC. EPA 402-R-96-015. Available at: 

http://www.epa.gov/rpdweb00/docs/mixed-waste/402-r-96-015.pdf

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 108 October 2010
Section 6 – Selected Radiohemical Methods 

• EPA. 2001. Changes to 40 CFR 266 (Storage, Treatment, Transportation, and Disposal of Mixed 

Waste), Federal Register 66:27217-27266, May 16. Available at: 

http://frwebgate.access.gpo.gov/cgi-bin/getdoc.cgi?dbname=2001_register&docid=01-11408-

filed.pdf

• EPA. 2008. Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) Orientation Manual. OSWER, 

Washington, DC. EPA530-R-02-016. 259 pp. Available at: 

http://www.epa.gov/osw/inforesources/pubs/orientat/

• MARLAP Manual. 2004. Chapter 17. Waste Management in a Radioanalytical Laboratory. 

Available at: http://www.epa.gov/rpdweb00/docs/marlap/402-b-04-001b-17-final.pdf

• National Research Council. 1995. Prudent Practices in the Laboratory; Handling and Disposal of 

Chemicals, National Academy Press, Washington, DC. Available at: 

http://books.nap.edu/openbook.php?isbn=0309052297

• National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements (NCRP). 2002. Risk-Based 

Classification of Radioactive and Hazardous Chemical Wastes, Report Number 139. 7910 

Woodmont Avenue, Suite 400, Bethesda, MD 20814–3095 

• Nuclear Regulatory Commission (NRC) / EPA. 1995. Joint Nuclear Regulatory 

Commission/Environmental Protection Agency Guidance on the Storage of Mixed Radioactive and 

Hazardous Waste., Federal Register 60:40204-40211 

6.2 Method Summaries 

Summaries for the analytical methods listed in Appendix B are provided in Sections 6.2.1 through 6.2.36. 

These summaries contain information that has been extracted from the selected methods. Each method 

summary contains a table identifying the contaminants in Appendix B to which the method applies, a 

brief description of the analytical method, and a link to the full version of the method or a source for 

obtaining a full version of the method. The full version of the method should be consulted prior to 

sample analysis. 

6.2.1 EPA Method 111: Determination of Polonium-210 Emissions from Stationary 

Sources 

Analyte(s) CAS RN 

Polonium-210 13981-52-7 

Analysis Purpose: Qualitative and confirmatory determination 

Determinative Technique: Alpha spectrometry 

Method Developed for: Polonium-210 in particulate matter samples collected from stationary source 

exhaust stacks

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for qualitative and confirmatory analysis of surface wipes 

and air filters. 

Description of Method: This method covers the determination of polonium-210 in particulate matter 

samples collected from stationary sources such as exhaust stacks. Polonium-210 in the sample is put in 

solution, deposited on a metal disc, and the radioactive disintegration rate measured. Polonium in acid 

solution spontaneously deposits on surface metals that are more electropositive than polonium. Po-209 

tracers should be added to determine the chemical yield. 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 109 October 2010
Section 6 – Selected Radiohemical Methods 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 110 October 2010

Source: EPA EMC, prepared by the Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards (OAQPS). 2000. 

“Method 111: Determination of Polonium-210 Emissions from Stationary Sources.” 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA-111.pdf

6.2.2 EPA Method 900.0: Gross Alpha and Gross Beta Radioactivity in Drinking Water 

Analysis Purpose: Gross alpha and gross beta determination

Determinative Technique: Alpha/Beta counting 

Method Developed for: Gross alpha and gross beta particle activities in drinking water 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for gross alpha and gross beta determination in drinking 

water samples. 

Description of Method: The method provides an indication of the presence of alpha and beta emitters, 

including the following SAM analytes: 

• Americium-241 (CAS RN 14596-10-2) Alpha emitter 

• Californium-252 (CAS RN 13981-17-4) Alpha emitter 

• Cesium-137 (CAS RN 10045-97-3) Beta emitter 

• Cobalt-60 (CAS RN 10198-40-0) Beta emitter 

• Curium-244 (CAS RN 13981-15-2) Alpha emitter 

• Europium-154 (CAS RN 15585-10-1) Beta emitter 

• Iridium-192 (CAS RN 14694-69-0) Beta emitter 

• Plutonium-238 (CAS RN 13981-16-3) Alpha emitter 

• Plutonium-239 (CAS RN 15117-48-3) Alpha emitter 

• Polonium-210 (CAS RN 13981-52-7) Alpha emitter 

• Radium-226 (CAS RN 13982-63-3) Alpha emitter 

• Ruthenium-103 (CAS RN 13968-53-1) Beta emitter 

• Ruthenium-106 (CAS RN 13967-48-1) Beta emitter 

• Strontium-90 (CAS RN 10098-97-2) Beta emitter 

• Uranium-234 (CAS RN 13966-29-5) Alpha emitter 

• Uranium-235 (CAS RN 15117-96-1) Alpha emitter 

• Uranium-238 (CAS RN 7440-16-1) Alpha emitter 

An aliquot of a preserved drinking water sample is evaporated to a small volume (3 to 5 mL) and 

transferred quantitatively to a tarred 2-inch planchet. The aliquot volume is determined based on a 

maximum total solids content of 100 mg. The sample aliquot is evaporated to dryness in the planchet to a 

constant weight, cooled, and counted using a gas proportional or scintillation counting system. The 

counting system is calibrated with thorium-230 for gross alpha, and with strontium-90 for gross beta 

analysis3

. A traceable standards-based efficiency curve must be developed for each calibration nuclide 

(Th-230 and Sr-90) based on a range of total solids content in the 2-inch planchet from 0 to 100 mg (see 

method for specific recommendations and requirements for the use of cesium-137). 

Special Considerations: Long counting time and increased sample size may be required to meet 

detection limits. Sensitivity is limited by the concentration of solids in the sample. The method provides 

an overall measure of alpha and beta activity, including activity for the radionuclides listed above, but 

does not permit the specific identification of any alpha or beta emitting radionuclides. 

Source: EPA, EMSL. 1980. “Method 900.0: Gross Alpha and Gross Beta Radioactivity in Drinking 

Water.” Prescribed Procedures for Measurement of Radioactivity in Drinking Water, EPA/600/4/80/032. 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA-900.0.pdf

 

3

 EPA lists standards for use when analyzing drinking water in the table at 40 CFR 141.25 (footnote 11). 
Section 6 – Selected Radiohemical Methods 

6.2.3 EPA Method 901.1: Gamma Emitting Radionuclides in Drinking Water

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Cesium-137 10045-97-3 

Cobalt-60 10198-40-0 

Europium-154 15585-10-1 

Iodine-131 10043-66-0 

Iridium-192 14694-69-0 

Molybdenum-99 14119-15-4 

Ruthenium-103 13968-53-1 

Ruthenium-106 13967-48-1 

Selenium-75 14265-71-5 

 

Analysis Purpose: Qualitative and confirmatory analysis 

Determinative Technique: Gamma spectrometry 

Method Developed for: Gamma emitting radionuclides in drinking water 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for qualitative and confirmatory analysis of select gamma 

emitters in drinking water samples. 

Description of Method: This method is applicable for analysis of water samples that contain 

radionuclides that emit gamma photons with energies ranging from approximately 60 to 2000 keV. The 

method uses gamma spectroscopy for measurement of gamma photons emitted from radionuclides 

without separating them from the sample matrix. A homogeneous aliquot of water is placed into a 

standard geometry (normally a Marinelli beaker) for gamma counting, typically using a high purity 

germanium (HP(Ge)) detector. Detectors such as Germanium (Lithium) (Ge(Li)) or thallium-activated 

sodium iodide (NaI(Tl)) also can be used. Sample aliquots are counted long enough to meet the required 

sensitivity of measurement. To reduce adsorbance of radionuclides on the walls of the counting 

container, the sample is acidified at collection time. Due to its lower resolution, significant interference 

can occur using the NaI(Tl) detector when counting a sample containing radionuclides that emit gamma 

photons of similar energies. When using this method, shielding is needed to reduce background 

interference. Detection limits are, in general, dependent on analyte radionuclide gamma-ray abundance, 

sample volume, geometry (physical shape), and counting time.

Source: EPA, EMSL. 1980. “Method 901.1: Gamma Emitting Radionuclides in Drinking Water.”

Prescribed Procedures for Measurement of Radioactivity in Drinking Water, EPA/600/4/80/032. 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA-901.1.pdf

6.2.4 EPA Method 903.0: Alpha-Emitting Radium Isotopes in Drinking Water

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Radium-226 13982-63-3 

Analysis Purpose: Qualitative determination 

Determinative Technique: Alpha counting 

Method Developed for: Total soluble alpha emitting isotopes of radium, namely radium-223, radium224 and radium-226 in drinking water 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for qualitative determination in drinking water samples. 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 111 October 2010
Section 6 – Selected Radiohemical Methods 

Description of Method: This method covers measurement of the total soluble alpha emitting isotopes of 

radium, namely radium-223, radium-224 and radium-226 in drinking water. The method does not give an 

accurate measurement of radium-226 content in the sample when other alpha emitters are present. If 

radium-223 and radium-224 are present, the results can be used to provide a gross determination of 

radium-226. When the total radium alpha activity of a drinking water sample is greater than 5 pCi/L, use 

of Method 903.1 (Radium-226 in Drinking Water) is preferred. Radium in the water sample is collected 

by coprecipitation with barium and lead sulfate, and purified by re-precipitation from EDTA solution. 

Citric acid is added to ensure that complete interchange occurs before the first precipitation step. The 

final barium sulfate precipitate is alpha counted to determine the total disintegration rate of the radium 

isotopes. By making a correction for the ingrowth of radon and its alpha emitting progeny for the elapsed 

time after separation, one can determine radium activity in the sample. Presence of significant natural 

barium in the sample can result in a falsely high yield. Based on a 1000-mL sample and 100-minute 

counting time, the minimum detectable level for this method is 0.5 pCi/L. 

Source: EPA, EMSL. 1980. “Method 903.0: Alpha-Emitting Radium Isotopes in Drinking Water.”

Prescribed Procedures for Measurement of Radioactivity in Drinking Water, EPA/600/4/80/032. 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA-903.0.pdf

6.2.5 EPA Method 903.1: Radium-226 in Drinking Water – Radon Emanation Technique

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Radium-226 13982-63-3 

Analysis Purpose: Confirmatory analysis 

Determinative Technique: Alpha counting 

Method Developed for: Radium-226 in drinking water 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for confirmatory analysis of drinking water samples. 

 

Description of Method: This method is specific for radium-226, and is based on the emanation and 

scintillation counting of radon-222, the immediate decay product of radium-226. Radium-226 is 

concentrated and separated from the water sample by coprecipitation on barium sulfate. The precipitate is 

dissolved in EDTA reagent, placed in a sealed bubbler and stored for ingrowth of radon-222. After 

ingrowth, the radon-222 gas is purged into a scintillation cell. When the short-lived radon-222 daughters 

are in equilibrium with the parent (after ~4h), the scintillation cell is counted for activity. The absolute 

measurement of radium-226 is effected by calibrating the scintillation cell system with a standard solution 

of the nuclide. There are no radioactive interferences in this method. Based on a 1000-mL sample and 

100-minute counting time, the minimum detectable level for this method is 0.5 pCi/L. 

Source: EPA, EMSL. 1980. “Method 903.1: Radium-226 in Drinking Water – Radon Emanation 

Technique.” Prescribed Procedures for Measurement of Radioactivity in Drinking Water, 

EPA/600/4/80/032. http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA-903.1.pdf

6.2.6 EPA Method 905.0: Radioactive Strontium in Drinking Water 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Strontium-89 14158-27-1 

Strontium-90 10098-97-2 

Analysis Purpose: Qualitative and confirmatory analysis 

Determinative Technique: Beta counting 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 112 October 2010
Section 6 – Selected Radiohemical Methods 

Method Developed for: Strontium-89, strontium-90, and total strontium in drinking water 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for qualitative and confirmatory analysis of aqueous/liquid 

and drinking water samples for strontium-89 and analysis of drinking water samples for strontium-90. 

 

Description of Method: Stable strontium carrier is added to the water sample. Both strontium-89 and 

strontium-90 are precipitated from the solution as insoluble carbonates. Interferences from calcium and 

from some radionuclides are removed by one or more precipitations of the strontium carrier as strontium 

nitrate. Barium and radium are removed by precipitation as chromates. The yttrium-90 decay product of 

strontium-90 is removed by a hydroxide precipitation step. The separated strontium-89 and strontium-90 

are precipitated as carbonates, weighed for determination of the chemical recovery, and counted for beta 

particle activity. The counting result, ascertained immediately after separation, represents the total 

strontium activity (strontium-89 and strontium-90) plus an insignificant fraction of the yttrium-90 that has 

grown into the separated strontium-90. The yttrium-90 decay product is allowed to in-grow for 

approximately two weeks and then is separated with stable yttrium carrier as hydroxide and finally 

precipitated as the oxalate, weighed for chemical recovery, and mounted for beta counting. The 

strontium-90 concentration is determined from the yttrium-90 activity; strontium-89 concentration is 

determined from the difference. 

Source: EPA, EMSL. 1980. “Method 905.0: Radioactive Strontium in Drinking Water, 

Prescribed Procedures for Measurement of Radioactivity in Drinking Water, EPA/600/4/80/032. 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA-905.0.pdf 

6.2.7 EPA Method 906.0: Tritium in Drinking Water 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Tritium (Hydrogen-3) 10028-17-8 

Analysis Purpose: Qualitative and confirmatory analysis 

Determinative Technique: Liquid scintillation 

Method Developed for: Tritium (as T2O or HTO) in drinking water 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for qualitative and confirmatory analysis of drinking water 

and aqueous/liquid phase samples. 

Description of Method: An unpreserved 100-mL aliquot of a drinking water sample is distilled after 

adjusting pH with a small amount of sodium hydroxide and adding potassium permanganate. The 

alkaline treatment prevents other radionuclides, such as radioiodine and radiocarbon, from distilling with 

the tritium. The permanganate treatment oxidizes trace organics that may be present in the sample and 

prevents their appearance in the distillate. To determine the concentration of tritium, the middle fraction 

of the distillate is used, because the early and late fractions are more apt to contain materials interfering 

with the liquid scintillation counting process. A portion of this collected fraction is added to a liquid 

scintillator cocktail, and the solution is mixed, dark adapted and counted for beta particle activity. The 

efficiency of the system can be determined by the use of prepared tritiated water standards having the 

same density and color as the sample. 

Source: EPA, EMSL. 1980. “Method 906.0: Tritium in Drinking Water.” Prescribed Procedures for 

Measurement of Radioactivity in Drinking Water, EPA/600/4/80/032. http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA906.0.pdf

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 113 October 2010
Section 6 – Selected Radiohemical Methods 

6.2.8 EPA Method 908.0: Uranium in Drinking Water – Radiochemical Method

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Uranium-234 13966-29-5 

Uranium-235 15117-96-1 

Uranium-238 7440-61-1 

Analysis Purpose: Qualitative determination 

Determinative Technique: Alpha counting 

Method Developed for: Total uranium alpha particle activity in drinking water 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for qualitative determination in drinking water samples. 

Description of Method: This method measures total uranium alpha activity of a sample, without doing 

an isotopic uranium analysis. The sample is acidified with hydrochloric acid and boiled to eliminate 

carbonate and bicarbonate ions. Uranium is coprecipitated with ferric hydroxide and separated from the 

sample. The uranium is then separated from other radionuclides that were carried down with the ferric 

hydroxide by dissolving the hydroxide precipitate in hydrochloric acid, putting the solution through an 

anion exchange column, washing the column with hydrochloric acid, and finally eluting the uranium with 

hydrochloric acid. The uranium eluate is evaporated and the uranium chemical form is converted to 

nitrate. The residue is transferred to a stainless steel planchet, dried, flamed, and counted for alpha 

particle activity. Since uranium is a naturally occurring radionuclide, reagents must be checked for 

uranium contamination by analyzing a complete reagent blank by the same procedure as used for the 

samples. Based on a 1000- mL sample and 100-minute counting time in a single laboratory study, the 

minimum detectable level for this method is 1.0 pCi/L. 

Special Considerations: If it is suspected that the sample exists in refractory form (i.e., non-digestible 

or dissolvable material after normal digestion methods) or if there is a matrix interference problem, use 

ORISE Method AP11. 

Source: EPA, EMSL. 1980. “Method 908.0: Uranium in Drinking Water – Radiochemical Method.”

Prescribed Procedures for Measurement of Radioactivity in Drinking Water, EPA/600/4/80/032. 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA-908.0.pdf

6.2.9 EPA Method EMSL-19: Determination of Radium-226 and Radium-228 in Water, 

Soil, Air and Biological Tissue

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Radium-226 13982-63-3 

Analysis Purpose: Confirmatory analysis 

Determinative Technique: Alpha counting 

Method Developed for: Radium-226 and radium-228 in water, soil, air, biological tissues, and 

biological fluids 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for confirmatory analysis of soil/sediment, surface wipe, 

and air filter samples. 

 

Description of Method: Following acid digestion and filtration of soil, sediment, surface wipe, or air 

filter samples, radium is precipitated with barium sulfate. Barium-radium-sulfate is dissolved in a 

pentasodium diethylenetriamine-pentaacetate (DTPA) solution and transferred to an emanation tube. The 

radon is allowed to come to equilibrium for approximately 30 days. Radium-226 decays by alpha 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 114 October 2010
Section 6 – Selected Radiohemical Methods 

emission to radon-222. Radon-222 is separated and collected from the liquid by a de-emanation 

technique. The radon is counted by alpha scintillation 4.5 hours after de-emanation, at which time the 

short-lived progeny have reached 97% of equilibrium. An applicable measurement range has not been 

determined; however, samples that contain 0.1 pCi of Radium-226 have been analyzed. 

Source: EPA, EMSL. 1979. “EMSL-19: Determination of Radium-226 and Radium-228 in Water, Soil, 

Air and Biological Tissue.” Radiochemical Analytical Procedures for Analysis of Environmental 

Samples. http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA-EMSL-19.pdf

6.2.10 EPA Method EMSL-33: Isotopic Determination of Plutonium, Uranium, and 

Thorium in Water, Soil, Air, and Biological Tissue

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Plutonium-238 13981-16-3 

Plutonium-239 15117-48-3 

Uranium-234 13966-29-5 

Uranium-235 15117-96-1 

Uranium-238 7440-61-1 

Analysis Purpose: Confirmatory analysis

Determinative Technique: Alpha spectrometry 

Method Developed for: Isotopic plutonium, uranium, and thorium, together or individually, in soil, 

water, air filters, urine, or ashed residues of vegetation, animal tissues, and bone 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for confirmatory analysis of drinking water, 

aqueous/liquid, soil/sediment, surface wipe, and/or air filter samples. 

 

Description of Method: This method is appropriate for the analysis of isotopic plutonium, uranium, and 

thorium, together or individually, by alpha spectrometry. Plutonium-236, uranium-232, and thorium-234 

tracer standards are added for the determination of chemical yields. Samples are decomposed by nitrichydrofluoric acid digestion or ignition to assure that all of the plutonium is dissolved and chemically 

separated from the sample by coprecipitation with sodium and ammonium hydroxide, anion exchange, 

and electrodeposition. The residues are dissolved in dilute nitric acid and successive sodium and 

ammonium hydroxide precipitations are performed in the presence of boric acid to remove fluoride and 

soluble salts. The hydroxide precipitate is dissolved, the solution is pH-adjusted with hydrochloric acid, 

and plutonium and uranium are adsorbed on an anion exchange column, separating them from thorium. 

Plutonium is eluted with hydrobromic acid. The actinides are electrodeposited on stainless steel discs 

from an ammonium sulfate solution and subsequently counted by alpha spectrometry. This method is 

designed to detect environmental levels of activity as low as 0.02 pCi per sample. To avoid possible 

cross-contamination, sample aliquot activities should be limited to 25 pCi or less. 

Special Considerations: If it is suspected that the sample exists in refractory form (i.e., non-digestible 

or dissolvable material after normal digestion methods) or if there is a matrix interference problem, use 

ORISE Method AP11. 

Source: EPA, EMSL. 1979. “EMSL-33: Isotopic Determination of Plutonium, Uranium, and Thorium in 

Water, Soil, Air, and Biological Tissue.” Radiochemical Analytical Procedures for Analysis of 

Environmental Sample. http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EPA-EMSL-33.pdf

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 115 October 2010
Section 6 – Selected Radiohemical Methods 

6.2.11 EPA Method R4-73-014: Radioactive Phosphorus

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Phosphorus-32 14596-37-3 

Analysis Purpose: Qualitative and confirmatory analysis 

Determinative Technique: Cerenkov counting with Liquid Scintillation counter 

Method Developed for: Phosporus-32 in nuclear reactor solutions 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for qualitative and confirmatory analysis of water samples. 

Description of Method: 200 mL or less of a water sample is acidified with nitric acid and carriers of 

phosphorus (standardized), cobalt, zirconium, silver, and manganese are added. Hydroxides are 

precipitated by the addition of hydrogen peroxide and potassium hydroxide, and the hot solution is 

filtered through filter paper. Carriers of cobalt and zirconium are added to the filtrate, and the hydroxides 

are precipitated by the addition of hydrogen peroxide and potassium hydroxide. The solution is filtered 

and the hydroxides are discarded. The filtrate is acidified with hydrochloric acid, and phosphorous is 

precipitated as magnesium ammonium phosphate by the addition of a magnesium mixture and ammonium 

hydroxide. The magnesium ammonium phosphate is collected on a tared filter, dried, and weighed to 

determine the chemical yield. The precipitate is mounted and beta counted with a gas-flow proportional 

counter. 

Source: EPA, EMSL. 1980. “Method R4-73-14: Radioactive Phosphorus.” Prescribed Procedures for 

Radiochemical Analysis of Nuclear Reactor Solutions. 

6.2.12 EPA Method: Determination of Radiostrontium in Food and Bioenvironmental 

Samples

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Strontium-89 14158-27-1 

Analysis Purpose: Qualitative and confirmatory analysis 

Determinative Technique: Low background alpha/beta counter 

Method Developed for: Strontium-89 and strontium-90 in food, vegetation, and tissue samples 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for qualitative and confirmatory analysis of soil, sediment, 

wipes, and air filters. 

Description of Method: This method is use for the determination of strontium-89 and strontium-90 in 

various bio-environmental samples. Ten grams or less of the sample is placed in a nickel crucible. 

Barium and strontium (standardized) carriers are added to the sample. Sodium hydroxide pellets and 

anhydrous sodium carbonate are added and mixed, and the sample is fused as a carbonate. The strontiumcalcium carbonates are dissolved in hydrochloric acid, complexed with di-sodium EDTA and passed 

through a cation column where the strontium is absorbed, and the complexed calcium passes through. 

The strontium is eluted from the column and precipitated as a carbonate. The strontium carbonate is 

weighed and mounted on a planchet for beta counting with a low background gas-flow alpha beta counter. 

The chemical yield is determined gravimetrically, using calculations provided in the method. 

Special Considerations: This method was developed for analysis of food, vegetation, and tissue. 

Additional laboratory development and testing is necessary for application to soil, sediment, air filters, 

and wipes. 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 116 October 2010
Section 6 – Selected Radiohemical Methods 

Source: EPA, National Environmental Research Center. 1975. “Determination of Radiostrontium in 

Food and Bioenvironmental Samples.” Handbook of Radiochemical Methods, EPA-680/4-75-001. 

6.2.13 EML HASL-300 Method Am-01-RC: Americium in Soil

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Americium-241 14596-10-2 

Californium-252 13981-17-4 

Curium-244 13981-15-2 

 

Analysis Purpose: Confirmatory analysis 

Determinative Technique: Alpha spectrometry 

Method Developed for: Americium in soil 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for confirmatory analysis of soil/sediment samples. 

 

Description of Method: This method uses alpha spectrometry for determination of americium-241 in 

soil, and also can be applied for determination of californium. Americium is leached from soil with nitric 

acid and hydrochloric acid. Americium-243 is added as a tracer to determine chemical yield. The soil is 

processed through the plutonium separation steps using ion exchange resin according to Method Pu-11-

RC. Americium is collected with a calcium oxalate precipitation and finally isolated and purified by ion 

exchange. Californium-252 and curium-244 are eluted with americium as americium is stripped off the 

column. After source preparation by microprecipitation, americium-241, californium-252, and curium244 are determined by alpha spectrometry analysis. The counting period chosen depends on the 

sensitivity required of the measurement and the degree of uncertainty in the result that is acceptable. The 

lower limit of detection (LLD) for americium-241 is 0.5 mBq when counted for 1000 minutes. In cases 

where less than 100 g of sample is available, use of Pu-12-RC is recommended. 

Special Considerations: If it is suspected that the sample exists in refractory form (i.e., non-digestible 

or dissolvable material after normal digestion methods) or if there is a matrix interference problem, use 

ORISE Method AP11. 

Source: EML, DOE (EML is currently part of the DHS). 1997. “HASL-300 Method Am-01-RC: 

Americium in Soil.” EML Procedures Manual, HASL-300, 28th Edition. 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EML-Am-01-RC.pdf

6.2.14 EML HASL-300 Method Am-02-RC: Americium-241 in Soil-Gamma Spectrometry

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Americium-241 14596-10-2 

Analysis Purpose: Qualitative determination

Determinative Technique: Gamma spectrometry

Method Developed for: Americium-241 in large volume soil samples 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for qualitative determination in soil/sediment samples. 

Description of Method: This method uses gamma spectrometry for determination of americium-241 in 

soil. Americium-241 decays with the emission of a gamma ray at 59.5 keV with a decay frequency 

(abundance or yield) of 35.9%. The sample is placed into an appropriately sized standard geometry 

(normally a Marinelli beaker) after drying and grinding the sample for homogenization. Gamma-ray 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 117 October 2010
Section 6 – Selected Radiohemical Methods 

attenuation corrections are required if the calibration source and the sample are in a different matrix or are 

of different densities. The LLD for 600 to 800 g of soil in a Marinelli beaker is 0.74 mBq for a 1000-

minute count. 

Source: EML, DOE (EML is currently part of the DHS). 1997. “HASL-300 Method Am-02-RC: 

Americium-241 in Soil-Gamma Spectrometry.” EML Procedures Manual, HASL-300, 28th Edition. 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EML-Am-02-RC.pdf

 

6.2.15 EML HASL-300 Method Am-04-RC: Americium in QAP Water and Air Filters - 

Eichrom’s TRU Resin

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Americium-241 14596-10-2 

Californium-252 13981-17-4 

Curium-244 13981-15-2 

 

Analysis Purpose: Confirmatory analysis 

Determinative Technique: Alpha spectrometry 

Method Developed for: Americium (but not lanthanides) in water and air filters 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for confirmatory analysis of drinking water, aqueous/liquid 

samples, surface wipes, and air filters. 

 

Description of Method: This method is specific to measurement of americium isotopes in samples that 

do not contain lanthanides, but also can be used for measurement of californium and curium. The method 

uses microprecipitation and determination by alpha spectrometry. Americium-243 is added to the sample 

to determine chemical yield. The sample is processed through separation steps using ion exchange resins. 

The eluate from the ion exchange column containing americium (and all other ions, except plutonium) is 

evaporated, redissolved, and loaded onto a Transuranic (TRU) Resin extraction column. Americium (and 

curium and californium, if present) is separated and purified on the column and finally stripped with 

dilute nitric acid stripping solution. Microprecipitation is used to prepare for alpha spectrometry. The 

method involves sample preparation steps from EML HASL-300 Method Pu-10-RC for water samples. 

The LLD for total americium is 0.3 mBq when counted for 1000 minutes. 

Special Considerations: If it is suspected that the sample exists in refractory form (i.e., non-digestible 

or dissolvable material after normal digestion methods) or if there is a matrix interference problem, use 

ORISE Method AP11. 

Source: EML, DOE (EML is currently part of the DHS). 1997. “HASL-300 Method Am-04-RC: 

Americium in QAP Water and Air Filters - Eichrom’s TRU Resin.” EML Procedures Manual, HASL300, 28th Edition. http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EML-Am-04-RC.pdf

6.2.16 EML HASL-300 Method Ga-01-R: Gamma Radioassay

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Cesium-137 10045-97-3 

Cobalt-60 10198-40-0 

Europium-154 15585-10-1 

Iodine-131 10043-66-0 

Iridium-192 14694-69-0 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 118 October 2010
Section 6 – Selected Radiohemical Methods 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 119 October 2010

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Molybdenum-99 14119-15-4 

Ruthenium-103 13968-53-1 

Ruthenium-106 13967-48-1 

Selenium-75 14265-71-5 

 

Analysis Purpose: Qualitative and confirmatory analysis or gross gamma determination

Determinative Technique: Gamma spectrometry

Method Developed for: Gamma-ray emitting radionuclides in a variety of environmental matrices 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for qualitative and/or confirmatory analysis of select 

gamma emitters in aqueous/liquid, soil/sediment, surface wipes, and/or air filter samples. 

Description of Method: This method uses gamma spectrometry for the measurement of gamma photons 

emitted from radionuclides without separating them from the sample matrix. Samples are placed into a 

standard geometry for gamma counting, typically using an HP(Ge) detector. Detectors such as Ge(Li) or 

NaI(Tl) also can be used. The sample is placed into a standard geometry for gamma counting. Soil 

samples and sludge are placed into an appropriately sized Marinelli beaker after drying and grinding the 

sample for homogenization. Air filters and surface wipes can be counted directly or pressed into a 

planchet and counted. Samples are counted long enough to meet the required sensitivity of measurement. 

For typical counting systems and sample types, activity levels of approximately 40 Bq are measured, and 

sensitivities as low as 0.002 Bq can be achieved for many nuclides. Because of electronic limitations, 

count rates higher than 2000 counts per second (cps) should be avoided. High activity samples may be 

diluted, reduced in size, or moved away from the detector (a limited distance) to reduce the count rate and 

allow for analysis. The method is applicable for analysis of samples that contain radionuclides emitting 

gamma photons with energies above approximately 20 keV for germanium (Ge) (both HP(Ge) and GeLi) 

detectors and above 50 keV for NaI(Tl) detectors. 

Source: EML, DOE (EML is currently part of the DHS). 1997. “HASL-300 Method Ga-01-R: Gamma 

Radioassay.” EML Procedures Manual, HASL-300, 28th Edition. http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EML-Ga01-R.pdf

6.2.17 EML HASL-300 Method Po-02-RC: Polonium in Water, Vegetation, Soil, and Air 

Filters

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Polonium-210 1-3981-52-7 

 

Analysis Purpose: Qualitative and confirmatory analysis 

Determinative Technique: Alpha spectrometry

Method Developed for: Polonium in water, vegetation, soil, and air filters 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for qualitative and confirmatory analysis of drinking water, 

aqueous/liquid, and soil/sediment samples. 

 

Description of Method: This method uses alpha spectrometry for determination of polonium in water, 

vegetation, soil, and air filter samples. Polonium equilibrated with Po-208 or Po-209 tracer is isolated 

from most other elements by coprecipitation with lead sulfide. The sulfide precipitate is dissolved in 

weak hydrochloric acid solution. Polonium is quantitatively deposited on a nickel disc, and the plated 

disc is counted on an alpha spectrometer to measure chemical yield and activity of the sample. The 
Section 6 – Selected Radiohemical Methods 

solution from the deposition may be retained and analyzed for Pb-210. When counted for 1000 minutes, 

the LLD for polonium is 1.0 mBq for water and 1.3 mBq for vegetation, soil and filters.

Source: EML, DOE (EML is currently part of the DHS). 1997. “HASL-300 Method Po-02-RC: 

Polonium in Water, Vegetation, Soil, and Air Filters.” EML Procedures Manual, HASL-300, 28th Edition. 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EML-Po-02-RC.pdf

6.2.18 EML HASL-300 Method Pu-12-RC: Plutonium and/or Americium in Soil or 

Sediments

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Americium-241 14596-10-2 

Californium-252 13981-17-4 

Curium-244 13981-15-2 

Analysis Purpose: Confirmatory analysis

Determinative Technique: Alpha spectrometry 

Method Developed for: Plutonium and americium in soil 

Method Selected for: This method is listed in SAM for use when small soil and sediment sample sizes 

(≤100 g) will be analyzed. 

 

Description of Method: A sample of soil of up to 100 g in size is equilibrated with Am-243 tracer. 

Contaminant isotopes are leached with nitric and hydrochloric acid. Plutonium is removed by ion 

exchange. The eluent from the plutonium separation is saved for determination of americium, curium, 

and californium. Americium, curium, and californium are collected with a calcium oxalate 

coprecipitation, isolated and purified by extraction chromatography. Microprecipitation is used to prepare 

the sample for analysis by alpha spectrometry of americium, curium, and californium. The LLD for 

americium is 0.5 mBq when counted for 1000 minutes.

Special Considerations: In cases where only small sample sizes (≤100 g) will be analyzed, this method 

is recommended for confirmatory analysis. If it is suspected that the sample exists in refractory form (i.e., 

non-digestible or dissolvable material after normal digestion methods) or if there is a matrix interference 

problem, use ORISE Method AP11. 

Source: EML, DOE (EML is currently part of the DHS). 1997. “HASL-300 Method Pu-12-RC: 

Plutonium and/or Americium in Soil or Sediments.” EML Procedures Manual, HASL-300, 28th Edition. 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EML-Pu-12-RC.pdf

6.2.19 EML HASL-300 Method Sr-03-RC: Strontium-90 in Environmental Samples

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Strontium-90 10098-97-2 

 

Analysis Purpose: Qualitative and confirmatory analysis

Determinative Technique: Beta counting 

Method Developed for: Strontium-90 in vegetation, water, air filters and soil 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for qualitative and confirmatory analysis of soil/sediment, 

surface wipe, and air filter samples. 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 120 October 2010
Section 6 – Selected Radiohemical Methods 

Description of Method: Strontium is separated from calcium, other fission products, and natural 

radioactive elements. Fuming nitric acid separations remove the calcium and most other interfering ions. 

Radium, lead and barium are removed with barium chromate. Traces of other fission products are 

scavenged with iron hydroxide. After strontium-90 and yttrium-90 equilibrium has been attained, yttrium90 is precipitated as the hydroxide and converted to oxalate for counting on a low-background gas 

proportional beta counter. Chemical yield is determined with strontium-85 tracer by counting in a gamma 

well detector.

Source: EML, DOE (EML is currently part of the DHS). 1997. “HASL-300 Method Sr-03-RC: 

Strontium-90 in Environmental Samples.” EML Procedures Manual, HASL-300, 28th Edition. 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EML-Sr-03-RC.pdf

6.2.20 EML HASL-300 Method Tc-02-RC: Technetium-99 in Water – TEVA® Resin

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Technetium-99 14133-76-7 

Analysis Purpose: Qualitative and confirmatory analysis

Determinative Technique: Liquid scintillation

Method Developed for: Technetium-99 (Tc-99) in water 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for qualitative and confirmatory analysis of drinking water 

and aqueous/liquid phase samples. 

Description of Method: The sample containing Tc-99 is mixed with Technetium-95m (Tc-95m) added 

as a gamma-emitting tracer. The two isotopes of technetium are brought to an isotopic equilibrium and 

separated from other elements by ferrous and ferric hydroxide coprecipitation. The precipitate is dissolved 

with dilute nitric acid and passed through a commercially available resin column (TEVA® Resin) which is 

highly specific for technetium in the pertechnetate form. The resin is washed with dilute nitric acid to 

remove possible interferences and then it is extruded directly into a suitable liquid scintillation cocktail. 

The sample is typically counted for 1 hour to simultaneously determine Tc-99 activity and the Tc-95m 

radiochemical yield. Quench/efficiency calibration curves need to be established for the liquid 

scintillation spectrometer for both Tc-95m and Tc-99. 

Source: EML, DOE (EML is currently part of the DHS). 1997. “HASL-300 Method Tc-02-RC: 

Technetium-99 in Water – TEVA® Resin.” EML Procedures Manual, HASL-300, 28th Edition. 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EML-Tc-02-RC.pdf

6.2.21 DOE FRMAC Method Volume 2, Page 33: Gross Alpha and Beta in Air

Analysis Purpose: Gross alpha and gross beta determination

Determinative Technique: Alpha/Beta counting 

Method Developed for: Gross alpha and beta in air 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for gross alpha and gross beta determination in air filters, 

and for direct counting of surface wipes. 

Description of Method: A thin-window gas-flow proportional counter is used for counting gross alpha 

and beta radioactivity. The method supplies an approximation of the alpha and beta activity present in the 

air or the removable surface activity dependent on the sample type. The method provides an indication of 

the presence of alpha and beta emitters, including the following SAM analytes:

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 121 October 2010
Section 6 – Selected Radiohemical Methods 

• Americium-241 (CAS RN 14596-10-2) Alpha emitter 

• Californium-252 (CAS RN 13981-17-4) Alpha emitter 

• Cesium-137 (CAS RN 10045-97-3) Beta emitter 

• Cobalt-60 (CAS RN 10198-40-0) Beta emitter 

• Curium-244 (CAS RN 13981-15-2) Alpha emitter 

• Europium-154 (CAS RN 15585-10-1) Beta emitter 

• Iridium-192 (CAS RN 14694-69-0) Beta emitter 

• Plutonium-238 (CAS RN 13981-16-3) Alpha emitter 

• Plutonium-239 (CAS RN 15117-48-3) Alpha emitter 

• Polonium-210 (CAS RN 13981-52-7) Alpha emitter 

• Radium-226 (CAS RN 13982-63-3) Alpha emitter 

• Ruthenium-103 (CAS RN 13968-53-1) Beta emitter 

• Ruthenium-106 (CAS RN 13967-48-1) Beta emitter 

• Strontium-90 (CAS RN 10098-97-2) Beta emitter 

• Uranium-234 (CAS RN 13966-29-5) Alpha emitter 

• Uranium-235 (CAS RN 15117-96-1) Alpha emitter 

• Uranium-238 (CAS RN 7440-16-1) Alpha emitter 

For this application, the procedure requires the use of thorium-230 for alpha counting efficiency and 

cesium-137 for beta counting efficiency in the calibration of the detector. An air filter or swipe sample is 

placed onto a planchet then counted for alpha and beta radioactivity. Activity is reported in activity units 

per volume of air sampled, as units of activity per surface area sampled, or as total units of activity in 

cases where sample collection information is not available. 

Source: FRMAC. 1998. “Gross Alpha and Beta in Air.” FRMAC Monitoring and Analysis Manual – 

Sample Preparation and Analysis - Volume 2, DOE/NV/11718-181 Vol. 2, UC-707, p. 33. 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/FRMAC-Vol2-pg33.pdf 

6.2.22 DOE RESL Method P-2: 32P Fish, Vegetation, Dry Ash, Ion Exchange 

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Phosphorus-32 14596-37-3 

Analysis Purpose: Qualitative and confirmatory analysis 

Determinative Technique: Cerenkov counting with Liquid Scintillation 

Method Developed for: Phosphorus-32 in fish and vegetation 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for qualitative and confirmatory analysis of soil, sediment, 

wipes, and air filters. 

Description of Method: Samples up to 500 g are dry ashed at 550oC and dissolved in two portions of 

nitric acid. The sample is evaporated to half volume and transferred to a perchloric acid hood. 

Concentrated nitric acid and concentrated perchloric acid are added, and the sample is evaporated to 

dryness. The residue is dissolved in hydrochloric acid and filtered through a glass fiber filter. Fe-55 is 

removed by precipitation with cupferron. The solution containing phosphate is purified by passing it 

through anion and cation columns to remove possible contaminants. The purified phosphate is 

precipitated as magnesium ammonium phosphate, filtered onto a glass fiber filter, and dried. The 

magnesium ammonium phosphate is dissolved in nitric acid and transferred to a counting vial. P-32 is 

assayed by counting the Cerenkov radiation with a liquid scintillation counter. 

Special Considerations: Laboratories using this method must have a designated perchloric acid fume 

hood. This method was developed for analysis of fish and vegetation. Additional development and 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 122 October 2010
Section 6 – Selected Radiohemical Methods 

testing is necessary for application to soil, sediment, wipes, and air filters. Phosphorus and iron carrier 

must be added to matrices that do not contain mg quantities of both elements. 

Source: RESL, DOE. 1977. “Method P-2: 32P Fish, Vegetation, Dry Ash, Ion Exchange.” RESL 

Analytical Chemistry Branch Procedures Manual, IDO-12096. 

6.2.23 ORISE Method AP1: Gross Alpha and Beta for Various Matrices 

Analysis Purpose: Gross alpha and gross beta determination

Determinative Technique: Alpha/Beta counting

Method Developed for: Gross alpha and beta in water, soil, vegetation, and other solids 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for gross alpha and gross beta determination in 

soil/sediment samples. 

Description of Method: This method provides an indication of the presence of alpha and beta emitters, 

including the following SAM analytes:

• Americium-241 (CAS RN 14596-10-2) Alpha emitter 

• Californium-252 (CAS RN 13981-17-4) Alpha emitter 

• Cesium-137 (CAS RN 10045-97-3) Beta emitter 

• Cobalt-60 (CAS RN 10198-40-0) Beta emitter 

• Curium-244 (CAS RN 13981-15-2) Alpha emitter 

• Europium-154 (CAS RN 15585-10-1) Beta emitter 

• Iridium-192 (CAS RN 14694-69-0) Beta emitter 

• Plutonium-238 (CAS RN 13981-16-3) Alpha emitter 

• Plutonium-239 (CAS RN 15117-48-3) Alpha emitter 

• Polonium-210 (CAS RN 13981-52-7) Alpha emitter 

• Radium-226 (CAS RN 13982-63-3) Alpha emitter 

• Ruthenium-103 (CAS RN 13968-53-1) Beta emitter 

• Ruthenium-106 (CAS RN 13967-48-1) Beta emitter 

• Strontium-90 (CAS RN 10098-97-2) Beta emitter 

• Uranium-234 (CAS RN 13966-29-5) Alpha emitter 

• Uranium-235 (CAS RN 15117-96-1) Alpha emitter 

• Uranium-238 (CAS RN 7440-16-1) Alpha emitter 

This procedure provides screening measurements to indicate whether specific chemical analyses are 

required for water, soil, vegetation, and other solids. Liquid samples are acidified, concentrated, dried in 

a planchet, and counted in a low-background proportional counter. Solid samples are dried and processed 

to provide homogeneity, and a known quantity is transferred to a planchet and counted in a lowbackground proportional counter. 

Special Considerations: Volatile radionuclides will not be accurately determined using this procedure.

Source: ORISE, Oak Ridge Associated Universities (ORAU). 2001. “Method AP1: Gross Alpha and 

Beta for Various Matrices.” Laboratory Procedures Manual for the Environmental Survey and Site 

Assessment Program. http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/ORISE-AP1.pdf

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 123 October 2010
Section 6 – Selected Radiohemical Methods 

6.2.24 ORISE Method AP2: Determination of Tritium

Analyte(s) CAS RN 

Tritium (Hydrogen-3) 10028-17-8 

Analysis Purpose: Qualitative and confirmatory analysis 

Determinative Technique: Liquid scintillation 

Method Developed for: Tritium in soil, sediment, animal tissue, vegetation, smears, and water samples 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for qualitative and confirmatory analysis of soil/sediment 

and surface wipe samples. 

Description of Method: The tritium in aqueous and solid samples is distilled using an Allihn condenser. 

For solid samples, an appropriate volume of laboratory reagent water is added to facilitate distillation. 

Certain solid samples may be refluxed to ensure distribution of any tritium that may be in the sample. 

The sample may be spiked with a standard tritium solution to evaluate quenching and counting efficiency. 

After the sample has been distilled, an aliquot of the distillate is added to a scintillation cocktail and the 

sample is counted using a liquid scintillation analyzer. 

Special Considerations: Other volatile radionuclides such as iodine and carbon isotopes may interfere 

and may require that the sample be made alkaline using solid sodium hydroxide before distillation. 

Organic impurities may interfere and may require the addition of an oxidizing agent to the sample as well 

as spiking the samples with a standard tritium solution. The addition of a standard tritium solution to 

each sample allows for counting efficiencies to be calculated for each individual sample.

Source: ORISE, ORAU. 2001. “Method AP2: Determination of Tritium.” Laboratory Procedures 

Manual for the Environmental Survey and Site Assessment Program. 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/ORISE-AP2.pdf

6.2.25 ORISE Method AP5: Determination of Technetium-99

Analyte(s) CAS RN 

Technetium-99 14133-76-7 

Analysis Purpose: Qualitative and confirmatory analysis 

Determinative Technique: Liquid scintillation 

Method Developed for: Technetium-99 in sediment, soil, smears, and water at environmental levels 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for qualitative and confirmatory analysis of soil/sediment, 

surface wipe, and air filter samples. 

Description of Method: Solid samples are leached with dilute nitric acid. The leachates are passed 

through a commercially available resin column (TEVA® resin) which is highly specific for technetium in 

the pertechnetate form. The technetium is absorbed onto the extraction resin. The resin is added to a 

scintillation vial containing an appropriate cocktail and counted using a liquid scintillation analyzer. 

Most interfering beta emitting radionuclides (including C-14, P-32, S-35, Sr-90, Y-90, and Th-234) are 

effectively removed using TEVA® resin under the conditions in this procedure. 

Special Considerations: Tritium may follow technetium due to the absorption of some tritium-labeled 

compounds by the resin. Possible tritium interferences are eliminated by setting the technetium counting 

window above the maximum energy of tritium beta particles.

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 124 October 2010
Section 6 – Selected Radiohemical Methods 

Source: ORISE, ORAU. 2001. “Method AP5: Determination of Technetium-99.” Laboratory 

Procedures Manual for the Environmental Survey and Site Assessment Program. 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/ORISE-AP5.pdf

6.2.26 ORISE Method AP11: Sequential Determination of the Actinides in Environmental 

Samples Using Total Sample Dissolution and Extraction Chromatography

Analyte(s) CAS RN 

Americium-241 14596-10-2 

Californium-252 13981-17-4 

Curium-244 13981-15-2 

Plutonium-238 13981-16-3 

Plutonium-239 15117-48-3 

Uranium-234 13966-29-5 

Uranium-235 15117-96-1 

Uranium-238 7440-61-1 

Analysis Purpose: Qualitative and confirmatory analysis 

Determinative Technique: Alpha spectrometry 

Method Developed for: Americium, curium, plutonium, neptunium, thorium, and/or uranium in water 

and solid samples 

Method Selected for: SAM recommends this method for confirmatory analysis when a sample exists in 

a refractory form (i.e., non-digestible or dissolvable material after normal digestion methods) or if there is 

a matrix interference problem. In the event of refractory radioactive material, SAM recommends this 

method for both qualitative determination and confirmatory analysis of drinking water, aqueous/liquid, 

soil/sediment, surface wipes, and air filter samples. 

Description of Method: Solid and unfiltered aqueous samples are dissolved completely by a 

combination of potassium hydrogen fluoride and pyrosulfate fusions. Filtered aqueous samples are 

evaporated to dryness followed by a pyrosulfate fusion. The fusion cake is dissolved and, for analyses 

requiring uranium only, two barium sulfate precipitations are performed, and the uranium is separated 

using EDTA. For all other analyses, one barium sulfate precipitation is performed and all alpha emitters 

are coprecipitated on barium sulfate. The barium sulfate is dissolved and the actinides are separated by 

extraction chromatography. An optional section is presented for the separation of americium from the 

lanthanides. All actinides are coprecipitated on cerium fluoride and counted with an alpha spectrometer 

system. 

Source: ORISE, ORAU. 2001. “Method AP11: Sequential Determination of the Actinides in 

Environmental Samples Using Total Sample Dissolution and Extraction Chromatography.” Laboratory 

Procedures Manual for the Environmental Survey and Site Assessment Program. 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/ORISE-AP11.pdf

6.2.27 ORISE Method Procedure #9: Determination of I-125 in Environmental Samples

Analyte(s) CAS RN 

Iodine-125 14158-31-7 

Analysis Purpose: Qualitative and confirmatory analysis 

Determinative Technique: Gamma spectrometry 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 125 October 2010
Section 6 – Selected Radiohemical Methods 

Method Developed for: Iodine-125 in environmental samples, such as soil, sediment, vegetation, water, 

milk, filters (air or water), etc. 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for qualitative and confirmatory analysis of drinking water, 

aqueous/liquid, soil/sediment, surface wipe, and air filter samples. 

Description of Method: In this method a direct comparison is made between the sample and a source 

prepared from a National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) traceable standard. If it is 

known, either by the sample preparation procedure or by a qualitative analysis on some device (high 

resolution intrinsic planar detector) that I-125 is the only radionuclide contributing to the observed peak, 

then this method can be used as a rapid quantitative method. 

The sample is prepared by matrix specific techniques and the final sample is placed in a 16 millimeter 

culture tube and counted in a 3” x 3” thin window sodium iodide (NaI) well detector attached to a pulse 

height analyzer. I-125 gamma counting rate is determined in the 25 to 35 keV energy range by pulse 

height analysis. NIST traceable liquid standards are also counted in the same geometric configuration as 

the samples to determine I-125 counting efficiency. 

Special Considerations: Due to the low photon energy of I-125, the Compton scattering and x-ray 

photons from other radionuclides may cause significant interferences in this procedure. 

Source: ORISE, ORAU. 1995. “Procedure #9: Determination of I-125 in Environmental Samples.”

Laboratory Procedures Manual for the Environmental Survey and Site Assessment Program. 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/ORISE-Procedure9-1995.pdf

6.2.28 ASTM Method D3084-05: Standard Practice for Alpha Spectrometry in Water

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Americium-241 14596-10-2 

Californium-252 13981-17-4 

Curium-244 13981-15-2 

Plutonium-238 13981-16-3 

Plutonium-239 15117-48-3 

Radium-226 13982-63-3 

Uranium-234 13966-29-5 

Uranium-235 15117-96-1 

Uranium-238 7440-61-1 

Analysis Purpose: Qualitative determination 

Determinative Technique: Alpha spectrometry

Method Developed for: Alpha particle spectra in water 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for qualitative determination in drinking water, 

aqueous/liquid, soil and sediment, surface wipes, and/or air filter samples. 

Description of Method: This standard practice covers the process that is required to obtain wellresolved alpha spectra from water samples and discusses the associated problems. This practice is 

typically preceded with specific chemical separations and mounting techniques that are included in 

referenced methods. A chemical procedure is required to isolate and purify the radionuclides (see ASTM 

Methods D3865, Standard Test Method for Plutonium in Water and D3972, Standard Test Method for 

Isotopic Uranium in Water by Radiochemistry), and a radioactive tracer is added to determine yield. A 

source is prepared by employing electrodeposition, microprecipitation, or evaporation (depositing the 

solution onto a stainless steel or platinum disc). Electrodeposition and microprecipitation are preferred. 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 126 October 2010
Section 6 – Selected Radiohemical Methods 

The source’s radioactivity is then measured in an alpha spectrometer according to manufacturer’s 

operating instructions. The counting period chosen depends on the sensitivity required of the 

measurement and the degree of uncertainty in the result that is acceptable. 

Special Considerations: If it is suspected that the sample exists in refractory form (i.e., non-digestible 

or dissolvable material after normal digestion methods) or if there is a matrix interference problem, use 

ORISE Method AP11 for sample preparation instead of the methods referenced in ASTM Method D3084. 

Source: ASTM. 2005. “Method D3084-05: Standard Practice for Alpha Spectrometry in Water.” Annual 

Book of ASTM Standards, Vol. 11.02. http://www.astm.org/Standards/D3084.htm

6.2.29 ASTM Method D3972-02: Standard Test Method for Isotopic Uranium in Water by 

Radiochemistry

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Uranium-234 13966-29-5 

Uranium-235 15117-96-1 

Uranium-238 7440-61-1 

Analysis Purpose: Confirmatory analysis

Determinative Technique: Alpha spectrometry 

Method Developed for: Alpha-particle-emitting isotopes of uranium in water

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for confirmatory analysis of drinking water samples. 

Description of Method: Uranium is chemically separated from a water sample by coprecipitation with 

ferrous hydroxide followed by anion exchange, and electrodeposition. When suspended matter is present, 

an acid dissolution step is added to ensure that all of the uranium dissolves. The sample is acidified, and 

uranium-232 is added as an isotopic tracer to determine chemical yield. Uranium is coprecipitated from 

the sample with ferrous hydroxide. This precipitate is dissolved in concentrated hydrochloric acid, or is 

subjected to acid dissolution with concentrated nitric and hydrofluoric acids, if the hydrochloric acid fails 

to dissolve the precipitate. Uranium is separated from other radionuclides by adsorption on anion 

exchange resin, followed by elution with hydrochloric acid. The uranium is finally electrodeposited onto 

a stainless steel disc and counted using alpha spectrometry. 

Special Considerations: If it is suspected that the sample exists in refractory form (i.e., non-digestible 

or dissolvable material after normal digestion methods) or if there is a matrix interference problem, use 

ORISE Method AP11. 

Source: ASTM. 2002. “Method D3972-02: Standard Test Method for Isotopic Uranium in Water by 

Radiochemistry.” Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol. 11.02. 

http://www.astm.org/DATABASE.CART/HISTORICAL/D3972-02.htm

6.2.30 Standard Method 7110 B: Gross Alpha and Gross Beta Radioactivity (Total, 

Suspended, and Dissolved)

Analysis Purpose: Gross alpha and gross beta determination

Determinative Technique: Alpha/Beta counting

Method Developed for: Gross alpha and gross beta activity in water 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for gross alpha and gross beta determination in 

aqueous/liquid samples. 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 127 October 2010
Section 6 – Selected Radiohemical Methods 

Description of Method: This method allows for measurement of gross alpha and gross beta radiation in 

water samples. The method provides an indication of the presence of alpha and beta emitters, including 

the following SAM analytes:

• Americium-241 (CAS RN 14596-10-2) Alpha emitter 

• Californium-252 (CAS RN 13981-17-4) Alpha emitter 

• Cesium-137 (CAS RN 10045-97-3) Beta emitter 

• Cobalt-60 (CAS RN 10198-40-0) Beta emitter 

• Curium-244 (CAS RN 13981-15-2) Alpha emitter 

• Europium-154 (CAS RN 15585-10-1) Beta emitter 

• Iridium-192 (CAS RN 14694-69-0) Beta emitter 

• Plutonium-238 (CAS RN 13981-16-3) Alpha emitter 

• Plutonium-239 (CAS RN 15117-48-3) Alpha emitter 

• Polonium-210 (CAS RN 13981-52-7) Alpha emitter 

• Radium-226 (CAS RN 13982-63-3) Alpha emitter 

• Ruthenium-103 (CAS RN 13968-53-1) Beta emitter 

• Ruthenium-106 (CAS RN 13967-48-1) Beta emitter 

• Strontium-90 (CAS RN 10098-97-2) Beta emitter 

• Uranium-234 (CAS RN 13966-29-5) Alpha emitter 

• Uranium-235 (CAS RN 15117-96-1) Alpha emitter 

• Uranium-238 (CAS RN 7440-16-1) Alpha emitter 

This method recommends using a thin-window gas-flow proportional counter for counting gross alpha 

and beta radioactivity. An internal proportional or Geiger counter may also be used. An aliquot of 

sample is evaporated to a small volume and transferred to a tared counting pan. The sample residue is 

dried to constant weight, cooled, and reweighed to determine dry residue weight, then counted for alpha 

and beta radioactivity. 

Special Considerations: Ground water samples containing elevated levels of dissolved solids will 

require use of smaller sample volumes.

Source: APHA, AWWA, and WEF. 2005. “Method 7110 B: Gross Alpha and Gross Beta Radioactivity 

(Total, Suspended, and Dissolved).” Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater. 

21st Edition. http://www.standardmethods.org/

6.2.31 Standard Method 7120: Gamma-Emitting Radionuclides

Analyte(s) CAS RN 

Cesium-137 10045-97-3 

Cobalt-60 10198-40-0 

Europium-154 15585-10-1 

Iridium-192 14694-69-0 

Ruthenium-103 13968-53-1 

Ruthenium-106 13967-48-1 

Selenium-75 14265-71-5 

Analysis Purpose: Qualitative and confirmatory determination 

Determinative Technique: Gamma spectrometry

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 128 October 2010
Section 6 – Selected Radiohemical Methods 

Method Developed for: Gamma emitting radionuclides in water 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for qualitative and confirmatory analysis of select gamma 

emitters in aqueous/liquid samples. 

Description of Method: The method uses gamma spectroscopy using either Ge detectors or NaI(Tl) 

crystals for the measurement of gamma photons emitted from radionuclides present in water. The method 

can be used for qualitative and confirmatory determinations with Ge detectors or semi-qualitative and 

semi-quantitative determinations (using NaI(Tl) detectors). Exact confirmation using NaI is possible for 

single nuclides or when the gamma emissions are limited to a few well-separated energies. A 

homogeneous water sample is placed into a standard geometry (normally a Marinelli beaker) for gamma 

counting. Sample portions are counted long enough to meet the required sensitivity of measurement. A 

standard containing a mixture of gamma energies from approximately 100 to 2000 keV is used for energy 

calibration.

Source: APHA, AWWA, and WEF. 2005. “Method 7120: Gamma-Emitting Radionuclides.” Standard 

Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater. 21st Edition. http://www.standardmethods.org/

6.2.32 Standard Method 7500-Ra B: Radium: Precipitation Method

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Radium-226 13982-63-3 

Analysis Purpose: Qualitative determination 

Determinative Technique: Alpha counting 

Method Developed for: Alpha-emitting isotopes of radium in water 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for qualitative determination in aqueous/liquid samples. 

Description of Method: This method is for determination of all alpha-emitting radium isotopes by alpha 

decay analysis. Lead and barium carriers are added to the sample containing alkaline citrate, then sulfuric 

acid is added to precipitate radium, barium, and lead as sulfates. The precipitate is purified by washing 

with nitric acid, dissolving in alkaline EDTA, and re-precipitating as radium-barium sulfate after pH 

adjustment to 4.5. This slightly acidic EDTA keeps other naturally occurring alpha-emitters and the lead 

carrier in solution. Radium-223, -224, and -226 are identified by the rate of ingrowth of their daughter 

products in barium sulfate precipitate. The results are corrected by the rate of ingrowth of daughter 

products to determine radium activity. This method involves alpha counting by a gas-flow internal 

proportional counter, scintillation counter, or thin end-window gas-flow proportional counter.

Source: APHA, AWWA, and WEF. 2005. “Method 7500-Ra B: Radium: Precipitation Method.”

Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater. 21st Edition. 

http://www.standardmethods.org/

6.2.33 Standard Method 7500-Ra C: Radium: Emanation Method

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Radium-226 13982-63-3 

Analysis Purpose: Confirmatory determination

Determinative Technique: Alpha counting

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 129 October 2010
Section 6 – Selected Radiohemical Methods 

Method Developed for: Soluble, suspended, and total radium-226 in water

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for confirmatory analysis of aqueous/liquid samples. 

Description of Method: Radium in water is concentrated and separated from sample solids by 

coprecipitation with a relatively large amount of barium as the sulfate. The precipitate is treated to 

remove silicates, if present, and to decompose insoluble radium compounds, fumed with phosphoric acid 

to remove sulfite, and dissolved in hydrochloric acid. The completely dissolved radium is placed in a 

bubbler, which is then closed and stored for a period of several days to 4 weeks for ingrowth of radon. 

The bubbler is connected to an evacuation system and the radon gas is removed from the liquid by 

aeration and helium, dried with a desiccant, and collected in a counting cell. Four hours after radon 

collection, the cell is counted. The activity of the radon is equal to the radium concentration. The 

minimum detectable concentration depends on counter characteristics, background-counting rate of 

scintillation cell, cell efficiency, length of counting period, and contamination of apparatus and 

environment by radium-226. Without reagent purification, the overall reagent blank (excluding 

background) should be between 0.03 and 0.05 pCi radium-226, which may be considered the minimum 

detectable amount under routine conditions.

Source: APHA, AWWA, and WEF. 2005. “Method 7500-Ra C: Radium: Emanation Method.” Standard 

Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater. 21st Edition. http://www.standardmethods.org/

6.2.34 Standard Method 7500-Sr B: Total Radioactive Strontium and Strontium-90: 

Precipitation Method

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Strontium-90 10098-97-2 

Analysis Purpose: Qualitative and confirmatory analysis

Determinative Technique: Beta counting 

Method Developed for: Strontium-90 or total radioactive strontium in drinking water or filtered raw 

water

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for qualitative and confirmatory analysis of aqueous/liquid 

samples. 

Description of Method: A known amount of inactive strontium ions, in the form of strontium nitrate, is 

added as a “carrier.” The carrier, alkaline earths, and rare earths are precipitated as the carbonate to 

concentrate the radiostrontium. The carrier, along with the radionuclides of strontium, is separated from 

other radioactive elements and inactive sample solids by precipitation as strontium nitrate using fuming 

nitric acid solution. The carrier and radionuclides of strontium are precipitated as strontium carbonate, 

which is dried, weighed to determine recovery of carrier, and measured for radioactivity. The activity of 

the final precipitate is due to radioactive strontium only, because all other radioactive elements have been 

removed. Because it is impossible to separate the isotopes of strontium-89 and strontium-90 by any 

chemical procedure, the amount of strontium-90 is determined by separating and measuring the activity of 

yttrium-90, its decay product. This method involves beta counting by a gas-flow internal proportional 

counter or thin end-window low-background proportional counter. A correction is applied to compensate 

for loss of carriers and activity during the various purification steps.

Source: APHA, AWWA, and WEF. 2005. “Method 7500-Sr B: Total Radioactive Strontium and 

Strontium-90: Precipitation Method.” Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater. 

21st Edition. http://www.standardmethods.org/

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 130 October 2010
Section 6 – Selected Radiohemical Methods 

6.2.35 Standard Method 7500-U B: Uranium: Radiochemical Method

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Uranium-234 13966-29-5 

Uranium-235 15117-96-1 

Uranium-238 7440-61-1 

 

Analysis Purpose: Qualitative determination 

Determinative Technique: Alpha counting 

Method Developed for: Total uranium alpha activity in water 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for qualitative determination in aqueous/liquid samples. 

Description of Method: The sample is acidified with hydrochloric or nitric acid and boiled to eliminate 

carbonate and bicarbonate ions. Uranium is coprecipitated with ferric hydroxide and subsequently 

separated. The ferric hydroxide is dissolved, passed through an anion-exchange column, and washed with 

acid, and the uranium is eluted with dilute hydrochloric acid. The acid eluate is evaporated to near 

dryness, the residual salt is converted to nitrate, and the alpha activity is counted by a gas-flow 

proportional counter or alpha scintillation counter.

Special Considerations: If it is suspected that the sample exists in refractory form (i.e., non-digestible 

or dissolvable material after normal digestion methods) or if there is a matrix interference problem, use 

ORISE Method AP11.

Source: APHA, AWWA, and WEF. 2005. “Method 7500-U B: Uranium: Radiochemical Method.”

Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater. 21st Edition. 

http://www.standardmethods.org/

6.2.36 Standard Method 7500-U C: Uranium: Isotopic Method

Analyte(s) CAS RN

Uranium-234 13966-29-5 

Uranium-235 15117-96-1 

Uranium-238 7440-61-1 

 

Analysis Purpose: Confirmatory determination 

Determinative Technique: Alpha spectrometry 

Method Developed for: Isotopic content of the uranium alpha activity; determining the differences 

among naturally occurring, depleted, and enriched uranium in water 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for confirmatory analysis of aqueous/liquid samples. 

Description of Method: This method is a radiochemical procedure for determination of the isotopic 

content of uranium alpha activity. The sample is acidified with hydrochloric or nitric acid and uranium232 is added as an isotopic tracer. Uranium is coprecipitated with ferric hydroxide and subsequently 

separated from the sample. The ferric hydroxide precipitate is dissolved and the solution passed through 

an anion-exchange column. The uranium is eluted with dilute hydrochloric acid. The acid eluate is 

evaporated to near dryness, and the residual salt is converted to nitrate and electrodeposited onto a 

stainless steel disc and counted by alpha spectrometry.

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 131 October 2010
Section 6 – Selected Radiohemical Methods 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 132 October 2010

Special Considerations: If it is suspected that the sample exists in refractory form (i.e., non-digestible 

or dissolvable material after normal digestion methods) or if there is a matrix interference problem, use 

ORISE Method AP11.

Source: APHA, AWWA, and WEF. 2005. “Method 7500-U C: Uranium: Isotopic Method.” Standard 

Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater. 21st Edition. http://www.standardmethods.org/
Section 7 – Selected Pathogen Methods 

Section 7.0: Selected Pathogen Methods 

Per decision of the NHSRC SAM Pathogens Committee, “Section 7.0: Selected Pathogen Methods” has 

been temporarily withdrawn from the SAM Revision 6.0. Section 7.0 is currently undergoing a 

significant restructuring to better address the complexity of environmental samples in a more userfriendly format. End-users, expert scientists, and federal agencies are contributing to the new design 

templates. 

During this transition period, the following personnel can be contacted for any emergency technical 

support need: 

• EPA’s Office of Emergency Management, Homeland Security Laboratory Research Center, manages 

the ERLN. The pathogens contact for ERLN is: Michele Burgess (burgess.michele@epa.gov, 202-

564-8006). 

• NHSRC SAM Pathogens Contact: Sanjiv Shah, Lead (shah.sanjiv@epa.gov, 202-564-9522) 

Users may also refer to the SAM Version 5.0, Pathogen Methods section. SAM Revision 5.0 can be 

accessed at http://www.epa.gov/sam/. The SAM 5.0 Pathogens section is available in a searchable 

format at http://www.epa.gov/sam/searchpath.htm

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 133 October 2010
Section 7 – Selected Pathogen Methods 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 134 October 2010
Section 8 – Selected Biotoxin Methods 

Section 8.0: Selected Biotoxin Methods 

A list of methods or procedures to be used in analyzing environmental samples for biotoxin contaminants 

is provided in Appendix D. These methods should be used to support remediation activities (site 

assessment through clearance) following a homeland security event. Procedures have been compiled for 

each biotoxin that may need to be identified and/or quantified following a contamination incident. 

Analytical procedures are not currently available for all the analyte-sample type combinations included in 

this document. Future research needs include identification of additional methods as well as development 

and validation of the procedures listed. Appendix D is sorted alphabetically by analyte, within each of 

two analyte types (i.e., protein and small molecule). 

Please note: This section provides guidance for selecting biotoxin methods that have a high likelihood 

of assuring analytical consistency when laboratories are faced with a large-scale environmental 

restoration crisis. Not all methods have been verified for the analyte/sample type combination listed in 

Appendix D. Please refer to the specified method to identify analyte/sample type combinations that 

have been verified. Any questions regarding information discussed in this section should be addressed 

to the appropriate contact(s) listed in Section 4.

Appendix D provides the following information: 

• Analyte(s). The compound or compound(s) of interest. 

• CAS RN / Description. A unique identifier for substances that provides an unambiguous way to 

identify a toxin or toxin isoform when there are many possible systematic, generic, or trivial names 

and/or a brief statement describing the toxin.

• Analysis type. Tests are either for presumptive identification, confirmatory identification, or 

biological activity determination; tests types are described below. 

• Analytical Technique. An analytical instrument or technique used to determine the quantity and 

identification of compounds or components in a sample. 

• Analytical Method. The recommended method or procedure, and the corresponding publisher. 

• Aerosol (filter/cassette or liquid impinger). The recommended method/procedure to measure the 

analyte of interest in air sample collection media such as filter cassettes and liquid impingers. 

• Solid (soil, powder). The recommended method/procedure to measure the analyte of interest in solid 

samples such as soil and powders. 

• Particulate (swabs, wipes, filters). The recommended method/procedure to measure the analyte of 

interest in particulate sample collection media such as swabs, wipes and dust-collecting socks used 

with vacuum collection. 

• Liquid/water. The recommended method/procedure to measure the analyte of interest in liquid and 

water samples. 

• Drinking water. The recommended method/procedure to measure the analyte of interest in drinking 

water samples. 

Following a homeland security event, it is assumed that only those areas with contamination greater than 

pre-existing, naturally prevalent levels commonly found in the environment would be subject to 

remediation. Dependent on site- and event-specific goals, investigation of background levels using 

methods listed in Appendix D is recommended. 

The “analysis type” listed for each biotoxin method in Appendix D is intended to address: (1) the level of 

certainty of results and (2) the remediation phase (e.g., site mapping, assessment, clearance). Presumptive 

methods are intended to provide results consistent with a reasonable level of certainty and would 

generally be used during remediation where a large number of samples may need to be processed (e.g., 

requiring high throughput). Immunoassays are common presumptive methods, may be adapted for largeSAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 135 October 2010
Section 8 – Selected Biotoxin Methods 

scale sample processing, and are listed for many of the biotoxin analytes. Confirmatory methods are 

intended to provide results with a high level of certainty. Confirmatory methods should be considered for 

remediation when: (1) presumptive analysis indicates the presence of the biotoxin, (2) a smaller subset of 

samples requires processing, or (3) as required for a tiered approach (e.g., algorithm) to remediation. 

Several techniques are listed in Appendix D as confirmatory; these are generally more time consuming 

and expensive. The use of these terms in this document is not intended to redefine or supersede the 

Laboratory Response Network’s (LRN) use of these terms. The terms presumptive and confirmatory as 

used by the LRN are described in Section 8.1.4. Methods that address biological activity are intended to 

provide a high level of certainty in corroborating other assay results. Biotoxins may be detectable but 

inactive (either before or after remediation); therefore these assays may also provide information about 

potential impact on human safety. Biological activity may be determined directly using in vivo (e.g., 

mouse bioassay) or in vitro (e.g., enzymatic activity) methods or inferred using indirect methods (e.g., 

HPLC). However, biological availability (i.e., biotoxin accessibility to site of action) and activity are 

both required to elicit toxicity and some in vitro methods may not address both parameters. Confirmatory 

procedures listed for the small molecule biotoxins involve a determination of intact compound structure 

(an indication of biological activity); therefore, only presumptive and confirmatory methods are listed for 

these biotoxins. Tiered approaches for specific contaminants will be described in a future revision of 

SAM. 

Numerous analytical techniques using a variety of instrumentation (e.g., high performance liquid 

chromatography – mass spectrometer [HPLC-MS], HPLC-FL, immunoassay [enzyme-linked 

immunosorbent assay (ELISA)], immunoassay [lateral flow device (LFD)], etc.) have been cited in 

Appendix D. It is expected that a reduced number of these analytical techniques and instruments will be 

necessary after method verification and validation. In addition, it is recognized that new reports detailing 

advances in biotoxin analysis appear in the literature frequently. Accordingly, the individual techniques 

and methods listed in Appendix D are to be regarded as a starting point; after thoughtful consideration of 

current technologies at the time of remediation and consultation with the authority in charge of the 

remediation activity, these techniques and methods can be modified as necessary for analysis of a 

particular sample. 

 

The presence of disinfectants (e.g., chlorine) and/or preservatives added during water sample collection to 

slow degradation (e.g., pH adjustors, de-chlorinating agents) could possibly affect analytical results. 

When present, the impact of these agents on method performance should be evaluated, if not previously 

determined. EPA’s NHSRC is working on a sample collection document that is intended as a companion 

to SAM. This sample collection document will provide information regarding sampling container/media, 

preservation, holding time, sample size, and shipping and is intended to complement the laboratory 

analytical methods that are the focus of the SAM document. 

8.1 General Guidelines 

This section provides a general overview of how to identify the appropriate method(s) for a given 

biotoxin as well as recommendations for QC procedures. 

For additional information on the properties of the biotoxins listed in Appendix D, TOXNET 

(http://toxnet.nlm.nih.gov/index.html), a cluster of databases on toxicology, hazardous chemicals, and 

related areas maintained by the National Library of Medicine, is an excellent resource. 

Additional resources include: 

• Defense Against Toxin Weapons, published by the U.S. Army Medical Research Institute of 

Infectious Diseases (http://www.usamriid.army.mil/education/defensetox/toxdefbook.pdf) contains 

information regarding sample collection, toxin analysis and identification, as well as decontamination 

and water treatment. 

• Select Agent Rules and Regulations found at the National Select Agent Registry 

(http://www.selectagents.gov/) 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 136 October 2010
Section 8 – Selected Biotoxin Methods 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 137 October 2010

• The CDC has additional information regarding select agent toxins at the following Web site: 

http://www.cdc.gov/od/sap/sap/toxinamt.htm

• SRC’s PHYSPROP and Chemfate, part of the Environmental Fate Database supported by EPA. See 

http://srcinc.com/what-we-do/product.aspx?id=133. 

• INCHEM at http://www.inchem.org/ contains both chemical and toxicity information. 

• The RTECS database can be accessed via the NIOSH Web site at 

http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/rtecs/default.html for toxicity information. 

• The Forensic Science and Communications Journal published by the Laboratory Division of the FBI. 

See http://www.fbi.gov/hq/lab/fsc/current/backissu.htm. 

Additional research on biotoxin contaminants is ongoing within EPA. 

8.1.1 Standard Operating Procedures for Identifying Biotoxin Methods 

To determine the appropriate method that is to be used on an environmental sample, locate the biotoxin of 

concern in Appendix D: Selected Biotoxin Methods under the “Analyte(s)” column. After locating the 

biotoxin, continue across the table and identify the appropriate analysis type. After an analysis type has 

been chosen, find the analytical technique (e.g., immunoassay) and analytical method applicable to the 

sample type of interest (aerosol, solid, particulate, liquid, or drinking water) corresponding to that 

particular analyte. 

Once a method has been identified in Appendix D, the corresponding method summary can be found in 

Sections 8.2.1 through 8.3.12. Method summaries are listed first by alphabetical order within each 

biotoxin subcategory (i.e., protein and small molecule) and then in order of method selection hierarchy 

(see Figure 2-1), starting with EPA methods, followed by methods from other federal agencies, VCSBs, 

and journal articles. Where available, a direct link to the full text of the method is provided with the 

method summary. For additional information on sample preparation procedures and methods available 

through consensus standards organizations, please use the contact information provided in Table 8-1. 

Table 8-1. Sources of Biotoxin Methods 

Name Publisher Reference

FDA, Bacteriological Analytical Manual 

Online 

FDA http://www.cfsan.fda.gov/~ebam/bamtoc.html

Official Methods of Analysis of AOAC 

International*

AOAC International http://www.aoac.org

NEMI EPA, USGS http://www.nemi.gov/

Pharmacology & Toxicology* Blackwell Synergy http://www.blackwell-synergy.com/loi/pto

Analytical Biochemistry* Science Direct http://www.sciencedirect.com/

Biochemical Journal* Portland Press Ltd. http://www.biochemj.org/

Journal of Medicinal Chemistry* American Chemical Society http://www.acs.org/

Journal of Food Protection* International Association for 

Food Protection 

http://www.foodprotection.org/

Journal of Chromatography B* Elsevier Science Publishers http://www.elsevier.com/

Biomedical Chromatography* John Wiley And Sons Ltd http://www.wiley.com/
Section 8 – Selected Biotoxin Methods 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 138 October 2010

Name Publisher Reference

Environmental Health Perspectives* National Institute of 

Environmental Health 

Sciences 

http://www.niehs.nih.gov/

Toxicon* Elsevier Science Publishers http://www.elsevier.com/

Federation of European Microbiological 

Societies (FEMS) Microbiology Letters* 

Wiley-Blackwell http://www.wiley.com/

International Journal of Food 

Microbiology* 

Elsevier Science Publishers http://www.elsevier.com/

Rapid Communications in Mass 

Spectrometry * 

John Wiley And Sons Ltd. http://www.wiley.com/

Journal of AOAC International* AOAC International http://www.aoac.org

Analyst* Royal Society of Chemistry http://www.rsc.org/

Journal of Pharmaceutical and 

Biomedical Analysis* 

Elsevier Science Publishers http://www.elsevier.com/

Journal of Clinical Microbiology American Society for 

Microbiology (ASM) 

http://www.asm.org/

Journal of Clinical Laboratory Analysis* John Wiley And Sons Ltd. http://www.wiley.com/

Journal of Analytical Toxicology* S. Tinsley Preston http://www.jatox.com/

Lateral Flow Immunoassay Kits Environmental Technology 

Verification (ETV) Program 

http://www.epa.gov/etv/

Journal of Agricultural and Food 

Chemistry* 

ACS Publications http://pubs.acs.org/

Applied and Environmental Microbiology 

(AEM)* 

ASM http://aem.asm.org/ 

Journal of Chemical Health and Safety* Elsevier Science Publishers http://www.elsevier.com/

* Subscription and/or purchase required.

8.1.2 General QC Guidelines for Biotoxin Methods 

Having data of known and documented quality is critical so that public officials can accurately assess the 

activities that may be needed in remediating a site during and following emergency situations. Having 

such data requires that laboratories: (1) conduct the necessary QC to ensure that measurement systems are 

in control and operating properly; (2) properly document results of the analyses; and (3) properly 

document measurement system evaluation of the analysis-specific QC. Ensuring data quality also 

requires that laboratory results are properly evaluated and the results of the data quality evaluation are 

transmitted to decision makers. 

The level or amount of QC needed often depends on the intended purpose of the data that are generated. 

Various levels of QC may be required if the data are generated during presence/absence determinations 

versus confirmatory analyses. The specific needs for data generation should be identified. QC 

requirements and data quality objectives should be derived based on those needs and should be applied 

consistently across laboratories when multiple laboratories are used. For example, during rapid sample 

screening, minimal QC samples (e.g., blanks, replicates) and documentation might be required to ensure 

data quality. Sample analyses for environmental evaluation during site assessment through site clearance, 

such as those identified in this document, might require increased QC (e.g., demonstrations of method 

sensitivity, precision, and accuracy). 
Section 8 – Selected Biotoxin Methods 

While method-specific QC requirements may be included in many of the procedures that are cited in this 

document, and will be referenced in any SAPs developed to address specific analytes and sample types of 

concern, the following describes a minimum set of QC samples and procedures that should be conducted 

for all analyses. Individual methods, sampling and analysis protocols, or contractual statements of work 

also should be consulted to determine any additional QC that may be needed. QC tests should be run as 

frequently as necessary to ensure the reliability of analytical results. In general, sufficient QC includes an 

initial demonstration of measurement system capability as well as ongoing assessments to ensure the 

continued reliability of the analytical results. 

Examples of sufficient QC for the presumptive tests listed in Appendix D include: 

• Method blanks; 

• Positive test samples / negative test samples; 

• Calibration check samples; 

• Use of test kits and reagents prior to expiration; and 

• Accurate temperature controls. 

Examples of sufficient QC for the confirmatory tests listed in Appendix D include: 

• Demonstration that the measurement system is operating properly 

< Initial calibration 

< Method blanks 

 

• Demonstration of measurement system suitability for intended use 

< Precision and recovery (verify measurement system has adequate accuracy) 

< Analyte/sample type/level of concern-specific QC samples (verify that measurement system has 

adequate sensitivity at levels of concern) 

• Demonstration of continued measurement system reliability 

< MS/MSDs (recovery and precision) 

< QC samples (system accuracy and sensitivity at levels of concern) 

< Continuing calibration verification 

< Method blanks 

Please note: The appropriate point of contact identified in Section 4 should be consulted regarding 

appropriate QA/QC procedures prior to sample analysis. These contacts will consult with the EPA ERLN 

coordinator responsible for laboratory activities during the specific event to ensure QA/QC procedures are 

performed consistently across laboratories. EPA program offices will be responsible for ensuring that the 

QA/QC practices are implemented. 

8.1.3 Safety and Waste Management 

It is imperative that safety precautions be used during collection, processing, and analysis of 

environmental samples. Laboratories should have a documented health and safety plan for handling 

samples that may contain target CBR contaminants, and laboratory staff should be trained in and 

implement the safety procedures included in the plan. In addition, many of the methods summarized or 

cited in Section 8.2 contain some specific requirements, guidelines, or information regarding safety 

precautions that should be followed when handling or processing environmental samples and reagents. 

These methods also provide information regarding waste management. Other resources that can be 

consulted for additional information include the following: 

• American Biological Safety Association, Risk Group Classifications for Infectious Agents, available 

at http://www.absa.org/riskgroups/index.html. 

• Biosafety in Microbiological and Biomedical Laboratories (BMBL), 5th Edition, found at 

http://www.cdc.gov/OD/ohs/biosfty/bmbl5/bmbl5toc.htm. 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 139 October 2010
Section 8 – Selected Biotoxin Methods 

• Biological Safety: Principles and Practices, 4th Ed. ASMPress (http://estore.asm.org/). 

• CDC – 42 CFR part 72. Interstate Shipment of Etiologic Agents. 

• CDC – 42 CFR part 73. Select Agents and Toxins. 

• DOT – 49 CFR part 172. Hazardous Materials Table, Special Provisions, Hazardous Materials 

Communications, Emergency Response Information, and Training Requirements. 

• EPA – 40 CFR part 260. Hazardous Waste Management System: General. 

• EPA – 40 CFR part 270. EPA Administered Permit Programs: The Hazardous Waste Permit 

Program. 

• OSHA – 29 CFR part 1910.1450. Occupational Exposure to Hazardous Chemicals in Laboratories. 

• OSHA – 29 CFR part 1910.120. Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response. 

• USDA – 9 CFR part 121. Possession, Use, and Transfer of Select Agents and Toxins. 

Please note that the e-CFR is available at http://ecfr.gpoaccess.gov/. 

8.1.4 Laboratory Response Network (LRN) 

The LRN was created in accordance with Presidential Decision Directive 39, which established terrorism 

preparedness responsibilities for federal agencies. The LRN is primarily a national network of local, 

state, federal, military, food, agricultural, veterinary, and environmental laboratories; however, additional 

LRN laboratories are located in strategic international locations. The CDC provides technical and 

scientific support to member laboratories as well as secure access to standardized procedures and reagents 

for rapid (within 4 to 6 hours) presumptive detection of biothreat agents and emerging infectious disease 

agents. These rapid presumptive assays are part of agent-specific algorithms of assays which lead to a 

confirmed result. The algorithm for a confirmed result is often a combination of one or more presumptive 

positive results from a rapid assay in combination with a positive result from one of the “gold standard” 

methods, such as culture. The standardized procedures, reagents, and agent-specific algorithms are 

considered to be sensitive and are available only to LRN member laboratories. Thus, these procedures are 

not available to the general public and are not discussed in this document. 

Additional information on select agents and regulations may be obtained at the National Select Agent 

Registry at: http://www.selectagents.gov/. 

For additional information on the LRN, including selection of a laboratory capable of receiving and 

processing the specified sample type/analyte, please use the contact information provided below or visit 

http://www.bt.cdc.gov/lrn/. 

Centers for Disease Control and Prevention 

Laboratory Response Branch 

Division of Bioterrorism Preparedness and Response (DBPR) 

National Center for Prevention, Detection, and Control of Infectious Diseases (NCPDCID) 

Coordinating Center for Infectious Diseases (CCID) 

Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) 

1600 Clifton Road NE, Mailstop C-18 

Atlanta, GA 30333 

Telephone: (404) 639-2790 

E-mail: lrn@cdc.gov

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 140 October 2010
Section 8 – Selected Biotoxin Methods 

Local public health laboratories, private, and commercial laboratories with questions about the LRN 

should contact their state public health laboratory director or the Association of Public Health 

Laboratories (APHL) (contact information provided below). 

Association of Public Health Laboratories 

8515 Georgia Avenue, Suite 700 

Silver Spring, MD 20910 

Telephone: (240) 485-2745 

Fax: (240) 485-2700 

Web site: www.aphl.org

E-mail: info@aphl.org

8.2 Method Summaries for Protein Biotoxins

Summaries of the analytical methods for protein biotoxins listed in Appendix D are provided in Sections 

8.2.1 through 8.2.5. These sections contain summary information only, extracted from the selected 

methods. The full version of the method should be consulted prior to sample analysis. 

Each summary contains a brief description of the method, intended method application, performance data 

(if available), and a link to or source for obtaining a full version of the method. 

8.2.1 Abrin 

Abrin – CAS RN: 1393-62-0. 

Description: Glycoprotein consisting of a deadenylase (25–32 kDa A chain) and lectin (35 kDa 

B chain); an agglutinin (A2B2) may be present in crude preparations. 

Abrine – CAS RN: 526-31-8 

Description: Small molecule, indole alkaloid marker for abrin. 

Method Analytical Technique Section 

Journal of Food Protection. 2008. 71(9): 1868–1874 Immunoassay 8.2.1.1 

Journal of Agricultural and Food Chemistry. 2008. 

56(23): 11139–11143 LC-MS-MS 8.2.1.2 

Pharmacology & Toxicology. 2001. 88(5): 255–260 Ribosome inactivation assay 8.2.1.3 

Analytical Biochemistry. 2008. 378: 87–89 Enzyme activity 8.2.1.4 

8.2.1.1 Literature Reference for Abrin (Journal of Food Protection. 2008. 71(9): 

1868–1874) 

Analysis Purpose: Presumptive 

Analytical Technique: Immunoassay 

Method Developed for: Abrin in food 

Method Selected for: SAM lists these procedures for presumptive analysis in aerosol, solid, 

particulate, liquid, and water samples. Further research is needed to develop and standardize the 

procedures for environmental sample types. 

Description of Method: Procedures are described for using mouse monoclonal antibodies 

(mAbs) and rabbit-derived polyclonal antibodies prepared against a mixture of abrin isozymes for 

three separate ELISA and electrochemiluminescence (ECL)-based assays in food products. The 

three assays vary by use of antibody combination (e.g, assay configuration): (1) polyclonal 

(capture)/polyclonal (detection) ELISA, (2) polyclonal/monoclonal ELISA, and (3) 

polyclonal/monoclonal ECL assay. The LODs, with purified Abrin C and various abrin extracts 

in buffer, are between 0.1 and 0.5 ng/mL for all three assays. The LOD for abrin spiked into food 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 141 October 2010
Section 8 – Selected Biotoxin Methods 

products ranged from 0.1 to 0.5 ng/mL, using the ECL assay. The LOD for abrin spiked into 

food products for the ELISA assays ranged between 0.5 and 10 ng/mL depending on the antibody 

combination. In all cases, the LODs were less than the concentration at which abrin may pose a 

health concern.

Special Considerations: Crude preparations of abrin may also contain agglutinins that are 

unique to rosary peas and that can cross-react in the immunoassays. Addition of non-fat milk 

powder to the sample buffer may eliminate false-positive results (Dayan-Kenigsberg, J., 

Bertocchi, A., and Garber, E.A. 2008. “Rapid Detection of Ricin in Cosmetics and Elimination of 

Artifacts Associated with Wheat Lectin.” Journal of Immunological Methods. 336(2): 251–254). 

http://www.sciencedirect.com/science/journal/00221759

Source: Garber, E.A., Walker, J.L., and O’Brien, T.W. 2008. “Detection of Abrin in Foods 

Using Enzyme-Linked Immunosorbent Assay and Electrochemiluminescence Technologies.” 

Journal of Food Protection. 71(9): 1868–1874. 

http://www.ingentaconnect.com/content/iafp/jfp/2008/00000071/00000009/art00015 

8.2.1.2 Literature Reference for Abrin by Abrine Detection (Journal of 

Agricultural and Food Chemistry. 2008. 56(23): 11139-11143) 

Analysis Purpose: Complementary presumptive for abrin 

Analytical Technique: LC-MS-MS 

Method Developed for: Abrine in beverages 

Method Selected for: SAM lists these procedures for complementary presumptive analysis of 

abrin by abrine detection in aerosol, solid, particulate, liquid, and water samples. Abrine, an 

alkaloid present in equal concentrations with abrin in rosary peas (Abrus precatorius L.), is found 

in crude preparations of abrin and may be an indicator of abrin contamination. Further research is 

needed to develop and standardize the procedures for environmental sample types. 

Description of Method: Procedures are described for sample extraction by SPE or liquid-liquid 

extraction, followed by tandem mass spectrometry. The method was verified in beverages 

(bottled water, cola, juice drink, 1% low fat milk, bottled tea) spiked with abrine at either 

0.5μg/mL or 0.05μg/mL. These samples were prepared for LC-MS-MS by either an optimized 

SPE procedure or a liquid-liquid extraction procedure. For SPE, optimal abrine recoveries were 

achieved with sample pH adjusted to 2 – 6 with formic acid, inclusion of a water/methanol (95/5, 

v/v) washing step prior to elution, and use of a Strata-X SPE cartridge. Liquid-liquid extraction 

was with an equal volume (2 mL) of acetonitrile/water (75/25, v/v). Differences in recovery 

between the two extraction methods were determined using the two-sided Student’s t test, 

assuming equal variance. At 0.5 μg/mL, recovery of abrine by SPE was significantly higher (P < 

0.01) for water and juice drink as compared to liquid-liquid extraction, but no significant 

differences were observed for cola and tea. At 0.05 μg/mL, the differences in recovery of abrine 

in water, tea, cola, and juice drink were highly statistically different (P < 0.001), with better 

recoveries for the optimized SPE procedure. The method had a MDL of 0.025 μg/mL and limit 

of quantitation (LOQ) of 0.05 μg/mL. Storage stability was also tested for abine at 10 μg/mL in a 

water/methanol stock solution (90/10, v/v) at three temperatures (0°C, 4°C, and 23°C). Aliquots 

were analyzed in triplicate at 0, 1, 7, and 21 days after sample preparation. There was no 

statistically significant difference between abrine standards stored at the three temperatures at 21 

days and no loss of abrine concentration. 

Special Considerations: The biotoxin methods points of contact listed in Section 4.0 of SAM 

should be consulted for additional information regarding water and drinking water analyses.

Source: Owens, J. and Koester, C. 2008. “Quantitation of Abrine, an Indole Alkaloid Marker of 

the Toxic Glycoproteins Abrin, by Liquid Chromatography/Tandem Mass Spectrometry When 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 142 October 2010
Section 8 – Selected Biotoxin Methods 

Spiked into Various Beverages.” Journal of Agriculture and Food Chemistry. 56(23): 11139–

11143. http://pubs.acs.org/doi/pdf/10.1021/jf802471y

8.2.1.3 Literature Reference for Abrin and Ricin (Analytical Biochemistry. 2008. 

378(1): 87-89) 

Analysis Purpose: Biological activity 

Analytical Technique: Enzyme activity 

Method Developed for: Jequirity seed (abrin) and castor bean (ricin) extracts in buffer 

Method Selected for: SAM lists these procedures for biological activity analysis in aerosol, 

solid, particulate, liquid, and water samples. Further research is needed to develop and 

standardize the procedures for environmental sample types. 

Description of Method: This in vitro assay is a ribonucleic acid (RNA) N-glycosidase enzyme 

activity assay for the detection of purified abrin and ricin toxins (Types I and II) or in jequirity 

seed (abrin) and castor bean (ricin) extracts. Synthetic biotinylated RNA substrates with varied 

loop sequences are cleaved by either the ricin or abrin toxin and the RNA products are hybridized 

to ruthenylated-oligodeoxynucleotides to generate an ECL signal. Assays require incubation for 

2 hours at 48°C. Commercially available ECL-based reagents and RNase inactivators are used. 

Control experiments for the jequirity seed experiments and the distinct GdAA/GdAGA ratio for 

the castor bean assay demonstrate lack of non-specific cleavage for the assay. The undiluted 

castor bean extract contained 22.0 ± 0.7 mg/mL total protein and 4.1 ± 0.3 mg/mL ricin 

equivalents as determined by standard protein determination and by ECL immunoassay assays 

respectively. The undiluted jequirity seed extract was similarly assayed, with a resultant 21.6 ± 

0.6 mg/mL total protein and 3.7 ± 0.3 μg/mL equivalents of toxin. Dilutions were performed to 

determine effective signal-to-background ratio and the linear range for calculation of toxin 

activity. Resultant calculations for ricin activity equivalents in the undiluted castor bean extract 

were equivalent to those obtained with the ECL immunoassays: 4.4 ± 0.2 mg/mL activity 

equivalents. In contrast, the undiluted jequirity seed extract contained a calculated level of 740 ± 

50 μg/mL activity equivalents, which greatly exceeded the immunoassay-based value. 

Special Considerations: This enzyme activity assay does not test for cell binding; cell culture 

assays are being developed to test for cell binding but are not currently available. The only 

readily available assay to test for both the cell binding and enzymatic activity of the intact 

(whole) toxin is the mouse bioassay. 

Source: Keener, W.K., Rivera, V.R., Cho, C.R., Hale, M.L., Garber, E.A.E., and Poli, M.A. 

2008. “Identification of the RNA N-glycosidase Activity of Ricin in Castor bean extracts by an 

Electrochemiluminescence-based Assay.” Analytical Biochemistry. 378(1): 87–89. 

http://www.sciencedirect.com/science/journal/00032697

 

8.2.1.4 Literature Reference for Abrin, Shiga Toxin, and Shiga-like Toxins 

(Pharmacology Toxicology. 2001. 88(5): 255–260) 

Analysis Purpose: Confirmatory for abrin; biological activity for shiga and shiga-like toxins 

Analytical Technique: Ribosome inactivation assay 

Method Developed for: Abrin in phosphate buffered saline (PBS) 

Method Selected for: SAM lists these procedures for confirmatory analysis in aerosol, solid, 

particulate, liquid, and water samples. Further research is needed to develop and standardize the 

procedures for environmental sample types. 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 143 October 2010
Section 8 – Selected Biotoxin Methods 

Description of Method: Procedures are described for measuring the biological activity of 

ribosome-inactivating proteins using a microtiter plate format for detection of abrin in PBS. 

Nuclease-treated rabbit reticulocyte lysate containing luciferase messenger ribonucleic acid 

(mRNA) is used to measure toxin activity via inhibition of protein synthesis. The relative 

biological activity is determined by comparing luminescence levels in treated samples versus 

those of untreated controls. The amount of luciferase translated, as measured by luminescence, is 

inversely proportional to the toxin concentration. Linear dose response curves are generated for 

abrin, with a 50% inhibition of translation at 0.5 nM. Coupling this procedure, or a modification 

of this procedure, with an immunoassay will provide more information regarding the specificity 

and toxicity of the target biotoxin. 

Special Considerations: For abrin, as well as shiga and shiga-like toxins, this assay does not 

test for cell binding; cell culture assays are being developed to test for cell binding but are not 

currently available. The only readily available assay to test for both the cell binding and 

enzymatic activity of the intact (whole) toxin is the mouse bioassay. 

Source: Hale, M.L. 2001. “Microtiter-based Assay for Evaluating the Biological Activity of 

Ribosome-inactivation Proteins.” Pharmacology Toxicology. 88(5): 255–260. 

http://www3.interscience.wiley.com/journal/120703798/abstract

8.2.2 Botulinum Neurotoxins (Serotypes A, B, E, F) 

Botulinum neurotoxins – Description: Protein composed of ~100 kDa heavy chain and ~50 

kDa light chain; can be complexed with hemagglutinin and non-hemagglutinin components for 

total MW of ~900 kDa. 

SNAP-25 – Description: Synaptosomal-associated protein 25; 25 kDa membrane-associated 

protein cleaved by botulinum neurotoxin Serotypes A, C, and E 

VAMP 2 – Description: Vesicle-associated membrane protein 2 (also known as synaptobreven 

2); cleaved by botulinum neurotoxin Serotypes B, D, F, and G 

Method Analytical Technique Section 

LRN Immunoassay, Immunoassay 

(ELISA) and Mouse bioassay 8.1.4 

FDA, Bacteriological Analytical Manual Online, January 

2001, Chapter 17, Clostridium botulinum

Immunoassay (ELISA) and 

Mouse bioassay 8.2.2.1 

Journal of Chemical Health and Safety. 2008. 15(6): 

14–19 Endopep-MS 8.2.2.2 

Lateral Flow Immunoassay Kits Immunoassay 8.2.2.3 

8.2.2.1 FDA, Bacteriological Analytical Manual Online, Chapter 17, 2001: 

Botulinum Neurotoxins 

Analysis Purpose: Confirmatory and biological activity 

Analytical Technique: Immunoassay (ELISA) and mouse bioassay 

Method Developed for: Botulinum neurotoxins (Serotypes A, B, E, F) in food 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this procedure for confirmation and biological activity 

assessment in aerosol samples. Further research is needed to develop and standardize the 

procedures for environmental sample types. 

Description of Method: An amplified-enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay (amp-ELISA) and a 

digoxigenin-labeled enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay (DIG-ELISA) are described for the 

detection of Types A, B, E, and F botulinum neurotoxins in food products. The amp-ELISA 

method uses goat anti-A or E, rabbit anti-B, or horse anti-F serum to capture the toxins in a 96-

well plate, and a corresponding biotinylated goat antitoxin to detect the toxin. Visualization is 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 144 October 2010
Section 8 – Selected Biotoxin Methods 

with streptavidin-alkaline phosphatase. The DIG-ELISA method is a modification of the ampELISA method, with digoxigenin-labeled antitoxin IgG’s substituted for the streptavidin-alkaline 

phosphatase. Toxin can be detected at approximately 10 minimum lethal doses (MLD)/mL (0.12 

to 0.25 ng/mL). High concentration samples (greater than 10,000 MLD/mL) may give a positive 

absorbance for more than one toxin type. Further dilution of the sample will remove crossreactivity. 

The mouse bioassay detects biologically active toxin using a three part approach: toxin screening; 

toxin titer; and finally, toxin neutralization using monovalent antitoxin sera. Samples are 

prepared by centrifugation for suspended solids under refrigeration, or solids are extracted with 

an equal volume of pH 6.2 gel-phosphate buffer and then centrifuged. Toxins from 

nonproteolytic strains of C. botulinum may need trypsin activation to be detected. Serial dilutions 

of untreated and trypsin-treated sample fluids are injected in separate pairs of mice 

intraperitoneally (i.p.). Mice are also injected with heated, untreated, undiluted sample. Death of 

mice, along with symptoms of botulism, confirms presence of botulinum toxin. After calculation 

of an MLD, dilute monovalent antitoxin sera types A, B, E, and F are injected into mice 30 

minutes to 1 hour before challenging them with the i.p. injection of each dilution that gave the 

highest MLD from the toxic preparation. 

Special Considerations: Immunoassays with botulinum toxins may produce variable results 

with uncomplexed forms of toxin. 

Source: FDA, Center for Food Safety and Applied Nutrition (CFSAN). 2001. “Chapter 17 – 

Clostridium botulinum.” Bacteriological Analytical Manual Online. 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/FDA-BAM-Chap17.pdf

8.2.2.2 Literature Reference for Botulinum Neurotoxins by SNAP-25 and VAMP 2 

Cleavage Product Detection (Journal of Chemical Health and Safety. 

2008. 15(6): 14–19) 

Analysis Purpose: Complementary presumptive for botulinum neurtotoxins 

Analytical Technique: LC-MS 

Method Developed for: Botulinum neurotoxins Serotypes A, B, E, and F in clinical samples 

(stool, serum) 

Method Selected for: SAM lists these procedures for complementary presumptive analysis of 

botulinum neurotoxins by SNAP-25 and VAMP 2 cleavage product detection in aerosol samples. 

SNAP-25 and VAMP 2 function as substrates for botulinum neurotoxins and may be an indicator 

of botulinum neurotoxin contamination. Further research is needed to develop and standardize 

the procedures for environmental sample types. 

Description of Method: Procedures are described for antibody-based sample extraction, 

followed by synthetic peptide cleavage and high resolution matrix-assisted laser-desorbtion 

ionization (MALDI) time of flight MS. The method is verified for stool and serum clinical 

samples obtained from an exposed individual. Botulinum neurotoxin Serotypes A, B, D, and E 

are obtained from Metabiologics (Madison, WI) and used as positive controls. Rabbit polyclonal 

antibodies specific for Serotypes A, B, E, and F are also obtained from Metabiologics and are 

coupled to Dynabeads® Protein G beads. Twenty microliters of beads are added to 100 μL of 

stool sample, along with a cocktail of protease inhibitors. The mixture is incubated for two hours 

at 37°C, washed in buffer, followed by a water wash. Five hundred microliters of serum sample 

is added to 100 μL of beads and similarly incubated and washed. Protease inhibitors are not 

required for serum samples. After antibody isolation, the bead-extracted sample is incubated in a 

reaction buffer with synthetic peptide substrates specific for Serotypes A, B, E, and F. Samples 

are incubated at 37°C for four hours. A 2-μL aliquot of the reaction mixture supernatant is mixed 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 145 October 2010
Section 8 – Selected Biotoxin Methods 

with 18 μL of a matrix solution and 0.5 μL of the resultant mixture is placed on a 192-spot 

MALDI plate. Mass spectra are collected from 650 to 4500 m/z in the positive ion reflector mode 

on either an Applied BiosystemsTM 4700 Proteomics Analyzer or an Applied BiosystemsTM 4800 

TOF/TOF. Cleavage product peaks specific for Serotypes A, B, E, and F can be for observed for 

the positive controls and positive stool and serum samples. Negative controls do not show these 

peaks. 

Special Considerations: Additional detector platforms are available such as described in 

“Development of an In Vitro Activity Assay as an Alternative to the Mouse Bioassay for 

Clostridium botulinum Neurotoxin Type A,” 2008. Applied and Environmental Microbiology. 

74(14): 4309–4313. (http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/AEM-74(14)-pgs4309-4313.pdf). FRET 

based assays are also available as commercial products 

(http://www.biosentinelpharma.com/products.php). 

Source: Barr, J.R., Kalb, S.R., Moura, H., and Pirkle, J.L. 2008. “Biological Monitoring of 

Exposure to Botulinum Neurotoxins.” Journal of Chemical Health and Safety. 15(6): 14–19. 

http://www.sciencedirect.com/science/journal/18715532 

8.2.2.3 EPA Environmental Technology Verification (ETV) Program Reports – 

Lateral Flow Immunoassay Kits 

Analysis Purpose: Presumptive 

Analytical Technique: Immunoassay 

Method Developed for: Botulinum neurotoxins (Types A, B) and ricin in buffer or water 

samples 

Method Selected for: SAM lists these procedures for presumptive analysis in aerosol samples. 

Further research is needed to develop and standardize the procedures for environmental sample 

types other than water. 

Description of Method: Test strips are self-contained, qualitative assays for screening 

environmental samples for the presence of botulinum toxin and ricin. After the sample is 

collected, it is transferred onto the test strip where dye-labeled antibodies detect trace amounts of 

the contaminant, as indicated by the presence of two bands in the test result window. After 15 

minutes, the results are read visually. Botulinum neurotoxin Type A can be detected at 5 mg/L 

and Type B at 4 mg/L, 33% of the time. Ricin toxin can be detected at 20 mg/L, with no crossreactivity to certain substances (i.e., lectin from soybeans). 

An alternative lateral flow immunochromatographic device also can be used. This device uses 

two antibodies in combination to specifically detect target antigen in solution. When a sufficient 

amount of target antigen is present, the colloidal gold label accumulates in the sample window on 

a test strip, forming a visible reddish-brown colored line. The presence of two bands indicates a 

positive reading. Botulinum neurotoxin Type A can be detected at 0.01 mg/L and Type B at 0.5 

mg/L, with no false negatives detected when interferents are present. Ricin toxin can be detected 

at 0.035 mg/L, with 88% accuracy. 

Lateral flow immunoassay kits have been evaluated by the EPA ETV Program using BADDTM and 

BioThreat Alert® test strips for the detection of botulinum neurotoxins Types A and B and ricin. 

Reports and information associated with these evaluations are available at: 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/ETV-BADD091904.pdf (BADDTM test strips) and 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/ETV-BioThreat092104.pdf (BioThreat Alert® test strips). 

Special Considerations: Immunoassays with botulinum toxins may produce variable results with 

uncomplexed form of toxin. Addition of non-fat milk powder to the sample buffer may eliminate 

false-positive results (Dayan-Kenigsberg, Bertocchi, J.A., and Garber, E.A.E. 2008. “Rapid 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 146 October 2010
Section 8 – Selected Biotoxin Methods 

Detection of Ricin in Cosmetics and Elimination of Artifacts Associated with Wheat Lectin.” 

Journal of Immunological Methods. 336(2): 251–254). 

http://www.sciencedirect.com/science/journal/00221759

Source: ETV. 2006. http://www.epa.gov/etv/

8.2.3 Ricin (Ricinine) 

Ricin – CAS RN: 9009-86-3. 

Description: 60 kDa glycoprotein composed of two subunits (~32 kDa A chain and ~34 kDa B 

chain); an agglutinin of MW 120 kDa may be present in crude preparations. 

Ricinine – CAS RN: 5254-40-3. 

Description: Small molecule, alkaloid marker for ricin.

Method Analytical Technique Section 

LRN Immunoassay 8.1.4 

Analytical Biochemistry. 2008. 378: 87–89 Enzyme activity 8.2.1.3 

Lateral Flow Immunoassay Kits Immunoassay 8.2.2.2 

Journal of AOAC International. 2008. 91(2): 376–382 Immunoassay 8.2.3.1 

Journal of Analytical Toxicology. 2005. 29: 149–155 LC-MS 8.2.3.2 

8.2.3.1 Literature Reference for Ricin (Journal of AOAC International. 2008. 

91(2): 376–382) 

Analysis Purpose: Confirmatory 

Analytical Technique: Immunoassay 

Method Developed for: Ricin for food products 

Method Selected for: SAM lists these procedures for confirmatory analysis in aerosol, solid, 

particulate, liquid, and water samples. Further research is needed to develop and standardize the 

procedures for environmental sample types. 

Description of Method: This immunoassay is for the detection of various concentrations of 

purified ricin in food products (e.g., juice, dairy products, vegetables, bakery products, 

condiments). The immunoassay uses ECL detection in a 96-well plate format with a monoclonal 

capture antibody against ricin (19A-2C6) and either a polyclonal or monoclonal detector 

antibody. The samples and detector antibodies can be added sequentially or in combination 

during the capture step. Using the polyclonal antibody, ricin was detected at concentrations as 

low as 0.04 ng/mL. Simultaneous addition of sample and detector antibody allowed for a 

shortened procedure with only a single 20 minute incubation with no false negatives caused by 

“hook” effects at high concentrations of ricin. Quantitation can be performed either with the 

sequential procedure or with the simultaneous procedure if it is know that the ricin concentration 

is not in the “hook” region. The simultaneous procedure should not be used when a sample 

contains constituents that may react with the ruthenium tag. Polyclonal/monoclonal antibodies 

are commercially available as an ELISA test kit. 

Special Considerations: Crude preparations of ricin may also contain agglutinins that are 

unique to castor beans and that can cross-react in the immunoassays. 

Source: Garber, E.A.E., and O’Brien, T. W. 2008. “Detection of Ricin in Food Using 

Electrochemiluminescence-Based Technology.” Journal of AOAC International. 91(2): 376–382. 

http://www.atypon-link.com/AOAC/doi/abs/10.5555/jaoi.91.2.376

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 147 October 2010
Section 8 – Selected Biotoxin Methods 

8.2.3.2 Literature Reference for Ricin by Ricinine Detection (Journal of 

Analytical Toxicology. 2005. 29(3): 149–155) 

Analysis Purpose: Complementary presumptive for ricin 

Analytical Technique: LC-MS 

Method Developed for: Ricinine in human and rat urine samples 

Method Selected for: SAM lists these procedures for complementary presumptive analysis of 

ricin by ricinine detection in aerosol, solid, particulate, liquid, and water samples. Ricinine, an 

alkaloid component of castor beans, is found in crude preparations of ricin, and may be an 

indicator of ricin contamination. Further research is needed to develop and standardize the 

procedures for environmental sample types. 

Description of Method: Procedures are described for sample extraction by SPE, isocratic 

HPLC, followed by ESI tandem mass spectrometry. For MS analyses, protonated molecular ions 

are selected in the multiple reaction monitoring mode and quantified by isotope dilution with 13C6-labeled ricinine as the internal reference. Urine pools enriched with ricinine at two 

concentrations were used as quality controls for validation of the method in urine samples. The 

calculated limit of detection was 0.04 ng/mL. In addition to the validation with urine samples, 

testing was performed on a single human urine sample (forensic), a crude ricin preparation, and 

urine samples from an animal ricinine exposure study. For the human urine sample, the 

concentration of ricinine was measured to be 4.24 ng/mL. After a series of simple extraction and 

filtration steps to provide a crude castor bean preparation, the final ricinine level was 502 ng/mL. 

For the animal exposure study, rats were injected with ricinine at 1, 5, and 10 mg/kg, with mean 

24-hour urine concentrations of 1010, 6364, and 17,152 ng/mL, respectively. Mean 48-hour 

urine concentrations were 40, 324, and 610 mg/mL. Stability of ricinine in human urine was also 

tested, with ricinine found to be stable in human urine samples when heated at 90°C for 1 hour 

and when stored at 25°C and 5°C for 3 weeks. 

Special Considerations: The following updated literature reference adds the analyte abrine for 

detection of select agent abrin: Rudolph C. Johnson, Yingtao Zhou, Ram Jain, Sharon W. Lemire, 

Shannon Fox, Pat Sabourin, and John R. Barr. 2009. “Quantification of L-Abrine in Human and 

Rat Urine: A Biomarker for the Toxin Abrin.” Journal of Analytical Toxicology, 33, (2), 77-84. 

Source: Johnson, R.C., Lemire, S.W., Woolfitt, Ospina, M., Preston, K.P, Olson, C.T., and Barr, 

J.R. 2005. “Quantification of Ricinine in Rat and Human Urine: A Biomarker for Ricin 

Exposure.” Journal of Analytical Toxicology. 29(3): 149–155. 

http://www.jatox.com/abstracts/2005/April/149-johnson.html 

8.2.4 Shiga and Shiga-like Toxins (Stx, Stx-1, Stx-2) 

CAS RN: 75757-64-1 (Stx). 

Description: Protein composed of one ~32 kDa A chain and five 7.7 kDa B chains. 

Method Analytical Technique Section 

Pharmacology & Toxicology. 2001. 88(5): 255–260 Ribosome inactivation assay 8.2.1.4 

FDA, Bacteriological Analytical Manual Online, 

January 2001, Appendix 1, Rapid Methods for 

Detecting Foodborne Pathogens 

Immunoassay (ELISA) 8.2.4.1 

Journal of Clinical Microbiology. 2007. 45(10): 3377–

3380 Optical immunoassay 8.2.4.2 

8.2.4.1 FDA, Bacteriological Analytical Manual Online, Appendix 1, 2001: Rapid 

Methods for Detecting Foodborne Pathogens 

Analysis Purpose: Confirmatory 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 148 October 2010
Section 8 – Selected Biotoxin Methods 

Analytical Technique: Immunoassay (ELISA) 

Method Developed for: Shiga and shiga-like toxins in food 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this manual for presumptive analysis in aerosol, solid, 

particulate, liquid, and water samples. Further research is needed to develop and standardize the 

procedures for environmental samples. 

Description of Method: Shiga toxin (Stx) is produced by Shigella dysenteriae and Shiga-like 

toxins (Shiga toxin Types 1 [Stx-1] and 2 [Stx-2]) are produced by various Shiga-toxigenic E. 

coli (STEC). An ELISA is described for the detection of these toxins. Diluted samples are added 

to microwells coated with an anti-Shiga toxin capture antibody. After incubation at room 

temperature, a wash is performed to remove unbound material. A second anti-Shiga toxin 

antibody is added for detection and incubation continued at room temperature. A wash is 

performed to remove unbound antibody. Enzyme conjugated anti-IgG visualization antibody, 

directed against the species from which the second anti-Shiga toxin antibody was derived, is 

added and the plate incubated then rinsed. Substrate is added, and after incubation to develop the 

color, stop solution is added. The results are interpreted spectrophotometrically. 

Source: FDA, CFSAN. 2001. “Rapid Methods for Detecting Foodborne Pathogens.” 

Bacteriological Analytical Manual Online. http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/FDA-BAMAppendix1.pdf

8.2.4.2 Literature Reference for Shiga and Shiga-like Toxins (Journal of Clinical 

Microbiology. 2007. 45(10): 3377–3380) 

Analysis Purpose: Presumptive 

Analytical Technique: Optical immunoassay 

Method Developed for: Shiga toxin in foods 

Method Selected for: SAM lists these procedures for presumptive analysis in aerosol, solid, 

particulate, liquid, and water samples. Further research is needed to develop and standardize the 

procedures for environmental sample types. 

Description of Method: Procedures are described for a rapid optical immunoassay for the 

detection of Stx-1 and Stx-2 using a commercially available kit. Fecal samples (742 specimens) 

are assayed for Shiga toxins with and without enrichment of the specimens in broth. Duplicate 

assays are applied using either the rapid optical immunoassay or a commercially available ELISA 

kit. Samples producing positive results by immunoassay are confirmed by Vero cell cytotoxicity 

assay. Sensitivities of 96.8% are achieved for direct stool sample assays. 

Special Considerations: At the time of publication, the manufacturer no longer supports this 

assay. The CDC lists possible alternative kits for identification of Shiga toxin, in Table 4 of the 

following Web site: http://www.cdc.gov/mmwr/preview/mmwrhtml/rr5812a1.htm#tab4. 

Source: Teel, L.D., Daly, J.A., Jerris, R.C., Maul, D., Svanas, G., O’Brien, A.D., and Park, C.H. 

2007. “Rapid Detection of Shiga Toxin-Producing Escherichia coli by Optical Immunoassay.”

Journal of Clinical Microbiology. 45(10): 3377–3380. www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/JCM-45(10)-

pgs3377-3380.pdf

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 149 October 2010
Section 8 – Selected Biotoxin Methods 

8.2.5 Staphylococcal Enterotoxins (SEA, SEB, SEC) 

CAS RNs: 37337-57-8 (SEA), 39424-53-8 (SEB), 39424-54-9 (SEC) 

Description: Monomeric protein of ~ 28 kDa (SEB), monomeric proteins of ~ 27–27.5 kDa 

(SEA and SEC)

Method Analytical Technique Section 

LRN Immunoassay 8.1.4 

AOAC Official Method 993.06 Immunoassay 8.2.5.1 

Applied and Environmental Microbiology. 1997. 63(6): 

2361–2365 T-cell proliferation assay 8.2.5.2 

8.2.5.1 AOAC Official Method 993.06: Staphylococcal Enterotoxins in Selected 

Foods 

Analysis Purpose: Presumptive 

Analytical Technique: Immunoassay 

Method Developed for: Staphylococcal enterotoxins in selected foods 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for presumptive analysis of staphylococcal 

enterotoxins Type B (SEB) in aerosol samples, and Types A (SEA) and C (SEC) in aerosol, solid, 

particulate, liquid, and water samples. Further research is needed to develop and standardize the 

procedures for environmental sample types. 

Description of Method: This method is an enzyme immunoassay (EIA) using a mixture of highaffinity capture antibodies for identification of toxin(s) in food samples. Samples are prepared by 

dilution in Tris buffer, centrifugation, and filtration of the supernatant through a syringe, with 

adjustment to a final pH of 7.0 to 8.0. Samples are incubated in 96-well plates with the mixture 

of antibodies conjugated to horseradish peroxidase (HRP), and visualized with a peroxidase 

substrate. Assay results are determined visually or using a microtiter plate reader. Test is 

considered positive for staphylococcal enterotoxins if absorbance is >0.200 and is considered 

negative if absorbance is <0.200. Specific toxin serotypes are not differentiated. This method 

detects from 1.3 to 3.3 ng/mL staphylococcal enterotoxin in extracts prepared from food 

containing 4 to 10 ng/mL staphylococcal enterotoxin. 

Source: AOAC International. 1994. “Method 991.06: Staphylococcal Enterotoxins in Selected 

Foods.” Official Methods of Analysis of AOAC International. 16th Edition, 4th Revision; Vol. I. 

http://www.aoac.org/

8.2.5.2 Literature Reference for Staphylococcal Enterotoxins Types A, B, and C 

(Applied and Environmental Microbiology. 1997. 63(6): 2361–2365) 

Analysis Purpose: Biological activity 

Analytical Technique: T-cell proliferation assay 

Method Developed for: Staphylococcal enterotoxin Type A (SEA) in selected foods 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for biological activity assessment of 

staphylococcal enterotoxins Type B in aerosol samples, and Types A and C in aerosol, solid, 

particulate, liquid, and water samples. Further research is needed to develop and standardize the 

procedures for environmental sample types. 

Description of Method: This method is a T-cell proliferation assay using lymphocytes in a 96-

well plate format for identification of staphyloccal enterotoxin(s) in food samples. Lyphocytes 

are prepared from heparinized Lewis rat blood or human blood using Ficoll-PaqueTM. Cells are 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 150 October 2010
Section 8 – Selected Biotoxin Methods 

aliquoted at 0.5 × 105 to 1.0 × 105 cell per well in 100 μL culture medium into a U-bottomed 96-

well tissue culture plate. Food samples (potato salad, canned mushrooms, hot dogs, dry milk) are 

homogenized in PBS (1:1, wt/wt), centrifuged, the supernatants diluted 1:10 in PBS, and added 

directly to sample wells containing lymphocytes. Varying concentrations of SEA can be used as a 

standard curve. The treated samples are added to the lymphocytes and incubated for two to five 

days at 37°C. On the last day either 1 μCi of [methyl-3

H] thymidine or 20 μL of Alamar blue is 

added to the well. After 24 hours, supernatant is either harvested onto glass fiber filters and the 

beta-radioactivity counted or the color reaction of the Alamar blue treated wells is read on a plate 

reader at 570 nm. Both human and rat lymphocytes produce strong T-cell proliferation in 

response to SEA. The radioactive assay shows a significant level of proliferation (P < 0.05) as 

compared to control medium at levels as low as 0.1 pg SEA per well. The Alamar blue assay 

detects SEA at 1 ng per well. Diluted food samples without SEA do not induce T-cell 

proliferation. 

Special Considerations: This method was developed for SEA in selected foods and has not 

been tested with SEB and SEC or in other sample types. However, because the T-cell 

proliferation assay is not antigen specific, the method may be appropriate for SEB and SEC, both 

of which have superantigen T-cell proliferation activity. This assay cannot identify the specific 

superantigen nor can it assess emetic activity; additional testing to determine specificity and 

assess toxin activity should be performed. 

Source: Rasooly, L., Rose, N.R., Shah, D.B., and Rasooly, A. 1997. “In Vitro Assay of 

Staphylococcus aureus Enterotoxin A Activity in Food.” Applied and Environmental 

Microbiology. 63(6): 2361–2365. www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/AEM-63(6)-pgs2361-2365.pdf

8.3 Method Summaries for Small Molecule Biotoxins

Summaries of the analytical methods for small molecule biotoxins listed in Appendix D are provided in 

Sections 8.3.1 through 8.3.12. These sections contain summary information only, extracted from the 

selected methods. The full version of the method should be consulted prior to sample analysis. 

Each summary contains a brief description of the method, intended method application, performance data 

(if available), and a link to or source for obtaining a full version of the method. 

8.3.1 Aflatoxin (Type B1) 

CAS RN: 27261-02-5

Method Analytical Technique Section 

AOAC Official Method 991.31 Immunoassay and HPLC-FL 8.3.1.1 

8.3.1.1 AOAC Official Method 991.31: Aflatoxins in Corn, Raw Peanuts, and 

Peanut Butter 

Analysis Purpose: Presumptive and confirmatory 

Analytical Technique: Immunoassay and HPLC-FL 

Method Developed for: Aflatoxins (Type B1) in corn, raw peanuts, and peanut butter 

Method Selected for: SAM lists this method for presumptive and confirmatory analyses in 

aerosol, solid, particulate, liquid, and water samples. Further research is needed to develop and 

standardize the procedures for environmental sample types. 

Description of Method: This method is for the detection of aflatoxins in agricultural products. 

The sample is extracted with methanol-water (7 + 3), filtered, diluted with water, and applied to 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 151 October 2010
Section 8 – Selected Biotoxin Methods 

an affinity column containing mAbs specific for aflatoxins B1, B2 (CAS RN 22040-96-6), G1 

(CAS RN 1385-95-1), and G2 (CAS RN 7241-98-7). Antibody-bound aflatoxins are removed 

from the column with methanol. For detection and quantitation of total aflatoxins, fluorescence 

measurement after reaction with bromine solution is performed. For individual aflatoxins, 

fluorescence detection and postcolumn iodine derivatization are performed and quantitation is by 

LC. Method performance was characterized using various commodities (e.g., corn) at aflatoxin 

levels over a range of 10 to 30 ng/g. This method was originally designed for the analysis of 

aflatoxins (B1, B2, G1, and G2) in samples where cleanup was necessary to remove food 

components, such as fats and proteins; the cleanup procedure may not be necessary for analysis of 

water samples. 

Special Considerations: AOAC Official Method 994.08: Aflatoxin in Corn, Almonds, Brazil 

Nuts, Peanuts, and Pistachio Nuts, (AOAC International. 1998. Official Methods of Analysis of 

AOAC International, 16th Edition, 4th Revision, Vol. II. http://www.aoac.org/) may be used as a 

complementary HPLC-FL method in order to provide more flexibility for analyses.

Source: AOAC International. 1994. “Method 991.31: Aflatoxins in Corn, Raw Peanuts, and 

Peanut Butter.” Official Methods of Analysis of AOAC International. 16th Edition, 4th Revision; 

Vol. II. http://www.aoac.org/

8.3.2 α-Amanitin 

CAS RN: 23109-05-9 

Method Analytical Technique Section 

Journal of Chromatography B. 1991. 563(2): 299–311 HPLC amperometric detection 8.3.2.1 

Journal of Food Protection. 2005. 68(6): 1294–1301 Immunoassay 8.3.2.2 

8.3.2.1 Literature Reference for α-Amanitin (Journal of Chromatography B. 1991. 

563(2): 299–311) 

Analysis Purpose: Confirmatory 

Analytical Technique: HPLC with amperometric detection 

Method Developed for: α-Amanitin in plasma 

Method Selected for: SAM lists these procedures for confirmatory analysis in aerosol, solid, 

particulate, liquid, and water samples. Further research is needed to develop and standardize the 

procedures for environmental sample types. 

Description of Method: Procedures are described for the selective determination in human 

plasma of α-amanitin using HPLC with amperometric detection. After extraction of plasma with 

disposable C18 silica cartridges, the extracts are separated by isocratic reversed-phase 

chromatography using a macroporous polystyrene-divinylbenzene column and a mobile phase of 

0.05 M phosphate buffer-acetonitrile (91:9) at pH 9.5. Amperometric detection is performed by 

applying an oxidation potential as low as +350 mV (vs. Ag/AgCl) to a glassy carbon electrode, in 

a thin-layer flow-cell. The linear range for alpha-amanitin is 3 to 200 ng/mL, and the relative 

LOD in plasma is 2 ng/mL at a signal-to-noise ratio of 2. The intra-assay precision has been 

evaluated at levels of 10 and 200 ng/mL. 

Source: Tagliaro, F., Schiavon, G., Bontempelli, G., Carli, G., and Marigo, M. 1991. “Improved 

High-performance Liquid Chromatographic Determination with Amperometric Detection of 

Alpha-amanitin in Human Plasma Based on its Voltammetric Study.” Journal of Chromatography 

B. 563(2): 299–311. http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/2055993

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 152 October 2010
Section 8 – Selected Biotoxin Methods 

8.3.2.2 Literature Reference for α-Amanitin, T-2 Mycotoxin (Journal of Food 

Protection. 2005. 68(6): 1294–1301) 

Analysis Purpose: Presumptive 

Analytical Technique: Immunoassay 

Method Developed for: α-Amanitin, ricin, and T-2 mycotoxin in food and beverages 

Method Selected for: SAM lists these procedures for presumptive analysis of α-amanitin and T2 toxin in aerosol, solid, particulate, liquid, and water samples and for confirmatory analysis of 

ricin in aerosol, solid, particulate, liquid, and water samples. Further research is needed to 

develop and standardize the procedures for environmental sample types. 

Description of Method: Commercially available ELISAs are described and assessed for 

detection of ricin, amanitin, and T-2 toxin at levels below those described as a health concern in 

food samples. Solid food samples are prepared by washing the sample with sodium phosphate 

buffer followed by dilution with phosphate-buffered saline. Liquid beverage samples are 

prepared by dilution in sodium phosphate buffer. Amanitin samples are similarly prepared using 

water instead of buffer, and T-2 toxin samples are similarly prepared using 35% methanol in 

water instead of buffer. The prepared samples are used with commercially obtained ELISA kits 

according to the manufacturer’s directions, except for the incorporation of an eight-point 

calibration curve and reading the plates at both 405 and 650 nm after 26 minutes of incubation at 

37°C. This assay detects ricin in food products at 0.01 μg/mL with acceptable background levels. 

Amanitin can be detected in food products at 1 μg/g with the ELISA. Background responses 

occurred, but at less than the equivalent of 0.5 ppm for amanitin. The ELISA kit will successfully 

detect T-2 toxin at targeted levels of 0.2 μg/g. The ELISA kit successfully detects T-2 toxin at 

targeted levels of 0.2 μg/g; the immunoassay for T-2 toxin, however, shows significant 

background responses and varies up to 0.1 ppm. 

Source: Garber, E.A., Eppley, R.M., Stack, M.E., McLaughlin, M.A., and Park, D.L. 2005. 

“Feasibility of Immunodiagnostic Devices for the Detection of Ricin, Amanitin, and T-2 Toxin in 

Food.” Journal of Food Protection. 68(6): 1294–1301. 

http://www.ingentaconnect.com/content/iafp/jfp/2005/00000068/00000006/art00027

8.3.3 Anatoxin-a 

 CAS RN: 64285-06-9

Method Analytical Technique Section 

Biomedical Chromatography. 1996. 10: 46–47 HPLC-FL (precolumn 

derivatization) 8.3.3.1 

8.3.3.1 Literature Reference for Anatoxin-a (Biomedical Chromatography. 1996. 

10(1): 46–47) 

Analysis Purpose: Confirmatory 

Analytical Technique: HPLC-FL (precolumn derivatization) 

Method Developed for: Anatoxin-a in potable water 

Method Selected for: SAM lists these procedures for confirmatory analysis in aerosol, solid, 

particulate, liquid, and water samples. Further research is needed to develop and standardize the 

procedures for environmental sample types other than water. 

Description of Method: Procedures are described for HPLC analysis with fluorimetric detection 

of anatoxin-a in water samples after derivatization with 7-fluoro-4-nitro-2,1,3-benzoxadiazole 

(NBD-F). Samples are extracted at pH 7 with SPE using a weak cation exchanger. The toxin is 

eluted with methanol containing 0.2% trifluoroacetic acid (TFA). Samples are evaporated, 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 153 October 2010
Section 8 – Selected Biotoxin Methods 

reconstituted with acetonitrile, and re-evaporated prior to derivatization. This procedure detects 

anatoxin-a at concentrations of 0.1 μg/L with a good linear calibration. 

Source: James, K.J., and Sherlock, I.R. 1996. “Determination of the Cyanobacterial Neurotoxin, 

Anatoxin-a, by Derivatisation Using 7-Fluoro-4-Nitro-2,1,3-Benzoxadiazole (NBD-F) and HPLC 

Analysis with Fluorimetric Detection.” Biomedical Chromatography. 10(1): 46–47. 

http://www3.interscience.wiley.com/journal/18562/abstract

8.3.4 Brevetoxins (B form) 

 CAS RN: 79580-28-2 

Method Analytical Technique Section 

Environmental Health Perspectives. 2002. 110(2): 

179–185 Immunoassay 8.3.4.1 

Toxicon. 2004. 43(4): 455–465 HPLC-MS-MS 8.3.4.2 

8.3.4.1 Literature Reference for Brevetoxins (Environmental Health 

Perspectives. 2002. 110(2): 179–185) 

Analysis Purpose: Presumptive 

Analytical Technique: Immunoassay 

Method Developed for: Brevetoxins in shellfish 

Method Selected for: SAM lists these procedures for presumptive analysis in aerosol, solid, 

particulate, liquid, and water samples. Further research is needed to develop and standardize the 

procedures for environmental sample types. 

Description of Method: Procedures are described for a competitive ELISA used to detect 

brevetoxins in shellfish. The assay uses goat anti-brevetoxin antibodies in combination with a 

three-step signal amplification process: (1) secondary biotinylated antibodies; (2) streptavidinHRP conjugate; and (3) chromogenic enzyme substrate. Sample preparation for liquids is 

dilution in PBS. Sample preparation for solids (oysters) is homogenization in PBS, or extraction 

in acetone. The working range for the assay is 0.2 to 2.0 ng/mL for diluted and undiluted liquid 

samples, and 0.2 to 2.0 ng/mL for solid samples, corresponding to 0.8 to 8.0 μg brevetoxins/100.0 

g shellfish. The method has been compared to the mouse bioassay and is equivalent in 

sensitivity. 

 

Source: Naar, J., Bourdelais, A., Tomas, C., Kubanek, J., Whitney, P.L., Flewelling, L., 

Steidinger, K., Lancaster, J., and Badan, D.G. 2002. “A Competitive ELISA to Detect 

Brevetoxins from Karenia brevis (Formerly Gymnodinium breve) in Seawater, Shellfish, and 

Mammalian Body Fluid.” Environmental Health Perspectives. 110(2): 179–185. 

http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/EHP-110(2)-pgs179-185.pdf

8.3.4.2 Literature Reference for Brevetoxins (Toxicon. 2004. 43(4): 455–465) 

Analysis Purpose: Confirmatory 

Analytical Technique: High performance liquid chromatography tandem mass spectrometers 

(HPLC-MS-MS) 

Method Developed for: Brevetoxins in shellfish 

Method Selected for: SAM lists these procedures for confirmatory analysis in aerosol, solid, 

particulate, liquid, and water samples. Further research is needed to develop and standardize the 

procedures for environmental sample types. 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 154 October 2010
Section 8 – Selected Biotoxin Methods 

Description of Method: Shellfish sample homogenates are extracted with acetone, and 

centrifuged. The supernatants are combined, evaporated, and re-solubilized in 80% methanol. 

Following a wash with 95% n-hexane, the methanolic layer is evaporated, and the residue resolubilized in 25% methanol and applied to a C18 SPE column. Analytes are eluted with 100% 

methanol, evaporated, and re-solubilized in methanol for analysis. Analysis of prepared samples 

is performed using HPLC-MS-MS with a mobile phase of water and acetonitrile with acetic acid. 

Analytes are detected by an MS with ESI interface. Brevetoxins are extensively metabolized, 

with many sub-forms. This method describes multiple liquid chromatography/electrospray 

ionization mass spectrometry (LC-ESI-MS) profiles for metabolites of brevetoxins from oysters. 

Source: Wang, Z., Plakas, S.M., El Said, K.R., Jester, E.L., Granade, H.R., and Dickey, R.W. 

2004. “LC/MS Analysis of Brevetoxin Metabolites in the Eastern Oyster (Crassostrea 

virginica).” Toxicon. 43(4): 455–465. http://cat.inist.fr/?aModele=afficheN&cpsidt=15668117

8.3.5 α-Conotoxin 

 CAS RN: 156467-85-5 

Method Analytical Technique Section 

Biochemical Journal. 1997. 328: 245–250 Immunoassay 8.3.5.1 

Journal of Medicinal Chemistry. 2004. 47(5): 1234–

1241 HPLC-MS 8.3.5.2 

8.3.5.1 Literature Reference for α-Conotoxin (Biochemical Journal. 1997. 328(1): 

245–250) 

Analysis Purpose: Presumptive 

Analytical Technique: Immunoassay 

Method Developed for: Purified α-Conotoxin GI in phosphate buffer 

Method Selected for: SAM lists these procedures for presumptive analysis in aerosol, solid, 

particulate, liquid, and water samples. Further research is needed to develop and standardize the 

procedures for environmental sample types. 

Description of Method: A biologically active fluorescein derivative of Conus geographus αconotoxin (FGI) is used in solution-phase-binding assays with two purified Torpedo californica

monoclonal antibodies (mAbs) to detect the toxin in laboratory samples. For competitive liganddisplacement spin-column assays, FGI was premixed with various dilutions of unlabelled ligands 

and then incubated with the two mAbs (5A1 and 8D2) at room temperature. Fluorescence is 

measured in ratio mode using cuvettes with excitation and emission monochromators set at 

gamma = 490 nm and gamma = 525 nm, respectively. The binding of FGI to the mAbs had 

apparent dissociation constants of 10 to 100 nM. The binding specificity and epitopes recognized 

by the two mAbs against α-conotoxin GI are also characterized. Competitive displacement 

assays showed that both mAbs specifically bound α-conotoxin GI with high avidity. Crossreactivity with α-conotoxins M1 and S1 was not observed for either mAb in a direct ELISA. 

With spin-column assay, however, 5A1, but not 8D2, cross-reacted at a low level (100 – 300-fold 

less avid) with these α-conotoxins. An antibody/α-conotoxin GI molar ratio of 1:1 afforded 

complete protection in mouse lethal assays. 

Source: Ashcom, J.D., and Stiles, B.G. 1997. “Characterization of α-Conotoxin Interactions 

with the Nicotinic Acetylcholine Receptor and Monoclonal Antibodies.” Biochemical Journal. 

328(1): 245–250. http://www.epa.gov/sam/pdfs/BJ-328-pgs245-250.pdf

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 155 October 2010
Section 8 – Selected Biotoxin Methods 

8.3.5.2 Literature Reference for α-Conotoxin (Journal of Medicinal Chemistry. 

2004. 47(5): 1234–1241) 

Analysis Purpose: Confirmatory 

Analytical Technique: HPLC-MS 

Method Developed for: Conus anemone venom (α-Conotoxins AnIA, AnIB, and AnIC) in 

buffer 

Method Selected for: SAM lists these procedures for confirmatory analysis in aerosol, solid, 

particulate, liquid, and water samples. Further research is needed to develop and standardize the 

procedures for environmental sample types. 

Description of Method: Procedures are discussed for the detection of peptides within the αconotoxin molecular mass range using an HPLC-MS. A crude extract of Conus anemone venom 

sample is made using 30% acetonitrile/water acidified with 0.1% TFA, with the insoluble portion 

of the sample removed by centrifugation. A portion of the sample extract is fractionated by sizeexclusion chromatography in order to prepare a sample containing small peptides in the range of 

1000 to 2500 Da. Chromatography conditions are elution with 30% acetonitrile / 0.048% TFA at 

a flow rate of 0.5 mL/minute, with detection at 214 nm. Three sulfated α-conotoxins (AnIA, 

AnIB, and AnIC) can be identified by LC-MS that are within the molecular mass range of other 

α-conotoxins (i.e., 1400–2200 Da). Peptides can be quantified by reversed-phase HPLC using an 

external reference standard for each peptide. 

Source: Loughnan, M.L., Nicke, A., Jones, A., Adams, D.J., Alewood, P.F., and Lewis, R.J. 

2004. “Chemical and Functional Identification and Characterization of Novel Sulfated Alphaconotoxins from the Cone Snail Conus anemone.” Journal of Medicinal Chemistry. 47(5): 1234–

1241. http://pubs.acs.org/cgi-bin/abstract.cgi/jmcmar/2004/47/i05/abs/jm031010o.html

8.3.6 Cylindrospermopsin 

CAS RN: 143545-90-8

Method Analytical Technique Section 

FEMS Microbiology Letters. 2002. 216: 159-164 HPLC-PDA 8.3.6.1 

ELISA Kits for Cylindrospermopsin Immunoassay 8.3.6.2 

8.3.6.1 Literature Reference for Cylindrospermopsin (FEMS Microbiology 

Letters. 2002. 216(2): 159–164) 

Analysis Purpose: Confirmatory 

Analytical Technique: High performance liquid chromatography – Photodiode array detector 

(HPLC-PDA) 

Method Developed for: Cylindrospermopsin in eutrophic waters 

Method Selected for: SAM lists these procedures for confirmatory analysis in aerosol, solid, 

particulate, liquid, and water samples. Further research is needed to develop and standardize the 

procedures for environmental sample types other than water. 

Description of Method: Cylindrospermopsin is detected using HPLC with photodiode array 

detector (PDA) in environmental waters. The suggested solvent range for cylindrospermopsin is 

below 50% methanol and 30% acetonitrile. Complex samples (culture medium) are purified on a 

C18 column with a linear gradient of 1 to 12% (v/v) methanol/water over 24 minutes at 40°C, with 

monitoring at 262 nm. The use of C18 columns for environmental waters is suggested for removal 

of the large number of organic compounds that may be present. This method detects and recovers 

cylindrospermopsin from spiked environmental water samples at 1 μg/L. 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 156 October 2010
Section 8 – Selected Biotoxin Methods 

Source: Metcalf, J.S., Beattie, K.A., Saker, M.L., and Codd, G.A. 2002. “Effects of Organic 

Solvents on the High Performance Liquid Chromatographic Analysis of the Cyanobacterial Toxin 

Cylindrospermopsin and Its Recovery from Environmental Eutrophic Waters by Solid Phase 

Extraction.” FEMS Microbiology Letters. 216(2): 159–164. 

http://cat.inist.fr/?aModele=afficheN&cpsidt=14002569

8.3.6.2 ELISA Kits for Cylindrospermopsin 

Analysis Purpose: Presumptive 

Analytical Technique: Immunoassay 

Method Developed for: Cylindrospermopsin in ground water, surface water, and well water 

Method Selected for: SAM lists these procedures for presumptive analysis in aerosol, solid, 

particulate, liquid, and water samples. Further research is needed to develop and standardize the 

procedures for environmental sample types other than water. 

Description of Method: Cylindrospermopsin is detected using a colorimetric immunoassay 

(competitive ELISA) procedure. A sample (0.05 mL), enzyme conjugate (cylindrospermopsinHRP), and an antibody solution containing rabbit anti-cylindrospermopsin antibodies are added to 

plate wells containing immobilized sheep anti-rabbit antibodies. Both the cylindrospermopsin (if 

present) in the sample and cylindrospermopsin-HRP conjugate compete in solution to bind to the 

rabbit anti-cylindrospermopsin antibodies in proportion to their respective concentrations. The 

anti-cylindrospermopsin antibody-target complexes are then bound to the immobilized sheep antirabbit antibodies on the plate. After incubation, the unbound molecules are washed and decanted. 

A specific substrate is then added which is converted from a colorless to a blue solution by the 

HRP enzyme conjugate solution. The reaction is terminated with the addition of a dilute acid. The 

concentration of cylindrospermopsin in the sample is determined photometrically by comparing 

sample absorbance to the absorbance of the calibrators (standards) at a specific wavelength (450 

nm). The applicable concentration range is 0.4–2.0 μg/L, with a minimum detection level of 0.4 

μg/L. 

Source: NEMI. 2006. 

http://infotrek.er.usgs.gov/pls/apex/f?p=119:38:7526698938332159::::P38_METHOD_ID:9507

8.3.7 Diacetoxyscirpenol (DAS) 

CAS RN: 2270-40-8 

Method Analytical Technique Section 

International Journal of Food Microbiology. 1988. 

6(1): 9–17 Immunoassay 8.3.7.1 

Rapid Communications in Mass Spectrometry. 

2006. 20(9): 1422–1428 LC/APCI-MS 8.3.7.2 

8.3.7.1 Literature Reference for Diacetoxyscirpenol (DAS) (International Journal 

of Food Microbiology. 1988. 6(1): 9–17) 

Analysis Purpose: Presumptive 

Analytical Technique: Immunoassay 

Method Developed for: DAS in food 

Method Selected for: SAM lists these procedures for presumptive analysis in aerosol, solid, 

particulate, liquid, and water samples. Further research is needed to develop and standardize the 

procedures for environmental sample types. 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 157 October 2010
Section 8 – Selected Biotoxin Methods 

Description of Method: An ELISA is used for the detection of DAS in food samples. 

Antibodies against DAS are obtained after immunization of rabbits with DAS-hemiglutaratehuman serum albumin (DAS-HG-HSA), and a DAS-hemisuccinate-HRP conjugate (DAS-HSHRP) is prepared by an ester method for use as enzyme-labeled toxin in the competitive assay. 

The detection limit for DAS using this assay is approximately 10 pg/mL. This assay will crossreact related toxins. The relative cross-reactivities of the assay are 597.5, 5.2, 100.0, 2.5, and 

1.5% for 3 alpha-acetyl-DAS, DAS, T-2 toxin, neosolaniol, and 15-acetoxyscirpenol, 

respectively. 

Source: Klaffer, U., Martlbauer, E., and Terplan, G. 1988. “Development of a Sensitive 

Enzyme-linked Immunosorbent Assay for the Detection of Diacetoxyscirpenol.” International 

Journal of Food Microbiology. 6(1): 9–17. 

http://www.sciencedirect.com/science/journal/01681605

8.3.7.2 Literature Reference for Diacetoxyscirpenol (DAS) and T-2 Mycotoxin 

(Rapid Communications in Mass Spectrometry. 2006. 20(9): 1422–1428) 

Analysis Purpose: Confirmatory 

Analytical Technique: Liquid chromatography/atmospheric pressure chemical ionization mass 

spectrometry (LC/APCI-MS) 

Method Developed for: DAS and T-2 mycotoxin in food 

Method Selected for: SAM lists these procedures for confirmatory analysis in aerosol, solid, 

particulate, liquid, and water samples. Further research is needed to develop and standardize the 

procedures for environmental sample types. 

Description of Method: A LC/APCI-MS procedure based on time-of-flight mass spectrometry 

(TOFMS), with a real-time reference mass correction, is used for simultaneous determination of 

Fusarium mycotoxins (to include DAS and T-2 mycotoxin) in foodstuffs. Mycotoxin samples are 

extracted with acetonitrile/water (85:15) and centrifuged, and the supernatant is applied to a 

column for cleanup. Prepared samples are separated by liquid chromatography with an aqueous 

mobile phase of ammonium acetate and methanol detection is provided in exact mass 

chromatograms with a mass window of 0.03 Th. The limits of detection range from 0.1 to 6.1 

ng/g in analyzed foodstuffs. 

Source: Tanaka, H., Takino, M., Sugita-Konishi, Y., and Tanaka, T. 2006. “Development of 

Liquid Chromatography/Time-of-flight Mass Spectrometric Method for the Simultaneous 

Determination of Trichothecenes, Zearalenone, and Aflatoxins in Foodstuffs.” Rapid 

Communications in Mass Spectrometry. 20(9): 1422–1428. 

http://cat.inist.fr/?aModele=afficheN&cpsidt=17697070

8.3.8 Microcystins (Principal isoforms: LA, LR, LW, RR, YR) 

CAS RNs: 96180-79-9 (LA), 101043-37-2 (LR), 157622-02-1 (LW), 111755-37-4 (RR), 

101064-48-6 (YR) 

Method Analytical Technique Section 

Journal of AOAC International. 2001. 84(4): 1035–

1044 

Immunoassay/Phosphatase 

assay 

8.3.8.1 

Analyst. 1994. 119(7): 1525–1530 HPLC-PDA 8.3.8.2 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 158 October 2010
Section 8 – Selected Biotoxin Methods 

8.3.8.1 Literature Reference for Microcystins (Journal of AOAC International. 

2001. 84(4): 1035–1044) 

Analysis Purpose: Presumptive 

Analytical Technique: Immunoassay/Phosphatase assay 

Method Developed for: Microcystins-LA, -LR, -LW, -RR, -YR in algae products 

Method Selected for: SAM lists these procedures for presumptive analysis in aerosol, solid, 

particulate, liquid, and water samples. Further research is needed to develop and standardize the 

procedures for environmental sample types. 

Description of Method: ELISA and protein phosphatase inhibition assays are used to detect 

microcystins in blue-green algae products. Solid samples are prepared by homogenization in 

methanol (75% in water), with centrifugation to remove solids. Immunoassays are performed on 

the prepared samples using a commercially available ELISA test kit as described by the 

manufacturer. Samples are quantitated by comparison with a microcystins-LR standard curve. 

Quantitation with the colorimetric protein phosphatase inhibition assay is based on a comparison 

with a microcystin-LR standard curve. ELISA and phosphatase assay results agree over a 

concentration range of 0.5 to 35 μg/g. Neither assay is specific for a particular isoform. 

Source: Lawrence, J.F., Niedzwiadek, B., Menard, C., Lau, B.P., Lewis, D., Kuper-Goodman, 

T., Carbone, S., and Holmes, C. 2001. “Comparison of Liquid Chromatography/Mass 

Spectrometry, ELISA, and Phosphatase Assay for the Determination of Microcystins in Bluegreen Algae Products.” Journal of AOAC International. 84(4): 1035–1044. 

http://cat.inist.fr/?aModele=afficheN&cpsidt=1135453

8.3.8.2 Literature Reference for Microcystins (Analyst. 1994. 119(7): 1525–1530) 

Analysis Purpose: Confirmatory 

Analytical Technique: HPLC-PDA 

Method Developed for: Microcystins-LA, -LR, -LW, -RR, -YR in raw and treated waters 

Method Selected for: SAM lists these procedures for confirmatory analysis in aerosol, solid, 

particulate, liquid, and water samples. Further research is needed to develop and standardize the 

procedures for environmental sample types other than water. 

Description of Method: Procedures are discussed to test the presence of microcystin-LR, -LY, -

LW, -LF (CAS RN 154037-70-4), and -RR in treated and untreated water samples. 

Cyanobacterial cells are separated from the water by filtration through 110-mm glass fiber grade 

C (GF/C) discs. The cellular components collected on the discs are extracted three times with 

methanol; the collected extraction fluids are combined and dried. The residue is resuspended in 

methanol and analyzed by HPLC-PDA. The liquid portion of the filtered water sample is 

subjected to trace enrichment using a C18 SPE cartridge, followed by identification and 

determination by HPLC-PDA. This procedure can detect microcystin concentrations as low as 

250 ng/L and is the basis of the World Health Organization (WHO) method for the detection of 

microcystins. 

Source: Lawton, L.A., Edwards, C., and Codd, G.A. 1994. “Extraction and High-performance 

Liquid Chromatographic Method for the Determination of Microcystins in Raw and Untreated 

Waters.” Analyst. 119(7): 1525–1530. 

http://www.rsc.org/Publishing/Journals/AN/article.asp?doi=AN9941901525

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 159 October 2010
Section 8 – Selected Biotoxin Methods 

8.3.9 Picrotoxin 

CAS RN: 124-87-8

Method Analytical Technique Section 

Journal of Pharmaceutical and Biomedical Analysis. 

1989. 7(3): 369–375 HPLC 8.3.9.1 

8.3.9.1 Literature Reference for Picrotoxin (Journal of Pharmaceutical & 

Biomedical Analysis. 1989. 7(3): 369–375) 

Analysis Purpose: Confirmatory 

Analytical Technique: HPLC 

Method Developed for: Picrotoxin in serum 

Method Selected for: SAM lists these procedures for confirmatory analysis in aerosol, solid, 

particulate, liquid, and water samples. Further research is needed to develop and standardize the 

procedures for environmental sample types. 

Description of Method: Procedures are described for quantification of the two components of 

picrotoxin (picrotin [CAS RN 21416-53-5] and picrotoxinin [CAS RN 17617-45-7]) in serum 

samples. Serum samples are prepared by washing with n-hexane, followed by extraction with 

chloroform. The chloroform is evaporated and the sample is reconstituted in acetonitrile-1 mM 

ammonium acetate buffer (pH 6.4) 34:66 (v/v) for assay by reversed-phase HPLC. The effluent 

is monitored at 200 nm, and quantification is based on peak-height ratio of analyte to the internal 

standard. A linear response is obtained for both analytes (picrotin and picrotoxinin) in the range 

0.2 to 20.0 μg/mL. 

Source: Soto-Otero, R., Mendez-Alvarez, E., Sierra-Paredes, G., Galan-Valiente, J., AguilarVeiga, E., and Sierra-Marcuno, G. 1989. “Simultaneous Determination of the Two Components 

of Picrotoxin in Serum by Reversed-phase High-performance Liquid Chromatography with 

Application to a Pharmacokinetic Study in Rats.” Journal of Pharmaceutical & Biomedical 

Analysis. 7(3): 369–375. http://www.sciencedirect.com/science/journal/07317085

8.3.10 Saxitoxins (Principal isoforms: STX, NEOSTX, GTX, dcGTX, dcSTX) 

CAS RNs: 35523-89-8 (STX), 64296-20-4 (NEOSTX), 77462-64-7 (GTX), 58911-04-9 

(dcSTX) 

Method Analytical Technique Section 

Journal of AOAC International. 1995. 78: 528–

532 

HPLC-FL (post column 

derivatization) 8.3.10.1 

ELISA Kits for Saxitoxin Immunoassay 8.3.10.2 

8.3.10.1 Literature Reference for Saxitoxin (Journal of AOAC International. 1995. 

78(2): 528–532) 

Analysis Purpose: Confirmatory 

Analytical Technique: HPLC-FL (post column derivatization) 

Method Developed for: Saxitoxins (STX, NEOSTX, GTX, dcGTX, dcSTX) in shellfish 

Method Selected for: SAM lists these procedures for confirmatory analysis in aerosol, solid, 

particulate, liquid, and water samples. Further research is needed to develop and standardize the 

procedures for environmental sample types. 

Description of Method: Procedures are described to detect multiple analogues of saxitoxin in 

shellfish using ion-interaction chromatography on a silica-based reversed-phase (C8) column with 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 160 October 2010
Section 8 – Selected Biotoxin Methods 

postcolumn periodate oxidation and FL detection. Toxin groups of different net charges are 

determined separately by isocratic elution using either sodium 1-heptanesulfonate in ammonium 

phosphate (GTX-1, GTX-6, dcGTX2, dcGTX3) or sodium 1-heplanesulfonate in ammonium 

phosphate and acetonitrile (STX [CAS RN 35523-89-8], neoSTX [CAS RN 64296-20-4], dcSTX 

[CAS RN 58911-04-9]). For biological sample types, a cleanup procedure using a C18 SPE 

cartridge is effective in preventing false peaks. High sensitivity with detection limits ranging 

from 20 to 110 fmol are achieved as a result of reduced band broadening and optimized reaction 

conditions. This method, when applied to low-toxicity shellfish, gives higher values than the 

standard mouse bioassay. 

Source: Oshima, Y. 1995. “Postcolumn Derivatization Liquid Chromatographic Method for 

Paralytic Shellfish Toxins.” Journal of AOAC International. 78(2): 528–532. 

http://cat.inist.fr/?aModele=afficheN&cpsidt=3469391

8.3.10.2 ELISA Kits for Saxitoxins 

Analysis Purpose: Presumptive 

Analytical Technique: Immunoassay 

Method Developed for: STX in water and solid samples (e.g., shellfish) 

Method Selected for: SAM lists these procedures for confirmatory analysis in aerosol, solid, 

particulate, liquid, and water samples. Further research is needed to develop and standardize the 

procedures for environmental sample types other than water. 

Description of Method: Saxitoxin is detected using a colorimetric immunoassay (competitive 

ELISA) procedure. A sample (0.05 mL), enzyme conjugate (saxitoxin-HRP), and an antibody 

solution containing rabbit anti-saxitoxin antibodies are added to plate wells containing 

immobilized sheep anti-rabbit antibodies. Both the saxitoxin (if present) in the sample and 

saxitoxin-HRP conjugate compete in solution to bind to the rabbit anti-saxitoxin antibodies in 

proportion to their respective concentrations. The anti-saxitoxin antibody-target complexes are 

then bound to the immobilized sheep anti-rabbit antibodies on the plate. After incubation, the 

unbound molecules are washed and decanted. A specific substrate is then added which is 

converted from a colorless to a blue solution by the HRP enzyme conjugate solution. The reaction 

is terminated with the addition of a dilute acid. The concentration of saxitoxin in the sample is 

determined photometrically by comparing sample absorbance to the absorbance of the calibrators 

(standards) at a specific wavelength (450 nm). The applicable concentration range is 0.015–0.4 

ng/mL, with a minimum detection level of 0.015 ng/mL. 

Special Considerations: This kit is not intended for other types of saxitoxin. Cross-reactivity is 

observed with the following saxitoxin types: dcSTX (29%), GTX 2, 3, and 5B (23%), sulfo GTX 

1 and 2 (2.0%, dcGTX 2 and 3 (1.4%), NEOSTX (1.3%), dcNEOSTX (0.6%), GTX 1 and 4 

(<0.2%). High concentrations (e.g., above 0.1 ng/mL for toxins with >20% cross-reactivity) of 

these other types of saxitoxin may produce false positive responses. 

Source: NEMI. 2006. 

http://infotrek.er.usgs.gov/pls/apex/f?p=119:38:8989971104293493::::P38_METHOD_ID:9512

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 161 October 2010
Section 8 – Selected Biotoxin Methods 

8.3.11 T-2 Mycotoxin 

CAS RN: 21259-20-1

Method Analytical Technique Section 

Journal of Food Protection. 2005. 68(6): 1294–1301 Immunoassay 8.3.2.2 

Rapid Communications in Mass Spectrometry. 2006. 

20(9): 1422–1428 LC/APCI-MS 8.3.7.2 

See Sections 8.3.2.2 and 8.3.7.2 for information on immunoassay and LC/APCI-MS procedures 

for T-2 Mycotoxin.

8.3.12 Tetrodotoxin 

CAS RN: 9014-39-5 

Method Analytical Technique Section 

Analytical Biochemistry. 2001. 290: 10-17 LC/ESI-MS 8.3.12.1 

Journal of Clinical Laboratory Analysis. 1992. 6: 65–

72 Immunoassay 8.3.12.2 

8.3.12.1 Literature Reference for Tetrodotoxin (Analytical Biochemistry. 2001. 

290(1): 10–17) 

Analysis Purpose: Confirmatory 

Analytical Technique: LC/ESI-MS 

Method Developed for: Tetrodotoxin (TTX) from puffer fish and newt tissues 

Method Selected for: SAM lists these procedures for confirmatory analysis in aerosol, solid, 

particulate, liquid, and water samples. Further research is needed to develop and standardize the 

procedures for environmental sample types. 

Description of Method: Procedures are described for LC/ESI-MS analysis of TTXs in tissue 

samples from puffer fish and newts by a combination of chromatography on a reversed-phase 

column with long carbon chains (C30) and with the mobile phase containing an ion pair reagent 

(ammonium heptafluorobutyrate). The relationship between the amount of applied standard TTX 

and its peak area on the mass chromatogram (m/z 320) shows good linearity over a range of 50 to 

1000 pmol. The detection limit of TTX in the SIM mode is estimated to be 0.7 pmol, with a 

signal to noise ratio of 2:1. 

Source: Shoji, Y., Yotsu-Yamashita, M., Miyazawa, T., and Yasumoto, T. 2001. “Electrospray 

Ionization Mass Spectrometry of Tetrodotoxin and its Analogs: Liquid Chromatography/Mass 

Spectrometry, Tandem Mass Spectrometry, and Liquid Chromatography/Tandem Mass 

Spectrometry.” Analytical Biochemistry. 290(1): 10–17. 

http://www.sciencedirect.com/science/journal/00032697

8.3.12.2 Literature Reference for Tetrodotoxin (Journal of Clinical Laboratory 

Analysis. 1992. 6(2): 65–72) 

Analysis Purpose: Presumptive 

Analytical Technique: Immunoassay 

Method Developed for: Tetrodotoxin in buffer 

Method Selected for: SAM lists these procedures for presumptive analysis in aerosol, solid, 

particulate, liquid, and water samples. Further research is needed to develop and standardize the 

procedures for environmental sample types. 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 162 October 2010
Section 8 – Selected Biotoxin Methods 

Description of Method: Procedures are described for a competitive inhibition enzyme 

immunoassay (CIEIA) for tetrodotoxin in biological samples. An anti-TTX mAb, designated 

T20G10, is directly labeled with alkaline phosphatase for use in the assay. Sensitivities of 6 to 7 

ng/mL (IC 50) and 2 to 3 ng/mL (IC 20) are achieved. 

Source: Raybould, T.J., Bignami, G.S., Inouye, L.K., Simpson, S.B., Byrnes, J.B., Grothaus, 

P.G., and Vann, D.C. 1992. “A Monoclonal Antibody-based Immunoassay for Detecting 

Tetrodotoxin in Biological Samples.” Journal of Clinical Laboratory Analysis. 6(2): 65–72. 

http://www3.interscience.wiley.com/journal/112131435/abstract

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 163 October 2010
Section 8 – Selected Biotoxin Methods 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 164 October 2010
Section 9 – Conclusions 

Section 9.0: Conclusions

Methods listed in Appendix A (chemical methods), Appendix B (radiochemical methods), and Appendix 

D (biotoxin methods) are recommended for use in assessment of the extent of contamination and the 

effectiveness of decontamination following a homeland security event. For pathogen methods, please 

refer to the points of contact listed in the Appendix C text box, or Appendix C in SAM 5.0. 

The primary objective of this document is not necessarily to identify the “best” analytical methods, but 

rather to identify appropriate methods that represent a balance between providing existing, documented, 

determinative techniques and providing consistent and valid analytical results. The method selected for 

each analyte/sample type combination was deemed the most general, appropriate, and broadly applicable 

of available methods. This is a living document, which can be used as a guide by EPA and EPAcontracted laboratories tasked with analysis of environmental samples following a homeland security 

event. Recommended methods are subject to change based on procedure testing and advances in 

technology. 

Any questions concerning the information in this document should be directed to the appropriate point(s) 

of contact listed in Section 4. 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 165 October 2010
Section 9 – Conclusions 

SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) 166 October 2010
Appendix A – Selected Chemical Methods 

Appendix A: Selected Chemical Methods 

SAM 2010 ( Revision 6.0) October 2010
Appendix A – Selected Chemical Methods 

SAM 2010 ( Revision 6.0) October 2010
SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0), Appendix A A - 1 October 2010

Analyte(s) CAS RN Determinative 

Technique Method Type Solid Samples Aqueous Liquid Samples

Drinking Water 

Samples Air Samples Wipes

Sample Prep

Determinative

Sample Prep Water extraction 3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8316

(EPA SW-846)

8316

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 5035A 

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8260C

(EPA SW-846)

8260C

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8318A

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8318A

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8318A

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 5035A 

(EPA SW-846)

5030C 

(EPA SW-846)

5030C

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8260C

(EPA SW-846)

8260C

(EPA SW-846)

8260C

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3535A/8330B 

(EPA SW-846)

3535A/8330B 

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8330B 

(EPA SW-846)

8330B 

(EPA SW-846)

8330B

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 4500- NH3 B

(SM)

Determinative 4500- NH3 G

(SM)

Sample Prep 3050B 

(EPA SW-846)

IO-3.1 

(EPA ORD)

9102

(NIOSH)

Determinative 6010C/6020A

(EPA SW-846)

IO-3.4/IO-3.5 

(EPA ORD)

6010C/6020A

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3050B 

(EPA SW-846)

IO-3.1

(EPA ORD)

9102

(NIOSH)

Determinative 6010C/6020A

(EPA SW-846)

IO-3.4/IO-3.5 

(EPA ORD)

6010C/6020A

(EPA SW-846)

Adapted from 

Chromatographia, 

63(5/6): 233-237

8316

(EPA SW-846)

524.2

(EPA OW)

D7600-09

(ASTM)

5601

(NIOSH) 

200.7/200.8 

(EPA OW)

Aldicarb sulfone 1646-88-4 HPLC

Adapted from 

Journal of 

Chromatography A, 

1154(1): 3-25

Adapted from Journal 

of Chromatography A, 

1154(1): 3-25

538

(EPA OW)

Adapted from Journal 

of Chromatography A, 

1154(1): 3-25

5601

(NIOSH) 

Aldicarb sulfoxide 1646-87-3 HPLC

5601

(NIOSH) 

Not of concern

200.7/200.8 

(EPA OW)

GC-MS

HPLC

8318A 

(EPA SW-846)

D7600-09

(ASTM)

D7600-09

(ASTM)

79-06-1 HPLC

107-13-1

HPLC

8316

(EPA SW-846)

531.2 

(EPA OW)

8318A 

(EPA SW-846)

8330B 

(EPA SW-846)

8318A 

(EPA SW-846)

531.2 

(EPA OW)

350.1 

(EPA OW)

200.7/200.8 

(EPA OW)

531.2 

(EPA OW)

504-24-5 HPLC

7440-38-2

ICP-AES / ICP-MS

4-Aminopyridine

Ammonium metavanadate 

(analyze as total vanadium)

Ammonia

Arsenic, Total

7803-55-6 200.7/200.8 

(EPA OW)

6015 

(NIOSH) Not of concern

30560-19-1

7664-41-7 Not of concern Visible 

spectrophotometry

LC-MS-MS

Aldicarb (Temik) 116-06-3

ICP-AES / ICP-MS

Acephate

Appendix A: Selected Chemical Methods

Not of concern TO-1521

(EPA ORD)

PV2004

(OSHA)

524.2

(EPA OW)

PV2004

(OSHA)

Allyl alcohol 107-18-6

Acrylamide

Acrylonitrile
SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0), Appendix A A - 2 October 2010

Analyte(s) CAS RN Determinative 

Technique Method Type Solid Samples Aqueous Liquid Samples

Drinking Water 

Samples Air Samples Wipes

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Sample Prep 3050B 

(EPA SW-846)

IO-3.1

(EPA ORD)

9102

(NIOSH)

Determinative 6010C/6020A

(EPA SW-846)

IO-3.4/IO-3.5 

(EPA ORD)

6010C/6020A

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3050B 

(EPA SW-846)

9102

(NIOSH)

Determinative 6010C/6020A

(EPA SW-846)

6010C/6020A

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep

Determinative

Sample Prep

Determinative

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8321B

(EPA SW-846)

8321B

(EPA SW-846)

8321B

(EPA SW-846)

8321B

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8321B

(EPA SW-846)

8321B

(EPA SW-846)

8321B

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8321B2

(EPA SW-846)

8321B2

(EPA SW-846)

8321B2

(EPA SW-846)

8321B2

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3050B 

(EPA SW-846)

IO-3.1

(EPA ORD)

9102

(NIOSH)

Determinative 6010C/6020A

(EPA SW-846)

IO-3.4/IO-3.5 

(EPA ORD)

6010C/6020A

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8318A

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 5035A 

(EPA SW-846)

5030C 

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8260C

(EPA SW-846)

8260C

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8321B

(EPA SW-846)

8321B

(EPA SW-846)

8321B

(EPA SW-846)

8321B

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D

(EPA SW-846)

200.7/200.8 

(EPA OW)

Not of concern

D7600-09

(ASTM)

200.7/200.8 

(EPA OW)

D7600-09

(ASTM)

200.7/200.8 

(EPA OW)

Not of concern

D6480-05 

(hard surfaces-wipes)

(ASTM)

8318A 

(EPA SW-846)

GC-MS

HPLC

GC-MS

200.7/200.8 

(EPA OW)

Not of concern

531.2 

(EPA OW)

524.2 

(EPA OW)

Not of concern

TO-15

(EPA ORD)

TO-10A3

(EPA ORD)

6001 

(NIOSH)

200.7/200.8 

(EPA OW)

10312:1995

(ISO)

Not of concern

ID216SG 

(OSHA)

Not of concern

200.7/200.8 

(EPA OW)

7784-42-1

1332-21-4

Boron trifluoride 7637-07-2

56073-10-0

1327-53-3

Asbestos

Arsenic trioxide

(analyze as total arsenic)

Brodifacoum

Arsine

(analyze as total arsenic in non-air 

samples)

1563-66-2

6581-06-2

470-90-6 

7778-44-1

Chlorfenvinphos

Carbofuran (Furadan)

Calcium arsenate

(analyze as total arsenic)

GFAA / ICP-AES / 

ICP-MS

ICP-AES / ICP-MS

BZ [Quinuclidinyl benzilate]

28772-56-7

HPLC

D5755-03 (soft 

surfaces-microvac)

(ASTM)

TO-10A

(EPA ORD)

Not of concern

5601

(NIOSH) 

Not of concern

Carfentanil 59708-52-0

Carbon disulfide 75-15-0

HPLC

TEM

HPLC / LC-MS-MS

ICP-AES / ICP-MS

ISE

Bromadiolone HPLC / LC-MS-MS

Not of concern

Not of concern
SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0), Appendix A A - 3 October 2010

Analyte(s) CAS RN Determinative 

Technique Method Type Solid Samples Aqueous Liquid Samples

Drinking Water 

Samples Air Samples Wipes

 

 

 

 

 

 

 Sample Prep

Adapted from Analyst, 

124(12): 

1853-1857

Determinative 4500-Cl G 

(SM)

Sample Prep 5035A 

(EPA SW-846)

5030C 

(EPA SW-846)

5030C 

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8260C

(EPA SW-846)

8260C

(EPA SW-846)

8260C

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A 

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A 

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D4

(EPA SW-846)

8270D4

(EPA SW-846)

8270D4

(EPA SW-846)

8270D4

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/'3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D6

(EPA SW-846)

8270D6

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3050B 

(EPA SW-846)

IO-3.1

(EPA ORD)

9102

(NIOSH)

Determinative 6010C/6020A

(EPA SW-846)

IO-3.4/IO-3.5 

(EPA ORD)

6010C/6020A

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D7

(EPA SW-846)

8270D7

(EPA SW-846)

8270D7

(EPA SW-846)

8270D7

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep

Determinative

Sample Prep

Determinative

551.1 

(EPA OW)

200.7/200.8 

(EPA OW)

3135.2I

(EPA RLAB)

4500-Cl G 

(SM)

3135.2I

(EPA RLAB)

ISM01.2 CN 

(EPA CLP)

ISM01.2 CN 

(EPA CLP)

Visible 

spectrophotometry

GC-MS

GC-MS / GC-ECD

GC-MS

Visible 

spectrophotometry

GC-MS

GC-MS

ICP-AES / ICP-MS

GC-MS / GC-FID

Visible 

spectrophotometry

551.1 

(EPA OW)

4500-Cl G 

(SM)

Not of concern

335.4 

(EPA OW)

200.7/200.8 

(EPA OW)

TO-10A5

(EPA ORD)

TO-10A5

(EPA ORD)

TO-10A5

(EPA ORD)

TO-10A

(EPA ORD)

6010 

(NIOSH)

TO-10A

(EPA ORD)

2513 

(NIOSH)

Not of concern

PV2103 (OSHA)

ISM01.2 CN 

(EPA CLP)

7782-50-5

57-12-5

96-24-2

7040-57-5

NA

5598-15-2

2-Chloroethanol 107-07-3

76-06-2

1445-76-7

Chlorine

GC-MS

GC-MS

Chlorpyrifos oxon

3-Chloro-1,2-propanediol

535-89-7

Chlorosarin

Chloropicrin

85090-33-1

2921-88-2

2-Chlorovinylarsonous acid 

(2-CVAA) (degradation product of 

Lewisite)

Chlorosoman

Chlorpyrifos

Crimidine

Cyanide, Amenable to chlorination

Cyanide, Total

3135.2I

(EPA RLAB)

3135.2I

(EPA RLAB)

Not of concern

Not of concern

Not of concern
SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0), Appendix A A - 4 October 2010

Analyte(s) CAS RN Determinative 

Technique Method Type Solid Samples Aqueous Liquid Samples

Drinking Water 

Samples Air Samples Wipes

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Sample Prep 5035A 

(EPA SW-846)

5030C 

(EPA SW-846)

5030C 

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8260C

(EPA SW-846)

8260C

(EPA SW-846)

8260C

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 5035A 

(EPA SW-846)

5030C 

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8260C

(EPA SW-846)

8260C

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8015C 

(EPA SW-846)

8015C 

(EPA SW-846)

8015C 

(EPA SW-846)

8015C 

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8321B8

(EPA SW-846)

8321B8

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8321B2

(EPA SW-846)

8321B2

(EPA SW-846)

8321B2

(EPA SW-846)

8321B2

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8321B

(EPA SW-846)

8321B

(EPA SW-846)

8321B

(EPA SW-846)

8321B

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

GC-MS / GC-FPD

GC-MS / GC-FPD

GC-MS

GC-MS

GC-MS

TO-10A5

(EPA ORD)

TO-10A

(EPA ORD)

D7597-09

(ASTM)

524.2 

(EPA OW)

Not of concern

TO-10A

(EPA ORD)

TO-10A

(EPA ORD)

525.2 

(EPA OW)

525.2 

(EPA OW)

525.2 

(EPA OW)

5600

(NIOSH)

TO-10A

(EPA ORD)

TO-15

(EPA ORD)

TO-15

(EPA ORD)

525.2 

(EPA OW)

5600

(NIOSH)

525.2 

(EPA OW)

538 

(EPA OW)

TO-10A3

(EPA ORD)

Not of concern

141-66-2

NA

298-04-4

868-85-9

2496-91-5

33876-51-6

Disulfoton sulfone oxon9

Disulfoton

Dichlorvos

Dicrotophos

 82-66-6

Diisopropyl methylphosphonate (DIMP)

(degradation product of GB)

Dimethylphosphite

Dimethylphosphoramidic acid (degradation 

product of GA)

1,2-Dichloroethane

(degradation product of HD)

506-77-4

Cyclohexyl sarin (GF)

Diphacinone

HPLC / LC-MS-MS

GC-MS

HPLC

GC-MS

GC-MS

GC-FID

1445-75-6

HPLC

Diesel range organics

Cyanogen chloride

62-73-7

329-99-7

107-06-2

Not of concern

Not of concern
SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0), Appendix A A - 5 October 2010

Analyte(s) CAS RN Determinative 

Technique Method Type Solid Samples Aqueous Liquid Samples

Drinking Water 

Samples Air Samples Wipes

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D

(EPA SW-846)

8270D

(EPA SW-846)

8270D

(EPA SW-846)

8270D

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8321B2

(EPA SW-846)

8321B2

(EPA SW-846)

8321B2

(EPA SW-846)

8321B2

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8321B2

(EPA SW-846)

8321B2

(EPA SW-846)

8321B2

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

9102

(NIOSH)

Determinative 8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8321B

(EPA SW-846)

8321B

(EPA SW-846)

8321B

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 5035A 

(EPA SW-846)

5030C 

(EPA SW-846)

5030C 

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8260C

(EPA SW-846)

8260C

(EPA SW-846)

8260C

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8321B

(EPA SW-846)

8321B

(EPA SW-846)

8321B

(EPA SW-846)

8321B

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep

Determinative

Sample Prep

Determinative

Adapted from 

Journal of 

Chromatography B, 

876(1): 103-108

GC-MS / GC-FPD

GC-MS

HPLC

300.1, Rev 1.0

(EPA OW)

525.2 

(EPA OW)

525.2 

(EPA OW)

D7599-09

(ASTM)

Not of concern

Adapted from Journal 

of Chromatography B, 

876(1): 103-108

Adapted from Journal 

of Chromatography B, 

876(1): 103-108

HPLC / LC-MS-MS

IC-conductivity 

detection

TO-10A3

(EPA ORD)

D7597-09

(ASTM)

525.2 

(EPA OW)

525.2 

(EPA OW)

HPLC / LC-MS-MS

HPLC

TO-10A3

(EPA ORD)

5600

(NIOSH)

TO-10A

(EPA ORD)

Not of concern

Not of concern

TO-10A

(EPA ORD)

Not of concern

525.2 

(EPA OW)

TO-15

(EPA ORD)

5600

(NIOSH)

505-29-3

2496-92-6

2497-07-6

598-14-1

75-21-8

22224-92-6

1832-53-7

437-38-7

640-19-7

139-87-7

16984-48-8

Disulfoton sulfoxide oxon9

Ethyldichloroarsine (ED)

Fluoride

Fenamiphos

Disulfoton sulfoxide

Ethylene oxide

Ethyl methylphosphonic acid (EMPA) 

(degradation product of VX)

N-Ethyldiethanolamine (EDEA)

(degradation product of HN-1)

73207-98-4

EA2192 [Diisopropylaminoethyl 

methylthiolophosphonate]

(hydrolysis product of VX)

1,4-Dithiane

(degradation product of HD)

Fentanyl

Fluoroacetamide

GC-MS

GC-MS

GC-MS

GC-MS / GC-FPD

GC-MS

Not of concern

Adapted from 

Journal of 

Chromatography B, 

876(1): 103-108

Not of concern TO-15

(EPA ORD)

300.1, Rev 1.0

(EPA OW)

Adapted from Journal 

of Chromatography B, 

876(1): 103-108
SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0), Appendix A A - 6 October 2010

Analyte(s) CAS RN Determinative 

Technique Method Type Solid Samples Aqueous Liquid Samples

Drinking Water 

Samples Air Samples Wipes

 

 

 

 

 

 

 Sample Prep

Adapted from 

Analytical Letters, 

27(14): 2703-2718 

 S301-1 

(NIOSH)

Adapted from Analytical 

Letters, 27)14): 2703-

2718

Determinative 300.1, Rev 1.0

(EPA OW)

300.1, Rev 1.0

(EPA OW)

300.1, Rev 1.0

(EPA OW)

Sample Prep 5035A 

(EPA SW-846)

5030C 

(EPA SW-846)

5030C 

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8260C

(EPA SW-846)

8260C

(EPA SW-846)

8260C

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8315A 

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 5035A 

(EPA SW-846)

5030C 

(EPA SW-846)

5030C 

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8015C 

(EPA SW-846)

8015C 

(EPA SW-846)

8015C 

(EPA SW-846)

8015C 

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3535A/8330B 

(EPA SW-846)

3535A/8330B 

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8330B 

(EPA SW-846)

8330B 

(EPA SW-846)

8330B 

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3535A/8330B 

(EPA SW-846)

3535A/8330B 

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8330B 

(EPA SW-846)

8330B 

(EPA SW-846)

8330B 

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep

Determinative

Sample Prep

Determinative

Sample Prep

Determinative

Sample Prep

Determinative

Sample Prep

Determinative

Not of concern

Not of concern

Not of concern

Not of concern

Not of concern

IC

Not of concern

Not of concern

Not of concern

FGC-ECD / HPLC

Not of concern

HPLC

HPLC

Not of concern Not of concern

300.1, Rev 1.0

(EPA OW)

8315A 

(EPA SW-846)

556.1

(EPA OW)

8330B 

(EPA SW-846)

300.1, Rev 1.0

(EPA OW)

Not of concern

8315A 

(EPA SW-846)

8330B 

(EPA SW-846)

GC-MS / GC-FID 2513 

(NIOSH)

Not of concern

2016 

(NIOSH)

Not of concern

Not of concern 7903 

(NIOSH)

6010 

(NIOSH)

790310

(NIOSH)

Not of concern

Not of concern

NA

121-82-4

283-66-9

10035-10-6

7647-01-0

74-90-8

7664-39-3

7783-06-4

50-00-0

371-62-0

NA

Hydrogen bromide

Hydrogen chloride

Hydrogen cyanide

Hydrogen fluoride

Hydrogen sulfide

Gasoline range organics

2-Fluoroethanol

Hexahydro-1,3,5-trinitro-1,3,5-triazine 

(RDX)

Hexamethylenetriperoxidediamine (HMTD)

Formaldehyde

Fluoroacetic acid and fluoroacetate salts 

(analyze as fluoroacetate ion)

Visible 

spectrophotometry

GC-FID

IC-conductivity 

detection

IC-conductivity 

detection

IC-conductivity 

detection

IC-conductivity 

detection

Not of concern

Not of concern

Not of concern

Not of concern

Not of concern

Not of concern

7903 

(NIOSH)

6013 

(NIOSH) Not of concern
SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0), Appendix A A - 7 October 2010

Analyte(s) CAS RN Determinative 

Technique Method Type Solid Samples Aqueous Liquid Samples

Drinking Water 

Samples Air Samples Wipes

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8321B2

(EPA SW-846)

8321B2

(EPA SW-846)

8321B2

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 5035A 

(EPA SW-846)

5030C 

(EPA SW-846)

5030C 

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8015C 

(EPA SW-846)

8015C 

(EPA SW-846)

8015C 

(EPA SW-846)

8015C 

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3050B 

(EPA SW-846)

IO-3.1

(EPA ORD)

9102

(NIOSH)

Determinative 6010C/6020A

(EPA SW-846)

IO-3.4/IO-3.5 

(EPA ORD)

6010C/6020A

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3050B 

(EPA SW-846)

IO-3.1

(EPA ORD)

9102

(NIOSH)

Determinative 6010C/6020A

(EPA SW-846)

IO-3.4/IO-3.5 

(EPA ORD)

6010C/6020A

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3050B 

(EPA SW-846)

IO-3.1

(EPA ORD)

9102

(NIOSH)

Determinative 6010C/6020A

(EPA SW-846)

IO-3.4/IO-3.5 

(EPA ORD)

6010C/6020A

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3050B 

(EPA SW-846)

IO-3.1

(EPA ORD)

9102

(NIOSH)

Determinative 6010C/6020A

(EPA SW-846)

IO-3.4/IO-3.5 

(EPA ORD)

6010C/6020A

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3050B 

(EPA SW-846)

IO-3.1

(EPA ORD)

9102

(NIOSH)

Determinative 6010C/6020A

(EPA SW-846)

IO-3.4/IO-3.5 

(EPA ORD)

6010C/6020A

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 9102

(NIOSH)

Determinative 747312

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 9102

(NIOSH)

Determinative 747312

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep

Determinative

Sample Prep 3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8318A

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 9102

(NIOSH)

Determinative 747312

(EPA SW-846)

Adapted from 

Chromatographia, 

63(5/6): 233-237

D7600-09

(ASTM)

747312

(EPA SW-846)

747312

(EPA SW-846)

200.7/200.8 

(EPA OW)

200.7/200.8 

(EPA OW)

200.7/200.8 

(EPA OW)

200.7/200.8 

(EPA OW)

747312

(EPA SW-846)

Visible 

spectrophotometry / 

CVAA / CVAFS

747312

(EPA SW-846)

Not of concern

IO-5

(EPA ORD)

531.2 

(EPA OW)

5601 

(NIOSH)

538

(EPA OW)

IO-5

(EPA ORD)

8318A 

(EPA SW-846)

747312

(EPA SW-846)

Adapted from Journal 

of Chromatography A, 

1154(1): 3-25

200.7/200.8 

(EPA OW)

7487-94-7

16752-77-5

10265-92-6 

151-38-2

40334-70-1

7645-25-2

40334-69-8

7439-97-6

1306-02-1

1832-54-8

64742-81-0

541-25-3

Methomyl

Methoxyethylmercuric acetate

(analyze as total mercury)

Lewisite 2 (L-2) 

[bis(2-chlorovinyl)chloroarsine]

(analyze as total arsenic)

Lewisite 1 (L-1)11 

[2-chlorovinyldichloroarsine]

(analyze as total arsenic)

Mercuric chloride (analyze as total 

mercury)

Mercury, Total

Methamidophos

Isopropyl methylphosphonic acid (IMPA) 

(degradation product of GB)

Lewisite oxide

(degradation product of Lewisite)

Lewisite 3 (L-3) 

[tris(2-chlorovinyl)arsine]

(analyze as total arsenic)

Lead arsenate

(analyze as total arsenic)

Kerosene

LC-MS-MS

Visible 

spectrophotometry / 

CVAA / CVAFS

HPLC / LC-MS-MS

HPLC / LC-MS-MS

ICP-AES / ICP-MS

GC-FID

ICP-AES / ICP-MS

Visible 

spectrophotometry / 

CVAA / CVAFS

ICP-AES / ICP-MS

TO-10A3

(EPA ORD)

Not of concern

200.7/200.8 

(EPA OW)

200.7/200.8 

(EPA OW)

Adapted from 

Journal of 

Chromatography A, 

1154(1): 3-25

Adapted from Journal 

of Chromatography A, 

1154(1): 3-25

245.1 

(EPA OW)

ICP-AES / ICP-MS

ICP-AES / ICP-MS

245.1 

(EPA OW)

245.1 

(EPA OW)

200.7/200.8 

(EPA OW)

200.7/200.8 

(EPA OW)

D7597-09

(ASTM)

747312

(EPA SW-846)

200.7/200.8 

(EPA OW)
SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0), Appendix A A - 8 October 2010

Analyte(s) CAS RN Determinative 

Technique Method Type Solid Samples Aqueous Liquid Samples

Drinking Water 

Samples Air Samples Wipes

 

 

 

 

 

 

 Sample Prep 5035A 

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8260C

(EPA SW-846)

8260C

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep

Adapted from 

Analytical Letters, 

27(14): 2703-2718

S301-1 

(NIOSH)

Adapted from Analytical 

Letters 27(14): 2703-

2718

Determinative 300.1, Rev 1.0 

(EPA OW)

300.1, Rev 1.0 

(EPA OW) 

300.1, Rev 1.0 

(EPA OW)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep

Determinative

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep

Determinative

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8321B

(EPA SW-846)

8321B

(EPA SW-846)

8321B

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8321B2

(EPA SW-846)

8321B2

(EPA SW-846)

8321B2

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

300.1, Rev 1.0 

(EPA OW)

Not of concern

Not of concern

TO-10A3

(EPA ORD)

D7599-09

(ASTM)

524.2

(EPA OW)

D7597-09

(ASTM)

TO-10A

(EPA ORD)

Not of concern

HPLC Not of concern OSHA 54

OSHA 40

PV2004

(OSHA)

TO-10A

(EPA ORD)

525.2 

(EPA OW)

TO-10A

(EPA ORD)

TO-10A5

(EPA ORD)

Not of concern

3510 

(NIOSH)

Not of concern

524.2

(EPA OW)

7786-34-7

993-13-5

105-59-9

60-34-4

74-89-5

1189-87-3 

624-83-9

298-00-0

126-98-7

453-18-9

950-35-6

Mevinphos

Methyl paraoxon

Methylamine

N-Methyldiethanolamine (MDEA)

(degradation product of HN-2)

Methylphosphonic acid (MPA)

(degradation product of VX, GB, & GD)

Methyl fluoroacetate

(analyze as fluoroacetate ion)

1-Methylethyl ester 

ethylphosphonofluoridic acid (GE)

Methyl isocyanate

Methyl hydrazine

Methyl acrylonitrile

Methyl parathion

IC

GC-MS

GC-MS / visible 

spectrophotometry

HPLC

GC-MS

HPLC

Not of concern

Not of concern

300.1, Rev 1.0 

(EPA OW)

HPLC

GC-MS

HPLC / LC-MS-MS

GC-MS

TO-10A

(EPA ORD)
SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0), Appendix A A - 9 October 2010

Analyte(s) CAS RN Determinative 

Technique Method Type Solid Samples Aqueous Liquid Samples

Drinking Water 

Samples Air Samples Wipes

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3571

(EPA SW-846)

3571

(EPA SW-846)

3571

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D13

(EPA SW-846)

8270D13

(EPA SW-846)

8270D13

(EPA SW-846)

8270D13

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3535A/8330B 

(EPA SW-846)

3535A/8330B 

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8330B 

(EPA SW-846)

8330B 

(EPA SW-846)

8330B

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3050B 

(EPA SW-846)

IO-3.1

(EPA ORD)

9102

(NIOSH)

Determinative 6010C 

(EPA SW-846)

IO-3.4

(EPA ORD)

6010C

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8318A

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep

Determinative

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

200.7/200.8 

(EPA OW)

56-38-2

Not of concern

TO-10A

(EPA ORD)

8318A 

(EPA SW-846)

200.7/200.8

(EPA OW)

531.2 

(EPA OW)

8330B 

(EPA SW-846)

TO-10A

(EPA ORD)

TO-10A

(EPA ORD)

TO-10A

(EPA ORD)

D7600-09

(ASTM)

549.2 

(EPA OW)

Not of concern

5601

(NIOSH) 

Not of concern

TO-10A

(EPA ORD)

TO-10A

(EPA ORD)

549.2 

(EPA OW) Not of concern

TO-10A

(EPA ORD)

54-11-5

538-07-8

51-75-2

555-77-1

Mustard, nitrogen (HN-1)

[bis(2-chloroethyl)ethylamine]

Osmium tetroxide 

(analyze as total osmium)

Parathion

Mustard, sulfur / Mustard gas (HD)

Monocrotophos 

Octahydro-1,3,5,7-tetranitro-1,3,5,7-

tetrazocine (HMX)

Nicotine compounds

(analyze as nicotine)

Mustard, nitrogen (HN-2)

[2,2'-dichloro-N-methyldiethylamine N,Nbis(2-chloroethyl)methylamine]

Mustard, nitrogen (HN-3)

[tris(2-chloroethyl)amine]

ICP-AES

HPLC / LC-MS-MS

HPLC-UV

GC-MS

GC-MS

GC-MS

HPLC

Not of concern

505-60-2

23135-22-0

6923-22-4 GC-MS

20816-12-0

GC-MS

GC-MS

2691-41-0

4685-14-7

GC-MS

GC-MS

Paraoxon 311-45-5

Oxamyl

Paraquat
SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0), Appendix A A - 10 October 2010

Analyte(s) CAS RN Determinative 

Technique Method Type Solid Samples Aqueous Liquid Samples

Drinking Water 

Samples Air Samples Wipes

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Sample Prep 3535A/8330B 

(EPA SW-846)

3535A/8330B 

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8330B 

(EPA SW-846)

8330B 

(EPA SW-846)

8330B

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep

Determinative

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep

Determinative

Sample Prep

Determinative

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8321B2

(EPA SW-846)

8321B2

(EPA SW-846)

8321B2

(EPA SW-846)

Not of concern

Not of concern

Not of concern

2588-03-6 

2588-04-7 GC-MS

2588-06-9 GC-MS

GC-MS TO-10A

(EPA ORD)

8330B 

(EPA SW-846)

D7597-09

(ASTM)

Not of concern

TO-10A3

(EPA ORD)

Not of concern

Not of concern

TO-10A

(EPA ORD)

OSHA 61

TO-10A

(EPA ORD)

6002 

(NIOSH)

6402 

(NIOSH)

TO-10A

(EPA ORD)

TO-10A

(EPA ORD)

TO-10A

(EPA ORD)

TO-10A

(EPA ORD)

Not of concern

Not of concern

Not of concern

75-44-5

7803-51-2

13171-21-6 

616-52-4

77-10-1

7719-12-2

Phosphamidon

Pinacolyl methyl phosphonic acid (PMPA)

(degradation product of GD)

Phorate sulfoxide oxon9

Phosphorus trichloride

Phencyclidine

Not of concern

Phorate sulfone

Phorate sulfone oxon9

Visible 

spectrophotometry

GC-MS

HPLC

GC-MS

Phosphine

Pentaerythritol tetranitrate (PETN) 78-11-5

Phosgene

HPLC / LC-MS-MS

Phorate

Phorate sulfoxide

298-02-2

2588-05-8 GC-MS

Visible 

spectrophotometry

GC-MS

GC-NPD

Not of concern

Not of concern

Not of concern
SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0), Appendix A A - 11 October 2010

Analyte(s) CAS RN Determinative 

Technique Method Type Solid Samples Aqueous Liquid Samples

Drinking Water 

Samples Air Samples Wipes

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Sample Prep 5035A 

(EPA SW-846)

5030C 

(EPA SW-846)

5030C 

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8260C

(EPA SW-846)

8260C

(EPA SW-846)

8260C

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3571

(EPA SW-846)

3571

(EPA SW-846)

3571

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D13

(EPA SW-846)

8270D13

(EPA SW-846)

8270D13

(EPA SW-846)

8270D13

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3050B 

(EPA SW-846)

IO-3.1

(EPA ORD)

9102

(NIOSH)

Determinative 6010C/6020A

(EPA SW-846)

IO-3.4/IO-3.5 

(EPA ORD)

6010C/6020A

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep

Adapted from J. of 

Forensic Sciences, 

43(1): 200-20214

Adapted from J. of 

Forensic Sciences, 

43(1): 200-20214

Adapted from J. of 

Forensic Sciences, 

43(1): 200-20214

Determinative 300.1, Rev 1.015

(EPA OW) 

300.1, Rev 1.015

(EPA OW) 

300.1, Rev 1.015

(EPA OW) 

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D6

(EPA SW-846)

8270D6

(EPA SW-846)

8270D6

(EPA SW-846)

8270D6

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3050B 

(EPA SW-846)

IO-3.1 

(EPA ORD)

9102

(NIOSH)

Determinative 6010C/6020A

(EPA SW-846)

IO-3.4/IO-3.5 

(EPA ORD)

6020A/6010C

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8321B

(EPA SW-846)

8321B

(EPA SW-846)

8321B

(EPA SW-846)

Not of concern

Not of concern

TO-10A

(EPA ORD)

TO-10A

(EPA ORD)

TO-10A

(EPA ORD)

TO-10A

(EPA ORD)

D7598-09

(ASTM)

200.7/200.8 

(EPA OW)

200.7/200.8 

(EPA OW)

200.7/200.8 

(EPA OW)

TO-10A5

(EPA ORD)

ID-211 (OSHA)

TO-10A5

(EPA ORD)

TO-10A

(EPA ORD)

1612 

(NIOSH)

GC-MS

7784-46-5

159939-87-4 

77-81-6

107-49-3

80-12-6

10031-59-1

57-24-9

111-48-8

96-64-0

 26628-22-8 

75-56-9

Tabun (GA)

Soman (GD)

Sodium azide

(analyze as azide ion)

Tetraethyl pyrophosphate

Tetramethylenedisulfotetramine

Propylene oxide

R 33 (VR) 

[methylphosphonothioic acid, S-[2-

(diethylamino)ethyl] O-2-methylpropyl 

ester]

Strychnine

Sodium arsenite 

(analyze as total arsenic)

Sarin (GB)

Thallium sulfate

(analyze as total thallium)

HPLC / LC-MS-MS Thiodiglycol (TDG)

(degradation product of HD)

200.7/200.8 

(EPA OW)

GC-MS

ICP-AES / ICP-MS

GC-MS

GC-MS

ICP-AES / ICP-MS

107-44-8

GC-MS / GC-FID

GC-MS

GC-MS

IC-UV

GC-MS

ID-211 (OSHA)
SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0), Appendix A A - 12 October 2010

Analyte(s) CAS RN Determinative 

Technique Method Type Solid Samples Aqueous Liquid Samples

Drinking Water 

Samples Air Samples Wipes

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8321B

(EPA SW-846)

8321B

(EPA SW-846)

8321B

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D16

(EPA SW-846)

8270D16

(EPA SW-846)

8270D16

(EPA SW-846)

8270D16

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3050B 

(EPA SW-846)

9102

(NIOSH)

Determinative 6010C/6020A

(EPA SW-846)

6010C/6020A

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8321B

(EPA SW-846)

8321B

(EPA SW-846)

8321B

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D6

(EPA SW-846)

8270D6

(EPA SW-846)

8270D6

(EPA SW-846)

8270D6

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3535A/8330B 

(EPA SW-846)

3535A/8330B 

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8330B 

(EPA SW-846)

8330B 

(EPA SW-846)

8330B

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3535A/8330B 

(EPA SW-846)

3535A/8330B 

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8330B 

(EPA SW-846)

8330B 

(EPA SW-846)

8330B

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3050B 

(EPA SW-846)

IO-3.1 

(EPA ORD)

9102

(NIOSH)

Determinative 6010C/6020A

(EPA SW-846)

IO-3.4/IO-3.5 

(EPA ORD)

6010C/6020A

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3541/3545A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3520C/3535A

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

8270D 

(EPA SW-846)

Sample Prep 3571

(EPA SW-846)

3571

(EPA SW-846)

3571

(EPA SW-846)

3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 8270D13

(EPA SW-846)

8270D13

(EPA SW-846)

8270D13

(EPA SW-846)

8270D13

(EPA SW-846)

200.7/200.8 

(EPA OW)

TO-10A

(EPA ORD)

TO-10A

(EPA ORD)

8330B 

(EPA SW-846) Not of concern

Not of concern

118-96-7

21738-25-0 TO-10A

(EPA ORD)

8330B 

(EPA SW-846)

TO-10A

(EPA ORD)

Not of concern

531.2

(EPA OW)

TO-10A

(EPA ORD)

Triethanolamine (TEA)

(degradation product of HN-3)

TO-10A

(EPA ORD)

Not of concern

5601

(NIOSH)

Not of concern

D7599-09

(ASTM) 102-71-6

1,4-Thioxane

(degradation product of HD)

Thiofanox

Not of concern

99-35-4

7550-45-0

78-53-5

21770-86-5 

39196-18-4

1314-62-1 

15980-15-1

Trimethyl phosphite

1,3,5-Trinitrobenzene (1,3,5-TNB)

2,4,6-Trinitrotoluene (2,4,6-TNT)

VG [phosphonothioic acid, S-(2-

(diethylamino)ethyl) O,O-diethyl ester]

VM [phosphonothioic acid, 

methyl-, S-(2-(diethylamino)ethyl) O-ethyl 

ester]

50782-69-9

GC-MS

GC-MS

GC-MS

VE [phosphonothioic acid, ethyl-, S-(2-

(diethylamino)ethyl) O-ethyl ester]

GC-MS

VX [O-ethyl-S-(2-

diisopropylaminoethyl)methylphosphonothiolate]

Vanadium pentoxide

(analyze as total vanadium)

HPLC

GC-MS

ICP-AES / ICP-MS

HPLC

Titanium tetrachloride 

(analyze as total titanium)

121-45-9

HPLC / LC-MS-MS

200.7/200.8 

(EPA OW) ICP-AES / ICP-MS

HPLC

GC-MS
SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0), Appendix A A - 13 October 2010

Analyte(s) CAS RN Determinative 

Technique Method Type Solid Samples Aqueous Liquid Samples

Drinking Water 

Samples Air Samples Wipes

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Sample Prep 3570/8290A Appendix A

(EPA SW-846)

Determinative 7580 

(EPA SW-846)

Footnotes

7580 

(EPA SW-846) 12185-10-3 GC-NPD / GC-FPD 7580 (EPA SW-846)

7905

(NIOSH)

7580 

(EPA SW-846) White phosphorus

1

 If problems occur when using this method, it is recommended that TO-10A be used.

2

 LC-MS (electrospray) procedures are preferred for these analytes; however, if this technique is not available to the laboratory, GC-MS procedures using derivatization based on SW-846 Method 8270D may be used. 

Sample preparation methods should remain the same. Both electrospray LC-MS and GC-MS derivatization procedures are currently under development.

5

 If problems occur when using this method, it is recommended that the canister Method TO-15 be used. 

6

 If problems occur with analyses, lower the injection temperature. 

13 For this analyte, refer to EPA SW-846 Method 8271 for GC-MS conditions.

9

 If problems occur during measurement of oxon compounds, analysts should consider use of procedures included in Kamal, A. et al., "Oxidation of selected organophosphate pesticides during chlorination of 

simulated drinking water." Water Research. 2009. 43(2): 522–534. http://www.sciencedirect.com/science/journal/00431354

3

 For this analyte, HPLC is the preferred technique; however, if problems occur, Method TO-10A must be modified to include a derivatization step prior to analysis by GC-MS.

4

 For this analyte, SW-846 Method 8270D must be modified to include a derivatization step.

16 If problems occur when using this method, it is recommended that SW-846 Method 8260C and appropriate corresponding sample preparation procedures (i.e., 5035A for solid samples, and 5030C for aqueous 

liquid and drinking water samples) be used. 

7

 If problems occur when using this method, it is recommended that SW-846 Method 8321B be used as the determinative method. Sample preparation methods should remain the same.

8 If problems occur with the analysis of DIMP using EPA SW-846 Method 8321B, use SW-846 Method 8270D.

10 If problems occur when using this method, it is recommended that NIOSH Method 7906 be used.

11 Laboratory testing is currently under way for speciation of Lewisite 1 using GC-MS techniques.

12 If equipment is not available, use CVAA Methods 7471B (EPA SW-846) for solid samples and 7470A (EPA SW-846) for aqueous liquid samples.

14 Water extraction, filtration, and acidification steps from the Journal of Forensic Science. 1998. 43(1): 200-202 should be used for the preparation of solid samples. Filtration and acidification steps from this journal 

should be used for preparation of aqueous liquid and drinking water samples. 

15 If analyses are problematic, refer to column manufacturer for alternate conditions 
SAM Revision 6.0, Appendix A A - 14 October 2010
Appendix B – Selected Radiochemical Methods 

Appendix B: Selected Radiochemical Methods

SAM 2010 ( Revision 6.0) October 2010
Appendix B – Selected Radiochemical Methods 

SAM 2010 ( Revision 6.0) October 2010
SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0), Appendix B B - 1 October 2010

Determinative 

Technique

Alpha/Beta 

counting

Alpha/Beta 

counting

Gamma 

spectrometry

Gamma 

spectrometry

Qualitative 

Determination2 Confirmatory Qualitative 

Determination2 Confirmatory Qualitative Determination2 Confirmatory Qualitative Determination2 Confirmatory Qualitative Determination2 Confirmatory

Americium-2413 14596-10-2 Alpha/Gamma

spectrometry

D3084-05 

(ASTM)

Am-04-RC

(HASL-300)

D3084-05 

(ASTM)

Am-04-RC

(HASL-300)

Am-02-RC

(HASL-300)

Am-01-RC4

(HASL-300)

D3084-05 

(ASTM)

Am-04-RC

(HASL-300) 

D3084-05 

(ASTM)

Am-04-RC

(HASL-300) 

Californium-2523 13981-17-4 Alpha 

spectrometry

D3084-05 

(ASTM)

Am-04-RC

(HASL-300)

D3084-05 

(ASTM)

Am-04-RC

(HASL-300)

D3084-05 

(ASTM)

Am-01-RC4

(HASL-300)

D3084-05 

(ASTM)

Am-04-RC

(HASL-300) 

D3084-05 

(ASTM)

Am-04-RC

(HASL-300) 

Cesium-137 10045-97-3 Gamma 

spectrometry

901.1 

(EPA)

901.1 

(EPA)

7120 

(SM)

7120 

(SM)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Cobalt-60 10198-40-0 Gamma 

spectrometry

901.1 

(EPA)

901.1 

(EPA)

7120 

(SM)

7120 

(SM)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Curium-2443 13981-15-2 Alpha

spectrometry

D3084-05 

(ASTM)

Am-04-RC

(HASL-300)

D3084-05 

(ASTM)

Am-04-RC

(HASL-300)

D3084-05 

(ASTM)

Am-01-RC4

(HASL-300)

D3084-05 

(ASTM)

Am-04-RC

(HASL-300)

D3084-05 

(ASTM)

Am-04-RC

(HASL-300)

Europium-154 15585-10-1 Gamma 

spectrometry

901.1 

(EPA)

901.1 

(EPA)

7120 

(SM)

7120 

(SM)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Iodine-125 14158-31-7 Gamma 

spectrometry

Procedure #9

(ORISE)

Procedure #9

(ORISE)

Procedure #9

(ORISE)

Procedure #9

(ORISE)

Procedure #9

(ORISE)

Procedure #9

(ORISE)

Procedure #9

(ORISE)

Procedure #9

(ORISE)

Procedure #95

(ORISE)

Procedure #95

(ORISE)

Iodine-131 10043-66-0 Gamma 

spectrometry

901.1 

(EPA)

901.1 

(EPA)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R5

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R5

(HASL-300)

Iridium-192 14694-69-0 Gamma 

spectrometry

901.1 

(EPA)

901.1 

(EPA)

7120 

(SM)

7120 

(SM)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Appendix B: Selected Radiochemical Methods

Aqueous and Liquid Phase 

Samples Drinking Water Samples

Analyte(s) Determinative 

Technique

Soil and Sediment Samples Air Filters

Analyte Class Drinking Water Samples Aqueous and Liquid Phase 

Samples

900.0 

(EPA)

900.0 

(EPA)

Gross Alpha

Gross Beta

7110 B 

(SM)

7110 B 

(SM)

Soil and Sediment Samples Surface Wipes

FRMAC, Vol 2, pg. 33

(DOE)

FRMAC, Vol 2, pg. 33

(DOE)

AP1

(ORISE)

AP1

(ORISE)

FRMAC, Vol 2, pg. 33

(DOE)

FRMAC, Vol 2, pg. 33

(DOE)

Air Filters

CAS RN

Gamma 901.1 

(EPA)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Surface Wipes

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300) Select Mixed Fission Products1 901.1 

(EPA)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)
SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0), Appendix B B - 2 October 2010

Qualitative 

Determination2 Confirmatory Qualitative 

Determination2 Confirmatory Qualitative Determination2 Confirmatory Qualitative Determination2 Confirmatory Qualitative Determination2 Confirmatory

Aqueous and Liquid Phase 

Samples Drinking Water Samples

Analyte(s) Determinative 

Technique

Soil and Sediment Samples Air Filters

CAS RN

Surface Wipes

Molybdenum-99 14119-15-4 Gamma 

spectrometry

901.1 

(EPA)

901.1 

(EPA)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Phosphorus-32 14596-37-3 Liquid 

scintillation

R4-73-014

(EPA)

R4-73-014

(EPA)

R4-73-014

(EPA)

R4-73-014

(EPA)

RESL P-2 

(DOE)

RESL P-2 

(DOE)

RESL P-2 

(DOE)

RESL P-2 

(DOE)

RESL P-2 

(DOE)

RESL P-2 

(DOE)

Plutonium-2383 13981-16-3 Alpha 

spectrometry 

D3084-05 

(ASTM)

EMSL-33

(EPA)

D3084-05 

(ASTM)

EMSL-33

(EPA)

D3084-05 

(ASTM)

EMSL-33

(EPA)

D3084-05 

(ASTM)

EMSL-33

(EPA)

D3084-05 

(ASTM)

EMSL-33

(EPA)

Plutonium-2393 15117-48-3 Alpha 

spectrometry 

D3084-05 

(ASTM)

EMSL-33

(EPA)

D3084-05 

(ASTM)

EMSL-33

(EPA)

D3084-05 

(ASTM)

EMSL-33

(EPA)

D3084-05 

(ASTM)

EMSL-33

(EPA)

D3084-05 

(ASTM)

EMSL-33

(EPA)

Polonium-210 13981-52-7 Alpha 

spectrometry 

Po-02-RC

(HASL-300)

Po-02-RC

(HASL-300)

Po-02-RC

(HASL-300)

Po-02-RC

(HASL-300)

Po-02-RC

(HASL-300)

Po-02-RC

(HASL-300)

Method 111

(EPA)

Method 111

(EPA)

Method 111

(EPA)

Method 111

(EPA)

Radium-226 13982-63-3 Alpha counting / 

spectrometry

903.0 

(EPA) 

903.1 

(EPA)

7500-Ra B

(SM)

7500-Ra C

(SM)

D3084-05 

(ASTM)

EMSL-19

(EPA)

D3084-05 

(ASTM)

EMSL-19

(EPA)

D3084-05 

(ASTM)

EMSL-19

(EPA)

Ruthenium-103 13968-53-1 Gamma 

spectrometry

901.1 

(EPA)

901.1 

(EPA)

7120 

(SM)

7120 

(SM)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ruthenium-106 13967-48-1 Gamma 

spectrometry

901.1 

(EPA)

901.1 

(EPA)

7120 

(SM)

7120 

(SM)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Selenium-75 14265-71-5 Gamma 

spectrometry

901.1 

(EPA)

901.1 

(EPA)

7120 

(SM)

7120 

(SM)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Ga-01-R

(HASL-300)

Strontium-89 14158-27-1 Beta counting 905.0

(EPA)

905.0

(EPA)

905.0

(EPA)

905.0

(EPA)

Strontium-90 10098-97-2 Beta counting 905.0

(EPA)

905.0

(EPA)

7500-Sr B

(SM)

7500-Sr B

(SM)

Sr-03-RC

(HASL-300)

Sr-03-RC

(HASL-300)

Sr-03-RC

(HASL-300)

Sr-03-RC

(HASL-300)

Sr-03-RC

(HASL-300)

Sr-03-RC

(HASL-300)

Technetium-99 14133-76-7 Liquid 

scintillation

Tc-02-RC

(HASL-300)

Tc-02-RC

(HASL-300)

Tc-02-RC

(HASL-300)

Tc-02-RC

(HASL-300)

AP5

(ORISE)

AP5

(ORISE)

AP5

(ORISE)

AP5

(ORISE)

AP5

(ORISE)

AP5

(ORISE)

Tritium 

(Hydrogen-3) 10028-17-8 Liquid scintillation

906.0

(EPA)

906.0

(EPA)

906.0

(EPA)

906.0

(EPA)

AP2

(ORISE)

AP2

(ORISE)

AP2

(ORISE)

AP2

(ORISE)

Not 

applicable6

Not 

applicable6

Uranium-2343 13966-29-5 Alpha counting / 

spectrometry

908.07 

(EPA)

D3972-02

(ASTM)

7500-U B7

(SM)

7500-U C

(SM)

D3084-05 

(ASTM)

EMSL-33

(EPA)

D3084-05 

(ASTM)

EMSL-33

(EPA)

D3084-05 

(ASTM)

EMSL-33

(EPA)

Stronium in Food and 

Bioenvironmental Samples 

(EPA)

Stronium in Food and 

Bioenvironmental Samples 

(EPA)

Stronium in Food and 

Bioenvironmental Samples 

(EPA)
SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0), Appendix B B - 3 October 2010

Qualitative 

Determination2 Confirmatory Qualitative 

Determination2 Confirmatory Qualitative Determination2 Confirmatory Qualitative Determination2 Confirmatory Qualitative Determination2 Confirmatory

Aqueous and Liquid Phase 

Samples Drinking Water Samples

Analyte(s) Determinative 

Technique

Soil and Sediment Samples Air Filters

CAS RN

Surface Wipes

Uranium-2353 15117-96-1 Alpha counting / 

spectrometry

908.07 

(EPA)

D3972-02

(ASTM)

7500-U B7

(SM)

7500-U C

(SM)

D3084-05 

(ASTM)

EMSL-33

(EPA)

D3084-05 

(ASTM)

EMSL-33

(EPA)

D3084-05 

(ASTM)

EMSL-33

(EPA)

Uranium-2383 7440-61-1 Alpha counting / 

spectrometry

908.07 

(EPA)

D3972-02

(ASTM)

7500-U B7

(SM)

7500-U C

(SM)

D3084-05 

(ASTM)

EMSL-33

(EPA)

D3084-05 

(ASTM)

EMSL-33

(EPA)

D3084-05 

(ASTM)

EMSL-33

(EPA)

Footnotes

7

 This method was developed for measurement of total uranium and does not distinguish between uranium isotopes.

3

 If it is suspected that the sample exists in refractory form (i.e., non-digestible or dissolvable material after normal digestion methods) or if there is a matrix interference problem, use ORISE Method AP11 for qualitative 

determination or confirmatory analysis of alpha radioactivity.

4

 In cases where only small sample volumes (≤100 g) are available, use HASL-300 Method Pu-12-RC.

2

 In those cases where the same method is listed for qualitative determination and confirmatory analysis, qualitative determination can be performed by application of the method over a shorter count time than that 

used for confirmatory analysis. 

5

 This procedure should be used only for filters specifically designed for iodine.

6

 Because tritium is not sampled using traditional air filters, this matrix is not applicable.

1

 Please note that this category does not cover all fission products. In addition to the specific radionuclides listed in this appendix, gamma-ray spectometry with a high resoution HP(Ge) detector will identify and 

quantify fission products with gamma rays in the energy range of 30 keV to 2000 keV. The sensitivity will be dependent on the detector efficiency and the gamma-ray emission probabilities (branching ratio) for the 

specific radionuclide. 
SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0), Appendix B B - 4 October 2010

 
Appendix C – Selected Pathogen Methods 

Appendix C: Selected Pathogen Methods

Per decision of the NHSRC SAM Pathogens Committee, “Section 7.0: Selected Pathogen Methods” has 

been temporarily withdrawn from the SAM Revision 6.0. Section 7.0 is currently undergoing a 

significant restructuring to better address the complexity of environmental samples in a more userfriendly format. End-users, expert scientists, and federal agencies are contributing to the new design 

templates. 

During this transition period, the following personnel can be contacted for any emergency technical 

support need: 

• EPA’s Office of Emergency Management, Homeland Security Laboratory Research Center, manages 

the ERLN. The pathogens contact for ERLN is: Michele Burgess (burgess.michele@epa.gov, 202-

564-8006). 

• NHSRC SAM Pathogens Contact: Sanjiv Shah, Lead (shah.sanjiv@epa.gov, 202-564-9522) 

Users may also refer to the SAM Version 5.0, Pathogen Methods section. SAM Revision 5.0 can be 

accessed at http://www.epa.gov/sam/. The SAM 5.0 Pathogens section is available in a searchable 

format at http://www.epa.gov/sam/searchpath.htm

SAM 2010 ( Revision 6.0) October 2010
Appendix C – Selected Pathogen Methods 

SAM 2010 ( Revision 6.0) October 2010
Appendix D – Selected Biotoxin Methods 

Appendix D: Selected Biotoxin Methods

SAM 2010 ( Revision 6.0) October 2010
Appendix D – Selected Biotoxin Methods 

SAM 2010 ( Revision 6.0) October 2010
SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0), Appendix D D - 1 October 2 010

Analyte(s) CAS RN / 

Description Analysis Type1 Analytical 

Technique

Aerosol

(filter/cassette, liquid 

impinger)

Solid

(soil, powder)

Particulate

(swabs, wipes, dust 

socks)

Liquid Water Drinking Water

Presumptive Immunoassay2

Adapted from Journal 

of Food Protection 

71(9): 1868-1874

Adapted from Journal 

of Food Protection 

71(9): 1868-1874

Adapted from Journal 

of Food Protection 

71(9): 1868-1874

Adapted from Journal 

of Food Protection 

71(9): 1868-1874

Adapted from Journal 

of Food Protection 

71(9): 1868-1874

Complementary 

Presumptive 

(abrine)

LC-MS-MS

 Adapted from Journal 

of Agricultural and 

Food Chemistry 

56(23): 11139–11143 

 Adapted from Journal 

of Agricultural and 

Food Chemistry 

56(23): 11139–11143 

 Adapted from Journal 

of Agricultural and 

Food Chemistry 

56(23): 11139–11143 

 Adapted from Journal 

of Agricultural and 

Food Chemistry 

56(23): 11139–11143 

 Adapted from Journal 

of Agricultural and 

Food Chemistry 

56(23): 11139–11143 

Confirmatory

Ribosome 

inactivation 

assay

Adapted from 

Pharmacology & 

Toxicology 

88(5): 255-260

Adapted from 

Pharmacology & 

Toxicology 

88(5): 255-260

Adapted from 

Pharmacology & 

Toxicology

 88(5): 255-260

Adapted from 

Pharmacology & 

Toxicology 

88(5): 255-260

Adapted from 

Pharmacology & 

Toxicology 

88(5): 255-260

Biological 

Activity Enzyme activity3

Adapted from 

Analytical 

Biochemistry 

378(1): 87-89

Adapted from 

Analytical 

Biochemistry 

378(1): 87-89

Adapted from 

Analytical 

Biochemistry 

378(1): 87-89

Adapted from 

Analytical 

Biochemistry 

378(1): 87-89

Adapted from 

Analytical 

Biochemistry 

378(1): 87-89

Presumptive Immunoassay4

Adapted from EPA 

Environmental 

Technology 

Verification report

Complementary 

Presumptive 

(SNAP25, 

VAMP 2)

LC-MS 

 Adapted from Journal 

of Chemical Health 

and Safety 

15(6): 14–19 

Confirmatory Immunoassay4

(ELISA)

Adapted from FDA 

Bacteriological 

Analytical Manual, 

Chapter 17

Biological 

Activity Mouse Bioassay

Adapted from FDA 

Bacteriological 

Analytical Manual, 

Chapter 17

Appendix D: Selected Biotoxin Methods 

Abrin

Botulinum neurotoxins

(Serotoypes A, B, E, F)

Protein

LRN

If analysis for this agent is required in solid, particulate, or liquid samples, contact 

the LRN at (404) 639-2790 for information of the closest LRN laboratory capable 

of receiving and processing the sample. The terms presumptive and confirmatory 

as used for LRN methods are described in Section 8.1.4.

1393-62-0 (abrin) / 

Glycoprotein consisting 

of a deadenylase 

(25–32 kDa A chain) 

and lectin (35 kDa B 

chain); an agglutinin 

(A2B2) may be present 

in crude preparations

526-31-8 (abrine) / 

small molecule, abrin 

marker

Protein composed of 

~100 kDa heavy chain 

and ~50 kDa light chain; 

can be complexed with 

hemagglutinin and nonhemagglutinin 

components for total 

MW of ~900 kDa

SNAP-25, VAMP 2 / 

botulinum neurotoxin 

markers

Note: The presence of disinfectants (e.g., chlorine) and/or preservatives added during water sample collection to slow degradation (e.g., pH adjustors, de-chlorinating agents) 

could possibly affect analytical results. When present, the impact of these agents on method performance should be evaluated if not previously determined.
SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0), Appendix D D - 2 October 2 010

Analyte(s) CAS RN / 

Description Analysis Type1 Analytical 

Technique

Aerosol

(filter/cassette, liquid 

impinger)

Solid

(soil, powder)

Particulate

(swabs, wipes, dust 

socks)

Liquid Water Drinking Water

Presumptive Immunoassay2

Adapted from EPA 

Environmental 

Technology 

Verification report

Complementary 

Presumptive 

(ricinine)

LC-MS

Adapted from Journal 

of Analytical 

Toxicology 

29(3): 149-155

Adapted from Journal 

of Analytical 

Toxicology 

29(3): 149-155

Adapted from Journal 

of Analytical 

Toxicology 

29(3): 149-155

Adapted from Journal 

of Analytical 

Toxicology 

29(3): 149-155

Adapted from Journal 

of Analytical 

Toxicology 

29(3): 149-155

Confirmatory Immunoassay

Adapted from Journal 

of AOAC International 

91(2): 376-382

Adapted from Journal 

of AOAC International 

91(2): 376-382

Adapted from Journal 

of AOAC International 

91(2): 376-382

Adapted from Journal 

of AOAC International 

91(2): 376-382

Adapted from Journal 

of AOAC International 

91(2): 376-382

Biological 

Activity Enzyme activity3

Adapted from 

Analytical 

Biochemistry 

378(1): 87-89

Adapted from 

Analytical 

Biochemistry 

378(1): 87-89

Adapted from 

Analytical 

Biochemistry 

378(1): 87-89

Adapted from 

Analytical 

Biochemistry 

378(1): 87-89

Adapted from 

Analytical 

Biochemistry 

378(1): 87-89

Presumptive Optical 

immunoassay

Adapted from Journal 

of Clinical 

Microbiology 

45(10): 3377–3380 

Adapted from Journal 

of Clinical 

Microbiology 

45(10): 3377–3380 

Adapted from Journal 

of Clinical 

Microbiology 

45(10): 3377–3380 

Adapted from Journal 

of Clinical 

Microbiology 

45(10): 3377–3380 

Adapted from Journal 

of Clinical 

Microbiology 

45(10): 3377–3380 

Confirmatory Immunoassay

(ELISA)

Adapted from FDA 

Bacteriological 

Analytical Manual, 

Appendix 1

Adapted from FDA 

Bacteriological 

Analytical Manual, 

Appendix 1

Adapted from FDA 

Bacteriological 

Analytical Manual, 

Appendix 1

Adapted from FDA 

Bacteriological 

Analytical Manual, 

Appendix 1

Adapted from FDA 

Bacteriological 

Analytical Manual, 

Appendix 1

Biological 

Activity

Ribosome 

inactivation 

assay3

Adapted from 

Pharmacology & 

Toxicology 

88(5): 255-260

Adapted from 

Pharmacology & 

Toxicology 

88(5): 255-260

Adapted from 

Pharmacology & 

Toxicology 

88(5): 255-260

Adapted from 

Pharmacology & 

Toxicology 

88(5): 255-260

Adapted from 

Pharmacology & 

Toxicology 

88(5): 255-260

Presumptive Immunoassay Adapted from 993.06 

(AOAC)

Confirmatory TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD

Biological 

Activity

 T-cell 

proliferation 

assay

Adapted from Applied 

and Environmental 

Microbiology 63(6): 

2361–2365 

Adapted from Applied 

and Environmental 

Microbiology 63(6): 

2361–2365 

Adapted from Applied 

and Environmental 

Microbiology 63(6): 

2361–2365 

Adapted from Applied 

and Environmental 

Microbiology 63(6): 

2361–2365 

Adapted from Applied 

and Environmental 

Microbiology 63(6): 

2361–2365 

9009-86-3 (ricin) / 

60 kDa glycoprotein 

composed of two 

subunits (~32 kDa A 

chain and ~34 kDa B 

chain); an agglutinin of 

MW 120 kDa may be 

present in crude 

preparations

5254-40-3 (ricinine) / 

small molecule, ricin 

marker

Ricin

LRN

If analysis for this agent is required in solid, particulate, or liquid samples, contact 

the LRN at (404) 639-2790 for information of the closest LRN laboratory capable 

of receiving and processing the sample. The terms presumptive and confirmatory 

as used for LRN methods are described in Section 8.1.4.

Staphylococcal enterotoxins

(SEB)

39424-53-8 (SEB) /

Monomeric protein of

 ~ 28 kDa

LRN

If analysis for this agent is required in solid, particulate, or liquid samples, contact 

the LRN at (404) 639-2790 for information of the closest LRN laboratory capable 

of receiving and processing the sample. The terms presumptive and confirmatory 

as used for LRN methods are described in Section 8.1.4.

Shiga and Shiga-like Toxins 

(Stx, Stx-1, Stx-2)

75757-64-1 (Stx) /

Protein composed of 

one ~32 kDa A chain 

and five 7.7 kDa B 

chains 
SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0), Appendix D D - 3 October 2 010

Analyte(s) CAS RN / 

Description Analysis Type1 Analytical 

Technique

Aerosol

(filter/cassette, liquid 

impinger)

Solid

(soil, powder)

Particulate

(swabs, wipes, dust 

socks)

Liquid Water Drinking Water

Presumptive Immunoassay Adapted from 993.06 

(AOAC)

Adapted from 993.06 

(AOAC)

Adapted from 993.06 

(AOAC)

Adapted from 993.06 

(AOAC)

Adapted from 993.06 

(AOAC)

Confirmatory TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD

Biological 

Activity

 T-cell 

proliferation 

assay

Adapted from Applied 

and Environmental 

Microbiology 63(6): 

2361–2365 

Adapted from Applied 

and Environmental 

Microbiology 63(6): 

2361–2365 

Adapted from Applied 

and Environmental 

Microbiology 63(6): 

2361–2365 

Adapted from Applied 

and Environmental 

Microbiology 63(6): 

2361–2365 

Adapted from Applied 

and Environmental 

Microbiology 63(6): 

2361–2365 

Presumptive Immunoassay Adapted from 991.31 

(AOAC)

Adapted from 991.31 

(AOAC)

Adapted from 991.31 

(AOAC)

Adapted from 991.31 

(AOAC)

Adapted from 991.31 

(AOAC)

Confirmatory HPLC-FL Adapted from 991.31 

(AOAC)

Adapted from 991.31 

(AOAC)

Adapted from 991.31 

(AOAC)

Adapted from 991.31 

(AOAC)

Adapted from 991.31 

(AOAC)

Presumptive Immunoassay

Adapted from Journal 

of Food Protection 

68(6): 1294-1301

Adapted from Journal 

of Food Protection 

68(6): 1294-1301

Adapted from Journal 

of Food Protection 

68(6): 1294-1301

Adapted from Journal 

of Food Protection 

68(6): 1294-1301

Adapted from Journal 

of Food Protection 

68(6): 1294-1301

Confirmatory

HPLC 

amperometric 

detection

Adapted from Journal 

of Chromatography 

563(2): 299-311

Adapted from Journal 

of Chromatography 

563(2): 299-311

Adapted from Journal 

of Chromatography 

563(2): 299-311

Adapted from Journal 

of Chromatography 

563(2): 299-311

Adapted from Journal 

of Chromatography 

563(2): 299-311

Presumptive TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD

Confirmatory

HPLC-FL 

(precolumn 

derivatization)

Adapted from 

Biomedical 

Chromatography B 

10(1): 46-47

Adapted from 

Biomedical 

Chromatography B 

10(1): 46-47

Adapted from 

Biomedical 

Chromatography B 

10(1): 46-47

Adapted from 

Biomedical 

Chromatography B 

10(1): 46-47

Adapted from 

Biomedical 

Chromatography B 

10(1): 46-47

Presumptive Immunoassay

Adapted from 

Environmental Health 

Perspectives 

110(2): 179-185

Adapted from 

Environmental Health 

Perspectives 

110(2): 179-185

Adapted from 

Environmental Health 

Perspectives 

110(2): 179-185

Adapted from 

Environmental Health 

Perspectives 

110(2): 179-185

Adapted from 

Environmental Health 

Perspectives 

110(2): 179-185

Confirmatory HPLC-MS-MS Adapted from Toxicon 

43(4): 455-465

Adapted from Toxicon 

43(4): 455-465

Adapted from Toxicon 

43(4): 455-465

Adapted from Toxicon 

43(4): 455-465

Adapted from Toxicon 

43(4): 455-465

Presumptive Immunoassay

Adapted from 

Biochemical Journal 

328(1): 245-250

Adapted from 

Biochemical Journal 

328(1): 245-250

Adapted from 

Biochemical Journal 

328(1): 245-250

Adapted from 

Biochemical Journal 

328(1): 245-250

Adapted from 

Biochemical Journal 

328(1): 245-250

Confirmatory HPLC-MS

Adapted from Journal 

of Medicinal Chemistry 

47(5): 1234-1241

Adapted from Journal 

of Medicinal Chemistry 

47(5): 1234-1241

Adapted from Journal 

of Medicinal Chemistry 

47(5): 1234-1241

Adapted from Journal 

of Medicinal Chemistry 

47(5): 1234-1241

Adapted from Journal 

of Medicinal Chemistry 

47(5): 1234-1241

Presumptive Immunoassay

Adapted from 

ELISA kits for 

Cylindrospermopsin

Adapted from 

ELISA kits for 

Cylindrospermopsin

Adapted from 

ELISA kits for 

Cylindrospermopsin

Adapted from 

ELISA kits for 

Cylindrospermopsin

Adapted from 

ELISA kits for 

Cylindrospermopsin

Confirmatory HPLC-PDA

Adapted from FEMS 

Microbiology Letters 

216(2): 159-164

Adapted from FEMS 

Microbiology Letters 

216(2): 159-164

Adapted from FEMS 

Microbiology Letters 

216(2): 159-164

Adapted from FEMS 

Microbiology Letters 

216(2): 159-164

Adapted from FEMS 

Microbiology Letters 

216(2): 159-164

α-Amanitin

Brevetoxins

(B form)

23109-05-9

64285-06-9

 79580-28-2

Anatoxin-a

α-Conotoxin 156467-85-5

Aflatoxin

(Type B1)

Cylindrospermopsin

37337-57-8 (SEA)

39424-54-9 (SEC) / 

Monomeric proteins of 

~ 27–27.5 kDa 

Staphylococcal enterotoxins

(SEA, SEC)

 27261-02-5

Small Molecule

143545-90-8
SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0), Appendix D D - 4 October 2 010

Analyte(s) CAS RN / 

Description Analysis Type1 Analytical 

Technique

Aerosol

(filter/cassette, liquid 

impinger)

Solid

(soil, powder)

Particulate

(swabs, wipes, dust 

socks)

Liquid Water Drinking Water

Presumptive Immunoassay

Adapted from 

International Journal 

of Food Microbiology 

6(1): 9-17

Adapted from 

International Journal 

of Food Microbiology 

6(1): 9-17

Adapted from 

International Journal 

of Food Microbiology 

6(1): 9-17

Adapted from 

International Journal 

of Food Microbiology 

6(1): 9-17

Adapted from 

International Journal 

of Food Microbiology 

6(1): 9-17

Confirmatory LC/APCI-MS

Adapted from Rapid 

Communications in 

Mass Spectrometry 

20(9): 1422-1428

Adapted from Rapid 

Communications in 

Mass Spectrometry 

20(9): 1422-1428

Adapted from Rapid 

Communications in 

Mass Spectrometry 

20(9): 1422-1428

Adapted from Rapid 

Communications in 

Mass Spectrometry 

20(9): 1422-1428

Adapted from Rapid 

Communications in 

Mass Spectrometry 

20(9): 1422-1428

Presumptive

Immunoassay/

Phosphatase 

assay

Adapted from Journal 

of AOAC International 

84(4): 1035-1044

Adapted from Journal 

of AOAC International 

84(4): 1035-1044

Adapted from Journal 

of AOAC International 

84(4): 1035-1044

Adapted from Journal 

of AOAC International 

84(4): 1035-1044

Adapted from Journal 

of AOAC International 

84(4): 1035-1044

Confirmatory HPLC-PDA Adapted from Analyst 

119(7): 1525-1530

Adapted from Analyst 

119(7): 1525-1530

Adapted from Analyst 

119(7): 1525-1530

Adapted from Analyst 

119(7): 1525-1530

Adapted from Analyst 

119(7): 1525-1530

Presumptive Immunoassay TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD

Confirmatory HPLC

Adapted from Journal 

of Pharmaceutical and 

Biomedical Analysis 

7(3): 369-375

Adapted from Journal 

of Pharmaceutical and 

Biomedical Analysis 

7(3): 369-375

Adapted from Journal 

of Pharmaceutical and 

Biomedical Analysis 

7(3): 369-375

Adapted from Journal 

of Pharmaceutical and 

Biomedical Analysis 

7(3): 369-375

Adapted from Journal 

of Pharmaceutical and 

Biomedical Analysis 

7(3): 369-375

Presumptive Immunoassay Adapted from ELISA 

kits for Saxitoxins

Adapted from ELISA 

kits for Saxitoxins

Adapted from ELISA 

kits for Saxitoxins

Adapted from ELISA 

kits for Saxitoxins

Adapted from ELISA 

kits for Saxitoxins

Confirmatory

HPLC-FL 

(post column 

derivatization)

Adapted from Journal 

of AOAC International 

78(2): 528-532

Adapted from Journal 

of AOAC International 

78(2): 528-532

Adapted from Journal 

of AOAC International 

78(2): 528-532

Adapted from Journal 

of AOAC International 

78(2): 528-532

Adapted from Journal 

of AOAC International 

78(2): 528-532

Presumptive Immunoassay

Adapted from Journal 

of Food Protection 

68(6): 1294-1301

Adapted from Journal 

of Food Protection 

68(6): 1294-1301

Adapted from Journal 

of Food Protection 

68(6): 1294-1301

Adapted from Journal 

of Food Protection 

68(6): 1294-1301

Adapted from Journal 

of Food Protection 

68(6): 1294-1301

Confirmatory LC/APCI-MS

Adapted from Rapid 

Communications in 

Mass Spectrometry 

20(9): 1422-1428

Adapted from Rapid 

Communications in 

Mass Spectrometry 

20(9): 1422-1428

Adapted from Rapid 

Communications in 

Mass Spectrometry 

20(9): 1422-1428

Adapted from Rapid 

Communications in 

Mass Spectrometry 

20(9): 1422-1428

Adapted from Rapid 

Communications in 

Mass Spectrometry 

20(9): 1422-1428

Presumptive Immunoassay

Adapted from Journal 

of Clinical Laboratory 

Analysis 6(2): 65-72

Adapted from Journal 

of Clinical Laboratory 

Analysis 6(2): 65-72

Adapted from Journal 

of Clinical Laboratory 

Analysis 6(2): 65-72

Adapted from Journal 

of Clinical Laboratory 

Analysis 6(2): 65-72

Adapted from Journal 

of Clinical Laboratory 

Analysis 6(2): 65-72

Confirmatory LC/ESI-MS

Adapted from 

Analytical 

Biochemistry 

290(1): 10-17

Adapted from 

Analytical 

Biochemistry 

290(1): 10-17

Adapted from 

Analytical 

Biochemistry 

290(1): 10-17

Adapted from 

Analytical 

Biochemistry 

290(1): 10-17

Adapted from 

Analytical 

Biochemistry 

290(1): 10-17

4

 Immunoassays may produce variable results with uncomplexed form of toxin.

Tetrodotoxin 9014-39-5

3

 This assay does not test for cell binding; cell culture assays are being developed to test for cell binding but are not currently available. The only readily available assay to test for both the cell binding and 

enzymatic activity of the intact (whole) toxin is a mouse bioassay.

1

 Descriptions for presumptive, confirmatory, and biological activity assays are provided in Section 8.0.

2

 Crude preparations of ricin and abrin may also contain agglutinins that are unique to castor beans and rosary peas, respectively, and that can cross-react in the immunoassays.

35523-89-8 (STX)

64296-20-4 (NEOSTX)

77462-64-7 (GTX)

None given (dcGTX)

58911-04-9 (dcSTX)

Saxitoxins

Principal isoforms: 

Saxitoxin (STX) 

Neosaxitoxin (NEOSTX) 

Gonyautoxin (GTX) 

Decarbamoylgonyautoxin (dcGTX) 

Decarbamoylsaxitoxin (dcSTX)

Diacetoxyscirpenol (DAS)

Picrotoxin

Microcystins

Principal isoforms: LA, LR, LW, 

RR, YR 

T-2 Mycotoxin 21259-20-1

96180-79-9 (LA)

101043-37-2 (LR)

157622-02-1 (LW)

111755-37-4 (RR)

101064-48-6 (YR)

2270-40-8

124-87-8
Attachment 1 – SAM Supporting Documents 

Attachment 1: 

SAM Supporting Documents 

The documents and tools listed in this attachment have been developed by EPA to provide information 

regarding collection, screening, rapid analysis, and disposal of samples that may be needed during 

environmental restoration following a homeland security event. The information included in the 

documents is intended to be complementary to information provided in the analytical methods listed in 

SAM. As additional documents containing similar complementary information become available, they 

will be added to the list contained in this Attachment. 

• Searchable SAM Web site at: www.epa.gov/sam/ 

• “Guidelines for Development of Sample Collection Plans for Radiochemical Analytes in 

Environmental Matrices Following Homeland Security Events,” EPA/600/R-08/128, February 2009. 

http://www.epa.gov/nhsrc/pubs/600r08128.pdf 

• “Sample Collection Procedures for Radiochemistry Analytes in Environmental Matrices,” 

EPA/600/S-07/001, December 2006. http://www.epa.gov/nhsrc/pubs/600s07001.pdf 

• “Sample Collection Information Document – Companion to SAM Revision 5.0,” EPA/600/R-09/074, 

June 2010. http://www.epa.gov/nhsrc/pubs/600r09074.pdf 

• “Field Screening Equipment Information Document – Companion to SAM Revision 5.0,” 

EPA/600/R-10/091, September 2010 

• “Rapid Screening and Preliminary Identification Techniques and Methods – Companion to SAM 

Revision 5.0,” EPA/600/R-10/090, September 2010 

• “Laboratory Environmental Sample Disposal Information Document – Companion to SAM Revision 

5.0,” EPA/600/R-10/092, September 2010 

 SAM 2010 (Revision 6.0) Attachment 1-1 October 2010
SCIENCE
 PRESORTED STANDARD
 

POSTAGE & FEES PAID
 

EPA
 

PERMIT NO. G-35
 

Office of Research and Development 

National Homeland Security Research Center 

Cincinnati, OH 45268